PC Programming Manual

Business Communication Server

Model No. KX-NSX1000

KX-NSX2000

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety, page 20" before using this product.

KX-NSX series: PNMPR Software File Version 004.00000 or later

Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/pbx/
Introduction

Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using Web Maintenance Console.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

Explains the layout and menus of Web Maintenance Console.

Sections 3 – 28, Web Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using Web Maintenance Console to programme the PBX.

Section 29, Appendix

Provides a list of changes from previous software versions of the PBX.

Feature Programming References

Provides a list of all related programming items for each feature.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

PC Programming Manual References
Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Manual References

The Feature Manual explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features
and facilities. Sections from the Feature Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections
from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other PBX
manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Manual References

Trademarks
• Microsoft, Outlook, Internet Explorer, Active Directory, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• Mozilla and Firefox are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
• Google and Google Chrome are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google, Inc.

2 PC Programming Manual
 Introduction

• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

Notice
• During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data
to the Storage Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for
some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card, it can be easily reloaded.
• To save the system data to the Storage Memory Card, (1) click the button on the Home screen of Web
Maintenance Console before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) logout from Web
Maintenance Console so that the PBX automatically saves the system data.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the software version
of the PBX or installed cards? in Maintenance Console Software in 2.3 Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ).
• Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some
PBX models. Please consult the seller where you purchased this PBX for more information.
• The description of the manual may differ from the actual Web-MC screen.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
• In this manual, the suffix of each model number (e.g., KX-NSX1000BX) is omitted unless necessary.
• Operation of the KX-NTV series depends on the NSX server software file version and the firmware
version of the KX-NTV series. You can confirm the compatibility on the Panasonic Web site at:
https://panasonic.net/cns/pcc/support/pbx/

PC Programming Manual 3
Introduction

4 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................ 19
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 20
1.1.1 For Your Safety ............................................................................................................. 20
1.1.2 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters ...................................................................................................... 21
1.2 PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 26
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console ............................................................................. 26
1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool ............................................................................................... 29
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types ............................................................................................. 31
1.2.3.1 Multi-connection Networking Survivability ................................................................. 32
2 Introduction of Web Maintenance Console ........................................ 33
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 34
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts ........................................................................... 34
2.1.2 Access Levels ............................................................................................................... 35
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console ..................................................................... 39
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard ....................................................................................................... 40
2.1.5 Software Interface ........................................................................................................ 40
2.1.6 Card Status ................................................................................................................... 45
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting ............................................................................................ 46
2.2 Logout ............................................................................................................................ 47
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ............................................................................. 48
3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen .......................................... 57
3.1 Home Screen ................................................................................................................. 58
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard .................................................................................. 60
4 Status ..................................................................................................... 63
4.1 Status—Equipment Status ........................................................................................... 64
4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS ................................................................................ 64
4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information ................................................................ 64
4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information ................................................................ 65
4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status ................................................................ 65
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB ................................................................................ 66
5 System Control ..................................................................................... 67
5.1 System Control—Program Update .............................................................................. 68
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File ...................................... 70
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File .......................................... 71
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update ................................................. 73
5.2 System Control—MOH .................................................................................................. 75
5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install .................................................................................... 75
5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete ................................................................................... 75
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup .................................................................... 75
5.3 System Control—FAX Card .......................................................................................... 77
5.4 System Control—System Reset ................................................................................... 78
5.5 System Control—System Shutdown ........................................................................... 79
5.6 System Control—Hot Standby ..................................................................................... 80
6 Tool ........................................................................................................ 83
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup .......................................................................................... 84
6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB .............................................................. 84

PC Programming Manual 5
Table of Contents

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS .............................................................. 85

6.1.3 Tool—System Data Backup—Auto Backup .................................................................. 86
6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ............................................................................ 87
6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group .................................................................................. 88
6.4 Tool—Extension List View ............................................................................................ 89
6.5 Tool—Import .................................................................................................................. 90
6.6 Tool—Export .................................................................................................................. 93
6.7 Tool—Screen Customise .............................................................................................. 94
6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup ................................................................................................. 95
6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup .................................................................... 95
6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup ............................................................... 96
6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore ................................................................................................. 98
6.10 Tool—UM Backup History .......................................................................................... 100
6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS ................................................................................................... 101
6.12 Tool—Contact information ......................................................................................... 102
6.13 Tool—URL Information ............................................................................................... 103
6.14 Tool—P-SIP Option ..................................................................................................... 103
7 Utility .................................................................................................... 105
7.1 Utility—Diagnosis ........................................................................................................ 106
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis ........................................................................... 106
7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping ............................................................................................. 107
7.2 Utility—File ................................................................................................................... 109
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX ....................................................................... 109
7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC ....................................................................... 109
7.2.3 Utility—File—File View ............................................................................................... 110
7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete ............................................................................................. 111
7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX ........................................................ 111
7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC ........................................................ 112
7.3 Utility—Log .................................................................................................................. 113
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log ............................................................................................... 113
7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog ................................................................................................... 116
7.3.3 Utility—Log—WEB Operation Log .............................................................................. 116
7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log .................................................................................... 116
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log .................................................................................... 117
7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace ................................................................................................. 119
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ................................................... 119
7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace ........................................................ 119
7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace ...................................................... 120
7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor ................................................................ 120
7.4.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group ................................. 120
7.4.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group ............................... 121
7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace ............................................................. 123
7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace .................................................. 123
7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal) ................................................. 123
7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ................................................. 124
7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace .................................................................. 124
7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Packet Trace ........................................................................ 125
7.4.11 Utility—Monitor/Trace—IP Traffic Monitor .................................................................. 125
7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage ...................................................... 126
7.4.12.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Setting .................................... 126
7.4.12.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Display ................................... 127
7.5 Utility—Report ............................................................................................................. 129
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report ................................................................ 129
7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information ................................................. 129

6 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

7.5.3 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information (Single IP node) ...................... 130

7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports ............................................................................. 131
7.5.5 Utility—Report—E-mail Report ................................................................................... 133
7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information ............................................................................ 134
7.5.6.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information ......................... 134
7.5.6.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information ................................... 135
7.5.6.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log ................................ 137
7.5.7 Utility—Report—Expansion Gateway Keep Alive Information .................................... 138
7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation ............................................................................ 139
7.7 Utility—Email Notification .......................................................................................... 140
7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert ................................................................................ 140
7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis ............................................................. 140
7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email ....................................................................... 141
7.8 Utility—Command ....................................................................................................... 142
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command ............................................................................ 142
7.8.2 Utility—Command—Network command ..................................................................... 142
7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation ......................................................... 143
7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording .................................................................... 145
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting ...................................... 145
7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting ....................................... 145
7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List ................................ 145
7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance .............................................. 147
7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance ............................................................................ 148
8 Users/Supervisors/Maintenance Personnel ..................................... 149
8.1 Users—User Container ............................................................................................... 150
8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User ............................................................ 152
8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users ............................................................. 157
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings ...................................................................... 159
8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings ..................... 160
8.2.1.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—CLIP
Generate .................................................................................................................. 169
8.3 Users—Flexible Button ............................................................................................... 171
8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension ................................................................. 171
8.3.1.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Flexible button data copy ................... 176
8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station .................................................................. 177
8.3.2.1 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Flexible button data copy ................... 181
8.4 Users—Speed Dial ...................................................................................................... 182
8.5 Users—CLIP ID Table .................................................................................................. 182
8.6 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording .......................................................... 183
8.6.1 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording .............................. 183
8.6.2 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List ....................................... 183
8.7 Supervisors—ICDG Management .............................................................................. 185
8.7.1 Supervisors—ICDG Management—Group Monitor ................................................... 185
8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report ....................................................... 186
8.7.3 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export ..................................... 195
8.7.4 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Export History ........................................... 196
8.8 Maintenance Personnel—Installer Information ........................................................ 196
8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting .............................................. 197
8.9.1 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Accounts ............................... 197
8.9.2 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Site Assignment .................... 198
9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration ............................................. 199
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot ........................................................ 200
9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary .................................... 204

PC Programming Manual 7
Table of Contents

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status ................ 206

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property ........................ 209
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property .............................. 211
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main ....................... 211
9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card ............... 221
9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM ..................... 222
9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Property—UM System Property
....................................................................................................................................... 223
9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Property—UM Port Property .....
224
9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View .......
225
9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property ... 226
9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Card Property .... 229
9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property ..... 230
9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property ...... 247
9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—GateKeeper Property
....................................................................................................................................... 252
9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property ....... 253
9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call
Distribution Port Group ............................................................................................... 254
9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to
Gateway ..................................................................................................................... 254
9.14.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—GK
Settings ....................................................................................................................... 257
9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property ..... 258
9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property ...... 261
9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Card Property ... 268
9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property .... 269
9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Card Property ......... 275
9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property .......... 277
9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Card Property ................ 281
9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property ................. 282
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type ......... 283
9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port ........... 288
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
....................................................................................................................................... 290
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ............ 293
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ............ 302
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2 ........ 310
9.28.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card
Property - OPB3 ......................................................................................................... 311
9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
....................................................................................................................................... 312
9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station ................................... 313
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option ................................................... 318
9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority ........................................ 320
9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource ...................................... 321
9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting ....................... 321
9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor ..................................................................................................................... 322
9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage ........................ 323
10 PBX Configuration—[2] System ........................................................ 325
10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time ..................................................... 326

8 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting ................ 326
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving .......... 326
10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—
Daylight Saving ........................................................................................................ 327
10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM .............................................. 329
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters .......................................... 331
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table ...................................................... 340
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time Setting ................................ 340
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table ................................................... 341
10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan .............................................. 345
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main .................................. 345
10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial .......................... 361
10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature .... 362
10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service .............................................. 364
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings .................... 364
10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block ............ 371
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block ............. 372
10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns ......................................... 373
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO ................ 373
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE .....
373
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others ........... 373
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options .............................................. 375
10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings ................................ 389
10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain ..................................................... 391
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ............................ 391
10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card ........................................ 392
10.12 PBX Configuration—[2-13] System—Security .......................................................... 392
11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group .......................................................... 393
11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group ...................................................... 394
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings ............................ 394
11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ................ 397
11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification ............... 397
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan .............................. 400
11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign .... 401
11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate ............................. 402
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group ........................................................ 404
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group ............................................. 405
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3-1] Group—Call Pickup Group—Main Setting ..................... 405
11.3.2 PBX Configuration—[3-3-2] Group—Call Pickup Group—Priority Setting ................. 405
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group .................................................... 406
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4-1] Group—Paging Group—Priority Setting ........................ 406
11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager ........................... 406
11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group ................... 407
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
..................................................................................................................................... 407
11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Settings—Member List ............................................................................................ 412
11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time
Table ........................................................................................................................... 413
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
..................................................................................................................................... 414
11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
..................................................................................................................................... 416

PC Programming Manual 9
Table of Contents

11.5.5 PBX Configuration–[3-5-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member ...... 417

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group ................................ 419
11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List ............. 419
11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group .......................................................... 420
11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings ........................... 420
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings ................................. 421
11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Member List ....... 422
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group .................................................. 423
11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List ............................. 423
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group ............................................ 424
11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List ........................ 425
11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group ....................................................... 426
12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension ................................................... 427
12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—DSS Console ............................................... 428
13 PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device ......................................... 429
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone ........................................ 430
13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager .................................. 432
13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message .................................. 433
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System ......... 433
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message ...... 435
13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay ................................... 437
13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor ................................ 438
13.6 PBX Configuration—[5-6] Optional Device—Optional IP Device ............................ 439
14 PBX Configuration—[6] Feature ........................................................ 441
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial ......................................... 442
14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge ................................................ 444
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code ............................................ 448
14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone ............................................ 450
14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message ............................................. 451
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant .............................................................. 452
15 PBX Configuration—[7] TRS ............................................................. 455
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code ......................................................... 456
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code .................................................... 457
15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier ...................................................... 458
15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial .................................................... 459
15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous ....................................................... 460
16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS ............................................................. 463
16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting ..................................................... 464
16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number ................................................... 465
16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time ............................................... 466
16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time Setting .......................... 466
16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority ........................................... 467
16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier ................................................................... 468
16.5.1 PBX Configuration—[8-5-1] ARS—Carrier—Main Setting ......................................... 468
16.5.2 PBX Configuration—[8-5-2] ARS—Carrier—TRG Priority .......................................... 469
16.5.3 PBX Configuration—[8-5-3] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant .............. 469
16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception ................................ 470
16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG ............................... 471
17 PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network ......................................... 473

10 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table ............................................ 474

18 PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call ................................. 475
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings ...................... 476
18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings ........ 477
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table ......................... 481
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic
Registration ................................................................................................................ 483
18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate ......
484
18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table ................................. 486
18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous .......................... 489
19 PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance ............................................. 491
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main ....................................................... 492
19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation ............................. 498
19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 498
19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
..................................................................................................................................... 499
19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group
Setting ........................................................................................................................ 501
19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer ........................ 503
20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings .......................................... 505
20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings ................................................................... 506
20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting ......................................... 507
21 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ........................................... 531
21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service ................................................................... 532
22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service .................... 543
22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group ............. 544
22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment ......... 547
23 UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings .......................................... 549
23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing ............... 550
23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters ......................................... 553
23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service ................................. 561
23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer ...... 563
23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control ............. 567
23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control ............. 568
23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control .............. 569
23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password ................. 570
24 UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters ..................................... 573
24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group .............................. 574
24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group .......................... 576
24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement
....................................................................................................................................... 577
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters ................................... 579
25 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ................................................ 595
25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings ......................................................................... 596

PC Programming Manual 11
Table of Contents

26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security .......................................... 597

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security ................................................................... 598
27 Router Configuration ......................................................................... 601
27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information ........................................ 602
27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information—Connection Status ........ 602
27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information—PPPoE Status .............. 602
27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN ................................................................ 604
27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings .......................... 604
27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network Monitor ................................ 610
27.2.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-3] WAN—Protocol Bridge .................................. 611
27.2.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-4] WAN—Dynamic DNS .................................... 611
27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN ................................................................. 612
27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4 ..................................................... 612
27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server ......................................... 614
27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing ........................................................... 616
27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ ................................................................. 617
27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC Address ................................................. 618
27.7 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-7] Pass Through ................................................ 619
27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security ................................... 620
27.9 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering .......................................... 622
27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS Settings .................................................... 623
28 Network Service .................................................................................. 627
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports .................................................................... 628
28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature ........................................................................ 634
28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP(LAN) .............................................. 634
28.2.2 Network Service—[2-3] Server Feature—FTP ........................................................... 635
28.2.3 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—HTTP ......................................................... 635
28.2.4 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—NTP ........................................................... 636
28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP ........................................................ 636
28.2.6 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—IMAP4 ....................................................... 638
28.2.7 Network Service—[2-9] Server Feature—TELNET .................................................... 638
28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature ......................................................................... 639
28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP ............................................................. 639
28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—SYSLOG ..................................................... 639
28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent ............................................... 640
28.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—Directory Service ........................................ 642
28.3.4.1 Network Service—[3-4-1] Client Feature—Directory Service—Server Setting ........ 642
28.3.4.2 Network Service—[3-4-2] Client Feature—Directory Service—External Directory .. 643
28.3.4.3 Network Service—[3-4-3] Client Feature—Directory Service—User Container Sync ....
644
28.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—HTTP .......................................................... 645
28.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance ................................. 646
28.4 Network Service—[4] Other ........................................................................................ 648
28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security .................................................................... 648
28.4.1.1 Network Service—[4-1-1] Other—Security—Encryption ......................................... 648
28.4.1.2 Network Service—[4-1-2] Other—Security—Protection .......................................... 648
28.4.1.3 Network Service—[4-1-3] Other—Security—Packet Filtering .................................. 649
28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS .......................................................................... 652
29 My Portal ............................................................................................. 653
29.1 Logging in to My Portal .............................................................................................. 654
29.1.1 My Portal—Home ....................................................................................................... 654

12 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

29.1.2 My Portal—Profile ....................................................................................................... 654

29.1.3 My Portal—Login ID & Password ............................................................................... 655
29.1.4 My Portal—Phone No (Office) .................................................................................... 655
29.1.5 My Portal—Phone No (Mobile) ................................................................................... 656
29.1.6 My Portal—Mail Address ............................................................................................ 656
29.1.7 My Portal—Phonebook ............................................................................................... 657
29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control .............................................................................. 657
29.1.9 My Portal—Desktop Phone Control ............................................................................ 659
29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail ................................................................................................. 660
29.2 Log-out ......................................................................................................................... 665
30 Appendix ............................................................................................. 667
30.1 Revision History .......................................................................................................... 668
30.1.1 PNMPR Software File Version 002.00xxx .................................................................. 668
30.1.2 PNMPR Software File Version 002.03xxx .................................................................. 670
30.1.3 PNMPR Software File Version 002.10xxx .................................................................. 671
30.1.4 PNMPR Software File Version 003.00xxx .................................................................. 671
30.1.5 PNMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx .................................................................. 673
Feature Programming References ............................................................................. 675
Absent Message ...................................................................................................... 676
Account Code Entry ................................................................................................. 676
Advice of Charge (AOC) .......................................................................................... 676
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) ....................................................................... 676
Automatic Extension Release .................................................................................. 676
Automatic Fax Delivery ............................................................................................ 677
Automatic Fax Transfer ........................................................................................... 677
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ............................................................................ 677
Automatic Setup ...................................................................................................... 677
Background Music (BGM) ........................................................................................ 678
Budget Management ............................................................................................... 678
Call Billing for Guest Room ...................................................................................... 678
Call Charge Services ............................................................................................... 678
Call Distribution Port Group ..................................................................................... 679
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) .................................................................. 679
Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) ..................................................................... 679
Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG .............................................................................. 679
Call Forwarding (FWD) ............................................................................................ 680
Call Hold .................................................................................................................. 680
Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN .................................................................................... 680
Call Monitor .............................................................................................................. 681
Call Park .................................................................................................................. 681
Call Pickup ............................................................................................................... 681
Call Transfer ............................................................................................................ 682
Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN ................................................................................... 682
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG ................................................................................... 682
Call Waiting .............................................................................................................. 682
Call Waiting Tone ..................................................................................................... 683
Caller ID ................................................................................................................... 683
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution ............................................................. 683
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection .......................................................... 684
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) ........................... 684
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG .................. 685
Class of Service (COS) ............................................................................................ 685
Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs ............................................................. 685

PC Programming Manual 13
Table of Contents

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs .................................................. 685

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) ..................................................... 686
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG .................................... 686
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) .................................................................... 686
Conference .............................................................................................................. 686
Conference Group Call ............................................................................................ 687
Confirmation Tone .................................................................................................... 687
Data Line Security ................................................................................................... 687
Dial Tone .................................................................................................................. 688
Dial Tone Transfer ................................................................................................... 688
Dial Type Selection .................................................................................................. 688
Direct In Line (DIL) ................................................................................................... 688
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) ................................................ 688
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ...................................................................... 689
Display Information .................................................................................................. 689
Distribution Order ..................................................................................................... 690
Do Not Disturb (DND) .............................................................................................. 690
Door Open ............................................................................................................... 690
Doorphone Call ........................................................................................................ 690
DSP Resource Reservation ..................................................................................... 691
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment .................................... 691
E-mail Notification for Extension Users ................................................................... 691
E-mail Notification for Manager ............................................................................... 691
E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm ......................................................................... 692
E-mail Notification of System-level Events .............................................................. 692
Emergency Call ....................................................................................................... 692
Executive Busy Override ......................................................................................... 692
Extension Dial Lock ................................................................................................. 692
Extension Feature Clear .......................................................................................... 693
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) ..................................................... 693
External Feature Access (EFA) ............................................................................... 693
External Relay Control ............................................................................................. 693
External Sensor ....................................................................................................... 694
Fax Cover Page ....................................................................................................... 694
Flash/Recall/Terminate ............................................................................................ 694
Flexible Buttons ....................................................................................................... 694
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..................................................................... 694
Floating Extension ................................................................................................... 695
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button .................................................................... 695
Group ....................................................................................................................... 696
Group Call Distribution ............................................................................................. 696
Hands-free Answerback .......................................................................................... 696
Hands-free Operation .............................................................................................. 697
Headset Operation ................................................................................................... 697
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
.................................................................................................................................. 697
Hot Line ................................................................................................................... 697
Idle Extension Hunting ............................................................................................. 697
Incoming Call Distribution Group Features .............................................................. 698
Incoming Call Log .................................................................................................... 698
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features ................................ 698
Intercept Routing ..................................................................................................... 699
Intercept Routing—No Destination .......................................................................... 699
Intercom Call ............................................................................................................ 699
Internal Call Block .................................................................................................... 699

14 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Internal Call Features .............................................................................................. 700

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ............................................................................. 700
IP-CS (KX-NS0154) ................................................................................................. 700
ISDN Extension ....................................................................................................... 700
ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol .............................................................. 701
ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN) .............................................................. 701
Last Number Redial ................................................................................................. 701
LED Indication ......................................................................................................... 702
Legacy Device Connection ...................................................................................... 702
Line Preference—Incoming ..................................................................................... 702
Line Preference—Outgoing ..................................................................................... 702
Local Alarm Information ........................................................................................... 702
Log-in/Log-out .......................................................................................................... 703
Making a TIE Line Call ............................................................................................. 703
Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ......................................................................... 703
Manager Features ................................................................................................... 704
Message Waiting ..................................................................................................... 704
Multi-connection Networking .................................................................................... 704
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service ............................................... 704
Music on Hold .......................................................................................................... 704
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) ..................................................................... 705
Off-hook Monitor ...................................................................................................... 705
One-touch Dialling ................................................................................................... 705
Operator Features ................................................................................................... 705
Outgoing Message (OGM) ....................................................................................... 705
Overflow Feature ..................................................................................................... 706
Paging ...................................................................................................................... 706
Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP) ............................................................................... 707
Pause Insertion ........................................................................................................ 707
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension . 707
Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection ............................................................................... 707
Ping .......................................................................................................................... 708
Portable Station (PS) Connection ............................................................................ 708
Printing Message ..................................................................................................... 708
Privacy Release ....................................................................................................... 708
PS Directory ............................................................................................................. 708
PS Ring Group ......................................................................................................... 708
PT Programming ...................................................................................................... 709
Public (Mobile Phone) Device .................................................................................. 709
Queuing Feature ...................................................................................................... 709
Quick Dialling ........................................................................................................... 709
Reverse Circuit ........................................................................................................ 710
Ring Tone Pattern Selection .................................................................................... 710
Room Status Control ............................................................................................... 710
Send to Fax Machine ............................................................................................... 710
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor ............................ 710
Simple Remote Connection ..................................................................................... 711
Simplified Isolated Mode .......................................................................................... 711
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension .............................................................. 711
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk .................................................................... 711
SIP Refer Transfer ................................................................................................... 712
Software Upgrading ................................................................................................. 712
Special Carrier Access Code ................................................................................... 712
Speed Dialling—Personal/System ........................................................................... 712
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) ............................................................ 712

PC Programming Manual 15
Table of Contents

Supervisory Feature ................................................................................................ 713

Supervisory Feature (ACD) ..................................................................................... 713
Syslog Record Management ................................................................................... 713
Tenant Service ......................................................................................................... 713
Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN ............................................................. 714
TIE Line Service ...................................................................................................... 714
Time Service ............................................................................................................ 715
Timed Reminder ...................................................................................................... 715
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) ............................................................ 716
Trunk Access ........................................................................................................... 716
Trunk Adaptor Connection ....................................................................................... 717
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ............................................................... 717
Trunk Busy Out ........................................................................................................ 717
Trunk Call Limitation ................................................................................................ 718
Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group ..................................................... 718
Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding ..................................................................... 718
Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt ........................................................................... 718
Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA) ...................................................... 719
Unified Messaging—Automatic Login ...................................................................... 719
Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager ........................... 719
Unified Messaging—Call Services ........................................................................... 720
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario ............................................................ 720
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status ................................................................ 720
Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside .......................................................... 720
Unified Messaging—Call-through Service ............................................................... 720
Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry ........................................................... 720
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing ............................................................. 721
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback ................................................................... 721
Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening ................................................................ 721
Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement .................................................. 721
Unified Messaging—Company Greeting ................................................................. 721
Unified Messaging—Covering Extension ................................................................ 721
Unified Messaging—Custom Service ...................................................................... 722
Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder .......................................................... 722
Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name .................................................................... 722
Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access ............................................................. 722
Unified Messaging—Extension Group ..................................................................... 722
Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service ........................................ 722
Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists .......................................................... 723
Unified Messaging—Hold ........................................................................................ 723
Unified Messaging—Holiday Service ....................................................................... 723
Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode ..................................................................... 723
Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration ..................................................................... 723
Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service ........................................... 723
Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox ................................................ 724
Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging ..................................................................... 724
Unified Messaging—Interview Service .................................................................... 724
Unified Messaging—List All Names ......................................................................... 724
Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS) ...................................................... 724
Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox) ................... 724
Unified Messaging—Mailbox ................................................................................... 725
Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching .................................................... 725
Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode ...................................................... 725
Unified Messaging—Message Transfer ................................................................... 725
Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device ....................... 725

16 PC Programming Manual
 Table of Contents

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp ..................................... 726

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device ................. 726
Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service ................................................................. 726
Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation ...................................................... 726
Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu ............................................... 726
Unified Messaging—Operator Service .................................................................... 727
Unified Messaging—Password Administration ........................................................ 727
Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service ....................................................... 727
Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings ................................................................. 727
Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing ..................................................................... 727
Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting ........................ 728
Unified Messaging—Port Service ............................................................................ 728
Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set .................................................. 728
Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial ................................................................. 728
Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore ......................................................... 728
Unified Messaging—System Prompts ..................................................................... 728
Unified Messaging—System Reports ...................................................................... 728
Unified Messaging—System Security ...................................................................... 729
Unified Messaging—Toll Saver ................................................................................ 729
Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox ................................................... 729
Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port) ............................................... 729
Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer ....................................... 729
Unified Messaging—Urgent Message ..................................................................... 730
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button ............................................. 730
Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service .................................................................. 730
Unified Messaging—Web Programming .................................................................. 730
User Container ......................................................................................................... 731
Verification Code Entry ............................................................................................ 731
VIP Call .................................................................................................................... 731
Voice Mail (VM) Group ............................................................................................. 731
Voice Mail Integration .............................................................................................. 731
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network ........................................................... 732
Walking COS ........................................................................................................... 732
Whisper OHCA ........................................................................................................ 732

PC Programming Manual 17
Table of Contents

18 PC Programming Manual
 Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the

PBX.

PC Programming Manual 19
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.

This notice means that misuse could result in death

WARNING or serious injury.

This notice means that misuse could result in injury

CAUTION or damage to property.

The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be
performed.

This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.

WARNING

• Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised
Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

CAUTION

• Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may cause the
PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

• To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords

20 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.2 Introduction

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.

2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
• There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

1.1.2 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the
PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your
requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system
programming".
Programming can be performed by system installers, on-site managers, and individual users. However,
managers and individual users may only change a limited number of settings. For details, see 2.1.1 Web
Maintenance Console Accounts.
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through system programming with Web
Maintenance Console. Starting Web Maintenance Console is described in 1.2 PC Programming. Individual
system programming items are described from 3 Web Maintenance Console Home Screen.

Programming Modes
• On-line Mode
On-line mode allows you to use Web Maintenance Console on a PC that is connected to the PBX to
modify the system data and settings used by the PBX. Settings can be modified and results are displayed
in real time. Modifications to settings change the information in the PBX’s temporary memory (DRAM). To
finalise the changes, you must either save the changes to the PBX’s Storage Memory Card by clicking
or log out of Web Maintenance Console by clicking . For details, see Web Maintenance Console
Features in 2.1.5 Software Interface.

1.1.3 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or
other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

PC Programming Manual 21
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 1 (Standard)

22 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 2 (For CE model)

PC Programming Manual 23
1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 3 (For RU model)

24 PC Programming Manual
 1.1.3 Entering Characters

Table 4 (For GR model)

PC Programming Manual 25
1.2 PC Programming

1.2 PC Programming
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using Web Maintenance
Console. Web Maintenance Console is accessed through a Web browser running on a networked PC.
This section describes how to set up and access Web Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® 7, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1 Professional, or Windows 10 operating system

Note
In Windows 8.1 / 8.1 Professional, Web Maintenance Console runs only in desktop mode. It is not
available from the Windows 8.1 Start screen.

Recommended Display Settings

• Screen resolution: XGA (1024 × 768)
• DPI setting: Normal size (96 DPI)
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console for users
• Windows Internet Explorer 11
• Mozilla® Firefox® version 57 or ESR52
• Google Chrome version 58
Supported Browsers for use with Web Maintenance Console for Maintenance
• Windows Internet Explorer 11
• Mozilla Firefox 57 or ESR52
Always apply the latest updates to your Web browser software. For details, refer to your Web browser’s
documentation. Only the browsers and browser versions listed above are supported for use with Web
Maintenance Console.

Note
When using Windows Internet Explorer, there may be a delay when displaying some screens of Web
Maintenance Console. A message may be displayed that reads "Stop running this script?". This
message is automatically displayed when a script takes a long time to complete. If this message is
displayed, click No to continue using Web Maintenance Console. If you click Yes, you will have to close
the browser window for Web Maintenance Console and log in again. For information about disabling this
prompt, refer to your Web browser’s on-line support resources.
Browser Setting Requirements
The following functions must be enabled in the Web browser’s settings to use Web Maintenance Console:
• Cookies
• JavaScript
• The ability to download files
• The display of animations
• The display of images
For details regarding the above settings, refer to your Web browser’s documentation.

26 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

PC Specifications (for programming)

The following are recommended specifications for PCs used for programming.
Recommended Specification
CPU 3.2 GHz Intel® Core™ 2 Duo processor or comparable CPU
RAM 2048 MB
Hard Disk 10 GB available space

Copyright for MD5

This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security, Inc. described in the RFC1321 (MD5 Message-
Digest Algorithm).

Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.

Licence to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function.

Licence is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or
referencing the derived work.

RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or
the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

PC Connection (On-line Mode)

To connect to Web Maintenance Console in On-line mode, both the PC and the PBX must be connected.
The connection can be made through a local area network (LAN), a virtual private network (VPN), or over
the Internet. A PC can also be connected directly to the maintenance port of the PBX.

Note
• When connecting to Web Maintenance Console over the Internet, the use of an encrypted
communication method, such as TLS, is strongly recommended. For details, contact your network’s
administrator.

Connecting to Web Maintenance Console (On-line Mode)

Below is the procedure for connecting to Web Maintenance Console to programme in On-line mode:
1. Connect the PC to the PBX:
• Connect the PBX to a PC with the MNT port and access the PBX directly from the PC.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC in your LAN or VPN.
• Connect the PBX to a network with the LAN port and access the PBX from a PC using an Internet
connection.

Notice
• When connecting the PC to the MNT port, if the PC is set to obtain the IP address automatically,
the IP address of the PC will be set to an appropriate IP address to establish a connection to the
PBX. For more information about the connection procedure, refer to "5.2 PC Connection" in the
Installation Manual.

PC Programming Manual 27
1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console

2. Access Web Maintenance Console:

MNT Port connection:
Launch your Web browser and in the address bar, enter one of the following addresses exactly as
shown:
– 223.0.0.1

Note
• If connecting using 223.0.0.1 takes a long time, configure a static IP address for the PC.

LAN or VPN connection:

Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance
Console port number into the address bar. The input method will differ according to the PC’s connection
to the PBX.
The default IP address for the LAN port of the PBX is 192.168.0.101, and the default Web Maintenance
Console port number is 80. Accordingly, the address to enter to connect to the PBX for the first time will
be as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://192.168.0.101

Internet connection (TLS Connection):

When the PC is accessing the PBX from a connection over the Internet, the use of TLS is strongly
recommended. When using a TLS encrypted connection, the default port is 443. The format of the
address to enter to connect to the PBX using a TLS encrypted connection will be as follows:
https://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy
• "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of a device that can be accessed from the Internet, such as the
IP address of a network router.
• "yyy" is a port number. The network router’s port forwarding settings must be configured so that traffic
arriving at port "yyy" is forwarded to the correct IP address and port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Port forwarding settings must specify the IP address and the port number of the network router
("xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:yyy") to transfer the packets to the PBX in the LAN, so that the packets sent to the
global IP address and specified port of the router will be transferred to the IP address and specified
port of the PBX in the LAN.
• Note the usage of "https" instead of "http".
• If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using TLS, a security alert window is displayed. Follow
the prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.

Note
• The IP address and Web Maintenance Console port number for the PBX can be changed from
their default values. If settings for the LAN port’s IP address or port number have been forgotten,
connect using the MNT port connection as described above and confirm the LAN port’s IP
address in 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings, and the port in
28.2.3 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—HTTP.
3. The Web Maintenance Console login screen is displayed. For details about logging in, see
2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.
• If this is the first time the PBX is accessed (i.e., it is in its initialised, factory default state), you must
log in using the Installer level account. Once you log in, the Easy Setup Wizard will launch. For
details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If the PBX has been set up using the Easy Setup Wizard, PBX system programming can be
performed. To perform programming, enter the login name and password according to your status
and authorisation level. For details about the differences between levels of authorisation, see
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

28 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool

• You can import a DNSYS file of another KX-NSX series to the NSX server (e.g., KX-NSX1000 →
KX-NSX2000). However, a DNSYS file of KX-NSX2000 cannot be imported to KX-NSX1000. To
import a DNSYS file, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard or 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX.
4. After you successfully log in to Web Maintenance Console, the Home screen will be displayed and
programming can be performed. For details about accessing the different features of Web Maintenance
Console, see 2.1.5 Software Interface.

1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool

Bulk Administration Tool can be used for upgrading the system data files and editing large amounts of data,
such as user settings.
Installation

Note
• Be sure to install and use the latest version of "Bulk Administration Tool".
System Requirements
CPU: Intel CoreTM Duo processor or higher, or comparable CPU
RAM: 1024 MB
OS: Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 8/8 Professional (32-bit or 64-bit), Windows 8.1/8.1
Professional (32-bit or 64-bit)
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows, you must be logged in as a user in the
"Administrators" group.
1. Copy the "Bulk Administration Tool" setup file to your PC.
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the installation wizard.

The Programme Launcher

After Bulk Administration Tool has been installed, you can run the Programme Launcher from the Windows
Start menu.

Bulk Administration Tool Programme Launcher

PC Programming Manual 29
1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool

Note
If the Off-line software for NSX server is already running, this tool cannot be started.
Starting a New System Data File
You can start a new session of Bulk Administration Tool. You can then programme NSX server settings in
Off-line mode and then save them to a file you can later upload to the NSX server.

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the NSX server will
overwrite all previous settings. Use this function only when necessary.
To create a new system data file
1. In the Programme Launcher, click New.
2. Select a PBX model.
3. Log in to Bulk Administration Tool using the Installer level account and password to start the Easy
Setup Wizard. For details, see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
Opening an Existing System Data File
This operation will load an NSX server-settings system data file from your PC for programming in Bulk
Administration Tool. The system data file can be a file created earlier using Bulk Administration Tool, or a
system data file downloaded from an NSX server. You can then programme settings using Bulk
Administration Tool and save the settings to a file you can later upload to the NSX server.
When you use the following procedure to open a system file created using a previous version of the
KX-NSX1000/2000 software, a confirmation screen will be displayed asking whether you want to convert the
system data to the latest software version. Click Yes to convert the data and proceed with Bulk
Administration Tool.
To open a system data file
1. In the Programme Launcher, click Open. The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Browse, and then click OK.
The file will be loaded and the login screen will be displayed.
5. Log in using the Installer level account and password associated with the system data file that was
loaded.

Options
You can specify the display language of the Programme Launcher, as well as set the web server port
number for Bulk Administration Tool. In the Programme Launcher, click Options and change the settings as
necessary.
Adding Additional Languages
Additional display language files may be made available. To add a display language not listed in the
language selection menu, select Additional language, and then click Browse to specify the language file.
After specifying a language file, click OK to change to the selected language.
VoIP Test Tool
Click the VoIP Test Tool button to launch the VoIP Test Tool. This tool is identical to the VoIP Test Tool
included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.
IP Terminal Utility
Click the IP Terminal button to launch the IP Terminal setup utility. This utility is identical to the IP Terminal
utility included with the Unified PC Maintenance Console for KX-TDA/KX-TDE/KX-NCP PBXs.
IP Trace File Converter

30 PC Programming Manual
 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

Click the IP Trace File Converter button to launch the IP Trace File Converter utility. This utility will convert
locally-saved IP trace file data collected by the system utilities listed below into a format that can be
analysed by general packet analysis software tools.
– 7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace
– 7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace
Programming in Bulk Administration Tool
Some of the settings in Web Maintenance Console, such as User Container settings, can be changed in
Bulk Administration Tool.
For details about the settings, consult your dealer.

1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

Multi-connection Network Configuration
Multiple KX-NS series PBXs can be connected together in a configuration called a Multi-connection network.
One KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 PBX serves as the Main Unit, and other KX-NS series PBXs connect to the
Main Unit as Expansion Units. Expansion Unit PBXs receive settings and operation instructions from the
Main Unit PBX. With this configuration, it is easy to make network-wide changes by performing
programming at only one PBX.

Multi-connection Network Data Types

The data that is set when programming a Multi-connection network using Web Maintenance Console is
divided into three categories: global data, local data, and connection data. The kind of data being
programmed affects how the programming is performed.
Data Type Description
Global Data Global data is related to the function of the PBX network as a whole. These
settings are unified network-wide, including extension and calling configurations.
Local Data Local data is related to the settings and functions of each Expansion Unit PBX.
Local data includes UM configuration settings and network settings.
Connection Connection data includes setting information for connecting the Main Unit to
Data Expansion Units in the Multi-connection network.

Details for Main Units and Expansion Units are as follows:

Configuration
Description
Type
Main Unit This is the central PBX of a Multi-connection network of KX-NSX1000/
KX-NSX2000 PBXs. All PBXs in a Multi-connection network can be programmed
by logging in to the Main Unit via Web Maintenance Console. Both the global
settings (settings that apply to all PBXs) and local settings (settings that apply
only to a single Expansion Unit PBX) of the Multi-connection network can be
programmed in one session. Expansion Units can also be registered to the Main
Unit and then configured from the Main Unit.
If the Main Unit is set to out of service (OUS) for maintenance or due to a
problem, the Multi-connection network cannot be used until the Main Unit is
returned to in service (INS) status.

Note
When a single KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 is used in a stand-alone
configuration or other networking configuration, for programming purposes it
still must be set as the Main Unit.

PC Programming Manual 31
1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types

Configuration
Description
Type
Expansion Unit Expansion Units receive programming information from the Main Unit for all
system-wide functions, such as extension information and call handling. Each
Expansion Unit also contains local data programming settings, but these local
settings are still specified using the Main Unit. When you log in to an Expansion
Unit, you may view all global data settings, but only that Expansion Unit’s local
data and connection data may be viewed. The only setting data that can be
specified using an Expansion Unit is connection data.
If an Expansion Unit is set to OUS, its resources cannot be used but otherwise
the Multi-connection network will still function. The resources of the OUS
Expansion Unit may be used again when it is returned to INS status.

Note
In this manual, the NSX Expansion Box is treated the same as the
KX-NS1000. For details about the NSX Expansion Box, refer to the NSX
Expansion Box manual.

Stand-alone and Other Networking Configurations

A KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 PBX can be used as a single stand-alone unit, without connecting to other
KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 PBXs in a Multi-connection network. Programming is still performed by logging
in to the PBX using Web Maintenance Console. A KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 PBX (including the Main Unit
of a Multi-connection network) can also connect to other PBXs using standards such as H.323. For details
about other networking configurations, refer to "4.2.2 Network Type Comparison" in the Feature Manual.

1.2.3.1 Multi-connection Networking Survivability

A Multi-connection network can be configured so that even if a site’s main PBX fails or is otherwise
disconnected from the network, operation of the Multi-connection Network as a whole continues. Multi-
connection Networking Survivability provides the following features:
• Simplified Isolated Mode
If this feature is enabled, an expansion gateway can operate in stand-alone mode when the NSX server
goes offline. In Simplified Isolated mode, the expansion gateway can operate with limited functionality
(e.g., making and receiving calls).

Note
• Simplified Isolated mode will operate only for 30 days.
For more information about Multi-connection Networking Survivability and programming required for each
aspect of network survivability, refer to "4.2.3 Multi-connection Networking Survivability" in the Feature
Manual.

32 PC Programming Manual
 Section 2
Introduction of Web Maintenance Console

This section serves as reference operating instructions

when using Web Maintenance Console to programme
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 33
2.1 Introduction

2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
User account levels
Access to Web Maintenance Console requires a login name and password, which are assigned to accounts
in the PBX. Also, access to Web Maintenance Console is controlled by different levels of authorisation. The
Installer level is the highest authorisation level. There are also three levels for end users, Administrators,
Sub-Administrators, and Users. The usage for each level and number of accounts available for each level
are as follows:
Level Description Number of Accounts/Network
Installer For dealers and system installers 1
User For on-site managers 128
(Administrator)
User (Sub- For individual site managers 32
Administrator)
User (User) For end users Up to 1000 (KX-NSX1000) or
2000 (KX-NSX2000)*1

*1 The total number of administrator and user accounts combined cannot exceed Users (User) maximum Accounts.

Differences between user levels

• Installer
The installer level account is the highest authorisation account of the four levels. This account level is to
be used by dealers or system installers. All system programming settings are available, and this account
is used for overall system installation and maintenance. The installer level can be used to programme
which menus in Web Maintenance Console are accessible by Administrator accounts.
• User (Administrator)
Administrator accounts are for general maintenance of users and user settings. This account level is used
by on-site managers and network administrators. Administrator level accounts can use Web Maintenance
Console to add users or programme user settings.
User (Administrator) accounts are intended for maintenance functions only. To manage their own PBX
user settings, on-site managers and network administrators should create their own User (User) accounts
for programming.
• User (Sub-Administrator)
Sub-Administrator accounts are for system maintenance of a specific site. This account level is used by
the managers for each site. Sub-Administrator-level accounts can manage all system programming
settings and limited PBX user settings that are authorised by the installer. Multiple Sub-Administrators can
use Web Maintenance Console at the same time.
• User (User)
User accounts are for individual users of the PBX system. Users can use Web Maintenance Console to
change their extension settings, speed dial settings, or other personal settings by accessing a limited
number of pre-defined menus.

Account Login Names and Passwords

Each account has a login name and password and are specified as follows. All account passwords are set
in Web Maintenance Console (see 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User).

34 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Level Login Name Password

Installer INSTALLER 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
and 0-9 (case sensitive).
For an initialised PBX that has not yet
been set up, the default Installer level
password is "1234". You will be prompted
to choose a new password for the
Installer level account when the Easy
Setup Wizard is run (see 2.1.4 Easy
Setup Wizard).
Administrator 1-16 character login name, using a- 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). and 0-9 (case sensitive). Set during
User
Set during account creation. account creation.
(see 8.1.1 Users—User Container (see 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add
—Add User/Edit User) User/Edit User)
Sub- 1-16 character login name, using a- 4-16 character password, using a-z, A-Z,
administrator z, A-Z, and 0-9 (case sensitive). and 0-9, * and # (case sensitive). Set
Default is "S-ADMIN" + 3 digits of during account creation.
Sub-Administrator number. Default is 4 digits of Sub-Administrator
(i.e., if Sub-Administrator number is number.
"1", the Login Name will be "S- (i.e., if Sub-Administrator number is "1",
ADMIN001".) the password will be "0001".)
Installer account can change the Installer account can change the
Login Name. password.
(See 8.9.1 Maintenance Personnel (See 8.9.1 Maintenance Personnel—Sub
—Sub Administrator Setting— Administrator Setting—Accounts)
Accounts)

For more information about creating and managing end user accounts, see 8 Users/Supervisors/
Maintenance Personnel.

CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding account passwords
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and
inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become
known to others.
3. The PBX has no passwords set initially. For security, select an installer password as soon as the
PBX system is installed at the site.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.

2.1.2 Access Levels

Access to menu options within Web Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the level of the
account and the current programming mode (see Programming Modes in 1.1.2 Introduction). When a
menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the initial description of that
menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."

PC Programming Manual 35
2.1.2 Access Levels

The options available for each programming mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User (User); A: User (Administrator); S: User (Sub-Administrator); I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.

Note
Sub-Administrator-level accounts can change the settings only of sites they are authorised for.

Home Screen
Menu Option On-line
U A S I
Add Site ü
System Information ü ü ü ü
Logout ü ü ü ü

Tool
Menu Option On-line
U A S I
System Data Backup—Backup to USB ü ü
System Data Backup—Backup to NAS ü ü
System Data Backup—Auto Backup ü ü
BRI Automatic Configuration ü ü
Call Pickup for My Group ü
Extension List View ü ü ü ü
Import→User Container ü ü
Import→Feature - Speed Dial & Caller ID ü ü
Import→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Import→Verification Code ü ü
Import→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Import→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Import→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Import→Quick Dial ü ü
Import→SIP Extension ü ü
Import→V-IPGW GW Settings ü
Import→V-IPGW DN to Gateway ü
Import→V-SIPGW Settings ü
Import→V-SIPGW Provider ü
Import→PS Registration ü
Export→User Container ü ü
Export→Feature - Speed Dial & Caller ID ü ü

36 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option On-line

U A S I
Export→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü
Export→Verification Code ü ü
Export→ARS - Leading Digit ü ü
Export→ARS - Except Code ü ü
Export→ARS - Routing Plan ü ü
Export→Quick Dial ü ü
Export→SIP Extension ü ü
Export→V-IPGW GW Settings ü
Export→V-IPGW DN to Gateway ü
Export→V-SIPGW Settings ü
Export→V-SIPGW Provider ü
Export→PS Registration ü
Screen Customise ü
UM Data Backup ü ü
UM Data Restore ü ü
UM Backup History ü ü
DXDP All OUS ü
Contact information ü ü
URL Information ü
P-SIP Option ü

Utility
Menu Option On-line
U A S I
Diagnosis→Card Diagnosis ü ü ü
Diagnosis→Ping ü ü ü
File Transfer PC to PBX ü ü
File Transfer PBX to PC ü ü ü
File View ü ü
File Delete ü ü
Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü ü ü
Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü ü ü
Error Log ü ü
Syslog ü ü
WEB Operation Log ü ü ü

PC Programming Manual 37
2.1.2 Access Levels

Menu Option On-line

U A S I
UM System Log ü ü
Call Control Log ü ü
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ü ü
V-IPGW Protocol Trace ü ü
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace ü ü
CS Status Monitor→Air Sync Group ü
CS Status Monitor→LAN Sync Group ü
Fax - Protocol Trace ü
Fax - Task sequence Trace ü
UM System Trace (Internal) ü
T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor ü ü
T1/E1 Line Trace ü ü
Packet Trace ü
IP Traffic Monitor ü
System Resource Usage ü
Digital Trunk Error Report ü ü ü
IP Extension Statistical Information ü ü ü
IP Extension Statistical Information (Single IP node) ü ü
UM View Reports ü ü
E-mail Report ü ü ü
IP-CS Information → IP-CS Statistical Information ü ü ü
IP-CS Information → LAN Sync Information ü ü ü
IP-CS Information → PS Call Disconnect Log ü ü ü
Expansion Gateway Keep Alive Information ü ü
Activation Key Installation ü ü
Email Notification—Alert ü ü ü
Email Notification—System Analysis ü ü
Email Notification—Test Email ü ü
UM Command ü ü
Network command ü ü ü
UM – System Prompts Customisation ü ü
Automatic Two-way Recording ü ü
UM - System Maintenance ü

38 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console

After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console (see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance
Console), the login window is displayed, and a login name and password must be entered. If this is the first
time to log in to Web Maintenance Console, and the PBX is in its initialised, factory default state, you must
log in using the Installer level account to begin the Easy Setup Wizard (see 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard).
For information about account names and passwords, see 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts.

Login Screen

Login Restrictions
• Only 1 user may log in using the Installer level account at a time. If someone using the Installer level
account is logged in to Web Maintenance Console and is making changes, and another user logs in using
the Installer level account, the user logging in may override the other logged-in user so that programming
can be performed (a warning screen will be displayed for the user that is about to override the currently
logged-in user).
• When Sub-Administrator level accounts are enabled, the installer can select the following one of the
programming modes at login:
– Shared Login Mode: Sub-Administrators can log in at the same time. Also, they can programme or
view the settings for which they have authority.
– Exclusive Login Mode: Sub-Administrators cannot log in at the same time. Logged-in Sub-
Administrators are forced to log out. (The installer can check which Sub-Administrators are logged in
through Active Administrators.)
• Users can view only menus and setting items they may access according to their account level. For User
(Administrator) level accounts, the items that can be viewed can be set by the Installer level account. For
details, see 6.7 Tool—Screen Customise.
• If two logged-in users change the same setting, the change made last will be the effective setting.
• If a user attempts to log in, but enters an incorrect password three times, the failure is recorded in the
error log of the PBX and the user may not attempt to log in again for a 5-minute period.
• If a Software Product Key (KX-NSX201) has not been installed, the NSX Start Up AK Installation screen
is displayed instead of the Login screen. After installing the Software Product Key, Easy Setup Wizard will
start.
For details, see 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation.

PC Programming Manual 39
2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

In the Easy Setup Wizard, you will configure the mandatory settings required for the PBX. When you log in
to Web Maintenance Console for a PBX that is in its initialised, factory default state, the Easy Setup Wizard
for that PBX will launch automatically.
You must log in using the Installer level account name and password.
– The Installer level account name is "INSTALLER".
– The default Installer level account password is "1234".
After logging in, the Easy Setup Wizard welcome screen is displayed. Select a language, and then click
Install. Refer to "5.4.1 Easy Setup Wizard" in the Installation Manual for detailed and important information
about configuring the PBX using the Easy Setup Wizard.

2.1.5 Software Interface

This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window
When you log in to Web Maintenance Console, the main window is displayed. For information about
connecting to Web Maintenance Console and logging in, see 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console.
The main window of Web Maintenance Console is divided into several areas, as shown below:

40 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.5 Software Interface

2
1 3

1. Logged in Account Level

The logged in account level is displayed.
2. Menu Buttons
Provides access to the three main components of Web Maintenance Console:
Button Description
Clicking this button will load the Home Screen. From the Home Screen, you can:
• View the status of connected PBXs in the Multi-connection network
• Add PBXs to your Multi-connection network
Home Screen • Select a PBX to perform programming
For more information, see 3.1 Home Screen.
Clicking this button will display the Maintenance Screen tree view items. From the
Maintenance Screen, you can:
• Check the status and equipment of the selected PBX
• Backup or update PBX system files
Maintenance • Use tools and reports to monitor and analyse system usage
Screen For more information, see Maintenance Screen Tree View Items below.

PC Programming Manual 41
2.1.5 Software Interface

Button Description
Clicking this button will display the Setup Screen tree view items. From the Setup
Screen, you can:
• Configure PBX hardware and virtual cards
• Programme settings for extensions and call handling
Setup Screen • Configure network settings and auxiliary PBX functions
• Configure the Unified Messaging (UM) system
For more information, see Setup Screen Tree View Items below.

3. Web Maintenance Console Features

Clicking these buttons provides features for Web Maintenance Console, as follows:
Button Description
Clicking this button will save any changes made to settings to the Storage Memory
Card. Programming changes that are not saved will be lost if the PBX is reset or is
turned off. Changes may also be lost if Web Maintenance Console is suddenly
Save Data terminated or the PC running Web Maintenance Console loses power
unexpectedly. Be sure to save the data periodically while programming, especially
during long programming sessions.
Clicking this button displays the Web Maintenance Console software version,
copyright notices, and licences.

System
Information
Clicking this button will save any programming changes to the PBX’s Storage
Memory Card and log you out of Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
see 2.2 Logout.
Logout
Clicking this button will display the Extension List View in a separate window. For
details, see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View.

Extension
List View
User Clicking this button will display the User Container List View in a separate window.
Container
List View

4. Home Screen/Tree View

The Home Screen (shown above) displays the PBX icon view or PBX list view. The information and
status of PBXs in the Multi-connection network can be managed and confirmed. For more information,
see 3.1 Home Screen.
When the Maintenance Screen or Setup Screen is selected, the tree view is displayed. The tree view is
used to display PBX setting items. Setting items are listed in categories, and by clicking items in the
tree, setting items are displayed to the right in the settings programming area. Some tree items have
sub-categories with additional options and settings. Clicking a sub-category will open an additional
layer of settings. Below is a summary of the tree view menu items for the Setup Screen and the
Maintenance Screen.

42 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.5 Software Interface

Maintenance Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Status • Check the status of the PBX’s system hardware
• Check the status of PBX equipment (PSs, CSs, UPS, etc.)
• Check the status of extensions used by the Unified Messaging system
For details, see 4 Status.
System Control • Download and update PBX software files
• Manage music on hold (MOH) data
• Reset or shutdown the system
For details, see 5 System Control.
Tool • Backup system data to a USB memory device
• View a list of PBX extensions
• Import and export PBX settings and user information
• Backup or restore Unified Messaging data
For details, see 6 Tool.
Utility • Perform tests for PBX cards and network connections
• Transfer files between the PBX and a connected PC
• View reports, error logs, event logs, and programme update logs
• Monitor and trace PBX communications and protocols
• Manage activation keys
For details, see 7 Utility.

Setup Screen Tree View Items

Item Primary Functions
Users • Manage, view, and add PBX User Container and account information
For details, see 8 Users/Supervisors/Maintenance Personnel.
PBX Configuration • Configure PBX hardware settings for cards, equipment, and networking
• Configure network-wide programming such as BGM and Class of Service
• Configure dialling features, call routing, and incoming call settings
• Configure call logging (SMDR) and other PBX maintenance items
For details, see 9 PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration to 19 PBX
Configuration—[11] Maintenance.
UM Configuration • Configure Unified Messaging mailboxes and voice mail subscriber settings
• Configure service settings and system parameters
• Configure hardware options
For details, see 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings to 26 UM
Configuration—[7] System Security.

PC Programming Manual 43
2.1.5 Software Interface

Item Primary Functions

Router • Confirm the status of the built-in router and its settings
Configuration
• Configure built-in router settings and connections
• Configure WAN/LAN settings for the built-in router
• Configure security for the built-in router, such as a firewall
For details, see 27 Router Configuration.
Network Service • Configure server and client features for the PBX
• Configure connections settings and network security
For details, see 28 Network Service.

Site Selection Menu

When you are logged in to the Main Unit of a Multi-connection network and you are viewing programming
screens in the tree view, a site selection drop-down menu is displayed with each PBX site’s name and ID
number. You can select a PBX site in the Multi-connection network from the drop-down menu to programme
items for that site.

Note
On some screens, the site selection menu will be inactive. This means that the currently displayed
programming items are set for the Main Unit PBX only, and cannot be set for each Expansion Unit.

Hot Standby Status

If the Hot Standby function is enabled, its status is displayed next to the account level in the upper-left of the
main window of Web Maintenance Console. The following information is displayed:

[Display Items]
Hot Standby : "TYPE", "STATE"

Item Value Description

TYPE Primary Operating as the Primary server
Secondary Operating as the Secondary server
STATE Active Operating in active mode
Standby Operating in standby mode
Fault Data synchronisation is being stopped.

Example: When the NSX server operates as the Primary server and the status of the Hot Standby function
is active mode, the Hot Standby status is displayed as follows:
"Hot Standby : Primary, Active"

Note
The Hot Standby status is displayed only when Enable is selected for Hot Standby Mode. For more
information about the Hot Standby settings, see 5.6 System Control—Hot Standby.

44 PC Programming Manual
 2.1.6 Card Status

Standard Buttons
There are standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance Console.
The standard buttons are as follows:
Button Function
OK Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory
(DRAM) and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and closes the current screen.
Apply Temporarily implements changes to the system’s memory
(DRAM) and remains on the same screen.

Copying and Pasting Data

Many setting items in Web Maintenance Console can be copied and pasted to other items on the same
screen. When the icon is displayed, clicking it will open a menu where you can specify the copy source
and the paste destinations.
1. On a programming screen, click . The copy window will be displayed.

Note
The icon may not be displayed for some programming screens.
2. Select the copy source from the Copy From drop-down menu.
3. In Copy To, select one or more paste destinations. Hold down the "Ctrl" key and click to select
destinations one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of destinations.
4. In Items, select one or more items to copy from the source selected in Copy From. Hold down the "Ctrl"
key and click to select items one at a time, or hold down the "Shift" key and click to select a range of
items.
5. Click Copy. The programming item(s) selected in Items for the copy source specified in Copy From will
be copied to the destination(s) specified in Copy To.

Individual items can also be copied and pasted in a manner similar to other software programmes. Press
"Ctrl"+"c" to copy a highlighted (orange-coloured) programming item entry, select a target cell by pressing
the keyboard arrow keys, and then press "Ctrl"+"v" to paste the copied information to the selected cell.

2.1.6 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service
(INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item.
Card status changes can be performed only in On-line mode (see Programming Modes in
1.1.2 Introduction).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been temporarily removed
from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly. For more
information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-
line mode only) in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

PC Programming Manual 45
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

2.1.7 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of
programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard
window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains
how to use this Extension Number Setting window.

To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions you
wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions will be
added to the first free spaces on the original screen.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Selects the types of extension numbers to display in User, ICD Group,
Type Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple items can PS Ring Group,
be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a OGM (DISA),
grey checkbox. External Pager,
Fax Unit, Analogue
Modem, ISDN
Remote, UM
Extension, UM
Group
Extension Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Matching
Numbers & Extension Type, and names. Click entries to select them, extensions
Names List and click the Add button when finished, to add the
selected extensions. To deselect an entry, click it again.
Available Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension Available fields
Column data to. For example, if both extension numbers and
names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to
specify that extension name data not be transferred, by
deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.
Selected Displays the extensions that have been selected to be Selected
Extension added to member data. To remove an extension from this extensions
List list, click it to select it and click Delete.

46 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 Logout

2.2 Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the button to end the programming session and return to
the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary
memory (DRAM) of the PBX to the Storage Memory Card.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.

Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down, or
the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved to the Storage Memory Card will
be lost. To save settings while programming, click the button on the Home screen. Always end your
programming session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

PC Programming Manual 47
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console software
to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:
Title Description
Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and
deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via a LAN connection.
A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more
details, see 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports.
• Is the login name and password correct?

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From the Home Screen, access the List View (see 3.1 Home Screen). The software
version of the PBX is displayed on this screen.
• From 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot, click Summary.
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too
narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the
table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".

48 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-Install"
for that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed
correctly in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?
• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 9.31 PBX
Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option from "In Service (INS)" to "Out of
Service (OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in 9.30 PBX
Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station.
A • Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station Number of User Container (8.1.1 Users—User Container—
Add User/Edit User-Device Settings-Portable Station) set?
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced De-
registration option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, delete the Portable Station Number of User Container (8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit User-Device Settings-Portable Station), de-register the
Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to
the CS and try the de-registration operation again.

PC Programming Manual 49
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is not
available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable
Station, so it cannot be de-registered.
A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—
Portable Station.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station
still shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q If I delete the Portable Station Number of User Container, and then turn the
Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the Portable Station Number of User Container (8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit User-Device Settings-Portable Station), as this information
is necessary for it to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • First, service out from wired extension, and change the extension number of User
Container (8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—User Information—
Extension Number) to the new number, and click Apply. Next, service in to the target
wired extension.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional
Digits from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?
in Numbering.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

50 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Select 3-digits for Select the default value of Numbering Plan in the Easy Setup
Wizard. If you want to change to a 3-digit extension numbering plan after the PBX
system is already running using a 4-digit extension numbering plan, follow the
procedure below. There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method
allows a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method
allows a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan? in
Numbering.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set
"21" as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension
numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– Another extension block
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.

Q How do I change a feature number?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen and navigate to the Features tab.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

PC Programming Manual 51
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– A Dial setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Other PBX Extension cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
– A feature number
– An extension
– An Other PBX Extension setting (see 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private
Network—TIE Table)
– Quick Dialling (see 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly

installed card?
A • Change New-Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card in the
9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option screen from "Enable" to
"Disable".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the main screen.

52 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to
the Storage Memory Card. If system data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card,
the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX
is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the button on the Home screen to save
the system data to the Storage Memory Card. Also, when you finish a programming
session, be sure to click the button to logout and save the system data to the
Storage Memory Card.

Note
Do not remove the Storage Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX.
Doing so may cause the PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.
A • The following setting data is not saved to the Storage Memory Card, so will be
deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX’s battery backup
memory.
– Advice of Charge (AOC)
– Hospitality guest billing data
– Timed Reminder
– ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
– Remote Extension Dial Lock

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or
"Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

A • From the 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
LCO Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection Time-Outgoing, Incoming
setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set
separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the CPC Signal Detection Time screen, set the Port Type of the port you want
to use to "EXT".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

PC Programming Manual 53
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • From the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -

BRI Port or 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
PRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-
Slave" or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block screen. Click in the
relevant cells to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from calling
each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 10.7.2 PBX
Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block screen.
Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk groups that cannot be used by
extensions associated with a particular COS in each time mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the
SLT—SLT Hold Mode option on the 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—
System Options screen.
For more details, see "2.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Manual.

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?

54 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, enter the floating extension
number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, select the ICD
group you created from the ICD Group No. drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number
column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—
DIL Table & Port Settings-CO & Incoming Call-DIL Table & Port Settings
screen, enter the floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL
Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required
for each queuing table.
2. On the 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table
tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List screen, from the ICD
Group No. drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of
the Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being
forwarded.

PC Programming Manual 55
2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

A • Perform the following steps:

1. Check that the Telephony Feature settings of the target extension on the
8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User screen are set to one of
the forwarding settings.
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

56 PC Programming Manual
 Section 3
Web Maintenance Console Home Screen

This section explains how to setup the main PBX and

other connected PBXs from the Home Screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 57
3.1 Home Screen

3.1 Home Screen

The Home Screen of Web Maintenance Console provides an overall view of your Multi-connection network,
and allows you select a PBX to perform programming, or add a PBX to your Multi-connection network. The
Home Screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console. The screen can also be accessed
by clicking the Home Screen icon at the top of the Web Maintenance Console screen.

Note
• The first time you login to a PBX using Web Maintenance Console, instead of the Home screen the
Easy Setup Wizard is run. See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.

1. PBX management buttons

These items provide site management functions as follows:
Icon Description
Add Slave
Click this button to run the Add Site Wizard to add a PBX as an Expansion Unit
to the Multi-connection network.

Note
This is displayed only when logged in to the Main Unit.

2. List View
List View displays the following information in a list format:
• Site status indicator
• Site ID (1–32)
• Site Name

58 PC Programming Manual
 3.1 Home Screen

• Location (MIB)
Specified at MIB info—SysLocation in 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent.
• Status (INS, OUS, Fault or Pre-INS)
• PBX Mode
• Direct Login
A Sub-Administrator account cannot directly log in to Expansion GW.
• Operation Mode
• PBX Model
• IP Address
• MAC Address
• PBX Version (software version)
• PBX Region
• Data Version
• SRAM Version
You can also perform PBX site management from this screen:
• Click Registration to register expansion gateways that have been added using the Add Site Wizard.
Up to 31 expansion gateways can be registered under the control of the NSX server.
For details, 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard. You can also click De-registration or
Forced De-registration to remove expansion gateways from the Multi-connection network.
– When logged in to an expansion gateway, only information for that expansion gateway and the
NSX server is displayed.
– You can register or de-register expansion gateway only in interactive mode.
• Click System Alarm. The Error Log screen will be displayed.
For details, see 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log.
• Clicking Remote Access, you can specifies the maintenance technician (INSTALLER and
Panasonic Support) that remote access is allowed.
It can be programmed by Administrator only.
• If an expansion gateway is in Simplified Isolated mode, but the NSX server has been restored to
normal operation, you can click the expansion gateway’s Change button and select to restore the
expansion gateway to normal operation. (It will reconnect to the NSX server as an expansion
gateway.)
How to change to Normal mode are three ways.
Immediately:
PBX mode is changed immediately.
Next change time:
Specifies the time to change PBX mode. This setting is cleared after System is restarted.
Scheduled:
Specifies the schedule to change PBX mode. This setting is remained even after System is
restarted.
3. PBX information
• The time of when Web Maintenance Console last received information from the PBX is displayed.
• The uptime of the PBX is displayed (the total time since the PBX was last reset).

PC Programming Manual 59
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

Note
• For the following items related to the Unified Messaging (UM) programming of an Expansion
Unit, you must select Direct Login to log in to the PBX that the UM Group in which programming
will be performed belongs to:
– 4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status
– 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB
– 5.3 System Control—FAX Card
– 6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
– 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup
– 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore
– 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History
– 7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log
– 7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)
– 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace
– 7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace
– 7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
– 7.8 Utility—Command
– 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
– UM Configuration settings
(For details for UM Configuration settings, see "20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings" to
"26 UM Configuration—[7] System Security".)

3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

The Add Site Wizard, which is run from the Home Screen, will add KX-NS series PBXs (KX-NS300/
KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000) to your Multi-connection network as Expansion Units.

Note
• The PBX to be added must have been configured as an Expansion Unit using the Easy Setup Wizard.
See 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000 PBXs cannot be designated as a Master.
1. To start the Add Site Wizard, click the Add Slave button ( ) on the Home screen. For details about the
Home Screen, see 3.1 Home Screen.
2. Follow the prompts of the Add Site Wizard to complete the following settings:
– PBX Setting
– WAN Setting
– Registration Setting
– SNTP / Daylight Saving
– Maintenance Setting

Note
• The parameters which appear in the settings above are described in 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard.
• If 2 or more sites will be added to the Multi-connection network, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each site.

60 PC Programming Manual
 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

3. After the Add Site Wizard is completed, click Registration on the List View of the Home screen.
4. A list of PBXs set up as Expansion Units will be displayed under Available Site. Select PBXs by their
assigned site names and click the right arrow to move them to Selected Site for Registration.
Click Next to start the registration process.
5. On the Registration Executing screen, the status of PBXs being registered is displayed.
6. On the Registration Completed screen, the result of the registration process is shown. Click Close to
continue.
Registered Slave PBXs can now be viewed and selected on the Home Screen for programming.

Removing registered Expansion Units from the Multi-connection network

To remove an Expansion Unit from the Multi-connection network, there are two methods: De-registration
and Forced De-registration.
Method Description
De-registration • Registration information and settings for the Expansion
Unit are deleted from the Main Unit.
• The De-registered Expansion Unit is reset to its initialised
state (factory default state).
Forced De-Registration • Registration information and settings for the Expansion
Unit are deleted from the Main Unit.
• The De-registered Expansion Unit is not reset to its
initialised state. Information and settings registered on the
Expansion Unit remain.

1. Set the Expansion Unit to be removed to out of service (OUS) status.

2. From the List View of the Home Screen (see 3.1 Home Screen) click De-registration or Forced De-
registration.
3. Select the PBX(s) by site name, click the arrow to move them to the selection box, and click Next.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK to continue.
A removal status screen will be displayed. Each selected PBX will be removed one at a time. After
each successful removal, a confirmation message will appear. Click Continue to proceed to the next
PBX to remove.
5. When all removal is complete, a message will be displayed. Click Close to finish.

PC Programming Manual 61
3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard

62 PC Programming Manual
 Section 4
Status

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Status menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 63
4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1 Status—Equipment Status

4.1.1 Status—Equipment Status—UPS
Information is provided about the status of the UPS device and the connection to the PBX
• UPS Connection Status
Displays if the UPS system is connected or not connected. If a UPS system is connected, the information
below will be displayed for the UPS system.
• Battery Voltage (V)
The voltage of the UPS battery is displayed (0-240 V).
• Battery Charge Percentage (%)
The remaining charge of the UPS battery is displayed (percentage value).
• Power Supply
Displays the usage status of the UPS (if the UPS is engaged in supplying power to the PBX).
• UPS Shutdown Conditions - Battery level
From the drop-down list, select the amount of remaining battery level for when to initiate PBX shutdown
procedures.

4.1.2 Status—Equipment Status—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode and requires that the target
V-IPCS card be set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Site Number of the site
Shelf Number of the shelf
Slot Number of the slot
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the programme file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the programme file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the
case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating
extension number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". The number of paths that can be used varies for each CS
model. For more details, see the documentation for your CS.

64 PC Programming Manual
 4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Item Description
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a
PS Ring Group.

To view CS information
1. From the Target CS I/F Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target shelf and slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the shelf number, slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "All".
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. If you want to save the CS information, click Capture.
a. Create a file for saving the data.
b. Click Start.
c. Click Close.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
6. If you started to save the CS information in step 3, click Capture, then click Stop to record the
information to the specified file.
7. Click Close to return to the main screen.

4.1.3 Status—Equipment Status—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available for the Installer level account in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
PS No. PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Site Number of the site.
LocationSlot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
LocationPort Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Model Name*1 Model name of the PS.
Version *1
Software version of the PS.

*1 This information is displayed for certain PSs only. For more information, refer to the documentation for your PS.

4.1.4 Status—Equipment Status—UM Port status

The UM Port status screen displays each port’s status and number for the Unified Messaging system. The
screen will be updated every 30 seconds. Each port’s status will be displayed in one of the following ways:

PC Programming Manual 65
4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

• Online (Ready): The port is ready to be used.

• Incoming Call: The port is handling an incoming call.
• Outgoing Call: An outgoing service is being processed.
• Error Occurred: An error has been detected.
• Off Line: The port is offline.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB

USB Mount Status indicates if a USB memory device is connected to the PBX. There is also an Unmount
button.
• Mounted: A USB memory device is connected to the PBX. Before removing the USB memory device
from the PBX, click Unmount.

Note
If a mounted memory device is removed from the PBX without first clicking Unmount, the data on the
USB memory device may be damaged.
• None: No USB memory device is detected by the PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

66 PC Programming Manual
 Section 5
System Control

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Control menu of the Maintenance screen
when programming using Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 67
5.1 System Control—Program Update

5.1 System Control—Program Update

The programme files for the following hardware components can be updated with the Program Update
feature.
Each file must be named as indicated in the table to be recognised by the KX-NSX1000/2000.
It is required to install valid activation key for maintenance to execute Program Update feature.

Hardware that can be updated using Program Update

Programme Type Target of Update File Name
MPR Programme KX-NSX1000/2000 Mother Board PNMPR
KX-NS1000 Mother Board PCMPR
KX-NS300/500 Mother Board PFMPR
Expansion Gateway Expansion Gateway (KX-NS1000) PCEXPGW
Programmes
Expansion Gateway (KX-NS300/500/700) PFEXPGW
LPR Programmes KX-NSX1000/2000, KX-NS1000 DHLC/DLC PDHLC
KX-NS300/500 DHLC/DLC PDHLC2
CSIF PCSINF
SLC PSLC
DID PDID
T1 PT1
E1 PE1
E&M PEM
BRI PBRI
PRI23 PPRI23
PRI30 PPRI30
OPB3 POPB3
ESLC16/EMSLC16 PESLC
ECSLC24/EMSLC24/MCSLC16/MCSLC24 PEESLC
ELCOT PELCOT
EECHO PEECHO
CSLC16 PCSLC
STACK-S PSTKS
EXPS PEXPS

68 PC Programming Manual
 5.1 System Control—Program Update

Programme Type Target of Update File Name

PT Programmes PIPTEL PIPTEL
KX-NT543, KX-NT546 PNT540
KX-NT551, KX-NT553, KX-NT556 PNT550
KX-NT560 PNT560
PNT511 PNT511
KX-NT630 PNT630
KX-NT680 PNT680
LCD picture file (for KX-NT680) PNTPICT
– The maximum file size is 1MB.
– The aspect ratio of the image is preferably
16:9.
– Supported file formats are as follows:
JPEG / PNG / BMP / GIF
– This file is updated from the local PC only.
Firmware for PFPGA PFPGA
KX-NS1000
PAPMIRNR PAPMIRNR
PARMVDNR PARMVDNR
PARMIREP PARMIREP
PARMVDEP PARMVDEP
PC300NR PC300NR
PC300EP PC300EP
PC300DAG PC300DAG
PFPGAM PFPGAM
PFPGAS PFPGAS
Unified Messaging PFAX PFAX
(UM) Programme
CS Programmes (PS CS using a CSIF card for DECT Portable PCSDECT
Programmes) Station
CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable PDCSDECT
Station
High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT
IP-CS for DECT Portable Station PICSDCT
TCAx85 + IP-CS (KX-NS0154)*1 PNS0154

*1 Software updates for PSs (e.g., KX-TCA185) are bundled with software updates for an IP-CS (KX-NS0154 only).

PC Programming Manual 69
5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File

5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program

File
Software updates for PBX hardware components can be downloaded to the PBXs in the Multi-Connection
network. Manual and automatic methods are available.
Programme downloading can be performed only in On-line mode.

Note
• If these operations are performed when logged in to an Expansion Unit, only the manual method can
be used, and files may only be acquired from a local PC or a USB memory device.
• When using an FTP server with this feature, the programme files to be downloaded to the NSX server
must be named on the FTP server in a specific way that includes the version number.
Example: "PNT300_xxx_xxx_xxx"
("xxx_xxx_xxx" is the version number.)

Manual
Using manual operations, the location of updated PBX software is specified and downloaded to the Main
Unit, and then transferred to any Expansion Units.
To download programme files manually
1. In Location of program files, specify the location of the updated files from the Look in drop-down list.
The choices are as follows:
• Local PC
Click Browse and specify the location of the updated programme files stored on the PC logged in to
Web Maintenance Console.
• USB Memory
If a USB memory device is inserted into the PBX, the contents of the following directory on the
device will be checked for updated files:
/private/meigroup/psn/ippbx/update
• FTP Server
The PBX connects to the specified FTP server and checks for updated files. Specify an FTP server
from the FTP connection name drop-down list, and specify the number of attempts to connect to
the FTP server in No. of retries.
To specify a new FTP site, see 28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
• Master Unit
The most recent versions of files previously downloaded to the Main Unit are displayed.
• NAS
Specify the location of the updated programme files stored on a directory of the NAS to Web
Maintenance Console.
2. Specify which PBX programme files will be automatically downloaded by checking the boxes next to
each hardware item.
3. For FTP Server only
Click Check to confirm the connection to the FTP server. If a connection is established, the Execute
button will become active.
4. Click Execute, and then click OK on the confirmation message that appears. When the transfer is
complete, click OK.

Note
• If downloading cannot be completed within 10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other
connection problems), the download operation will be cancelled.

70 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

• The Main Unit’s FTP server function must be enabled for Expansion Units to download programme
files. See 28.2.2 Network Service—[2-3] Server Feature—FTP.

Automatic
The Main Unit is set to automatically check an FTP server for updated programme files. If an update is
available, the Main Unit will download the data. The downloaded software is then sent over the Multi-
Connection network from the Main Unit to all Expansion Units.
To download programme files automatically
1. For Download Server, select an FTP site.
To specify a new FTP site, see 28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP.
2. For Download mode, select one of the following:
• None: No actions are taken (automatic downloading is disabled).
• Check only: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been discovered.

Note
If Check only is selected, updated files will have to be downloaded manually (see the manual
procedure above).
• Download automatically: The specified download server is checked at the specified times. If
updated files are discovered, they will be downloaded automatically to the PBX. If an e-mail is entered
in Email notification, an e-mail notification is sent when updated files have been downloaded.
3. In Check time and date, specify when the PBX will contact the server to check for updates. The check
can be performed on a daily or weekly basis.
4. In Email notification specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive an e-mail notification when
updated files have been discovered or when updated files have been downloaded.

Note
If Download automatically is not selected in step 2, specify at least one e-mail address so that an
administrator will be notified when updated files have been discovered.
5. To begin automatic checking for updates according to Check time and date, click Execute.
6. The PBX will now periodically perform checks and downloads as specified in the settings. Click
Download Cancel on this screen to stop automatic programme updates.

Note
When the system is downloading data from an FTP server, if downloading cannot be completed within
10 minutes (due to slow network speeds or other connection problems), the download operation will be
cancelled.

5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

Once updated programme files have been downloaded and are stored on a PBX, they can be used to
update the system files of the PBX. The update process can be set to be automatically performed at a
specified time, or the update process can be carried out manually.
You must be connected to the PBX in On-line mode to update programme files.

Note
• Before updating programme files, we strongly recommend making a backup of all system files. For
details, refer to the following:

PC Programming Manual 71
5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File

– 6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

– 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup
• When the programme has been updated, the format of the system data is converted automatically to
the updated version.
• If the conversion of the system data fails during a programme update, the system can be recovered
as follows:
1. System is rolled back to previous version automatically.
2. Check the error log to confirm whether the system data conversion had failed. See 7.3.1 Utility—
Log—Error Log.
3. Convert backup system data using Bulk Administration Tool. See 1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool.
4. Update the programme and restart the system.
5. Transfer the converted system data to the PBX.
• When upgrading the firmware for the Unified Messaging (UM) Programme (PFAX), specify the MPR
card as the target hardware. The MPR card’s firmware will be updated at the same time. Be aware
that a system reset is necessary when doing the update.

For Program Update Type, select Immediately or Timed Update.

Immediately (Manual update)

Specify which cards or devices to update, and perform the update immediately.
1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Select the site to update from the drop-down list.
3. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
• When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click OK to continue.
• If you are updating the software for a PS, select the port of an IP-CS (e.g., KX-NS0154) that
supports this feature. For details about which PSs can be updated, see 5.1.3 System Control—
Program Update—Plug and Update.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click on another PBX site tab to programme another PBX in the Multi-Connection network as required,
and then repeat steps 1–3. Perform settings for each PBX in the Multi-Connection network as required.
6. Click Execute.
The programme files are updated to the specified PBXs.

Note
• Updated PBXs reset when the update is complete.
• If this operation is performed when logged in to an Expansion Unit only the PBX mother board and
hardware specifically registered to the Expansion Unit may be updated.

Timed Update (Automatic update)

Specify which cards or devices to update and a time to execute the update.

72 PC Programming Manual
 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

1. In Email notification, specify up to 2 e-mail addresses that will receive a notification when programme
files have been updated.
2. Select the site to update from the drop-down list.
3. Updated programme files that can be used to update cards or devices installed in the system are listed
in Available Program File(s). In Select the target to update, specify which cards or devices will be
updated using the files listed by checking the boxes next to each item.

Note
When selecting an item, a warning message may be displayed. Confirm the contents of the warning,
and then click OK to continue.
4. In Date, specify the date when the update will be executed.
5. In Update Time, specify the time of day when the update will be executed.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click on another PBX site tab to programme another PBX in the Multi-Connection network as required,
and then repeat steps 1–6. Perform settings for each PBX in the Multi-Connection network as required.
8. Click Execute.
The programme files will be updated to the specified PBXs at the specified time.

Note
• In a Multi-Connection network, the following processing is performed after you click Confirm:
1. If you are updating the PBX's software, the check boxes are checked for all sites where the
update will be applied.
2. A general check of the software version of all sites is performed.
• When updating the software of devices other than the PBX (i.e., terminal devices), individually select
the check boxes for sites where the update will be applied.
• All PBXs in a Multi-Connection network must be using the same version of the software. When
updating PBXs connected in a Multi-Connection network, note the following:
– To confirm the software version of each site, click Confirm. Major and minor software versions are
displayed as follows:
Software version: XXX.YYY
XXX = Major version
YYY = Minor version
– If all sites are the same software version, Apply is available and the settings will be applied for all
sites. If all sites are not the same software version, Apply is not available.
– When updating the programme files for multiple PBXs, an immediate (manual) update is
recommended. For Automatic (timed) updates, set the same time for all PBXs in the Multi-
Connection network.
• At most, the process of updating all PBXs in the network can take approximately 30 minutes to
complete.
• For CS programme files, in order for CS cards to be displayed on this screen, the cards must be set
to INS, and the ports of the card must be set to OUS.

5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

The Plug and Update feature allows IP-PTs, IP-CSs, and certain PSs to be automatically updated to the
latest software version when they are registered to the PBX. When Plug and Update is enabled, the version
number of the system software stored on the Main Unit is compared to the system software currently in the

PC Programming Manual 73
5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update

device, after the device has been registered to the PBX. If the software on the Main Unit is newer, it is
downloaded to the device. In a Multi-Connection network, Plug and Update can be enabled for each type of
device on a per-site basis. Manual update can also be enabled for PSs.
The Plug and Update screen lists the PBXs in the Multi-Connection network by site number and site name.
By default, Plug and Update is set to Off for all sites and device types.
1. For each site and device type, select On for the features you want to enable.
• Plug & Update for IP-PT/IP-CS: Enable Plug and Update for IP-PTs and IP-CSs.
• Plug & Update for TCAx85: Enable Plug and Update for supported PSs.
• Manual Update for TCAx85: Enable manual updates for supported PSs.
2. Click OK.

Note
• Plug & Update for TCAx85 and Manual Update for TCAx85 cannot be set to enable at the same
time.
• The following PSs support this feature:
– KX-TCA185
– KX-TCA285
– KX-TCA385

74 PC Programming Manual
 5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2 System Control—MOH

5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
Sound files on the programmer’s PC can be installed to each PBX for use as Music on Hold (MOH).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and select a WAV file to install as an MOH file. Only one file may be installed at a time.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will install the sound file as an MOH file.
3. As uploading the file to the PBX may require some time, a time can be set in Time Set.
4. In BGM/MOH No., specify which BGM number the MOH file will occupy.
5. Click Execute to confirm the settings. An installation report for each site will be displayed when the
installation is finished. If "Now" is set for Time Set, the installation will begin at this time.

Note
• Users logged in to the Main Unit can see the status of all Multi-connection network sites. Users
logged in to an Expansion Unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Only WAV files can be installed, and file names must not exceed 57 characters in length (including
the file extension ".wav"). If non-alphabetic characters are used, the file name must not exceed 14
characters in length.
• Some language codes for file names are not supported, and file names may not display correctly after
they are installed on the PBX. To ensure proper display, use only the ASCII character set for file
names.
• Files may not be larger than 80 MB in size.
• For a KX-NS300 PBX Expansion Unit, only 2 sound files can be installed for the site.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete

MOH files that are occupying BGM numbers can be deleted.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. In BGM/MOH No., specify the BGM numbers to delete MOH files from. Specify "All" to delete the data
saved in all BGM numbers.
2. In the Select column, specify which PBX sites will delete MOH files from the specified BGM numbers.
3. Click Execute to delete the files of the specified BGM numbers.

Note
• Users logged in to the Main Unit can see the status of all Multi-connection network sites. Users
logged in to an Expansion Unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

MOH files stored on a PBX can be downloaded to the user’s PC.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. From Site No., select a PBX from which to download MOH files.

PC Programming Manual 75
5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup

2. The MOH files saved to the PBX will be listed. Click Backup for the file you would like to back up. One
file can be backed up at a time.
3. A save file dialogue will appear. Specify the directory on the PC to back up the file to.
4. Click OK when finished.

Note
• Users logged in to the Main Unit can see the status of all Multi-connection network sites. Users
logged in to an Expansion Unit may only view the status of that PBX.
• Remained Capacity Time indicates the amount of time available for new MOH files to be added. The
amount of time of any MOH files scheduled to be uploaded in 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
is not reflected in this value.
• User (User) level accounts cannot perform this procedure.

76 PC Programming Manual
 5.3 System Control—FAX Card

5.3 System Control—FAX Card

This function is used to restart the optional FAX Card after it is installed in the PBX. For details about
installing the FAX Card, refer to the Installation Manual for KX-NS1000.
To Reset Fax card of all KX-NS1000 that is connected to KX-NSX1000/2000, as follows:
1. Click Execute.
2. Click OK.
3. The card is restarted and a confirmation message is displayed. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 77
5.4 System Control—System Reset

5.4 System Control—System Reset

When programming changes or other changes to PBX settings require a system reset, this command allows
a reset to be performed remotely from Web Maintenance Console.
When the system is reset, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup should be
performed before the reset to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be performed if settings
or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup would overwrite the
imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

[Manual System Reset]

1. Select the System Reset tab.
2. Select a site at Select Site (select All Sites or a specific site number and name).
3. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
4. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will be reset after the backup has been
performed.
• Skip: The system is reset without performing a backup.
In System Data File Selection, you can select which system data files are loaded when the system is
reset from the following:
– Current File: load the current system data file.
– Backup File: load an automatic backup data file. Click Select to show a file dialogue box, and select
the system data file to load.
If you are logged in to the PBX that is reset using this command, it is necessary to re-log in to Web
Maintenance Console to continue programming.

[System Reset by Timed Schedule]

1. Select the Timed Reset tab.
2. Select a site at Select Site (select All Sites or a specific site number and name).
3. Select the Reset Mode (None, One Time, One Time (KX-NT only), Daily*1).
4. Set the Reset Time (00:00-23:59).
5. Click Apply or OK to set the system reset.
*1 If Backup File in System Data File Selection is selected, Daily cannot be selected.
The specified site will have its system reset at the specified mode and reset time, according to the above
settings.

78 PC Programming Manual
 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

5.5 System Control—System Shutdown

In order to turn off the power to a PBX, it must first be issued a shutdown command using Web Maintenance
Console. Follow the procedure below to prepare a PBX for system shutdown.
When the system is shut down, any settings not saved to the Storage Memory Card are lost. A backup
should be performed before the shutdown to ensure no data is lost. However, a backup should not be
performed if settings or data have recently been imported into the system, because performing a backup
would overwrite the imported data with the current PBX settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Select the PBX site(s) to shut down in the Select Site drop-down menu.
2. Confirm the contents of the displayed warning message.
3. Click Backup or Skip according to the system’s status:
• Backup: Click to backup system settings. The system will prepare for shutdown after the backup
has been performed.
• Skip: The system is prepared for shutdown without performing a backup.
4. The STATUS LED on the front of the PBX will flash amber. When shutdown preparations are
completed, the STATUS LED will stop flashing and remain a solid amber. Once the STATUS, BATT
ALARM, and SYSTEM MODE LEDs light in amber, red, and amber respectively, you may turn off the
power switch on the back of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 79
5.6 System Control—Hot Standby

5.6 System Control—Hot Standby

Settings for the Hot Standby feature can be programmed.
For details about the Hot Standby feature, see 6.7 Hot Standby in Installation Manual.

Configuration
Name Description Value Range Links
Specifies whether enable to Hot
Hot Standby Mode Enable, Disable
Standby feature.
Specifies the setup position of the NSX
Setup Position server (Primary server or Secondary Primary, Secondary
server).
Specifies the MPR-ID for the other
MPR-ID for Primary / NSX server (e.g., if Setup Position is Max 19 characters. (xxxx-
MPR-ID for Secondary set to Primary, specifies the MPR-ID xxxx-xxxx-xxxx)
of the Secondary server.)
Virtual IP Address Specifies the virtual IP address. 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Specifies the keep alive method
Keep Alive Method between the Primary server and the Unicast, Multicast
Secondary server.
Specifies the IP address for the other
IP Address for Primary /
NSX server.
IP Address for 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
This setting must be set, when Unicast
Secondary
is selected for Keep Alive Method.
Specifies the length of time that one
NSX server will continue to consider
the other NSX server to be alive, even
if it receives no transmissions from the
System Failure other NSX server. If no
1s–180s
Detection Time communications are received from the
other NSX server for the duration
specified here, the first NSX server
considers the other NSX server to be
off-line.
Specifies the length of time that the
NSX server will wait after it has
System Recovery
restarted to reconnect to the other NSX 1s–180s
Detection Time
server, before it considers the other
server to be off-line.
Specifies the keep-alive monitoring
Alive Check Interval 1s–30s
interval.
IP address of HA (LAN3 Specifies the IP address for the LAN3
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
port) for Primary port of the primary server.
IP address of HA (LAN3 Specifies the IP address for the LAN3
1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
port) for Secondary port of the secondary server.

80 PC Programming Manual
 5.6 System Control—Hot Standby

Name Description Value Range Links

0–255.0-255.0-255.0–255
Subnet Mask of HA Specifies the subnet mask for the
(except 0.0.0.0 and
(LAN3 port) LAN3 port of the NSX server.
255.255.255.255)

Command
Data transfer can be controlled as follows:
Clicking Data Transfer Start starts transferring data.
Clicking Data Transfer Stop stops transferring data.
Clicking Execute switches the statuses of the NSX servers from Active to Standby and from Standby to
Active.
Name Description Value Range Links
None,
Available (Sender),
Data Transfer Status Specifies the status of data transfer. Available (Receiver),
Executing,
Suspended

Data Sync
The settings for data synchronisation can be programmed.
Clicking the Test LAN3 button measures the throughput between the LAN3 ports of the NSX servers
(primary and secondary).
Name Description Value Range Links
Check the checkbox of the data to be
synchronised. The types of data that
can be synchronised are as follows:
• PBX System Data

Data to be
• PBX System Files
On, Off
synchronised • UM System Guidance
• UM Mailbox Data
• SMDR / CDR / Charge Record /
ACD Report
• MOH / OGM
Displays the throughput required to the
synchronisation of data.
If a sufficient communication bandwidth
Estimated Throughput is not available between the primary
PBX and the secondary PBX, disable
this setting to reduce the amount of
data to be synchronised.
Specifies whether to resume the data
Automatic Recovery synchronisation in the time of day
from "Suspended" when users do not use any services Enable, Disable
status after the data synchronisation is
suspended.

PC Programming Manual 81
5.6 System Control—Hot Standby

82 PC Programming Manual
 Section 6
Tool

This section serves as reference for the Tool menu of

the Maintenance screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 83
6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1 Tool—System Data Backup

6.1.1 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to USB
A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a USB memory device inserted into the PBX’s USB port. At a
later time, the USB memory device can be used to restore the backed up system data to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a USB memory device

1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX.

Note
• To check the inserted USB memory’s status, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment Status—USB.
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX. For details, refer to "4.5
Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for USB Memory Device—Using a USB memory
device" in the Installation Manual.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
• Activation Key
Activation key files that were installed on the PBX are backed up.
Any or all of the above items may be selected. However, the system cannot be restored unless System
Data is specified.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the USB memory device,
it will be deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A time estimation for the backup will be displayed. Click Continue.
5. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.8 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Use a USB memory device with a capacity of at least 512 MB. During the backup process, if an error
message is displayed indicating there is not enough free memory space on the USB memory device,
delete other unnecessary files on the USB memory device, or use a USB memory device with a larger
capacity.

Restoring backed up data from a USB memory device to a PBX

Follow the procedure below to restore the backed up data to a PBX.

Note
The restoration process first requires an initialisation of the PBX, which returns the PBX to its factory
default state. Under the following conditions, restoration may not be possible, even though the PBX has
been initialised.
• The USB memory device hardware is faulty.

84 PC Programming Manual
 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

• The data on the USB memory device has become corrupted.

• The USB memory device is removed from the USB port of the PBX during the restoration process.
To minimise the potential of a failed backup, connect the USB memory device to a PC to confirm the
USB memory device is operational and that the backup data is intact before starting this restore
process.
1. The PBX must be in a powered-off state.
2. Insert the USB memory device with the backup data into the USB port of the PBX.
3. Set the PBX’s System Mode Switch to the "SYSTEM INITIALIZE" position.
4. Turn on the PBX’s power switch. The STATUS indicator will flash green. Slide the System Mode Switch
back to the "NORMAL" position. The restore process will begin and the STATUS indicator will flash
rapidly.
5. When the restoration process is completed, the PBX will restart automatically.

6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS

A PBX’s system data can be backed up to a NAS (Network Attached Storage) in the PBX’s LAN network.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To back up the system data to a NAS

1. Connect a NAS and PBX.
Set the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the PBX (IP address of the NAS, etc.), and then
confirm the connection. See 28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS.
2. Select the system data items to backup.
• System Data
System data includes programming information for the PBX, including extension and network
configuration information.
• MOH + OGM
MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Message) sound files stored on the PBX are backed up.
3. Click Execute to back up the specified files. If backup data already exists on the NAS, it will be
deleted. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click Continue.
4. A progress bar is displayed to indicate the progress of the backup. A message will be displayed when
the backup is finished. Click OK.

Note
• Unified Messaging (UM) data must be backed up using a separate process. See 6.8 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
• Data backed up from the PBX to a NAS cannot be restored directly from the NAS to the PBX. The
backup data must be copied from the NAS to a local PC. Then the data can be restored from the local
PC to the PBX.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
• When using a NAS, select the protocol NFS (Ver. 4 only) or CIFS. For more information, refer to
"28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS".
• Since it is necessary to send large amounts of data to the NAS when using the data backup feature,
we recommend setting up a NAS at each site.

PC Programming Manual 85
6.1.3 Tool—System Data Backup—Auto Backup

PC Programming Manual References

28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

6.1.3 Tool—System Data Backup—Auto Backup

A PBX's system data can be backed up automatically to internal storage, a USB memory device, or a NAS
(Network Attached Storage).
When saving to internal storage, up to 30 system data files can be backed up. When saving to a USB
memory device or a NAS, as much system data can be backed up as the capacity of the device will allow.
The automatic backup can back up only system data.
To reset the system by specifying the auto backup system file, see 5.4 System Control—System Reset.
To enable automatic backup
1. Select Enable from the Auto Backup drop-down list.
2. In Backup Time, specify the date to start the automatic backup.
3. In Backup Storage, select the storage device where you want to save backup files.
• Internal Storage (Max 30 files of DxSYS backup)
• USB Memory (Unlimited)
– Insert a USB memory device into the USB port of the PBX in advance.

Note
• To check the status of the inserted USB memory device, see 4.1.5 Status—Equipment
Status—USB.
• The USB memory device must be compatible for use with the PBX.
For details, refer to "4.5 Connection of Peripherals—USB Interface for USB Memory Device
—Using a USB memory device" in the Installation Manual.
• NAS (Unlimited)
– Connect the NAS and PBX in advance. Set the parameters necessary to connect the NAS to the
PBX (IP address of the NAS, etc.), and then confirm the connection. See 28.4.2 Network Service
—[4-2] Other—NAS.
4. In Backup File Prefix, specifies the name for backup file. (Max 8 characters.)
– Backup file is named as this name (default: "DNSYS1K" or "DNSYS2K") + "_YYYYMMDDHHMM".
(YYYYMMDDHHMM indicates the date and time of the automatic backup.)
5. In case of storage capacity is full (for USB Memory / NAS), select which action to take if the
storage device (a USB memory device or a NAS) does not have enough available space.
• Overwrite: Deleting the oldest backup file, and then start to back up the data.
• Alarm: Cancel the backup, and record the error code.
6. Click OK.

86 PC Programming Manual
 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI Mode, on
the Network tab of the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
screen.

Note
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details, see
2.1.6 Card Status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Cancel to return to the previous screen without saving.
To configure the BRI card
1. In Check, select the card, and then click OK.
2. Click Execute.
The results of the automatic configuration will be displayed.
3. Click the Check Box cell for the ports that have been configured.
4. Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.

PC Programming Manual 87
6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

6.3 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group

Allows you to automatically configure settings in 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering
Plan—Quick Dial and 8.4 Users—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by
pressing " 0".

To activate this tool

1. When this tree menu item is selected, a confirmation screen will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
The Group Call Pickup feature number (default: 40) + the extension user group number of the
extension is assigned to first personal speed dial.

Note
This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met:
– The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to " 0".
– " 0" is not used for another feature number.
– The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned.
– The Personal Speed Dialling feature number has been assigned.
– The extension user group number does not exceed the highest Call Pickup Group number.

88 PC Programming Manual
 6.4 Tool—Extension List View

6.4 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information
according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Site, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word
searching feature.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail
Intercom Wired Extension
Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
SIP/IP-PT SIP/IP-PT Extension
IP Doorphone/Camera IP Doorphone / IP camera terminal
UM Unified Messaging
ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group
PS Ring Group Portable Station Ring Group
Pager External Pager
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS
UM Group Unified Messaging Group

PC Programming Manual 89
6.5 Tool—Import

6.5 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
V-IPGW GW Settings, V-IPGW DN to Gateway, V-SIPGW Settings, V-SIPGW Provider and PS Registration
menus are only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using
the Export tool (see 6.6 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported file types
cannot be opened.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan, it is possible to edit the CSV file directly using an appropriate
editor, before importing.

Note
You can import only a CSV file that was exported with all items.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool are as follows:

User Container
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 8.1 Users—User Container

Feature - Speed Dial & Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Verification Code
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

90 PC Programming Manual
 6.5 Tool—Import

Related programming: 16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

Quick Dial*
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Select import Quick Dial Table origination "Basic Memory" or "Tenant 1-128."
Related programming: 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
*: Refer to 6.5 Tool—Import below.

SIP Extension*
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Extension Number cannot be imported.

Related programming: 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port
Property
*: Refer to 6.5 Tool—Import below.

V-IPGW GW Settings
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port

Property—DN to Gateway—GW Settings–Main

V-IPGW DN to Gateway
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port

Property—DN to Gateway

V-SIPGW Settings
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port

Property

V-SIPGW Provider
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

PC Programming Manual 91
6.5 Tool—Import

Related programming: 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port

Property

PS Registration
Data Type Import Destination
(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Note
Before importing PS registration settings, be sure to de-register any PSs already registered to the
KX-NSX1000/2000 PBX.

To import system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click OK to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. Click OK to perform the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error
message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being
imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

92 PC Programming Manual
 6.6 Tool—Export

6.6 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see
6.5 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files.
V-IPGW GW Settings, V-IPGW DN to Gateway, V-SIPGW Settings, V-SIPGW Provider and PS Registration
menus are only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in List
Separator, found in the Windows Control Panel’s "Regional Options".

To export system data

1. From the Tool tree menu, select Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Click OK.
• In the Feature - Speed Dial & Caller ID menu, select which Speed Dial Table to export ("System
(default)" or "All Tenants"), before you click OK.
• In the Quick Dial menu, select which Quick Dial Table to export ("Basic Memory" or "Tenant 1-128"),
before you click OK.
3. If a message window is displayed, click OK.
4. In the file selection screen, select the Save check box, and then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 93
6.7 Tool—Screen Customise

6.7 Tool—Screen Customise

Allows you to specify which Setup and Maintenance screens can be accessed in the User (Administrator) or
User (Sub-Administrator) account level.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed in the tree menus of Web Maintenance Console to users with the
User (Administrator) or User (Sub-Administrator) account level.

To modify displayed screens

1. Select the tab to modify.
• Select the Setup or Maintenance tab to customise the screen for User (Administrator).
• Select the Sub-Administrator tab to customise the screen for User (Sub-Administrator).
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

94 PC Programming Manual
 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup

6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup

The UM Data Backup tool can be used to backup and restore Unified Messaging (UM) data.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following voice data can be backed up or restored as individual files. The data can be backed up to a
USB memory device connected to the PBX or a NAS.
a. System Prompts
– Installed Prompts
– Custom Service Menu
– Company Name
– Company Greetings
– System Mailbox Group Voice Label
– System Caller Name
– Prompt Selection
– Hold Announce Menu
b. Mailbox Prompts
– Owner Name
– Personal Greetings
– Personal Caller ID Name
– Interview
– Personal Group List Name
– EMD List Member Name
c. Mailbox Messages

Note
Mailbox data may not be backed up if the mailbox is in use during the backup process. Additionally,
Unified Messaging system response time may be affected when backing up data. For these reasons, we
recommend backing up data when the Unified Messaging system is not in use.
Use only the ASCII character set for directory/file names.
The UM Data Backup tool can be executed manually or scheduled to run automatically at regular intervals.
Refer to the following:
• 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup

Use this procedure to manually back up Unified Messaging system data. For details on the items that can
be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup.
1. To back up system prompts, select the check box next to System Prompts and select the check boxes
of the items you want to back up.
2. To back up mailbox prompts, select the check box next to Mailbox Prompts and select which prompts
to back up.
3. To back up the prompts for specific mailboxes, click Mailbox Prompts to open the mailbox list. Check
the top checkbox to select all mailboxes, or select the mailboxes for which you wish to back up
prompts, then click OK.

PC Programming Manual 95
6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

4. To back up mailbox messages, check the box next to Mailbox Messages button and click Mailbox
Messages to open the mailbox list. Select the top check box to select all mailboxes, or select the
mailboxes you wish to back up, and then click OK.
5. Select the destination for the backed up data:
• Local PC: After the backup is started, a file download will begin in your web browser. Specify a
location on your local PC to save the backup data.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit): Back up the data to a USB memory device connected to the Main
Unit PBX. When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the USB memory device for saving the backup data.

Note
Before selecting this option, make sure that a USB memory device is connected to the Main Unit
PBX.
• NAS: Back up the data to a NAS. When NAS is selected, a folder selection menu becomes active.
Specify a folder on the NAS for saving the backup data.
6. Click OK to start the backup.

Note
• The system will prepare the data to be backed up, and the backup will begin about 30 seconds later.
The time needed to backup the data will vary depending on the communication speed and the
amount of data that is being backed up.
• Deleted messages will not be backed up when backing up Mailbox Messages.
• To back up the Unified Messaging data of an Expansion Unit in a Multi-connection network, log in to
the Expansion Unit and perform the backup operation from the Expansion Unit.
• When Local PC is selected, individual messages that are larger than 100 MB cannot be backed up.
• Depending on your browser or your browser’s settings, a prompt may appear during the backup for
each file to be downloaded. Be sure to select an action for each prompt that appears.

6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

You can schedule backups in advance. The Unified Messaging system will automatically back up the
selected data at the scheduled times to a USB memory device connected to the PBX. (Scheduled backups
cannot be made to a local PC.) For details on the items that can be backed up, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data
Backup.
Follow the procedure below to schedule an automatic backup.
1. Click to create a new scheduled backup.
2. Enter a description for the backup (MAX. 32 characters).
3. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day when the backup should take place.
4. Check the desired item(s) to backup.
5. Click Edit next to Mailbox Prompts.
6. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup.
a. Click OK.
7. Click Edit next to Mailbox Messages.
a. Check either All Mailboxes or select the mailboxes you wish to backup. You can also specify the
following backup conditions:

96 PC Programming Manual
 6.8.2 Tool—UM Data Backup—Scheduled Backup

• Retention Days: Back up only messages that have been stored on the system for at least the
number of days specified (1-30 days, or None).
• Remaining mailbox Capacity (min): Only perform a backup if the remaining mailbox capacity
has reached the specified amount (1-60 min, or None).
• Delete After Backup: Specify to delete messages that have been backed up from the mailbox.
• Message Type: Specify to back up all messages, or only messages marked as "old".

Note
An invalid combination of these settings may prevent a backup from occurring. For example, if a
mailbox is full, but there are no messages older than the number of days specified in Retention
Days, or no messages are marked as "old", the backup will not be performed.
8. In System Backup, specify the folder on the USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) or NAS where you want to
save the system backup file.
a. Click OK.
b. In Status, select Enable and click OK.

Note
• Up to 20 backup events can be scheduled.
• If a backup is scheduled, but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the
scheduled backup, the backup will not be performed.

Editing a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to edit.
2. Click Edit.
3. Edit the settings as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled backup

1. From the Scheduled Backup screen, select the backup you wish to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 97
6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore

6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore

Follow the procedure below to restore data backed up using the UM Data Backup tool.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
For more information about the UM Data Backup tool, see 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup. You can restore
data from a USB memory device connected to the PBX or from a file on your local PC.
1. Select the check boxes of the items to restore.
2. In System Restore, select Local PC or USB Flash Drive (Main Unit).
• Local PC
Click Browse and select a backup file from your local PC. The file must have been saved using the
UM Data Backup tool.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
When USB Flash Drive (Main Unit) is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify
the folder on the USB memory device where the backup data is saved.
• NAS
When NAS is selected, the folder selection menu becomes active. Specify the folder on the NAS
where the backup data is saved.

Note
Before selecting USB Flash Drive (Main Unit), make sure that the USB memory device with the
backup data is connected to the Main Unit PBX.
To restore a single file:
Files that match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a file in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display that
folder’s contents, and then click a file to select it.
To restore multiple files at once:
Folders whose contents match the selected types of items to restore will be highlighted.
Click a folder in the list to display its name in the text box. You can also click a folder name to display
that folder’s contents, and then click a folder to select it.

Note
When restoring data from a local PC, up to 40 files can be selected at one time. When there are a
large number of files to restore, they should be restored from the folder on the USB memory
device.
3. Click OK to restore the selected file or folder of files.
• Local PC
The results of the data restore will be downloaded from the PBX as a text file called
"UM_data_restore_result.txt". Save the file to your local PC to view its contents.
• USB Flash Drive (Main Unit)
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
USB memory device. To view this file, you must connect the USB memory device to a PC and then
open the text file.
• NAS
The results of the data restore will be saved in a text file called "UM_data_restore_result.txt" on the
NAS. To view this file, you must connect to the NAS and copy to a PC and then open the text file.

98 PC Programming Manual
 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore

Note
• When restoring multiple items, only files that match the items for which check boxes have been
selected will be restored. Also, even if data exists in the specified folder of the USB memory device,
the data will not be restored unless the check box of the matching item has been selected.
• Data in sub-folders of a selected folder will not be restored.
• If more than one file matches a selected item, the newest file will be restored.
• The following characters cannot be used in the names of the backup files: open bracket, close
bracket, space, forward slash ("/"), period ("."), or 0 (zero).
• The backup file names stored on the USB memory device should not be changed. If the file names
are changed, the system may not be able to detect which backup files correspond to which UM data
items.
• A backed up message cannot be restored to the subscriber’s mailbox if the mailbox still contains a
New/Old/Deleted copy of the same message.

PC Programming Manual 99
6.10 Tool—UM Backup History

6.10 Tool—UM Backup History

The following records for backup that have been performed can be checked on this screen:
• Description
• Parameters
• Completion Status
• Date & Time
• Total Elapsed Time (HH:MM:SS)
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

100 PC Programming Manual

 6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS

6.11 Tool—DXDP All OUS

Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously for the currently selected site.

To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS for the currently selected site
1. Access Tool—DXDP All OUS from the Maintenance Screen tree view.
2. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 101

6.12 Tool—Contact information

6.12 Tool—Contact information

Dealers can set contact information for the user of the PBX here. When users select this tree menu item,
this information will be displayed for the user’s reference.
1. Input the following information, and then click OK.
• Company Name
• Telephone Number
• Fax Number
• Address
• URL
• Email Address

102 PC Programming Manual

 6.13 Tool—URL Information

6.13 Tool—URL Information

The URL addresses for downloading the IMAP tool and the Fax Driver can be specified on this screen.
These URL addresses will be used for the Unified Messaging Plug in and Fax Driver Tool download
buttons displayed to users when they view the Unified Message tab of their profile in the User menu. For
details, see 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User.

Specify valid URL addresses for Unified Messaging Plug in and/or Fax Driver Tool, and then click OK.

6.14 Tool—P-SIP Option

You can export the root certificate to be used for internal call encryption.
For details about internal call encryption, see 5.2.7 Internal Call Encryption in Feature Manual.
To export the root certificate file, click Export.

PC Programming Manual 103

6.14 Tool—P-SIP Option

104 PC Programming Manual

 Section 7
Utility

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Utility menu of the Maintenance screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 105

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis

7.1 Utility—Diagnosis
7.1.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Card Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems.
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if they are
to be used again.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary
according to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are listed below.

Note
Tests marked with a "*" are available only for cards installed on a legacy gateway. For details, see
9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2. For more
information about cards installed in legacy gateways, refer to the documentation of the legacy gateway
PBX.

Test Type Available Cards

Local loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
SLC2, LCOT2, BRI4, PRI
Legacy Gateways:
DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, MCSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, CSIF, LCOT8,
LCOT16, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI2, BRI4, BRI8, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID
Card CT Bus diagnosis* DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16,
ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M,
DID
DTMF Receive test port KX-NS1000 PBXs:
SLC2
Legacy Gateways:
DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, MCSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16,
CSLC16, ECSLC24, MCSLC24, E&M, DID
PT loop back diagnosis* DHLC, DLC
DSP DTMF generator/receiver T1, E1
diagnosis*
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis* T1, E1
Framer IC alarm signal detection T1, E1, PRI
diagnosis*
Framer IC error detection diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
PRI
Legacy Gateways:
T1, E1, PRI
CS-INF loop back diagnosis* CSIF

106 PC Programming Manual

 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Test Type Available Cards

Super frame synchronization CSIF
diagnosis*
Caller ID card loop back diagnosis KX-NS1000 PBXs:
LCOT2
Legacy Gateways:
LCOT, ELCOT
Extension mode setting test BRI

To perform a card test

1. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
2. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
3. Select the Card Test option, and then click Execute.
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be shown on
the last line of the output.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Specify a save destination and file name.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Note
To run consecutive card tests on the BRI4 card, you must change the card’s status to INS, then OUS
again after running each test.

Network Loopback Test

Performs a remote loopback test on the PRI23 card.

Note
To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 9.27 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting to "Enable".

To perform a network loopback test

1. Select Point1 or Point2 depending on the type of loopback test you want to perform.
The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card.
2. Click Apply.
Preparation for the test is complete. The test will start automatically.
3. After the test is complete, select Release and click Apply.
4. Click Cancel to return to the Test Menu screen.

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping
Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address
across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

PC Programming Manual 107

7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

To perform a Ping test

1. Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.
2. Click Test to perform the test.
The result will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Ping screen.

108 PC Programming Manual

 7.2 Utility—File

7.2 Utility—File
7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
Copies PBX system data files from the connected PC to the SSD installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on
the SSD are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To install new main system data that has been copied to the PBX, use the System Reset utility (see
5.4 System Control—System Reset) for DNSYS files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains
supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred.
Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored on the SSD are as follows:

PCPF Configuration Data

File name: PCPFCONF

System Data
Name on SSD Corresponding Card
DNSYS Mother Board
DNSYS_R Mother Board*1

*1 DNSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DNSYS_R".

To transfer files to the SSD

1. The dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload, and click OK.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SSD, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header
information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. With a KX-NSX1000, when a DNSYS file from a KX-NSX2000 is imported to the KX-NSX1000, a
warning dialogue will be displayed. Click OK.
4. Click OK.

7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC

Copies system data files from the SSD or Storage Memory Card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

The files that can be downloaded from the SSD or Storage Memory Card are as follows:

System Data
File Name File Type
DNSYS, DCSYS, DFSYS System data

PC Programming Manual 109

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

File Name File Type

DNSYS_YYYYMMDDHHMM Auto backup system data
(default)
$SYSERR Error data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
Root_CERT_ExpnGW Expansion gateway's CA certificate
(Displayed when the selected site is an
expansion gateway)

• Downloading the DNSYS, DCSYS, DFSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the
configuration of the PBX.
• The file name of the auto-backup system data might be an alias. See 6.1.3 Tool—System Data Backup—
Auto Backup.
• The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major error
causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem. If there
is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files will be
numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.

To transfer files to the PC

1. Select the file to download from the list of files on the SSD or Storage Memory Card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an error
message to be displayed.
2. Click Transfer.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
• A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
• A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
6. Click OK.

7.2.3 Utility—File—File View

Displays a list of files on the SSD.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.
This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the SSD.
The effective date, IPCEMPR-ID, activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of
activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

To view information of programme and activation key files stored in the SSD
1. Click on the name of the desired programme or activation key file.
2. Click Detail. The Detail screen will be displayed. You can select different files from the File drop-down
menu to view the details for each file.
3. Activation key files can be deleted on the Detail screen. Follow the procedure below.
a. Click Delete.

110 PC Programming Manual

 7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

A confirmation screen will be displayed.

b. Click OK.

Note
The maximum number of files is 99. Therefore, we recommend deleting activation key files that have
expired.

7.2.4 Utility—File—File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the SSD.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The DNSYS system file cannot be deleted by this utility.

Note
Programme files cannot be deleted if the Program Update feature’s timed update is set, or if an update
is currently being performed. For details, see 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update
Program File.

To delete files from the SSD

1. Click on the file to be deleted.
2. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK.
The display will return to the File Delete screen.

7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the SSD.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.
Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary. If the location specified already contains an OGM, it
will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message.

To transfer OGMs to the SSD

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the destination to transfer the OGM files to from the drop-down list, and then click Browse.
The Open dialogue box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload. The files must be in the WAV format.
It is possible to select multiple files.

Note
• When selecting files to copy to the PBX, the file names (apart from the file extension) cannot be
more than 33 characters in length.
• When selecting G.711 codec WAV files to copy to the PBX, the total file size of all selected files
combined cannot exceed 32 megabytes.
4. Click OK.
• The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
• An index number (001 to 128) will be appended automatically to the file names of message files
transferred to the PBX.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 111

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the Storage Memory Card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level when programming in On-line mode.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.
4. Click OK.
• When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a
number appended to the file name corresponding to that message’s location on the SSD.
• When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

112 PC Programming Manual

 7.3 Utility—Log

7.3 Utility—Log
7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all
of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Save Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system, or result in
system failure.
Information Displays information log.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX. For details about the error code,
refer to the "Log Information" item in this table.
Sub Code SMDR:
The 10-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (BBBWXYYZZZ).
Web Maintenance Console:
The 7-digit sub code of the relevant hardware (WXYYZZZ). (The site number
of the PBX can be confirmed in the Site column of the Error Log.)
For information about the digits of the Sub Code, refer to table "Sub Code
Details" below.
Error Message A description of the error.
Log Information Clicking this button displays a list of errors and solutions in PDF format, as
shown below.

[Sample] List of Errors and Solutions

For each error code, the error message, probable cause, and solutions are explained.

PC Programming Manual 113

7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Sub Code Details

Sub Code Description
BBB Site ID
000–031
• Corresponds to site numbers of PBXs in the Multi-connection network (1 to
32)
W Slot Type
For physical slots (including physical slots of legacy gateway PBXs)
– " " (blank)
For virtual slots
– "*" (asterisk)
X Shelf Number
• – KX-NSX series or KX-NS series unit: 1
– Legacy gateway: 2–3
– Non-PBX process: 5
– Convert process: 6

114 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log

Sub Code Description

YY Slot Number
When X is not 5 or 6
Main unit:
• Physical shelf
– Mother board slot: 00
• Virtual shelf
– Virtual Trunk slots: 1–12
– Virtual Extension slots: 13–60
– Virtual IP-CS slots: 61–98

Expansion unit:
• Physical shelf
– Mother board slot: 00
– Regular slots: 01–07
• Expansion shelf
– STACK-S/EXP-S card: 00
– Optional physical service card slots: 01–11
• Virtual shelf
– Virtual Trunk slots: 1–16
– Virtual Extension slots: 17–36
– Virtual IP-CS slots: 37–52

When X is 5
YY: Process code

When X is 6
YY: Convert code
ZZZ Port Number
When X is not 5 or 6
ZZZ: Optional service card port number (001–XXX)

When X is 5
ZZZ: Process number (determined by each process)

When X is 6
ZZZ: Convert code

Note
• When there is no parameter for slot and port number, YY and ZZZ will be displayed as "000".
Example: Sub code for the mother board = "001 100000"
• Depending on the error code, the sub codes may be recorded with a configuration different from those
in the table above.

PC Programming Manual 115

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog

• For more information about Shelf Numbers and Slot Numbers for KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700
PBXs, refer to the PC Programming manual for each PBX.

7.3.2 Utility—Log—Syslog
Displays a log of system events. Each entry in the log includes the following information:
• Type: Describes the type of system event.
• Date: The date and time the system event occurred.
• Message: Details about the system event.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

7.3.3 Utility—Log—WEB Operation Log

The WEB Operation Log retains information about user interaction with Web Maintenance Console.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The items displayed on screen are as follows:
Item Description
Date The date of the event.
Time The time of the event.
User The account name of the user accessing Web Maintenance
Console.
Description A description of the action taken by the user. (i.e. "Login to Web-
MC")
IP Address The IP address of the PC used to access Web Maintenance
Console.

To save the event log as a text file

1. From the WEB Operation Log screen, select Save.
The Save dialogue box will be displayed.
2. Enter a file name.
3. Click Save.

To clear the event log

1. From the WEB Operation Log screen, select Clear.

Note
Users logged in to a Main Unit can see all events. Users logged in to an Expansion Unit can only view
the events for that unit.

7.3.4 Utility—Log—UM System Log

You can export a log of events from the Unified Messaging system for troubleshooting purposes.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click OK to export a UM System Log file.
2. Click Save to save the data to a local file.
3. Click OK.

116 PC Programming Manual

 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Collects and displays User Operation or Logical Partitioning Call Control Log information.
To show the following settings, select the item from the Type drop-down list.

User Operation
Item Description
Date The date on which the user performed the operation.
Time The time at which user performed the operation.
Information The user’s extension number is displayed.
Status Service-in/Service-out operation
"Service-in/Service-out" is displayed.
User remote (User Remote Operation/Walking COS/
Verification Code) operation
• If Verification Code is not used:
"attempted to use <Extension Number/Display Name>:
succeeded"
• If Verification Code is used:
"attempted to use <Verification Code>: succeeded"
Automatic Service-out operation
If the system fails to operate the automatic Service-out (because
the user is operating the device), the following status will be
displayed:
"Auto Service-out failed due to having an active call."

Logical Partition (Condition)

Item Description
Date The date on which the setting change of the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Time The time at which the setting change of the logical partitioning
feature occurred.
Information "Logical Partition" is displayed.
Status The new setting status of the following settings is displayed.
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property
—Main—Area ID for logical partition
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option
2—Applying logical partitioning

Logical Partition (Status)

Item Description
Date The date on which the call restriction event from the logical
partitioning feature occurred.
Time The time at which the call restriction event from the logical
partitioning feature occurred.

PC Programming Manual 117

7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log

Item Description
Function The call restriction types are as follows:
– CO call
– CO-CO call
– Conference call
Information The restricted extension number and/or trunk number is displayed.
If the restriction is between sites in a Multi-connection network, an
asterisk "*" is shown directly before the trunk or extension number
(e.g. EXTN100-*T256).
Status "Restricted (Logical Partitioning)" is displayed.

118 PC Programming Manual

 7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace

7.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace
7.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace
This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI or PRI cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target BRI or PRI card
be set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN cards, and 3 types of data can be downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second intervals. The
displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This trace
shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–32)
• Y: Shelf number (1–3)
– 1: KX-NS1000 physical shelf
– 2: Legacy Gateway 1
– 3: Legacy Gateway 2
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-IPGW Protocol Trace

This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW card.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode, and requires that the target V-IPGW card be
set to INS status.

To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card

1. From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to
the Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTH323").

To transfer trace data to the PC

1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 119

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.3 Utility—Monitor/Trace—V-SIPGW Protocol Trace

The trace data of protocol activity can be collected from the V-SIPGW card and saved to a PC using the
V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
This option requires that the target V-SIPGW card be set to INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to trace and file V-SIPGW card protocol activity:
To save trace data to the Storage Memory Card
1. From the tree menu, select V-SIPGW Protocol Trace.
When the progress bar disappears, the protocol trace is complete. The trace data has been saved to the
Storage Memory Card (file name: "PRTSIPC").
To transfer trace data to the PC
1. Click the File Transfer PBX to PC link to access the file transfer screen.
The list of files will be displayed.

Note
The file transfer screen can also be accessed from the tree menu (see 7.2.2 Utility—File—File
Transfer PBX to PC).
2. Select the desired trace data file.
3. Click Transfer.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
7. Click OK.

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor

7.4.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with air synchronisation. CSs receive data from
other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Current Sync CS information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows:

120 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor

Item Description
CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Shelf The shelf number (or Virtual for IP-CSs) of the CS that each CS is
currently synchronised with.
Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Port Port number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS / Repeater Indicates whether the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with is a
CS or Repeater.
CS Name Name of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
CS ID 12-digit ID number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.
Monitored Value Monitored value (dBm) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised
with.
Monitored Level Monitored level (signal strength level) of the CS that each CS is currently
synchronised with.
Error Rate Error Rate (%) of the CS for each CS that it is currently synchronised
with.

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the Air Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired Air Synchronisation
Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of air synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.
10. Click Save.
The dialogue box will close.

7.4.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group

This utility monitors the status of CSs being synchronised with LAN synchronisation (KX-NS0154 only). CSs
receive data from other CSs that they are currently synchronised with. Information is displayed for IP-CSs
that are in INS status.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.

The displayed items for each CS are as follows:

PC Programming Manual 121

7.4.4 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor

Item Description
Index A unique index for the CS. (This depends on the number of V-IPCS cards
and the number of connected CSs.)
Site The site to which the CS is connected.
Shelf Always displays "Virtual".
Slot The slot number of the CS in the selected synchronisation group.
Port The port number of the CS.
Connection The connection status of the CS (OUS/INS/Fault).
LAN Sync Status The current synchronisation status of the CS, as follows:
1. No Sync.: Attempting to establish synchronisation
2. Establishing Sync.: Establishing synchronisation
3. Good: Currently synchronised
4. Keep Sync.: Maintaining synchronisation
5. Unstable: The CS is running unsynchronised
6. Sync. Lost: Synchronisation has been lost
7. Out of system: Cannot communicate with the PBX
8. Sync. Master: CS is the sync master or is a slave acting as the sync
master
LAN Sync Quality Level Shows the quality of the synchronisation, depending on the value of LAN
Sync Status, as follows:
• 1, 7, 8: "–" is displayed.
• 6: The quality of the synchronisation before synchronisation was lost is
displayed.
• Other: A number indicating the quality of the synchronisation (-16384–
16384 ns).

To monitor the status of CSs

1. From the LAN Synchronisation Group Number drop-down list, select the desired LAN
Synchronisation Group number.
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start to monitor the status of LAN synchronisation.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the specified interval.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
5. To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
6. To collect the monitored data, click Start Capture.
7. Click Stop Capture to finish and save the monitored data.
A dialogue box will be displayed.
8. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
9. Enter a file name.

122 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

10. Click Save.

The dialogue box will close.

7.4.5 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Protocol Trace

This screen displays trace information for faxes sent and received by the PBX’s FAX Card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following information is recorded for each fax sent or received:
• Date/Time
• Status
• Mode
• Resolution
• Speed
• Remote Capacity
• Local Capacity
To save a copy of the recorded information, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

7.4.6 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Fax - Task sequence Trace

This screen displays a log of events related to fax activity.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
To save a copy of the log, click Save Trace and follow the prompts.

7.4.7 Utility—Monitor/Trace—UM System Trace (Internal)

Unified Messaging (UM) system processes can be monitored and logged.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following data can be traced and logged for each UM port, or all UM ports:
• DTMF / Dial: data regarding DTMF signals received by the Unified Messaging system.
• Guidance: guidance data that the Unified Messaging system played.
• Message: Unified Messaging system activity for messages such as creating, playing and deleting.
• Process Event: events occurred between Unified Messaging system processes such as Application, Call
Processor and DSP.
• Caller ID: received Caller ID information.
• DID: received DID numbers.
• PIN: PINs received by the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the steps below to monitor or log the system trace data.
1. Select Internal Trace, Display, or Trace Clear.
– Setting
1. Check Enable / Disable Trace Data.
2. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
3. Click OK.
– Display: Displays the trace data and/or error data.
1. Check the data and UM ports you wish to monitor.
2. To include error data, click the Error Trace tab and check Error Data.

PC Programming Manual 123

7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

3. Click OK.
4. The selected data will be displayed in a new window. Click the Trace Data or Error Trace tabs
to switch views. Click Save Log File to save a copy of the displayed data.
5. Click Cancel when finished.
– Trace Clear: Clears saved trace data.
1. Select the trace data to clear.
2. Click OK to clear the selected trace data.
3. The message "System Trace Clear Successful" will be displayed. Click OK to continue.

7.4.8 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of a T1 or E1 card that is installed in a legacy
gateway by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
This option is only available at the Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice versa will
be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.

To view signalling bit information

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–32)
• Y: Shelf number (2–3 [Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2])
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic screen
refresh.
3. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
4. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

7.4.9 Utility—Monitor/Trace—T1/E1 Line Trace

Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line
of a card installed in a legacy gateway. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data

1. From the Site-Shelf-Slot No. drop-down list, select the target slot. Each card will be preceded by the
pattern "X-Y-Z" as follows:
• X: Site number (1–32)
• Y: Shelf number (2–3 [Corresponding to Legacy Gateway 1 or 2])
• Z: Slot number (1–11)
2. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.

124 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Packet Trace

3. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data being
monitored changes.
4. Click Stop to end the trace.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information will be saved to the PC as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.

7.4.10 Utility—Monitor/Trace—Packet Trace

NSX server can monitor the packets of the Signalling and Media Stream features. The data saved in the
capture buffer can be manually saved as a snapshot. It can also be automatically saved if a trigger to
capture the packets has been specified. The target packets for signalling are IP packets of connected IP
extensions, IP trunks, expansion gateways, and IP-CSs. The target packets for Media Stream are
transmitted or received RTP packets.
This feature requires a system maintenance activation key. If the activation key has not been installed, this
screen will not open.
To view trace data
1. From the Type drop-down list, select the packet type.
2. In Monitor, select Enable to start the trace.
3. In Monitor, select Disable to end the trace.
4. Click Create Current Snapshot to save the trace information.
The snapshot file folder and the date and time of creation will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
• To select which types of logs trigger a snapshot, click Trap Settings.
• To delete snapshots, select the check boxes of the snapshots to delete in Snapshot file folder, and
then click Delete.
• To move to snapshots to a NAS, select the check boxes of the snapshots to delete in Snapshot file
folder, and then click Move to NAS.
• To move to snapshots to a USB device, select the check boxes of the snapshots to move in
Snapshot file folder, and then click Move to USB.
• To view snapshots, click File List View.

7.4.11 Utility—Monitor/Trace—IP Traffic Monitor

NSX server can monitor transmitted and received packets from designated extensions. The monitored
packets can include the Media Stream feature. The data saved in the capture buffer can be saved as a
snapshot to a NAS or a USB device. Designated FTP clients can view the snapshots.
This feature requires a system maintenance activation key. If the activation key has not been installed, this
screen will not open.
To view IP traffic
1. Enter a specific IP address in Target IP Address.
2. Select the check boxes of the IP addresses whose IP traffic you want to save.
3. In Save File to, select whether to save the IP traffic to a USB memory device or a NAS.

PC Programming Manual 125

7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage

4. In Monitor, select Enable to start the trace.

5. In Monitor, select Disable to end the trace.
6. Select an option:
• File Encryption: Select whether to encrypt the file.
• Include Media Stream: Select whether to capture Media Stream packets in the snapshots.
• External Tool: Enter the IP Address of a client using an external tool.

Note
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
• The IP traffic of up to 10 targets can be saved.

7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage

7.4.12.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Setting
The settings for the recording period of error logs of the NSX server system resources and the threshold
settings for each monitoring resource can be configured.
Clicking Email Notification will display the Email Notification screen. See 7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—
Alert.

Name Description Value Range

Error Logging Specifies the time interval for recording error logs. 1 hour–24 hour
Interval
DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the total DSP None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
Total resource usage rate. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
If None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.
DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
VoIP DSP resources allocated to VoIP calls (G.711). 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
If None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.
DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
Unified Message DSP resources allocated to the Unified Messaging 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
system.
If None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.
DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
Two-way DSP resources allocated to Two-way Recording. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
Recording If None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.
DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
Conference DSP resources allocated to conference trunks. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
trunks When None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.

126 PC Programming Manual

 7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage

Name Description Value Range

DSP Resource - Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
OGM DSP resources allocated to OGM. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
When None is selected, resource usage rate will not be
recorded.
SMDR Buffer Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of the None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
SMDR buffer. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
When None is selected, the usage rate will not be
recorded.
Hotel Billing Specifies the threshold for recording the usage rate of the None, 65%, 70%, 75%,
Buffer hotel billing buffer. 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%
If None is selected, the usage rate will not be recorded.

7.4.12.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Display

Displays the peak value of system resources for a single day or the last 7 days. Values from today to the
past 7 days in 24-hour blocks for each resource can be stored.

Name Description Value Range

Type of Resource Specifies which resource DSP Resource - Total,
information to display. If ACD DSP Resource - VoIP,
Report is enabled, Hotel DSP Resource - Unified Message,
Billing Buffer will not be DSP Resource - Two-way Recording,
available. DSP Resource - OGM,
DSP Resource - Conference trunks,
SMDR Buffer,
Hotel Billing Buffer
Site Selects a site. Registered sites
This setting is available only
when displaying the
information for DSP resources.
Time Period Specifies the time period to be 1 day: Shows the peak value of the
displayed. usage rate of every hour for a day.
Last 1 week: Shows the peak value of
the usage rate of every day for 7 days.
Date Specifies the date to be Date from today to the past 7 days
displayed.
This setting is available only
when 1 day is selected in
Time Period.

For DSP Resource

Name Description
Time Shows the time period at which the usage of resources is displayed (each hour
for a day).
Date Shows the date on which the usage of resources is displayed (the past 7 days).
Assigned Resource Shows the number of allocated DSP resources.

PC Programming Manual 127

7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage

Name Description
Free Resource Shows the number of free resources at peak time.
Total Resource Shows the total number of DSP resources.
Peak Value Shows the peak number of resources used in a 1-hour or 1-day period for the
specified resource.

For SMDR Buffer/Hotel Billing Buffer

Name Description
Time Shows the time period at which the usage of resources is displayed
(each hour for a day).
Date Shows the date on which the usage of resources is displayed (the past
7 days).
Total Capacity Shows the number of free resources available for use.
Peak Value Shows the peak number of resources used in 1 hour or 1 day.
Peak Rate (%) Shows the peak resource usage rate in 1 hour or 1 day.

128 PC Programming Manual

 7.5 Utility—Report

7.5 Utility—Report
7.5.1 Utility—Report—Digital Trunk Error Report
Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level in On-line mode.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time
period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the equipment
being used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Time Time of error
Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Trunk Error Logs
RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
logged in "Minor Error"
Log AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal
reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe Framing
Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Slot drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
2. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
3. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

7.5.2 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, V-IPEXT cards, and the DSP card.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.

PC Programming Manual 129

7.5.3 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information (Single IP node)

Item Description
Port No. Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card.
2. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
3. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
4. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

7.5.3 Utility—Report—IP Extension Statistical Information

(Single IP node)
Displays accumulated statistical information on IP-PTs, SIP phones, P-SIP extensions, and IP-CSs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
You can select the date from the past
30 days to today.
Hour The time the information was acquired.
Statistics are collected every hour.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

130 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

1. Select IP Terminal from the drop-down list of either Extension Number or MAC Address.
2. Specify the day in Date.
3. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Export if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
5. Click Close to return to the main screen.

7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Unified Messaging (UM) system reports can be generated in order to monitor voice mail operations. Reports
can be displayed on a PC, printed, or exported.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

To view a report
1. In the View Report tab, select the desired report from the Report Parameters drop-down list.
2. Specify a range of mailbox numbers in the From and To boxes, or click Select all mailboxes.
3. Click View Report.
Some reports can be viewed as a table or as a graph. For these reports, select "Table" or "Graph"
under View As before clicking View Report.

To export a report
A report can be printed from Web Maintenance Console or exported as a text file or CSV file.
1. When viewing a report, select Print Out (PC), Text, or Comma-separated values (CSV) from the
drop-down menu.
2. Click Export.
3. If you select Print Out (PC):
A print command is sent to the PC. Follow any prompts to print the report.
If you select Text or Comma-separated values (CSV):
A file save dialogue is displayed. Specify the folder to export the report file to.

To clear a report
For each report, all data can be cleared. Follow the steps below to clear all report data. Some reports can
also be set to automatically clear at specified times.
1. Select the Report Data Clear (Manual) tab.
2. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
3. Click Report Data Clear.

To automatically clear report data:

1. Select the Report Data Clear (Scheduled) tab.
2. Select Daily, Weekly, Monthly, or Yearly, and specify the time, the day of week or day of month, and
the month, as necessary.
3. Select the desired report from Report Parameters.
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 131

7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Note
For scheduling the Automatic Report Data Clear, if a day is specified that does not exist (i.e., February
31), the Automatic Report Data Clear will not be performed.

Unified Messaging System Reports

Report Type Description
Mailbox Information Report The mailbox information report displays configuration
parameters (from owner’s extension to e-mail options) for a
specified mailbox or a range of mailboxes. 50 records are
displayed at a time for this report.
Call Account Report*1 The call account report displays information about outgoing call
activity. Information can be shown by UM port or by mailbox.
The report includes date, starting time, used port, connection
time, called telephone number, call type, exit status of each
callout, total callouts number and the connection time for local or
long distance call, and total number of outgoing calls. 400
records are displayed at a time for this report.
UM Extn. Usage Report*1 The port usage report displays information about each UM port,
such as connection time and percentage of time which each UM
port was busy.
Memory Card Usage Report*1 The memory usage report indicates the amount of storage
space used and the amount of available space. Available space
is expressed in minutes. Information for the number of
messages stored in and deleted from the Unified Messaging
system is displayed.
Mailbox Usage Report*1 The mailbox usage report displays information for a specified
mailbox or range of mailboxes, including the number of recorded
messages, the total time of outgoing calls, external messages,
message notification, group message delivery, and number of
faxes received.
• Specify the mailboxes for which you want to display a report,
then click View Report.
• Items not marked as "current" are accumulated indications
since the last clearing of this report.
100 records are displayed at a time for this report.
Fax Transfer Report*1 The fax transfer report displays information about faxes received
by the Unified Messaging system and transferred to a fax
extension. It includes the fax reception date, the port number
used, and the fax transfer status for a maximum of 64 fax
messages.
Fax Server Report The fax server report displays the log of all sent and received
faxes. The report includes the user name or mailbox number
that sent or received the fax, number of pages of the fax
document, and the result of the fax transmission or reception.
Images of sent and received faxes can also be displayed.

132 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.5 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

Report Type Description

Call Handling Statistic Report*1 The call handling statistic report displays both a summary of and
details of Unified Messaging activity over a specified period of
time for the Automated Attendant service. This report includes
the total number of incoming calls, transferred calls, held calls,
calls which left a message, the result of transferred calls, etc.
Custom Service Report*1 The Custom Service report displays information such as Custom
Service settings, message recording status, number of access,
time of access, and number of access to each key.
Message Status Report The message status report provides the status of all messages
of specified subscribers, including faxes.
Subscriber Setup Report The subscriber setup report displays the basic settings (owner’s
name, password, personal greeting, etc.) for a specified mailbox
or range of mailboxes.
Security Information Report The security information report displays information about
mailbox accesses. The report includes the date of the last
change and last access, number of total accesses, login, and
failed accesses.
Hourly Statistics Report*1 The hourly statistics report displays information about the
number of incoming or outgoing calls, the connected time per
hour, etc.

*1 This report can be set to be automatically cleared according to scheduled settings.

7.5.5 Utility—Report—E-mail Report

A log of information about e-mail messages sent using the functions of the PBX can be viewed in the E-mail
Report.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The information in the report includes the following items for each e-mail message sent:
• User name under which the message was sent
• Unified Messaging mailbox number
• Time sent
• Destination e-mail address
• Sending status of the e-mail message

The maximum number of entries included in the report is as follows, depending on the type of the message:
• Voice mail or fax message notifications: 5,000 entries
• Missed call notifications: 1,000 entries
• Other e-mail messages (system messages, etc.): 1,000 entries

Note
Messages sent by the PBX, such as system alerts, will list the user as "System" and the mailbox
number as "—".

If these maximum amounts are exceeded, older records beyond the maximum amount for each type will be
deleted as new entries are recorded. To delete all e-mail report records, click Delete all E-mail report.

PC Programming Manual 133

7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Exporting the E-mail Report

1. Select an export format from the drop-down list.
2. Click Export.
3. A download dialogue for the e-mail report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the file to the
PC.

7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

7.5.6.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical
Information
Displays accumulated statistical information on the usage of wireless channels and air synchronisation of
IP-CSs.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
Available Channel (Max / Min / Maximum, minimum, and average number of available channels
Average) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Location Registration The number of successful, failed, and total location registrations
(OK / NG / Total) for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Outgoing Call (OK / The number of successful, failed, and total number of outgoing
NG / Total) calls made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of Incoming Call (OK / The number of successful, failed, and total number of incoming
NG / Total) calls received by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Number of etc. (OK / NG / Total) The number of successful, failed, and total number of other
transactions made by the CS for the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Change*1 The number of times the CS has changed its air synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Self Running*1 The number of times the CS has switched to self-running mode
in the previous 1 hour.
Air Sync Lost*1 The number of times the CS has lost synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.

*1 A dash is displayed if the selected CS is synchronised using LAN synchronisation.

To view IP-CS statistical information
1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want to view. Only
CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s CSID is displayed in CSID, and the statistics for the selected CS are displayed.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

134 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.6.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.6.2 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information

Displays accumulated statistical information on the performance of CSs being synchronised using LAN
synchronisation. On this screen, you can view the performance of wireless devices on the LAN, which is
useful for troubleshooting and determining whether the number of channels needs to be increased.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
Time The time the information was acquired. Statistics are collected
every hour.
IP Address The IP address of the selected CS.
Sync Change The number of times the CS has changed its synchronisation
destination in the previous 1 hour.
Sync Lost The number of times the CS has lost its synchronisation in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync The number of times the CS has switched to keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable The number of times handover has not been possible in the
previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been in keep sync in the
previous 1 hour.
H.O Unable Ratio (%) The percentage of time the CS has been unable to do handover
in the previous 1 hour.
Keep Sync Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been in keep sync.
H.O Unable Time The length of time in minutes the CS has been unable to do
handover.

PC Programming Manual 135

7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Short Term Diag The short term (within the previous 1 hour) diagnosis for LAN
synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to
delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.

136 PC Programming Manual

 7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information

Item Description
Long Term Diag The long term diagnosis for LAN synchronisation.
• Indeterminable: Status cannot be determined.
• Indeterminable (IGMP Querier not found): Status cannot be
determined because the IGMP querier could not be found.
• Under Diagnosis: Diagnosis is being performed.
• OK: Synchronisation is OK.
• Not OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is susceptible to jitter.
• Not OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is susceptible to
delay.
• Conditional OK (Signal Jitter): Synchronisation is OK, but jitter
is possible.
• Conditional OK (Signal delay): Synchronisation is OK, but
delay is possible.
• Out of Sync: Synchronisation cannot be established.
• Out of Sync (10base-T): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 10Base-T connection.
• Out of Sync (100base-TX half): Synchronisation cannot be
established on a 100Base-TX half-duplex connection.
• Out of Sync (IGMP Querier not found): Synchronisation
cannot be established because an IGMP querier could not be
found.

To view LAN synchronisation information

1. In the Target IP-CS: CS Name / MAC Address drop-down list, select the CS whose statistics you want
to view. Only CSs that support this feature are displayed in the drop-down list.
The selected CS’s MAC address is displayed in the text box, and the statistics for the selected CS are
displayed. The master CS’s name and MAC address are also displayed for reference.
2. To refresh the display with the latest statistics, click Refresh.

Note
You can view a list of disconnected calls at the CS by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link in the
upper-right corner of the screen. For details, see 7.5.6.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call
Disconnect Log.

7.5.6.3 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—PS Call Disconnect Log

Displays a list of PS calls that have been disconnected at the CS selected on the parent screen. This log
can be saved as a text file.
This screen can be accessed by clicking the "PS Call Disconnect Log" link on either the IP-CS Statistical
Information screen or the LAN Sync Information screen.
See 7.5.6.1 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information—IP-CS Statistical Information and 7.5.6.2 Utility—
Report—IP-CS Information—LAN Sync Information.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

The displayed items are as follows:

PC Programming Manual 137

7.5.7 Utility—Report—Expansion Gateway Keep Alive Information

Item Description
Index The entry’s index.
Date The date the call was disconnected.
Time The time the call was disconnected.
Error Message The reason the call was disconnected.
• Connection Error: There was an error in the connection.
Extension Number The extension number of the PS where the call was
disconnected.
PS-ID The ID of the PS where the call was disconnected.

To save the log

1. Click Save.
The log information of CSs that support this feature is saved.
2. A download dialogue for the call disconnect report will be displayed. Open the file to view it, or save the
file to the PC.

7.5.7 Utility—Report—Expansion Gateway Keep Alive

Information
Displays information about expansion gateway keep-alive requests for 1 week. This information includes the
following data for each hour:
• Number of times access to an expansion gateway was tried
• Number of times access to an expansion gateway succeeded
• Success ratio
The displayed items are as follows:
Item Description
Date The date the information was acquired.
You can select the date from the past 7
days to today.
Hour The time the information was acquired.
Statistics are collected every hour.
Keep Alive Ratio (%) The percentage of successful
expansion gateway keep-alive
requests in the previous 1 hour.

To view expansion gateway keep-alive information

1. From the Site ID: Name drop-down list, select the target site.
2. Select an option:
• Click Export if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
3. Click Close to return to the main screen.

138 PC Programming Manual

 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation

Activation keys for various features of the PBX can be installed using this screen. Activation key files are
copied from a PC to the PBX and activated. Use the below procedure to install activation key files to a PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Click Browse and specify the directory where the activation key files are stored, and click Open.
2. A list of activation key files stored in the specified directory is displayed. Check the boxes next to the
activation keys to install to the PBX, and click Install.
3. The activation keys will be copied to the Main Unit. When installation is complete, the message, "The
activation key has been installed and activated successfully!" is displayed.
4. Click OK.

Note
• You can click the provided link to directly access 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
—Activation Key Status to view activation key information and programme the number of activated
IP-GW trunks and IP softphones.

PC Programming Manual 139

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7 Utility—Email Notification

7.7.1 Utility—Email Notification—Alert
You can specify e-mail addresses that will receive messages regarding the PBX’s status.

System Alarm
An e-mail message will be sent to the specified address when there is a system alarm. The e-mail message
will contain details about the alarm.
1. For Filtering Setting, select the check boxes to specify whether to receive e-mails when there is a
Major alarm, a Minor alarm, or Information.
2. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive system alarm alert messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when there is a system alarm, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
3. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
4. Click OK when finished.
Licence Expiry
• Non-product licences with an expiration date
A notification e-mail will be sent to the specified addresses at midnight, 10 days before the activation key
expires if the PBX is turned on. If the PBX is started within 10 days of the activation key’s expiration, a
notification e-mail will be sent each time the PBX is started.
1. Specify one or two e-mail addresses that will receive expiry notice messages.
Notice
Be sure to enter e-mail addresses correctly. If an address is incorrectly entered, an alert will not be
received when activation keys are about to expire, or information regarding the PBX may be sent
unintentionally to a third party.
2. In Subject enter the text that will be used for the subject header of e-mails that are sent.
For Format—Message body type, select the check boxes to specify whether to include the subject in
the message body.
• Type1: Message body does not include the subject
• Type2: Message body includes the subject
3. Click OK when finished.

7.7.2 Utility—Email Notification—System Analysis

Send a specific log file to the designated e-mail address(es).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Check the Log File Type drop-down menu, select a log file to send to the e-mail address.

140 PC Programming Manual

 7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

2. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.

3. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
4. Click Execute and the mail will be sent at that time.

7.7.3 Utility—Email Notification—Test Email

Send a test e-mail to confirm e-mail sending settings are correctly configured.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
1. Enter up to 2 e-mail addresses in Email Address 1 and Email Address 2.
2. In Subject, enter text to be used as the subject line of the e-mail sent.
3. Click Execute. A test mail will be sent to the specified address(es).
Mail settings can be viewed and set in 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP.

PC Programming Manual 141

7.8 Utility—Command

7.8 Utility—Command
7.8.1 Utility—Command—UM Command
System commands can be sent directly to the Unified Messaging system using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

7.8.2 Utility—Command—Network command

Network commands can be sent directly to the built-in router using the Commands dialogue.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Follow the steps below to use the Commands dialogue:
1. Enter the desired command, then click RUN. Results from entered commands are displayed.
2. When finished, click Close.

Note
• Commands such as the following are always supported for the NSX server: ROUTE, NETSTAT, ARP,
DNSFLUSH. However, they are supported for the Expansion GW (KX-NS1000) only when the Built-in
Router function is enabled.
• Some examples of supported commands are as follows: ROUTE, NETSTAT, ARP, DNSFLUSH,
RMTSTOP.
• Commands such as the following are supported only for the NSX server's site: RMTSET, RMTSTART,
RMTSTAT.

142 PC Programming Manual

 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

The System Prompts customisation screen is used to view, play, add, or delete system prompts. The
programmer can also check the prompt number and text for these prompts.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
The following categories of system prompts can be customised from the System Prompts customisation
screen:
a. System Guidance
b. Custom Service Menus
c. Company Greetings
d. Other
– Company Name
– Language Select Menu
– Hold Announce Menu
– Mailbox Group List
– System Caller ID
To customise system prompts, select a tab in the System Prompts dialogue box.

Notice
The system prompts initially installed on the Storage Memory Card cannot be restored to their original
state by initialising or resetting the PBX; any changes made to the initially installed system prompts
cannot be undone. Before changing any system prompts, perform a backup of the initial system prompt
data. See 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup for details. Then, you can restore the system prompts to their
initial state by restoring the backup data. See 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore for details.

Deleting Prompts
The programmer is able to delete specified system prompts.
To delete a specific system prompt:
1. Select the cell for the desired prompt number.
2. Click Delete.

Recording System Prompts

1. Select the desired system prompt to record, and click Play/Record.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
a. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
b. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
d. Click Disconnect.
e. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a. Click Browse.
The Open dialogue box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:

PC Programming Manual 143

7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

– G.711 PCM codec

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open to import the file.
e. Click OK.

Starting and Stopping System Prompt Playback

1. Select the desired system prompts.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.

144 PC Programming Manual

 7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording

7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor
Setting
Specify the extensions of supervisors that will control the Automatic Two-way Recording feature for agent
extensions. These settings may be changed by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
To assign extensions as Supervisor, click Select Supervisor Extensions. (See 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting.)

7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting
Specify the Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervisor. These settings may be changed by
a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. From the Select a Supervisor drop-down list, select a supervisor (specified in 7.10.1 Utility—
Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting).
2. In UM Destination Mailbox specify the mailbox where the Automatic Two-way Recording data will be
sent. Select Add New Mailbox and specify a new mailbox number, or select an existing mailbox from
the Select Mailbox drop-down list.
3. In What type of calls to record, check the boxes to specify if internal calls, external calls, and/or calls
made to an incoming call distribution group will be recorded to the mailbox.
4. In Select User Extensions, click Add.
5. Select the check boxes for the agent extensions that the supervisor will control, and then click OK.
6. Click List View to confirm the current Automatic Two-way Recording settings for each supervised
extension.
7. Click OK when you have finished configuring settings and adding agent extensions for a supervisor.
Once these settings have been configured, supervisors can change settings for agent extensions they have
been assigned in 8.6.1 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a Recording.

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension

Setting List
In this list you can view the settings of extensions that are programmed to have calls recorded by the
Automatic Two-way Recording feature. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor,
UM Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension. These settings may be changed by a
programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. For an extension, select a setting for Internal Call, External Call, and ICDG Incoming Only. (See
below for details.)
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls from outside parties that are received through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.
3. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 145

7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List

The programming items displayed on this screen are as follows.

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 20 Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–
Number extension (reference only). characters 9)
First Name, Indicates the name of the extension
Last Name (reference only).
Internal Call Specifies whether intercom calls for the On, Off Feature Manual
extension will be automatically References
recorded. 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
Note
Calls between extensions that are
connected in a QSIG network are
seen as external calls, irrespective
of whether an activation key for
QSIG enhanced features is used.
To enable Automatic Two-way
Recording for this type of call, set
External Call to On.
External Call Specifies whether trunk calls for the On, Off Feature Manual
extension are automatically recorded. References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager
ICDG Specifies whether only trunk calls that On, Off Feature Manual
Incoming are received through an incoming call References
Only distribution group to the extension are 3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
automatically recorded. Recording for Manager
Note
External Call must be set to "On" to
set this item to "On".
Supervisor Indicates the extension designated as a Extension PC Programming Manual
supervisor that may play, delete, or number and References
confirm the information of two-way user name 7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-
recordings (reference only). way Recording—Supervisor
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

146 PC Programming Manual

 7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Mailbox Indicates the Unified Messaging Mailbox PC Programming Manual
Number mailbox where two-way recordings will number References
be stored (reference only). 7.10.2 Utility—Automatic Two-
way Recording—Extension
Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way
Recording for Manager

7.10.4 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Maintenance

Automatic Two-way Recording can be enabled or disabled, or set to record until a specified date and time
by a programmer with a User (Administrator) account.
1. To start Automatic Two-way Recording, click Start. The button will change to display Stop.
Two-way recording for all designated extensions will continue until one of the following occurs:
• The Stop button is clicked.
• The two-way recording time limit or memory capacity has been reached.
• The date and time set in Recording Period is reached.
2. To set a specific time when Automatic Two-way Recording will stop:
a. In Recording Period, select Yes for Setting.
b. In Date & Time, enter a year, month, day, hour, and minute. Click on the calendar and clock
numbers to select them.
c. Click OK.
3. To end Automatic Two-way Recording any time, click Stop.

PC Programming Manual 147

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

7.11 Utility—UM - System Maintenance

Programme settings for Unified Messaging (UM) system maintenance.

System Maintenance Mode

Specifies whether to enable or disable System Maintenance Mode.

System Maintenance Start Time

Specifies the System Maintenance start time.
After specifying the settings on this screen, click OK.

148 PC Programming Manual

 Section 8
Users/Supervisors/Maintenance Personnel

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Users, the Supervisors and the Maintenance
Personnel menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 149

8.1 Users—User Container

8.1 Users—User Container

Manage each user's devices (such as a wired extension, wireless extension, mobile device, and built-in
Unified Messaging mailbox) at the user-container level. User container information can be registered,
edited, or deleted in these settings.

Note
• For User (Administrator) accounts to change User (User) account settings, the Installer account must
use the Screen Customise tool to allow User (Administrator) accounts to view the Users—User
Container screen. For details, see 6.7 Tool—Screen Customise.
• A Sub-Administrator can add, edit, and delete only User (User) accounts that belong to user groups
that the Sub-Administrator is authorised to manage. For details about assigning user groups, See
11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.
• When a User (User) level account accesses this screen, he may view and edit items for his account
as explained in 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User. In addition, some advanced
settings are available for User (User) level accounts only. For details, see 29.1 Logging in to My
Portal .
The settings that can be changed in the User Profile List for each user are as follows:

Common
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user (max. 20 characters).
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user (max. 20 characters).
Extension No. Specifies the extension number associated with this user.
Extension numbers can be set in Extension Settings:
8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
Current User Displays the current type of user. If the user activation key has been activated,
the activated User Type will be displayed. If no activation key has been installed,
"None" will be displayed for the User Type, and the user will not be activated.
Sub Device No. Specifies the Sub Device No. of the user (0-5 digits).
The extension number set in Sub Device No. on the Add/Edit screen will be
displayed. If no extension number is set, this item will be left blank.
PS No. Specifies the PS No. of the user (0-5 digits).
The extension number set in PS number on the Add/Edit screen will be
displayed. If no extension number is set, this item will be left blank.

FWD
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user (max. 20 characters).
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user (max. 20 characters).
FWD setting - call from CO Mode Specifies the FWD setting for calls from trunks.
FWD setting - call from CO Specifies the FWD destination for calls from trunks.
Destination
FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD setting for calls from extensions.
Mode

150 PC Programming Manual

 8.1 Users—User Container

Item Description
FWD setting - call from Ext. Specifies the FWD destination for calls from extensions.
Destination
FWD No Answer Time (s) Select a FWD No Answer Time from the drop-down list.
Remote FWD COS Select a Remote FWD COS from the drop-down list.
Specifies which COS has privileges to change the extension's
FWD settings.

For settings and details for FWD items, refer to the following:
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
• 29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control
Security
Item Description
First Name Specifies the first name of the user (max. 20 characters).
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user (max. 20 characters).
User PIN / Mailbox Password Select a User PIN (Mailbox Password) Expiry Period (days) from
Expiry Period (days) the drop-down list.
My Portal Login Password Select a My Portal Login Password Expiry Period (days) from
Expiry Period (days) the drop-down list.

Option
Item Description
Rule of copy to extension name Determines how the First Name and Last Name set in User
Container is used for the Display Name of the following
settings.
8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

Customize MyPortal
Allows you to specify which My Portal screens can be accessed by users. Selected check boxes will be
displayed in the menu of My Portal. For more information about My Portal, refer to 29 My Portal.

User Controls
• Add Button/Add Single User Button
To add a user profile for a single extension, click the button or Add Single User button to open the Add
User Wizard. See 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User.
• Edit Button
To edit information on an individual user level, select a user from the list by clicking on the row of the user
to edit, then clicking the button to open the Add User Wizard with the selected user’s information filled
in. See 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User.
• Delete Button
To delete users:
1. Check the box(es) next to the user’s name(s) and click the button.
2. A confirmation message will appear. Click OK.
3. The user’s information is deleted from the list.

PC Programming Manual 151

8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

• Add Range Button/Add Multiple Users Button

To add multiple User Container for a range of extensions at one time, click the button or Add Multiple
Users button. See 8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users.
• Activate User Button
To Activate the registered users, click the Activate User button. For more information, see Activating
Users in 5.10 Configuration of Users in Installation Manual.

Note
• In order to edit the settings of the Unified Message tab by clicking the button, you must be logged
in to the PBX with the associated UM Group that your mailbox is assigned to. If you are logged in to a
PBX that is different from the PBX with the associated UM Group of your mailbox, the following items
will be greyed out:
– Prompt Registration
– Advanced setting
If these items are greyed out, click Direct Login to log in directly to the PBX associated with the UM
Group of your mailbox to make changes to these items.
• The , , and buttons are not visible for User (User) level accounts.

8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

The Add User/Edit User screen provides a method to create user accounts and establish PBX settings on
a per-user level. When adding a user, the following settings can be specified. This screen will also be
displayed with information already entered when editing an existing user.

Note
User (User) level accounts may access this screen to edit their account information, but only the items
marked with a "*".

User Information
Item Description
First Name*1 Specifies the first name of the user (max 20 characters).
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user (max 20 characters).
Display Name Displays the first name and the last name of the user (max 32 characters).
Extension Number Specifies Extension Number of the user (blank or 2-5 digits).*2
If Main Device—Type in Device Settings tab is ISDN Extension, you can add a
wild card ("X" or "XX") at the end of the setting value (e.g., 10XX, 20X, or 3XX).
Login ID*1 Set a login ID for the user (1-16 characters in length).
Password ["A-Z", "a- Set a password for the user (4-16 characters in length).
z", "0-9", "*", "#"]*1
Re-enter ["A-Z", "a- Re-enter the password for confirmation.
z", "0-9", "*", "#"]
User PIN / Mailbox Set a User PIN (Mailbox Password) for the user (max 8 characters in length).
Password ["0-9"]
Confirm new PIN Re-enter the User PIN(Mailbox Password) for confirmation.
["0-9"]

152 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

Item Description
WebMC Language Select the Web Maintenance Console language displayed for the user from the
drop-down list. Users may select different display languages without affecting
the display of other users.
Memo-1 Specifies the memo (max 64 characters).
Memo-2 Specifies the memo (max 64 characters).
Current User Displays the current type of user. If the user activation key has been activated,
the activated User Type will be displayed. If no activation key has been
installed, "None" will be displayed for the User Type, and the user will not be
activated.
Type of User Select a Type of User from the drop-down list.
Admin Capability Select a Admin Capability from the drop-down list.
User Group Select a User Group from the drop-down list. Sub-Administrators can select
only user group numbers that they are authorised to manage. See 11.2 PBX
Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.
Class of Service Select the COS for the user from the drop-down list.
(COS)

*1 Required item to set

*2 It is impossible to reset the extension number once registered.
The Display Name set on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• The Display Name is used as Extension Name for the user’s extension number.
The format of the extension name is determined by the setting in the User Container—Option tab:
– Rule-A: [First Name] [space] [Last Name]
– Rule-B: [Last Name] [,] [First Name]

Notice
If the length of the name copied to the Display Name is longer than the maximum number of
characters allowed for the setting, the letters at the end of the name exceeding the maximum will be
discarded.
• The First Name and Last Name are copied to the corresponding First Name and Last Name on the
following screen for the specified mailbox number.
C. 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters
• Changing the name settings in the Extension Settings or Mailbox Settings screens listed above will not
change the First Name or Last Name on this screen (the copying function is one-way).

Device Settings
Item Description
Main Device— Displays the extension number of the Main Device.
Number
Main Device—Type Specifies the Device Type of the Main Device.
Main Device—IP Displays the IP Address of the Main Device.
address
Sub Device—Number Specifies the extension number of the Sub Device (2-5 digits).
If Sub Device—Type in Device Settings tab is ISDN Extension, you can add a
wild card ("X" or "XX") at the end of the setting value (e.g., 10XX, 20X, or 3XX).

PC Programming Manual 153

8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

Item Description
Sub Device—Type Specifies the Device Type of the Sub Device.
Sub Device—Delayed Select a delayed ringing setting of the Sub Device from the dropdown list.
Ringing (s)
Sub Device—IP Specifies the IP Address of the Sub Device.
address
Portable Station— Specifies the extension number of the Portable Station (2-5 digits).If Sub
Number Device—Type in Device Settings tab is ISDN Extension, you can add a wild
card ("X" or "XX") at the end of the setting value (e.g., 10XX, 20X, or 3XX).
Portable Station— Specifies the Device Type of the Portable Station.
Status
Portable Station— Select a delayed ringing setting of the Portable Station from the dropdown list.
Delayed Ringing (s)
Mobile Phone— When the mobile phone started ringing by delayed ringing, ringing of the phone
When the mobile (Main/Sub/PS) will be terminated. To enable this function, select the Yes check
phone started ringing box.
by delayed ringing,
ringing of the phone
(Main / Sub / PS) will
be terminated.
Mobile Phone— Select a Quantity of Mobile devices from the dropdown list.
Quantity of Mobile
devices
Mobile Phone— Specifies the Phone-Number of the Mobile Phone (max. 32 digits). Up to 4
Number Numbers can be specified (#1–#4).
Mobile Phone—Line Select a Line Access Type for the Mobile Phone from the dropdown list. Up to
Access Type 4 Numbers can be specified (#1–#4).
Mobile Phone— Select a delayed ringing setting of the Mobile Phone from the dropdown list. Up
Delayed Ringing (s) to 4 Numbers can be specified (#1–#4).

Note
Delayed Ringing (s) is greyed out if Normal User or Mobile User is selected for Type of User.
If IP-PT is selected for Device—Type, the registered IP address is displayed in IP address.
Mobile Phone Number is greyed out if Normal User is selected for Type of User (User AK).

Contact
Item Description
Phone (Home)* Specifies the user’s home telephone phone number (max. 32 digits).
Phone (Mobile)* Specifies the user’s mobile telephone phone number (max. 32 digits).
Email 1–3* Specifies the user’s e-mail address(es) (max. 128 characters).

Notice
The e-mail addresses set for Email 1–3 on this screen are applied to system settings as follows.
• If Use for missed call notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the user will
receive an e-mail at the address(es) specified when a trunk call is missed.

154 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

• If Use for voice mail notification is checked when the Email 1–3 information is input, the input
address(es) are copied to the following setting. This process is one-way; changes to the below setting will
not change the information input on this screen.
– 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/
Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address

Unified Message
Item Description
Mailbox Number Enter the UM mailbox for the user.
Prompt Registration* Click Prompt Registration to open the User Prompt Registration screen. The
following prompts can be recorded in this screen:
• Owner Name
• Personal Greetings (No Answer, Busy, After Hour, Caller ID Greeting,
Temporary Greeting and Absent Message)
• Caller Information
• Interview Mailbox Questions
To record a prompt
Select a prompt number and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then
click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a system prompt.
4. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
1. Click Browse. The Open dialogue box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import.
3. Select the desired WAV file.
4. Click Open to import the file.
5. Click Upload.
6. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Play/Record.
3. Click Play or Stop.
4. Click OK.
To delete a specific prompt
1. Select the desired prompt.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 155

8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

Item Description
Advanced setting* Click to view the selected mailbox’s settings. See 20.1 UM Configuration—[1]
Mailbox Settings.

Note
When User (User) level accounts access these settings, additional items
are displayed. See 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail—Advanced Settings.
Unified Messaging Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
Plug in (UM IMAP site for the IMAP Session Controller software.
Session Controller
for Microsoft®
Outlook®)
Fax Driver Tool Click to open a new window in your Web browser and access the download
site for the Fax Driver software.

Telephony Feature
Item Description
Forward / Do Not Specifies whether to enable the user’s FWD/DND settings for trunk calls. To
Disturb—For external enable FWD, specify a value other than None for FWD Setting, and then
calls—Status select FWD On. To enable DND, specify Do Not Disturb for Do Not Disturb
Setting, and then select DND On.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD settings for trunk calls. For the FWD destination,
Disturb—For external Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in the Contact tab), or a
calls—FWD Setting manually input number (1-32 digits) can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user's DND settings for trunk calls.
Disturb—For external
calls—Do Not Disturb
Setting
Forward / Do Not Specifies whether to enable the user’s FWD/DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal To enable FWD, specify a value other than None for FWD Setting, and then
calls—Status select FWD On. To enable DND, specify Do Not Disturb for Do Not Disturb
Setting and then select DND On.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user’s FWD settings for extension calls. For the FWD destination,
Disturb—For internal Phone (Home) or Phone (Mobile) (as specified in the Contact tab), or a
calls—FWD Setting manually input number (1-32 digits) can be specified.
Forward / Do Not Specifies the user's DND settings for extension calls.
Disturb—For internal
calls—Do Not Disturb
Setting
Forward / Do Not Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before
Disturb—FWD No the call is forwarded.
Answer Time
Forward / Do Not Specifies the COS that allows the FWD setting on the extension to be changed
Disturb—Remote from another extension. This COS must then be set for the extensions that will
FWD COS remotely change the FWD setting.
Call Waiting Mode— Specifies Call Waiting Mode for trunk calls.
For external calls

156 PC Programming Manual

 8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users

Item Description
Call Waiting Mode— Specifies Call Waiting Mode for extension calls.
For internal calls
PT Display Language Selects the language shown on the displays of extensions.
Selection
Station Dial Lock Specifies whether to enable the use of the extension dial lock feature.
PT Display Lock Specifies whether to enable the use of the extension display lock feature.
Device in use (for Specifies which device to use when making or receiving a call from a CTI
CTI) client.
Speed Dialling View/ Click this button to open the Speed Dial screen. The appropriate screen (wired
Edit* extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
specified for the user. If you have not added the user yet by clicking Apply, this
item is inactive.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen. The appropriate screen
Edit for Wired (wired extension or portable station) will be opened according to the extension
Extension specified for the user. If you have not added the user yet by clicking Apply, this
item is inactive.
Flexible Button View/ Click this button to open the Flexible Button screen for portable station. The
Edit for PS appropriate screen will be opened according to the extension specified for the
user. If you have not added the user yet by clicking Apply, this item is inactive.

Note
If the user changes any of their own settings, they will be applied to the user the next time they log into
Web Maintenance Console.

8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users

The Add User—Multiple Users screen provides a method to create multiple User Container for a range of
extensions at one time.
1. In the From and Number of Users fields, specify the number of users to create profiles for.
2. Select Create User Container Data from other User template check box if you want to create User
Container Data from other User template. For more information about User template, refer to 2.29.1.2
Individual User Information Management of the Construction and Maintenance Personnel in the Feature
Manual.
3. If you choose to copy the other User Container Data, Select a User template from Select template drop
down list.
4. Click OK.
5. A confirmation message will be displayed. Confirm the massage, and then click OK to continue.
Settings automatically programmed for each user
• First Name: "User_" + 4 digits of User Container number (i.e., if User Container number is "1", the First
Name for the user will be "User_0001".)
• Login ID, Password and User PIN / Mailbox Password ["0-9"]:
4 digits of User Container number (i.e., if User Container number is "1", the Login ID, Password and User
PIN/Mailbox Password ["0-9"] for the user will be "0001".)
• Current User: "None" (No User activation key has been activated.)

PC Programming Manual 157

8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users

• User Group (when not copying from a User template):

– If the Installer or an Administrator creates the user: "1"
– If a Sub-Administrator creates the user: the lowest number of the user groups that the Sub-
Administrator is authorised to manage

Note
• When OK is clicked, if any extensions within the range specified in step 1 already have user accounts
associated with them, the process will not complete, and an error message will be displayed.
• When OK is clicked, the progress of creating the user container data will be displayed. A dialogue box
will be displayed to indicate when the process is complete.
• A maximum of 1000 (KX-NSX1000) or 2000 (KX-NSX2000) users can be created at once using this
feature.
• A Sub-Administrator cannot create user container data while another Sub-Administrator is creating
user container data.

158 PC Programming Manual

 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings

8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings

For each user, various devices can be assigned.
To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and
click Find Next.
To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/
DND, personal speed dialling, and flexible button settings.
To edit device settings, click button (See 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced
Extension Settings).
Sub-Administrators can edit the device settings only of users that belong to user groups that they are
authorised to manage. For details about assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—
User Group.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
First Name Indicates the first name of the Max. 20
extension (reference only). characters
Last Name Indicates the last name of the extension Max. 20
(reference only). characters
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits
Number extension (reference only). (consisting of
0–9)
User Group Specifies the extension user group to 1–512 PC Programming Manual
which the extension belongs. Extension References
user groups are used to compose 8.2.1 Users—Advanced
tenants, call pickup groups and paging Extension Settings—
groups. Advanced Extension Settings
—Intercept Destination—
Note
Intercept Destination
Sub-Administrators can specify only
user group numbers that they are
authorised to manage.
COS Specifies the COS of the extension. 1–512 PC Programming Manual
References
Note
8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Sub-Administrators can specify the Extension Settings—
settings only of users that belong to Advanced Extension Settings
user groups that they are —Intercept Destination—
authorised to manage. Intercept Destination
10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-3] System—Class of
Service—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual
References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 159

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced

Extension Settings
To copy the advanced extension settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.

Intercept Destination
Name Description Value Range Links
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
When called party in each time mode for #, [ ] [Secret], and P 8.2.1 Users—Advanced
does not answer Intercept Routing–No [Pause]) Extension Settings—
—Day, Lunch, Answer and Intercept Advanced Extension
Break, Night Routing–DND. Settings—Intercept
Note that Intercept Routing– Destination—Intercept
Busy calls are routed using Destination—When Called
Intercept Destination— Party is Busy
When Called Party is Busy
below. Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Intercept Specifies the Intercept Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Destination— Routing destination of calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
When Called when the extension is busy. #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Party is Busy [Pause])

Intercept No Answer Time

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Intercept No Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Time an unanswered call is redirected References
—Day, Lunch, to the intercept routing 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
Break, Night destination in each time mode. —Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA /
When this setting is set to "0", Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No
the system timer is used. Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

CLIP
Name Description Value Range Links
CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual References
number sent to the public of 0–9, *, and #) 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
network to show on the Identification Presentation (CLIP/
called party’s telephone COLP)
display when making a
trunk call.

160 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIP on Selects the CLIP number Extension: Show the PC Programming Manual
Extension/ to show on the called CLIP number specified in References
CO party’s telephone. CLIP ID. 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
CO: Show the CLIP Configuration—Slot—Port
number specified in ISDN Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—
CO in 9.26 PBX Subscriber Number
Configuration—[1-1] 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot— Configuration—Slot—Port
Port Property - BRI Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting
or 9.27 PBX —Subscriber Number
Configuration—[1-1] 8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Configuration—Slot— Extension Settings—Advanced
Port Property - PRI Extension Settings—CLIP—CLIP
Port. ID
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
CLIR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number on the Identification Presentation (CLIP/
called party’s telephone COLP)
when making a public
network trunk call.
COLR Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
restrict the display of the 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
CLIP number of the Identification Presentation (CLIP/
extension on the caller’s COLP)
telephone display when
answering a call.

UM
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Two-way Specifies whether to enable the two- Enable, Feature Manual
Recording way recording feature for the Disable References
extension using the Unified 3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/
Messaging system. Two-way Transfer

PC Programming Manual 161

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
Ring Pattern Specifies the Ring Tone 1–8 PC Programming Manual
Table Pattern Table to be used by References
the extension. 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from CO
10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from DOORPHONE
10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3]
System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call
from Others
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Transfer Specifies the transfer recall Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Recall destination when an extension (consisting of 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Destination user transfers a call with the 0–9)
Call Transfer without
Announcement feature and
the transferred call is not
answered within a certain time
period.
ARS Specifies the itemised billing Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Itemised code used by the ARS feature (consisting of References
Code for identifying calls made from 0–9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS
the extension for accounting —Carrier
and billing purposes.
Feature Manual References
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Pickup Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. Off, On PC Programming Manual
Dial Set The number specified in Pickup Dial References
No. on this screen is dialled 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
automatically after going off-hook System—Timers & Counters—
when the Hot Line feature is active. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Start
Feature Manual
References
2.6.7 Hot Line

162 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Pickup Specifies the number to be dialled Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Dial No. automatically after going off-hook (consisting of 0–9, References
when the Hot Line feature is active. *, #, T [Transfer], 2.6.7 Hot Line
[ ] [Secret], P
[Pause], and F
[Flash])
Data Sets or cancels the protection Off, On Feature Manual
Mode against tones or interruptions from References
other extensions during 2.11.5 Data Line Security
communication.

Option 3
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Pickup Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other extension Feature Manual
Deny picked up by other extensions. users to pick up calls to your References
extension 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Enable: Prevents other
extension users from picking up
calls to your extension
Call Pickup Specifies how incoming calls Display & Tone1, Display & Feature Manual
Group that can be answered by an Tone2, Display & Tone3, References
Monitoring extension in a pickup group Display only, Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
are indicated on a PT (display,
tone, etc.). Note
• Supported terminals are:
DPT, DPT (S-DPT), S-
Hybrid, S-Hybrid (S-
DPT), IP-EXT
• Depending on system
programming, the
number of terminals may
be limited to 256. For
more information, consult
your dealer.
Executive Specifies whether calls can be Disable: Allows other extension Feature Manual
Override interrupted by other users to interrupt an existing References
Deny extensions. call 2.10.2 Executive
Enable: Prevents other Busy Override
extension users from
interrupting an existing call
Absent Specifies the Personal Absent Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Message Message which, unlike the References
System Absent Message, can 2.20.2 Absent
be customised for each Message
extension.

PC Programming Manual 163

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Specifies the maximum limit of 0–9999999 PC Programming
Limit call charges allowed for the Manual
extension. When this limit is References
reached, the extension cannot
14.2 PBX
be used to make further trunk
Configuration—[6-2]
calls.
Feature—Hotel &
The number of decimal places
Charge
that can be specified here
depends on the value set in Feature Manual
Charge in 14.2 PBX References
Configuration—[6-2] Feature 2.7.2 Budget
—Hotel & Charge. Management
Intercom Selects the method of Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Feature Manual
Call by receiving intercom calls. When Voice Call References
Voice Deny Voice Call is selected, 2.5.3 Intercom Call
the extension will always ring
when receiving calls,
regardless of how the caller
wants to make the call.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized. PC Programming
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized Manual
Line (for hook to make a call. automatically from the programmed References
Wired Ext.) trunk groups.
8.3.1 Users—Flexible
ICM/PDN: An extension line is
Button—Wired
seized, or, for a PDN extension, an
Extension
idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-84: A trunk programmed for a Feature Manual
flexible button (F-1–F-84) is seized. A References
flexible button customised as a 2.5.5.2 Line
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or Preference—
ICD Group button must be selected. Outgoing
Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. Select a PC Programming
Preferred an incoming call is line by pressing the desired Line Manual
Line (for answered after going off- Access button to answer a call. References
Wired Ext.) hook. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call
8.3.1 Users—Flexible
Note that even if a is selected.
Button—Wired
specific PDN button is PDN: The call arriving at any PDN
Extension
selected here, a call button is selected.
ringing at any PDN F-1–F-84: The call arriving at a Feature Manual
button on the extension flexible button (F-1–F-84) is selected. References
will be answered when A flexible button customised as a 2.4.2 Line Preference
going off-hook. Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or —Incoming
ICD Group button must be selected.

164 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Outgoing Selects the line to be No Line: No line is seized.
Preferred seized after going off- Idle: An idle trunk is seized
Line (for PS) hook to make a call. automatically from the programmed
trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is
seized, or, for a PDN extension, an
idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a
flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A
flexible button customised as a
Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or
ICD Group button must be selected.
Incoming Selects the line on which No Line: No line is selected. Select a
Preferred an incoming call is line by pressing the desired Line
Line (for PS) answered after going off- Access button to answer a call.
hook. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call
Note that even if a is selected.
specific PDN button is PDN: The call arriving at any PDN
selected here, a call button is selected.
ringing at any PDN F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a
button on the extension flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected.
will be answered when A flexible button customised as a
going off-hook. Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or
ICD Group button must be selected.
Call Waiting Selects the type of Call CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Feature Manual
Tone Type Waiting tone sent to the References
busy extension. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
Tone
LCS Specifies whether to Stop Record, Keep Record Feature Manual
Recording continue or stop References
Mode recording the message 3.1.1 Unified
in the extension’s Messaging System
mailbox when the Overview
extension user answers
a call that was being
monitored.
LCS Answer Specifies whether the Hands free: Monitor through the built- Feature Manual
Mode extension’s mailbox is in speaker References
monitored in Hands-free Private: Monitor through the handset 2.11.1 Hands-free
or Private mode. or the built-in speaker after hearing a Operation
warning tone 3.1.1 Unified
Messaging System
Overview

PC Programming Manual 165

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Display Selects the display language of the Language1– Feature Manual
Language extension telephone. Language5 References
2.21.4 Display
Information
Incoming Call Selects which caller information is shown Caller ID Name, Feature Manual
Display on the first line of the extension’s display. CO Line Name, References
DDI/DID Name 2.21.4 Display
Information
Automatic LCD Enables the first line of the display to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Switch when show the call duration automatically after References
Start Talking answering a trunk call. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are Off, On
heard when dialling.
Automatic Enables the extension to answer an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Answer for CO incoming trunk call automatically after a References
Call certain number of rings without going off- 2.4.4 Hands-free
hook, when Hands-free Answerback has Answerback
been set on the extension. This setting is
only effective when Option 6 on this
screen has been set to Off.

Option 6
Name Description Value Range Links
Forced Specifies whether the extension Off, On
Automatic automatically answers all incoming calls
Answer (both intercom and trunk calls) without
going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-
free Answerback setting.
Flexible Key Specifies whether the extension user can No Limitation, One-
Programming modify all flexible buttons without touch Dial
Mode limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling
buttons. When the mode is set to One-
touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2"
before the number when customising a
One-touch Dialling button.

166 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls IP-PT (except
arriving at the INTERCOM button or KX-NT321): 1–30
PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if
specified here is applied to all PDN ring tone 9–30 is
buttons on an extension. selected, ring tone 1 is
heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30
is selected, ring tone 2
is heard.)
Paging Deny Specifies whether paging of the Disable, Enable Feature
extension from other extensions is Manual
enabled. References
2.17.1 Paging

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Character Input Selects the character table to be used Table 1:
Mode for entering characters. Standard mode
Table 2: Option
mode
Flash Mode Selects the function of the FLASH/ EFA, Terminate, Feature Manual
during CO RECALL button during a trunk Flash Recall References
Conversation conversation. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of incoming 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory trunk calls that are retained in the References
extension’s Incoming Call Log 2.19.2 Incoming Call
memory. Log
Outgoing Call Log Specifies the number of telephone 1–100 Feature Manual
Memory numbers dialled by the extension that References
are retained in the extension’s 2.6.3 Last Number
Outgoing Call Log memory. Redial
ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic, Feature Manual
Automatic is selected, the bearer Speech, Audio References
mode is set automatically depending 4.1.2.1 Integrated
on the extension’s telephone type as Services Digital Network
follows: (ISDN)—SUMMARY
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio

PC Programming Manual 167

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Option 8
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Group CW Enables an incoming call to an incoming call Disable,
w/o Tone distribution group to arrive at a previously Enable
(Ring after busy extension at the moment that the
Call) extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
Extension Enables the extension to send Caller ID Disable, Feature Manual
Caller ID information to an SLT. Enable References
Sending 2.19.1 Caller ID
Incoming Call Specifies the length of time that the ringing 0–15 s Feature Manual
Wait Timer for a call is delayed when the call follows References
for Extension immediately after the previous unanswered 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID call. When receiving two calls in quick
succession (e.g., when a call waiting in a
queue is directed to an extension
immediately after the previous unanswered
call stops ringing), some SLTs require a
pause, after the first call stops ringing, to
receive the second call’s Caller ID
information.
SLT MW Enables the use of the Message Waiting Disable, Feature Manual
Mode Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the MW- References
extension port. Lamp 2.20.1 Message Waiting
Note
This setting must be disabled for
Message Waiting by FSK.
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that must pass 0–3000 s PC Programming
Timer after completing a call before an extension Manual References
will accept another call when logged in as a 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration
member of an Incoming Call Distribution —[3-5-1] Group—Incoming
Group. Call Distribution Group—
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Group Settings—Member
Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in List—Wrap-up Timer
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group— 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—
Incoming Call Distribution Group— [3-5-3] Group—Incoming
Miscellaneous. Call Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous—Options—
Wrap-up Timer based on
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

168 PC Programming Manual

 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
PDN Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing setting for Immediate, 1 Feature Manual
Ringing calls to a PDN extension (an extension Ring, 2 Rings, References
with one or more PDN buttons). 3 Rings, 4 2.9.1 Primary Directory
Rings, 5 Number (PDN)/
Rings, 6 Secondary Directory
Rings Number (SDN)
Extension
Built-in Specifies to use the Built-in Disable, Feature Manual
Communication Communication Assistant. Enable References
Assistant 2.26.2 CA
(Communication
Assistant) Operator
Console
Guest Room Specifies "Yes" for Guest Room of each No, Yes Feature Manual
extension port when the hotel uses a References
FOS system (Front Office Software). 2.23.4 Built-in FOS
Interface

Option 10
Name Description Value Range Links
Service Mode for Specifies the time service Disable, Feature Manual
Automatic Service- mode for operating the Night Mode, References
out Automatic Service-out Lunch Mode, 2.24.4.3 Automatic
feature. Break Mode Service-out Feature
Automatic Service- Specifies whether to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
out by no operation operate the Automatic References
Service-out feature when a 2.24.4.3 Automatic
user does not operate the Service-out Feature
devices within the
specified time.
No Operation Timer Specifies the no operation 5 min, 10 min, 15 Feature Manual
timer for the Auto Service- min, 30 min, 1-24 h References
out feature. 2.24.4.3 Automatic
Service-out Feature

8.2.1.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension

Settings—CLIP Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-
assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

PC Programming Manual 169

8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Location Entry Specifies the extension Wired extension PC Programming Manual
—Beginning number of the first location number (1-5 References
Entry Location to be programmed. digits) 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
(Ext. Number) Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Location Entry Specifies the number of 1–total number PC Programming Manual
—Number to locations to be programmed. of connected References
Generate A CLIP number will only be wired 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
assigned to connected wired extensions Settings—Advanced Extension
extensions, even if the Settings
number entered here is
larger than the total number Feature Manual References
of wired extensions. 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies the number of 0–5 PC Programming Manual
Deleting Digits digits to be deleted from the References
start of an extension number 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
when using it as part of the Settings—Advanced Extension
CLIP number. Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a prefix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Head of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of 0– References
CLIP numbers. 9, *, and #) 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Parameter— Specifies a suffix number to Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
Tail of ID be applied to all generated (consisting of 0– References
CLIP numbers. 9, *, and #) 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)

170 PC Programming Manual

 8.3 Users—Flexible Button

8.3 Users—Flexible Button

8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
Overview
Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. Select the desired
user from the User Name/Extension Number list. And Select the desired extension device for user from
the Show usable keys for list (Main Device or Sub Device).

Note
• Rows whose Key Location field is coloured can be customised.
• The number of available flexible buttons is displayed in Available Keys on the screen.
• Sub-Administrators can edit or copy the flexible button settings only of users that belong to user
groups that they are authorised to manage. For details about assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX
Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.

KX-NT505 Flexible Buttons

KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PTs can be connected to up to 4 KX-NT505 48 key add-on units. When an
extension that has one or more KX-NT505 units connected is selected in the Extension Number / Name
list, Number of Connections NT505 and NT505 Location No. are displayed. In Number of Connections
NT505, specify the number of connected KX-NT505 units (a maximum of 4). This configuration is available
at the Installer level only. Then, in NT505 Location No., select a KX-NT505 to program. Up to 48 flexible
buttons can be programmed for each KX-NT505 unit.

Note
Up to 64 KX-NT505 units can be connected to the PBX system.

Copying Flexible Button Settings

To copy the flexible button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. This operation
(Copy to) is available at the User (Administrator) level.

Note
The Copy to button can be used with KX-NT505 units, even if the number of connected KX-NT505 units
differs between extensions. Settings for NT505 Location No. will be copied to the same number of the
copy target extension. However, if a matching NT505 Location No. does not exist at the target
destination, those settings will not be copied.

For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.

PC Programming Manual 171

8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

Name Description Value Range Links

Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible button. Single CO, Group CO, Manual References
DSS, One-touch, ICD 8.3.1.1 Users—
Group, Message Waiting, Flexible Button—
FWD/DND (Both), Wired Extension—
FWD/DND (External), Flexible button data
FWD/DND (Internal), copy
Group Fwd (Both), Group
Fwd (External), Group
Fwd (Internal), Account,
Conference, Terminate,
EFA, Charge, Call Park,
Call Log, Log-in/Log-out,
Hurry-up, Wrap-up,
System Alarm, Time
Service, Answer,
Release, TRS Level
Change, ISDN Service,
CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold,
Headset, Time Service -
Automatic/Manual, Check
In, Check Out, Cleaned
Up, Two-way Record,
Two-way Transfer, LCS,
Voice Mail Transfer, CTI,
PDN, SDN
Notice
For each KX-UT
series SIP phone that
is connected to the
PBX, at least one DN
button must be
assigned to the
extension. Without a
DN button assigned,
the extension will not
be able to make or
receive calls.
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be KX-NSX1000: 1–640 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. KX-NSX2000: 1–960 References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–128 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.

172 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming call Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the distribution group is References
Log-in/Log-out) extension belongs to are selected manually. 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
logged in to or logged out All (Log-in/Log-out): All
from. incoming call distribution
groups that the extension
belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-
specified incoming call
distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Time Service), Day/ Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Night/Break, Day/Night/ References
Time Service) Lunch, Day/Night 5.1.4 Time Service
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for level to be used temporarily on References
TRS Level a certain extension. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone
Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be Tenant 1–Tenant 128 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)
Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Feature Manual
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring 2.9.1 Primary
Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number
(SDN) Extension
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension to be accessed. of 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for ICD number of an incoming call of 0–9)
Group) distribution group to be
accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for extension or floating extension of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this
cell is left empty, the extension
will check its own messages
only.

PC Programming Manual 173

8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom and (DND)—SUMMARY
trunk calls will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose trunk calls will (DND)—SUMMARY
be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom calls (DND)—SUMMARY
will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the extension’s own Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (for Call number or the floating of 0–9)
Log) extension number of an
incoming call distribution group
for which call log information is
displayed. If the cell is left
empty, the extension will
display its own call log
information.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for Log- number of an incoming call of 0–9) References
in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose 2.2.2.3 Queuing
longest waiting call will be Feature
redirected (Manual Queue
Redirection).
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the extension’s 3.1.1 Unified
Record) mailbox. Messaging System
Overview

174 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group of 0–9) References
Voice Mail containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) Messaging System
Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number (for number of the PDN extension of 0–9) References
SDN) corresponding to this SDN 2.9.1 Primary
button. Directory Number
Note that the extension (PDN)/Secondary
specified here must have a Directory Number
PDN button registered for the (SDN) Extension
SDN button to function.
Extension Name Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (Max. 32 Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting
digits) dialled. of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer],
[ ] [Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])
Label Name Specifies the name of each Max. 12 characters Feature Manual
(Max. 12 flexible button for KX-NT366 References
characters) and KX-NT553/KX-NT556/ 2.21.2 Flexible
KX-NT560 IP-PTs. The name Buttons
specified here is displayed on
the LCD for each button.
Optional Specifies the Time Table to be Tenant 1–Tenant 128 Feature Manual
Parameter used for changing time modes References
(Ringing Tone in the Automatic Switching 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number) mode.
(for Time
Service)

PC Programming Manual 175

8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

Name Description Value Range Links

Optional Specifies the ring tone type. IP-PT (except
Parameter KX-NT321): 1–30
(Ringing Tone KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if
Type Number) ring tone 9–30 is
(for Loop CO, selected, ring tone 1 is
Single CO, heard.)
Group CO, ICD S-PS: Not available.
Group, SDN) Other telephones: 1–8
(Even if ring tone 9–30 is
selected, ring tone 2 is
heard.)
Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter parking zone a call is to be References
(Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with 8.3.1 Users—
(for Call Park) Flexible Button—Wired
Extension on this screen set
to Specific is pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Blank, Available Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will Extension Number or References
Two-way be used to record ICDG Number 3.1.1 Unified
Transfer) conversations using One-touch Messaging System
Two-way Transfer. (For Overview
example, a secretary can
record a conversation into the
mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is
left empty, the extension user
must specify the number of an
extension each time.

8.3.1.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Flexible button

data copy
The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different
extensions.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select a user group from the drop-down list. All PC Programming
Extension Line The user names and the extension numbers of Group, Manual References
—User Group the users in the selected user group are 1–512 8.3.1 Users—Flexible
displayed in User Name / Extension Number. Button—Wired
Extension
Note
Sub-Administrators can select only user
group numbers that they are authorised to
manage.

176 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select the number and name of the extension PC Programming
Extension Line that will receive the copied settings. Multiple Manual References
—User Name / extensions can be selected. To select all 8.3.1 Users—Flexible
Extension extensions at once, click Select All. Button—Wired
Number When selecting multiple extensions, note that if Extension
the source extension has an SDN button, the
copy operation cannot be performed.

8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Each flexible button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A maximum of 12
flexible buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the User Name/Extension
Number list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
Sub-Administrators can edit or copy the flexible button settings only of users that belong to user groups that
they are authorised to manage. For details about assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2]
Group—User Group.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "2.21.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, Loop CO, PC Programming
assigned to the flexible button. Single CO, Group CO, Manual References
DSS, One-touch, ICD 8.3.2.1 Users—Flexible
Group, Message Button—Portable
Waiting, FWD/DND Station—Flexible button
(Both), FWD/DND data copy
(External), FWD/DND
(Internal), Group Fwd
(Both), Group Fwd
(External), Group Fwd
(Internal), Account,
Conference,
Terminate, EFA,
Charge, Call Park,
Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-
up, Wrap-up, Time
Service, TRS Level
Change, ISDN
Service, CLIR, COLR,
ISDN Hold, Time
Service - Automatic/
Manual, Two-way
Record, Two-way
Transfer, LCS, Voice
Mail Transfer, CTI,
PDN, SDN
Parameter Specifies the trunk to be KX-NSX1000: 1–640 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. KX-NSX2000: 1–960 References
Single CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 177

8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies the trunk group to be 1–128 Feature Manual
Selection (for accessed. References
Group CO) 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parameter Specifies whether a call is Automatic, Specific Feature Manual
Selection (for parked in an idle parking zone References
Call Park) automatically, or in a specific 2.13.2 Call Park
parking zone.
Parameter Specifies which incoming call None: The incoming Feature Manual
Selection (for distribution groups that the PS call distribution group References
Log-in/Log-out) belongs to are logged in to or is selected manually. 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
logged out from. All (Log-in/Log-out):
All incoming call
distribution groups
that the PS belongs
to.
Incoming Group: A
pre-specified incoming
call distribution group
Parameter Selects which time modes are All (Time Service), Feature Manual
Selection (for switched manually. Day/Night/Break, Day/ References
Time Service) Night/Lunch, Day/ 5.1.4 Time Service
Night
Parameter Specifies the TRS/Barring level Level 1–Level 7 Feature Manual
Selection (for to be used temporarily on a References
TRS Level certain PS. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Change) (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer
Parameter Specifies the Time Table to be Tenant 1–Tenant 128 Feature Manual
Selection (for used when the Time Service References
Time Service - Switching Mode is set to 5.1.4 Time Service
Automatic/ Automatic.
Manual)

178 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Parameter Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 PC Programming
Selection (for setting for calls arriving at an Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Manual References
SDN) SDN button. Rings, 5 Rings, 6 10.9 PBX Configuration
The value specified here is only Rings, No Ring —[2-9] System—
used when Option 4 on System Options—
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] Option 4—System
System—System Options is Wireless—SDN
set to "Enable". Delayed Ringing with
LCD
Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Extension
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension to be accessed. (consisting of 0–9)
DSS)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for ICD number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Group) distribution group to be
accessed.
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits
Number (for extension or floating extension (consisting of 0–9)
Message number of an incoming call
Waiting) distribution group for which
messages are checked. If this
cell is left empty, the PS will
check its own messages only.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Both)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom and (DND)—SUMMARY
trunk calls will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(External)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose trunk calls will (DND)—SUMMARY
be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)

PC Programming Manual 179

8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Group Fwd distribution group or the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(Internal)) extension number to set FWD (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
remotely whose intercom calls (DND)—SUMMARY
will be forwarded. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number (for number of an incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Log-in/Log-out) distribution group to log-in to or
log-out from.
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9) References
Hurry-up) distribution group whose longest 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
waiting call will be redirected
(Manual Queue Redirection).
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the PS’s mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Record) System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Two-way containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the UM group (consisting of 0–9) References
Voice Mail containing the desired mailbox. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) System Overview
Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (for number of the corresponding (consisting of 0–9) References
SDN) (owner) extension for the SDN 2.9.1 Primary Directory
button. Number (PDN)/
Note that the extension specified Secondary Directory
here must have a PDN button Number (SDN)
registered for the SDN button to Extension
function.
Extension Name Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters
extension, when an extension
number is specified (reference
only).
Dial (Max. 32 Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits
digits) dialled. (consisting of 0–9, *,
#, T [Transfer], [ ]
[Secret], P [Pause],
and F [Flash])

180 PC Programming Manual

 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Optional Specifies the Time Table to be Tenant 1–Tenant 128 Feature Manual
Parameter (or used for changing time modes in References
Ringing Tone the Automatic Switching mode. 5.1.4 Time Service
Type Number)
(for Time
Service)
Optional Specifies the number of the Park 00–Park 99 Feature Manual
Parameter (or parking zone a call is to be References
Ringing Tone parked in when a Call Park 2.13.2 Call Park
Type Number) button with 8.3.2 Users—
(for Call Park) Flexible Button—Portable
Station on this screen set to
Specific is pressed.
Ext No. of Specifies the number of the Blank, Available Feature Manual
Mailbox (for extension whose mailbox will be Extension Number or References
Two-way used to record conversations ICDG Number 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Transfer) using One-touch Two-way System Overview
Transfer. (For example, a
secretary can record a
conversation into the mailbox of
a boss.) If the cell is left empty,
the extension user must specify
the number of an extension each
time.

8.3.2.1 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Flexible button

data copy
The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Destination Select a user group from the drop-down list. The All PC Programming
Extension Line user names and the extension numbers of the Group, Manual References
—User Group users in the selected user group are displayed in 1-512 8.3.2 Users—Flexible
User Name / Extension Number. Button—Portable
Station
Note
Sub-Administrators can select only user
group numbers that they are authorised to
manage.
Destination Select the number and name of the extension PC Programming
Extension Line that will receive the copied settings. Multiple Manual References
—User Name / extensions can be selected. To select all 8.3.2 Users—Flexible
Extension extensions at once, click Select All. Button—Portable
Number When selecting multiple extensions, note that if Station
the source extension has an SDN button, the
copy operation cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual 181

8.4 Users—Speed Dial

8.4 Users—Speed Dial

Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed
dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for
each extension. Select the desired extension from the User Name / Extension Number list.
Sub-Administrators can edit only users that belong to user groups that they are authorised to manage. For
details about assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Speed Dialling - Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Personal Name Personal Speed Dialling References
(20 characters) number to call using the 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal Speed Dialling Personal/System
Directory shown on the
extension's display.
Speed Dialling - Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Personal Number dialled by the Personal Speed (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
Dialling number. T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
[Secret], P [Pause], Personal/System
and F [Flash])

8.5 Users—CLIP ID Table

Up to 8 CLIP IDs can be set for each user. For details about CLIP Generate, see 8.2.1.1 Users—Advanced
Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—CLIP Generate.
Sub-Administrators can edit only users that belong to user groups that they are authorised to manage. For
details about assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–
extension (reference only). 9)
First Name Indicates the first name of the user Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Last Name Indicates the last name of the user Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
CLIP 1–8 Specifies up to 8 CLIP IDs for the Max. 16 digits (consisting of
extension. 0–9, *, and #)

182 PC Programming Manual

 8.6 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording

8.6 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording

This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording supervisors. See
7.10.1 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Supervisor Setting.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

8.6.1 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Edit a

Recording
On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed.
You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. For an extension, click the setting for Internal Call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal Call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
2. Select On or Off for that setting.

Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Click OK when finished.

8.6.2 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. Select one or more mailboxes, and click Edit.
2. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that
match those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or
specify both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or "Both".
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or trunk calls, or
specify both.
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.

PC Programming Manual 183

8.6.2 Supervisors—Automatic Two-way Recording—Record List

• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
3. Click the button.
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click
Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
4. Click the button.

Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the button will be disabled. Select a specific
mailbox to enable the button.
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at
which to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step b, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected
messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.

184 PC Programming Manual

 8.7 Supervisors—ICDG Management

8.7 Supervisors—ICDG Management

This screen is accessible only by users designated as an ACD supervisor. This screen can be accessed
only in On-line mode.

8.7.1 Supervisors—ICDG Management—Group Monitor

Description
Users designated as an ACD supervisor can specify an ICD group to monitor, set monitoring conditions, and
begin monitoring. If there is no "Call Center Feature Enhancement" or "Built-in ACD Report AK" activation
key, [Start Monitor] button is disable.
Name Description Value Range Links
Supervisor Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop- Registered Feature Manual
selection down list. ACD References
This operation is available only at the supervisors 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
User (Administrator) level. Feature (ACD)
For details about ACD supervisor
settings, see 11.5.4 PBX
Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—
Incoming Call Distribution Group—
ACD Supervisor.
Start Monitor Click the Start Monitor button to start Feature Manual
monitoring the target ICD group. This References
feature requires the Call Centre Feature 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Enhancement activation key. If this Feature (ACD)
activation key is not installed, the Start
Monitor button is greyed out.
Basic Settings— Specifies the layout of monitoring 1 Group, 4 Feature Manual
Layout results. Groups References
2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Basic Settings— Selects the ICD groups to be managed ICD groups Feature Manual
Select ICD Group by the ACD supervisor, from a drop- References
down list. 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Options— Specifies the display mode of the status Standard, Feature Manual
Member Status View of group members. Simple References
Mode 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Options— Specifies the threshold number of 1–30 Feature Manual
Highlighted Display current waiting calls. When this number References
Settings—Number of is matched or exceeded, calls are 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Current Waiting Calls highlighted on the monitor screen. Feature (ACD)
(1-30)

PC Programming Manual 185

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Options— Specifies the waiting time after which 0–10’00 Feature Manual
Highlighted Display calls are highlighted on the monitor References
Settings—Waiting screen. When this setting is set to "0", all 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Time (0-10 min/10 waiting calls are highlighted. Feature (ACD)
sec)
Options— Specifies the colour mode of highlighted Mode 1, Mode Feature Manual
Highlighted Display items on the monitor screen. 2, Mode 3 References
Settings—Colour 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Mode Feature (ACD)
Options— Specifies whether highlighted items blink Enable, Feature Manual
Highlighted Display on the monitor screen. Disable References
Settings—Blinking 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Options— Select the display resolution of the Disable,
Highlighted Display monitor screen for full screen display. Automatic,
Settings—Full 1024 × 768,
Screen Display Note 1280 × 1024,
(pixels) When you select Automatic, the 1920 × 1080
system automatically recognises the
specified resolution of your PC
display and selects a full screen
resolution from the following display
resolutions. If any of these sizes do
not match the specified resolution for
your PC display, select the resolution
that is smaller than and closest to
your monitor's maximum display
resolution.

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Description
On this screen, users designated as an ACD supervisor can create ACD reports on ICD groups after filtering
according to group, agent, or call. Filtering types are separated by tabs.
If there is no activation key "Call Center Feature Enhancement" or "Built-in ACD Report AK", [View Report]
button is disable.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Supervisor Selects the ACD supervisor from a drop-down list. Registered Feature
selection This operation is available only at the User ACD Manual
(Administrator) level. supervisors References
2.2.2.9
Supervisory
Feature (ACD)

186 PC Programming Manual

 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Report Follow the procedure below to save/load ACD Feature
Profiles report profiles. The type of ACD report (Group/ Manual
Agent/Call) and filter conditions are saved in each References
profile.
2.2.2.9
1. Click the Report Profiles button. Supervisory
2. To load a previously saved report profile, click Feature (ACD)
a profile to select it, and then click the Load
button.
3. To save the current report profile, assign a
name in Profile Name (max. 32 characters),
and then click the Save button.
Option Follow the procedure below to set ACD report Feature
options. Manual
1. Click the Option button. References
2. In Device, Select the destination for the ACD 2.2.2.9
report data: Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
• Local PC: After the ACD report is created,
a file download will begin in your web
browser. Specify a location on your local
PC to save the ACD report data.
• NAS: Save the data to a NAS. When NAS
is selected, a folder selection menu
becomes active.
3. Select the ACD Report - Export CSV File
Format.
Value Range
Comma(,), Semicolon(;)
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 187

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Group
Name Description Value Range Links
Group— To display a report according to groups, follow the Feature Manual
View Report procedure below. This feature requires the Call References
Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this 2.2.2.9
activation key is not installed, the View Report Supervisory
button is greyed out. Feature (ACD)
1. Enter the report output conditions and click
the View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Group Report screen is
displayed. To confirm the selected groups,
click View. The list of selected groups is
displayed.
*1
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3
ways.
• Graph: Click the Graph button to display
the report in graph form on the ACD
Report - Group Graph screen. Click the
Print button to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output
the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the
report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD
Report - Group Report screen.
Group— Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop- *2
Group, Hour , Feature Manual
Filter down list. Day, Date, References
Settings— Month, Trunk, 2.2.2.9
View Mode Caller ID/ Supervisory
CLIP Feature (ACD)
Group— To select the target group for creating a report, Feature Manual
Filter follow the procedure below. References
Settings— 1. Click the Select button. 2.2.2.9
Select Supervisory
Group 2. Click an ICD group from those displayed in
Feature (ACD)
the Available Group for ACD Report
window to select it. Up to 64 groups can be
selected.
3. Click ==> to move the selected ICD groups to
the Selected Group for ACD Report
window.
4. To remove ICD groups from the Selected
Group for ACD Report window, click a group
to select it and click <==.
5. Click OK.

188 PC Programming Manual

 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Group— Specifies the target period for the report. Yesterday, Feature Manual
Filter Last Week, References
Settings— Last Month, 2.2.2.9
Select Today, This Supervisory
Period Week, This Feature (ACD)
Month,
Custom
*3
Period

*1
Item Description

Incoming Calls

Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group.

Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group.

Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group cancelled by the caller.

Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls to the target ICD group.

Talk Time

Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Average The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Wait Time

Wait Time (Answered)

Total The total waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Average The average waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Wait Time (Lost)

Total The total waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Average The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group.

*2 If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).
*3 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.
*4 "D" indicates the number of days (D=1–366). If the number of days is 0, (D) is not displayed.

PC Programming Manual 189

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Agent
Name Description Value Range Links
Agent— To display a report according to agents, follow the Feature Manual
View Report procedure below. This feature requires the Call References
Centre Feature Enhancement activation key. If this 2.2.2.9
activation key is not installed, the View Report Supervisory
button is greyed out. Feature (ACD)
1. Enter the report output conditions and click the
View Report button.
2. The ACD Report - Agent Report screen is
displayed. To confirm the selected agents,
click View. The list of selected agents is
displayed.
*1
3. Results for the following items are displayed.
4. Reports can be outputted in the following 3
ways.
• Graph: Click the Graph button to display
the report in graph form on the ACD Report
- Agent Graph screen. Click the Print
button to print the graph.
• Export: Click the Export button to output
the report to a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button to print the
report.
5. Click the Close button to close the ACD
Report - Agent Report screen.
Agent— Selects the monitoring view mode from a drop-down Agent, Feature Manual
Filter list. *2
Hour , Day, References
Settings— Date, Month 2.2.2.9
View Mode Supervisory
Feature (ACD)
Agent— To select the target agent for creating a report, Feature Manual
Filter follow the procedure below. References
Settings— 1. Click the Select button. 2.2.2.9
Select Agent Supervisory
2. Click an agent from those displayed in the
Feature (ACD)
Available Agent for ACD Report window to
select it. Up to 8192 agents are displayed, and
up to 128 agents can be selected from the list.
3. Click ==> to move the selected agents to the
Selected Agent for ACD Report window.
4. To remove agents from the Selected Agent
for ACD Report window, click an agent to
select it and click <==.
5. Click OK.

190 PC Programming Manual

 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Agent— Specifies the target period for the report. Yesterday, Feature Manual
Filter Last Week, References
Settings— Last Month, 2.2.2.9
Select Today, This Supervisory
Period Week, This Feature (ACD)
Month,
Custom
*3
Period

*1
Item Description

Total Answer

Total Answer The number of calls that the target agent answers.

Talk Time

Total The total talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Average The average talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)

Max. The longest talking time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS)

Login Time The total login time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Not-ready Time The total not ready time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

Wrap-up Time The total wrap-up time for the target agent. (HH:MM:SS (D))*4

*2 If Hour is selected, set the monitoring range for the target group (0:00–23:59).
*3 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.
*4 "D" indicates the number of days (D=1–366). If the number of days is 0, (D) is not displayed.

PC Programming Manual 191

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Call
Name Description Value Range Links
Call— To display a report according to calls, PC Programming
View follow the procedure below. This Manual
Report feature requires the Call Centre References
Feature Enhancement activation key.
11.5.3 PBX
If this activation key is not installed,
Configuration—
the View Report button is greyed
[3-5-3] Group—
out.
Incoming Call
1. Enter the report output Distribution Group
conditions and click the View —Miscellaneous—
Report button. Options—Call Log
2. The ACD Report - Call Report for Built-in ACD
*1 Report—ICD Group
screen is displayed. Unanswered Call
Log
Note
The displays described in Feature Manual
*1–*3 can be changed References
through system 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
programming. For details, Feature (ACD)
see "11.5.3 PBX
Configuration—[3-5-3]
Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—
Miscellaneous—Options—
Call Log for Built-in ACD
Report—ICD Group
Unanswered Call Log".
3. Reports can be outputted in the
following 2 ways.
• Export: Click the Export
button to output the report to
a local PC as a file.
• Print: Click the Print button
to print the report.
4. Click the Close button to close
the ACD Report - Call Report
screen.

192 PC Programming Manual

 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Call— Follow the procedure below to select Feature Manual
Filter the target group for creating a report. References
Settings 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
1. Click the Select button.
—Select Feature (ACD)
Group 2. Click the ICD group name you
want to analyse from the ICD
group names displayed on the
Available Group for ACD
Report window. (Maximum 64
groups displayed)
3. Click ==> to move the ICD group
you selected in step 2 to the
Selected Group for ACD
Report window. (Maximum 64
groups)
To delete an ICD group from the
Selected Group for ACD
Report window, click the ICD
group name, and then click <==.
4. Click OK.
Call— Specifies the target period for the Yesterday, Last Week, Last Feature Manual
Filter report. Month, Today, This Week, References
*2
Settings This Month, Custom Period 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
—Select Feature (ACD)
Period

PC Programming Manual 193

8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report

Name Description Value Range Links

Call— Calls that are the target of an ACD • Caller ID/CLIP Filter: Feature Manual
Filter report can be filtered in the following Filtering according to caller References
Settings 3 ways. ID or CLIP 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
—Call Feature (ACD)
1. Click Caller ID/CLIP
Filter
Filter.
Mode
2. Set the target caller
ID or CLIP
(maximum: 10).
• Talk/Wait Duration Filter:
Filtering according to
continuous talking or
waiting time
1. Click Talk/Wait
Duration Filter.
2. Select Talk Time or
Wait Time from a
drop-down list.
3. Set the filtering target
duration using one of
the following 2
methods.
To set a minimum
duration, click Min.,
and set the duration
time (0:00–23:59).
To set a maximum
duration, click Max.,
and set the duration
time (0:00–23:59).
• Lost Call Filter: Filtering
according to lost calls
1. Click Lost Call Filter.

*1
Item Description

ACD Report - Call Report

Start Date The start date of the call.

Start Time The start time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)

End Date The end date of the call.

End Time The end time of the call. (HH:MM:SS)

Result The processing result. (Answered/Abandoned/Overflowed/Unanswered )

*3

ICDG The incoming ICD Group number.

Incoming Agent The extension number of the agent that received the call.
*4

Answering Agent The answering member. (Extension Name/Extension Number)

Talk Time The talking time. (HH:MM:SS)

194 PC Programming Manual

 8.7.3 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export

Item Description

Wait Time The waiting time. (HH:MM:SS)

*5

Trunk The incoming trunk group number.

Caller ID/CLIP The caller’s number.

*2 If Custom Period is selected, set Start Date/Start Time/End Date/End Time also.
*3 Unanswered is displayed when the agent did not answer the call if the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call
Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*4 Displayed only when the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.
*5 The unanswered wait time is displayed when the call was Unanswered and the ICD group distribution method is set to Uniform
Call Distribution or Priority Hunting.

8.7.3 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Scheduled Export

On this screen, users can register or delete the schedule for the automatic export of ACD Report data. The
PBX system will automatically export the selected ACD Report data at the scheduled times to a USB
memory device or NAS connected to the PBX. (ACD scheduled exports cannot be made to a local PC.) For
details about ACD reports, see 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report.

Follow the procedure below to schedule the automatic export of ACD Report data.
1. Click to create a new scheduled export.
2. In Description, enter a description for the export (maximum 32 characters). This information is shown
as the description of the ACD Scheduled Export.
3. Select a report profile to be used for the scheduled export. If no report profile is selected, all items will
be exported.
For the details about report profiles, see 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report—
Description.
4. Specify the file name for the exported ACD report data (maximum 32 characters).
5. Set the frequency (daily, weekly, etc.) and time of day for when the export should take place.
6. Select the type of CSV separator value to be used for the exported CSV files.
7. In Device, select a USB memory device or NAS, and then specify the folder on the selected device
where you want to save the ACD scheduled export file.
8. Click OK.

Note
• Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Supervisor
selection drop-down list in 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
Each supervisor can register up to 10 schedules for the automatic export of ACD reports.
• If an ACD report export is scheduled and a USB memory device has been selected in Device,
but a USB memory device is not connected to the PBX at the time of the scheduled export, the
ACD scheduled export will not be performed.
• When using a NAS, make sure there is sufficient network bandwidth.
Editing ACD export schedules
1. From the ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to edit.
2. Click .
3. Edit the settings as desired.

PC Programming Manual 195

8.7.4 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Export History

4. Click OK.

Deleting a scheduled export

1. From the ACD Scheduled Export screen, select the schedule you wish to delete.
2. Click .
3. Click OK.

8.7.4 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Export History

The export history for ACD Report data can be checked on this screen. The following items are recorded for
each export:
• Date/Time
• Description
• Parameters
• Report Profile
• Completion Status
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.

Note
Installer and User (Administrator) level accounts can select a supervisor from the Select Supervisor
drop-down list in 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report.
The date/time display can be switched between 12 hour and 24 hour in 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display.

To back up the export history of ACD Report data

1. Click Backup.
2. Click OK.
3. Specify the folder and file name to export the history file to and click Save.
The export history of ACD Report data on the current screen is saved as a text file.
When you export the ACD report manually, a hyphen will be displayed for the report profile in the ACD
Report data export history.

To delete the records for exporting exports of ACD Report data

1. Click Clear.
2. Click OK.
The records for the export history of ACD Report data on the current screen are deleted.

8.8 Maintenance Personnel—Installer Information

This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
Login ID Specifies the login ID for 1–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z,
Installer level account. A–Z, * , and #)
Password ["A-Z", "a- Set a password for Installer 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z,
z", "0-9", "*", "#"] level account. A–Z, * , and #)
Re-enter ["A-Z", "a-z", Re-enter the password for 4–16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z,
"0-9", "*", "#"] confirmation. A–Z, * , and #)

196 PC Programming Manual

 8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

WebMC Language Selects the display English (UK), English (US), espańol,
language of WebMC. Français, italiano, Deutsch, Português
(BR), русский, Other

8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator

Setting
Settings for Sub-Administrators can be programmed. This option is only available at the Installer level.
To programme, the Installer must log in using exclusive mode. Otherwise, this screen is reference only.
See Login Restrictions in 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console.

8.9.1 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—

Accounts
Settings for Sub-Administrator accounts can be programmed.
Up to 32 Sub-Administrator accounts can be programmed.
To validate a Sub-Administrator account, select the Activated check box in Sub-Administrator number
column.
To edit Sub-Administrator account, click the button to display the Edit Sub-Administrator screen.

Name Description
Sub-Administrator No. Displays the Sub-Administrator number. (1–32)
Login ID Displays the login ID for each Sub-Administrator account.
Assigned Site Number Displays the numbers of the sites that the Sub-Administrator is authorised to
manage. For details about editing the site assignment, see
8.9.2 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Site
Assignment.

Edit Sub-Administrator
Name Description Value Range
Login ID Specifies the login ID Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z, *, and #)
for the Sub-
Administrator.
Password ["A- Specifies the 4-16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z, *, and #)
Z", "a-z", password for the Sub-
"0-9", "*", "#"] Administrator.
Re-enter ["A- Re-enter the password 4-16 characters (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A–Z, *, and #)
Z", "a-z", for confirmation.
"0-9", "*", "#"]

PC Programming Manual 197

8.9.2 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Site Assignment

Name Description Value Range

WebMC Select the Web English (UK),
Language Maintenance Console English (US),
language displayed for espańol,
the Sub-Administrator. Français,
italiano,
Deutsch,
Português (BR),
русский,
Others

8.9.2 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Site

Assignment
The Installer can assign which Sub-Administrator is authorised to manage each site.

Name Description Value Range

Site Number Displays the site number (1–32) of each PBX (reference 1–32
only).
Sub-Administrator Specifies the number of the Sub-Administrator who is None, 01:–32:
authorised to manage the site.

198 PC Programming Manual

 Section 9
PBX Configuration—[1] Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Configuration menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 199

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a
summary of status and versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 9.2 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary).

Note
Sub-Administrator-level accounts can change the settings only of sites they are authorised for.

To select a shelf in the PBX

Click one of the following buttons to view the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual: View the virtual card shelf.
• Legacy-GW1: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 1 of the
STACK-M card.
• Legacy-GW2: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 2 of the
STACK-M card.

Note
If the NSX site is selected, the Virtual, Physical, Legacy-GW1, and Legacy-GW2 buttons will not be
displayed.

To add new virtual cards to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install at the top.
2. Select the number of cards to install of that type from the Total number of cards drop-down list. An
according number of cards will fill free virtual slots.

To access card properties

PBX site is Expansion GW:
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

PBX site is NSX1000/2000:

Click Edit in the Card Property column. The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties

PBX site is Expansion GW:
1. Move the mouse pointer over a card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over the
individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

200 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

PBX site is NSX1000/2000:

Click Port Property button. The property screen for that card’s port or ports will be displayed.

To remove a card from the PBX

PBX site is Expansion GW:
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete.
3. Click OK to confirm.
The card will be removed.

Note
When deleting a physical combination card, both cards must be set to OUS before selecting Delete.

PBX site is NSX1000/2000:

1. Click Execute in the Card Delete Execute.
2. Click OK to confirm. The card will be removed.

Note
Virtual card must be set to OUS before removing the card.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (On-line mode only)

PBX site is Expansion GW:
1. Move the mouse pointer over the card. For combination physical cards, move the mouse pointer over
the individual card name.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.
PBX site is NSX1000/2000:
1. Click INS or OUS in the Status column.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To access IP-PT port properties

1. When you place the mouse cursor over the IP Phone Registration button on the Slot screen, the
following choices appear. Click an option to open a port properties programming screen:

IP-PT: For KX-NT300/KX-NT500 series IP-PTs

(→ 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property)

Standard SIP Phone: For third party SIP Phones

(→ 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property)

PC Programming Manual 201

9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Option: Opens the Site Property—Main screen.

(→ 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main)

Supported Card Types

Card Maximum Number/PBX Card Programming
V-IPEXT128: Virtual 128-Channel 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
8 (KX-NSX1000)/
VoIP Extension Card Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128
16 (KX-NSX2000)
—Card Property
V-SIPEXT128: Virtual 128-Channel 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
8 (KX-NSX1000)/
SIP Extension Card Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128
16 (KX-NSX2000)
—Card Property
V-IPGW128: Virtual 128-Channel 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
VoIP Gateway Card 2 Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—
Card Property
V-SIPGW128: Virtual 128-Channel 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
5 (KX-NSX1000)/
SIP Trunk Card Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—
8 (KX-NSX2000)
Card Property
V-IPCS16: Virtual 16 IP Cell Station 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Interface Card 16 Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—
Card Property

For more information on the virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the
Installation Manual:
→ 4.4 Virtual Cards
For information about cards supported by legacy gateway PBXs, see "System Components for Legacy
Gateways" in the KX-NSX1000/2000 Installation Manual.

Common Programming Reference Items

When programming settings for cards, extensions, and other devices using Web Maintenance Console,
depending on the screen being accessed, the following items may be listed on the screen for your
reference:
Item Description
Site Indicates the site number (1–32) of the PBX in the Multi-connection Network where
the card, extension, or device is located. For more information about Multi-
connection Networking, see 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types.

202 PC Programming Manual

 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

Item Description
Shelf Indicates the physical or virtual shelf where the card, extension, or device is located
in the PBX.
If the selected site is a KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700
• Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the Main Unit.
• Shelf "2" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 1.
• Shelf "3" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 2.
• Shelf "4" corresponds to the Expansion unit connected to EXP-M port 3.
If selected site is KX-NS1000
• Shelf "1" is the physical shelf of the KX-NS1000 PBX.
• Shelf "2" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy
Gateway 1.
• Shelf "3" corresponds to the physical shelf of the PBX connected to Legacy
Gateway 2.
Slot Indicates the slot number within the shelf where the card, extension, or device is
located.
Port Indicates the port number assigned to the extension or device.

PC Programming Manual 203

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary

9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Summary
Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
Click one of the following buttons to view a summary of the shelf in the PBX:
• Physical: View the physical card shelf.
• Virtual: View the virtual card shelf.
• Legacy-GW1: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 1 of the
STACK-M card.
• Legacy-GW2: View the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway connected to connection port 2 of the
STACK-M card.

Physical Shelf
The Site, Shelf, and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Indicates the service Card type. Available cards PC Programming Manual
Type cards installed in vary by the model of the References
the slots of the expansion gateway. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
physical shelf Configuration—Slot
(reference only). 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Card
Property
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card Property -
LCO type
9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card Property -
BRI type/PRI type
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of References
only). service. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Fault: The card is not Configuration—Slot
communicating with the
network.
Pre-Install: A card has been
added to the slot.
IDLE: No card is installed in
the slot.
Version Indicates the Version number PC Programming Manual
software version of References
the installed card 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(reference only). Configuration—Slot

Virtual Shelf
The Site, Shelf, and Slot for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

204 PC Programming Manual

 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary

Name Description Value Range Links

Slot Indicates the type of Trunk, Extension PC Programming Manual
Type card slot (reference References
only). 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Card Indicates the type of V-SIPGW4, V-IPGW4, V-IPEXT8, PC Programming Manual
Type virtual card installed V-SIPEXT8, V-SIPGW16, V-IPGW16, References
(reference only). V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPCS4, 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
V-SIPGW128, V-IPGW128, Configuration—Slot
V-IPEXT128, V-SIPEXT128,
V-IPCS16
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not communicating 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been added to
the slot.

Legacy Gateway 1 Shelf/Legacy Gateway 2 Shelf

Name Description Value Range Links
Card Indicates the type of Card type. Available cards vary PC Programming Manual
Type card installed by the model of the legacy References
(reference only). gateway. 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot
Installation Manual
References
Equipment Compatibility for
Legacy Gateways
Status Indicates the card INS: The card is in service. PC Programming Manual
status (reference OUS: The card is out of service. References
only). Fault: The card is not 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
communicating with the network. Configuration—Slot
Pre-Install: A card has been
added to the slot.
IDLE: No card is installed in the
slot.
Version Indicates the Version number PC Programming Manual
software version of References
the installed card 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(reference only). Configuration—Slot

PC Programming Manual 205

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Activation Key Status
Refreshes and displays information about activation keys provided by any activation key files on the Storage
Memory Card and by pre-installed activation keys on the mother board. To access this screen, click the
Activation Key button on the Configuration—Slot main screen.
It is possible to programme how the number of available IP Trunk channels is to be divided for H.323 and
SIP trunks. In Number of IP-GW to be used, type the number of IP Trunk channels to be used for H.323
trunks. The remaining number of IP Trunk channels will be used for SIP trunks.

Note
• If you have changed the value for Number of IP-GW to be used, you must click Execute to restart
the V-IPGW cards for the change to take effect.
• You can click the Activation Key Installation link to access the Activation Key Installation screen
(see 7.6 Utility—Activation Key Installation) for installing activation keys.
• You can click the AK Detailed Info button to view the details of installed activation keys.
Trial Activation Keys
The PBX includes free trials for some PBX features that normally require activation keys. The trials have a
60-day limit. To begin using the free trials:
1. Click Activate Trial Activation Keys. A list of trial activation keys is displayed in a new window.
2. Select the check boxes next to the trial activation keys you want to activate.
3. Click OK.
The trial period for the selected trial activation keys will begin.

Trial activation keys:

• Redundancy
• CA Operator Console (user)
• System Multi-Connection
• UM Message Backup
• Auto Two-way Rec for Manager AK
• Call Centre Feature Enhancement
• Multiple CTI Interface
• External Database Synchronisation (LDAP)
• Queue Position Announcement
• Built-in ACD Report
• Expansion GW: Expansion-GW (NS300/500/700/1000) Only

Name Description Value Range Links

MPR-ID Indicates the ID number of the mother ID number of the mother board
board (reference only).
Maintenance Indicates the expiration date for the Expiration date
AK Expiration Maintenance Activation Key (reference
Date only).

206 PC Programming Manual

 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Number of Number of IP gateway channels to be 0-256
IP-GW to be used at the corresponding site.
used
Activated Indicates the type of activation keys NSX2000 Activated: NSX2000 only
Feature (reference only). NSX1000 Activated: NSX1000 only
Note that the types of activation keys Maintenance (1 year)
are subject to change without notice. Redundancy
Remote Maintenance
Note Ultimate AK for Panasonic Terminal
If Ultimate Activation Key for Users
Panasonic Terminal Users is Normal User (user)
installed, only the following Mobile User (user)
features will be displayed: Advanced User (user)
SIP Extension for 3rd Party (ch)
• NSX1000 Activated
Peripheral Device (ch)
• NSX2000 Activated IP-CS channel expansion (CS unit)
• Maintenance (1 year) IP Trunk (ch)
CA Operator Console (user)
• Remote Maintenance System Multi-Connection
• Ultimate AK for Panasonic UM Message Backup
Terminal Users Automatic Two-way Recording
Call Centre Feature Enhancement
• SIP Extension for 3rd Party (ch) Multiple CTI Interface
External Database Synchronisation
(LDAP)
Queue Position Announcement
Built-in ACD Report

Expansion GW: Expansion-GW

(NS300/500/700/1000) Only

Built-in Router: NSX Expansion

Box/KX-NS1000 only
Pre-installed Indicates the number of channels Not applicable.
provided by the mother board
(reference only).
Trial Activation Indicates the number of channels Not applicable.
Keys provided by activation key files on the
Storage Memory Card (reference
only).
Purchased Number of activation keys purchased No limit, 0-N
per site.
Total per site Indicates the total number of channels Not applicable.
provided by the mother board and
activation key files on the Storage
Memory Card (reference only).
System Total Indicates the total number of channels Not applicable.
provided by activation keys in the
Multi-connection network.

PC Programming Manual 207

9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Active Number of licences that have been No limit, 0-N
activated.

208 PC Programming Manual

 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

System Property
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.

Main
Value
Name Description Links
Range
DSP CODEC G.711 only Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 Enable,
(SIP extension) codec for SIP extension calls. Disable
DSP CODEC G.711 only Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 Enable,
(IP-GW) codec for IP trunk calls. Disable
DSP CODEC Priority-1 Specifies whether or not to only use the priority 1 Enable,
value only (others) codec set for the following types of calls: Disable
• IP extension calls
• SIP trunk calls

System Status
Name Description Value Range Links
CPU Usage Displays the system CPU’s current processor load, 1.00–100.00%
expressed as a percentage of total capacity (reference
only).
Memory Displays the amount of system memory currently being 1.00–100.00%
Usage used, displayed as a percentage of total capacity (reference
only).
Storage Displays the capacity and used space of the pre-installed 1.00–100.00%
Usage SSD of the KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 main unit as a
percentage.
Storage Displays the capacity and used space of the expansion SSD 0.00–100.00%,
Usage for the KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 main unit as a －: (not
(Option) percentage. installed)
Storage Displays the amount of storage for logs currently being used 0–100%
Usage (for for the KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000 main unit as a
Log) percentage.

Multisite
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for Detection feature for the G.711 codec. This
G.711 feature conserves bandwidth by detecting
silent periods during a call and suppressing
the packets of silence from being sent to
the network.
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be sent Inband, Outband (RFC2833),
out. Outband (H.245)

PC Programming Manual 209

9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones 96–127
using RFC2833. Programming this
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set
to Outband (RFC2833).
Multisite Specifies the re-sending time for message 500–8000 ms, in units of 500
message communication between the Main Unit and ms
resend time Expansion Units.
(ms)
Multisite Specifies the number of seconds after 150–240 s
message which a message being re-sent between
resend expired the Main Unit and Expansion Units will
time (s) timeout if it cannot be sent.
Multisite for Specifies the first of two contiguous UDP 1024–65534
PBX UDP port ports to be used for Type 1 message
number communication between the Main Unit and
Expansion Units.

Note
The UDP port specified here and the
next contiguous port will be assigned
for transmission.
Example: If the value set here is 4560,
ports 4560 and 4561 will be assigned.
Multisite Specifies the UDP port to be used for Type 1024–65535
message UDP 2 message communication between the
port number Main Unit and Expansion Units.
Multisite Specifies the Keep Alive Time-Out time in 30, 40, 50, 60, 120, 180, 300,
Keepalive total seconds for communication between the 600, 1800, 3600 s
time Main Unit and Expansion Units.
Count of Specifies the number of multisite keep-alive 1-50
Multisite retries.
Keepalive
retries
Multisite Specifies the amount of time in seconds 300, 360, 420, 480, 540, 600,
startup required to pass before a PBX that loses its 1800, 3600 s
monitoring time connection with the Master PBX switches to
Master Backup or Isolated mode.
Master System Specifies how to obtain the Master System Obtain an IP address
IP Address IP Address automatically or manually. automatically,
This setting is not displayed when logged in Use the following IP address
to the NSX server. (1.0.0.0-253.255.255.255)

Fax
Name Description Value Range Links
Fax Main Number Specifies the main FAX 2–5 digits
number.

210 PC Programming Manual

 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property

9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

Site Property
The properties of the PBX site can be specified. When you place the mouse cursor over the Site Property
button, Main, FAX Card, and NSVM buttons are displayed. Click a button to open that site property screen.

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—Main
Overall settings for the PBX site can be specified.

Main
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Storage Indicates the size of the installed storage Card Size
Memory Size memory card (reference only).
Multisite Specifies whether the PBX may connect to Enable,
Connection other PBX sites as part of a Multi- Disable
Ability connection network.
Isolated Mode Specifies whether the PBX will continue to Enable, PC Programming
operate in Isolated mode if the PBX cannot Disable Manual References
connect to the Main Unit. 1.2.3.1 Multi-connection
Networking Survivability
Note
• This setting is available for Feature Manual
Expansion Unit PBXs in a Multi- References
connection network. 4.2.3.1 Simplified
Isolated Mode
• When this item is set to "Disable",
system functions for the site will
become unavailable if the Main Unit.
Normal Mode Specifies whether to enable Auto Recovery Enable,
Auto Recovery from Isolated Mode. Disable
Area ID for Specifies the area ID for the Logical 1–32 PC Programming
logical partition Partitioning feature of the site. This feature Manual References
is available only in a Multi-connection 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call
network. Control Log
10.9 PBX Configuration
—[2-9] System—
System Options—
Option 2—Applying
logical partitioning
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call
Limitation

PC Programming Manual 211

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the 1–512 Feature Manual
site. References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer group’s P2P Group Feature Manual
Name name (reference only). Name References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
LLDP Packet Specifies whether the PBX notifies IP-CSs Disable,
Sending Ability (KX-NS0154 only) to enable or disable the Enable
ability to send and receive LLDP packets.
IP Terminal Specifies the IP terminal registration mode Manual, Full Installation Manual
Registration for registering IP telephones to the PBX. Automatic References
Mode 5.4.1 Easy Setup
Wizard
IP-CS Specifies the registration mode for Manual, Full
Registration registering IP-CSs to the PBX. Automatic
Mode
SIP over TCP/IP Specifies whether or not to use SIP over Disable,
(V-SIPGW) *) TCP/IP protocol for the site. When this Enable
setting is enabled, SIP trunks cannot use
the UDP/IP protocol.

Note
If this setting is changed, the V-IPGW
cards and/or V-SIPGW cards installed
at the site will be deleted.

VoIP-DSP Options
The settings in this tab relate to IP extensions and IP trunks.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
IP Extension Count of Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to 0–117 Feature
BGM the mother board can send out BGM. Manual
References
2.28.1
Background
Music (BGM)
Echo Cancellation Ports Specifies the number of ports to be used 0–64
for echo cancellation.
Send Music On Hold to IP Enables the sending of hold music to an IP Disable,
trunk (for P2P trunk during a P2P connection call between Enable
conversation) an IP extension and IP trunk.

212 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.711 voice communications using the G.711 Enable
codec.
P2P Group Jitter Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Compensation Operation fax communications using the G.711 Enable
for G.711 FAX codec.
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for Disable,
Operation for G.729A communications using the G.729A codec. Enable
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
Voice for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for Voice buffer is applied for voice communications. ms
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. for Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
FAX buffer for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Max. Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for FAX buffer for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
FAX for fax communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530
Period for FAX buffer is applied for fax communications. ms
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -45– -12 dB
G.711A the G.711A codec.
DTMF Detection Level for Specifies the level of DTMF detection for -39– -6 dB
G.711Mu the G.711Mu codec.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) detects the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 (OFF) waits until another CNG signal is detected.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter signal must be detected before the PBX
proceeds the fax operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be OFF, ON
Detection Pattern detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time - SIP required for the CED (called station 100) ms
Extension identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX.

PC Programming Manual 213

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Value
Name Description Links
Range
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 1 (ON) - detects the CNG signal for SIP extensions. 250) ms
SIP Extension
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX 20 × n (n=1–
Detection Width 2 (OFF) - waits until another CNG signal is detected 250) ms
SIP Extension for SIP extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG 1–3
Detection Counter - SIP signal must be detected before the PBX
Extension proceeds the fax operation for SIP
extensions.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be Off, On
Detection Pattern - SIP detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
Extension operation for SIP extensions.
CED Signal Fixation Specifies the minimum length of time 50 × n (n=1–
Detection Time - SIP required for the CED (called station 100) ms
Extension - SIP Extension identification) signal to be detected by the
PBX for SIP extensions.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
(Network to PBX) A-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
(Network to PBX) Mu-Law signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -13–2 dB
A-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711A for SIP extensions.
T38 FAX Transmit Level Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax -7–8 dB
Mu-Law - SIP Extension signals after being converted from T.38
protocol packets, when the codec used is
G.711Mu for SIP extensions.

VoIP-DSP Options 2
The settings in this tab relate to communications within a Multi-connection network.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo cancellation ability 64 ms, 128 ms,
Ability time. Off
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB
(Down) down voice path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB

214 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak, Feature
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong Manual
References
5.2.1 IP
Proprietary
Telephone (IP-
PT)
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature Disable, Enable
Operation for G.711 for voice communications using the G.711
codec.
Jitter Compensation Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature Disable, Enable
Operation for G.729A for communications using the G.729A
codec.
Jitter Buffer Delay Min. Specifies the minimum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Specifies the maximum size of the jitter 0–200 ms
Max. for Voice buffer for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Delay Init. Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer 0–200 ms
for Voice for voice communications.
Jitter Buffer Adaptation Specifies the length of time that the jitter 1000–65530 ms
Period for Voice buffer is applied for voice
communications.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.711A) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.711Mu) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms,
(G.729A) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 50 ms,
during a conversation. The smaller this 60 ms
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.

PC Programming Manual 215

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Port Number
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024–64000 Feature Manual
Port No. (Server) system to transmit and receive RTP References
(Real-time Transfer Protocol) data. This 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
must be changed if another network Telephone (IP-PT)
application is using the same port.
For voice communications, the system
uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting
from the port number specified here.
Voice (RTP) UDP Specifies the UDP port used to transmit 1024–65535 Feature Manual
Port No. (IP-PT) and receive RTP (Real-time Transfer References
Protocol) data on the IP-PT side. This 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
must be changed if another network Telephone (IP-PT)
application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT
uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting
from the port number specified here.
NAT - Voice (RTP) Specifies the starting port number of the 1024–65535
UDP Port No. dynamic ports used for NAT Traversal.
UDP Port No. for Specifies the UDP port number used for 1024–65535 Feature Manual
SIP Extension the SIP Extension server. References
Server 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Signalling (PTAP) Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024–65535 Feature Manual
UDP Port No. V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive References
(Server) PTAP (Panasonic Telephony 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Administration Protocol) data. This must Telephone (IP-PT)
be changed if another network
application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Signalling (MGCP) Specifies the UDP port used by the 1024–65535 Feature Manual
UDP Port No. V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive References
(Server) MGCP (Media Gateway Control 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. This must be changed if Telephone (IP-PT)
another network application is using the
same port.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Signalling (MGCP) Specifies the TLS port number used for 1024-65535
TLS Port No. the MGCP signalling server.
(Server)
TLS Port No. for Specifies the TLS port number used by 1024-65535
SIP Extension the SIP extension server.
Server

216 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Firmware Update Specifies the IP-PT/IP-CS firmware 0-65535
Port No. for IP- update port number.
PT/IP-CS (Media
Relay)
LOGIN Port Specifies the port number used to login 1024–65535
Number to the PBX via the LAN.
CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to 0, 1024– Feature Manual
operate CTI via the LAN. Selecting "0" 65535 References
disables the 3rd Party CTI feature. 2.26 Computer
Telephony Integration
(CTI) Features
Built-in Specifies the port number for the 0, 1024– Feature Manual
Communication Communication Assistant (CA) 65535 References
Assistant Server application. 2.26.2 CA
(Communication
Assistant) Operator
Console
FOS Interface Port Specifies the port number used to 0, 1024– Feature Manual
Number communicate with a hotel application 65535 References
(FOS). Selecting "0" disables the FOS 2.23.4 Built-in FOS
interface. Interface
H.225 Port Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
Number protocol (call control) in an H.323
protocol suite.
RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 1–65535
protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol
suite.
QSIG Specifies the TCP port number for 1–65535
Connectionless connectionless tunnelling between
Tunnelling TCP gateway devices at different locations in
Port Number a QSIG network.
QSIG Specifies the UDP port number for 1–65535
Connectionless connectionless tunnelling between
Tunnelling UDP gateway devices at different locations in
Port Number a QSIG network.
H.323 Dynamic Specifies the starting port number from 1–65000
Port Number which 448 contiguous ports are used as
dynamic ports.

LAN Status
Name Description Value Range Links
Link-MNT/ Displays the link status. Up, Down
LAN1/LAN2/ Up is displayed when an L2 link is established.
LAN3 Down is displayed when there is no connection.

PC Programming Manual 217

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Speed-MNT/ When devices are connected and the L2 link-up 10 Mbps Half Duplex, 10
LAN1/LAN2/ is successful, its communication speed is Mbps Full Duplex, 100
LAN3 displayed. Mbps Half Duplex, 100
Mbps Full Duplex, 1Gbps,
-

Media Relay
Name Description Value Range Links
Common—NAT - Specifies the NAT device Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
External IP Address / external IP address (common). 223.255.255.254 (IP References
FQDN address), Max. 255 5.2.2.1 Simple
characters (FQDN) Remote Connection
Common—DNS Specifies the DNS interval time. 1-60
Interval Time (min)
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
NAT - MGCP Server MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. network gateway for remote 5.2.2.1 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the outside-facing 0-65535
NAT - MGCP-TLS MGCP-TLS port of the PBX-side
Server Port No. network gateway for remote
connections.
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the outside-facing 1–65535 Feature Manual
NAT - MGCP Server MGCP port of the PBX-side References
Port No. for IP-CS network gateway for remote 5.2.2.1 Simple
connections. Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type connections for IP extensions. 5.2.2.1 Simple
Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the type of Keep Alive Blank UDP, None Feature Manual
Keep Alive Packet packets to be sent out for remote References
Type for IP-CS connections for IP-CS 5.2.2.1 Simple
(KX-NS0154 only). Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the time interval 10–60 s Feature Manual
Keep Alive Packet between transmissions of Keep References
Sending Interval Time Alive packets. 5.2.2.1 Simple
(s) Remote Connection
IP Extension / IP-CS— Specifies the port number of 1–65535
NAT - FTP Server Port FTP server for IP-CS
No. (KX-NS0154 only).

218 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Extension—NAT - Specifies the outside-facing port 0–65535 (except Feature Manual
SIP Proxy Server Port of the network gateway "50xx" and "x50xx") References
No. connected to the SIP proxy 5.2.2.1 Simple
server. Remote Connection
SIP Extension—NAT Specifies the outside-facing port 0–65535 (except Feature Manual
- SIP TLS Server Port of the network gateway "50xx" and "x50xx") References
No. connected to the SIP TLS 5.2.2.1 Simple
server. Remote Connection
Option—NAT - RTP IP Specifies the RTP server’s IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Address address. If using a separate IP 223.255.255.254 References
address from Common—NAT - 5.2.2.1 Simple
External IP Address / FQDN, Remote Connection
configure this setting.
Option—NAT - SIP Specifies the outside-facing IP Blank, 1.0.0.1– Feature Manual
Proxy Server IP address or host name of the 223.255.255.254 References
Address network gateway connected to 5.2.2.1 Simple
the SIP proxy server. If using a Remote Connection
separate IP address from
Common—NAT - External IP
Address / FQDN, configure this
setting.

SIP Extension
Value
Name Description Links
Range
SIP Location Specifies the maximum length of time 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Hold Time that the PBX holds information on the References
Max. location of SIP Extensions. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
SIP Location Specifies the minimum length of time 10–3600 s Feature Manual
Hold Time Min. that the PBX holds information on the References
location of SIP Extensions. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
SIP Location Specifies the interval time that the PBX 1–10 s Feature Manual
Hold Time waits before starting to hold information References
Interval on location of SIP Extensions. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
SIP Session Specifies the minimum length of time 90–3600 s Feature Manual
Timer Min. that the PBX waits before disconnecting References
SIP sessions when no communication is 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
detected. Protocol) Extension

Echo Cancellation
The settings in this tab are for non-IP calls.

PC Programming Manual 219

9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Ability
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
(Down) voice path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak,
setting to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong

DSP Conference
Name Description Value Range Links
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
V-IPEXT side for conference path for conference calls using an extension of
a V-IPEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
V-SIPEXT side for path for conference calls using an extension of
conference a V-SIPEXT card.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
Multisite GW side for path for conference calls using a gateway
conference between sites.
Echo Cancellation Ability on Specifies the echo canceller ability time for OFF, 64 ms,
TDM side for conference conferencing using TDM circuit mode 128 ms
communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
TDM side for conference path for conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.
DSP Digital Gain (Down) on Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down -14–6 dB
TDM side for conference voice path for conferencing using TDM circuit
mode communication.
EC Gain on TDM side for Specifies the error correction gain for -14–6 dB
conference conferencing using TDM circuit mode
communication.
NLP Setting on TDM side for Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable,
conference setting for conferencing using TDM circuit Weak, Normal,
mode communication. Strong

QoS
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting for extension Specifies the type of value to be ToS
RTP*1―QoS Ability stored in the ToS field in the IP DSCP
header, it sends to IP terminals from HEX
the PBX.

220 PC Programming Manual

 9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—FAX Card

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting for extension Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0-7: When "ToS" is
RTP*1―QoS-ToS Priority field, it sends to IP terminals from the selected in QoS Ability
PBX. 0-63: When "DSCP" is
selected in QoS Ability
00-FF: When "HEX" is
selected in QoS Ability
Setting for extension Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal
RTP*1―QoS-ToS Type when "ToS" is selected in Setting for Monetary Cost
extension RTP―QoS Ability Reliability
Throughput
Delay
Setting for multi- Specifies the type of value to be ToS
connection signalling stored in the ToS field in the IP DSCP
(SSAP/PSAP)*2―QoS header, it sends to other sites from the HEX
Ability PBX.
Setting for multi- Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0-7: When "ToS" is
connection signalling field, it sends to other sites from the selected in QoS Ability
(SSAP/PSAP)*2―QoS- PBX 0-63: When "DSCP" is
ToS Priority selected in QoS Ability
00-FF: When "HEX" is
selected in QoS Ability
Setting for multi- Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal
connection signalling when "ToS" is selected in Setting for Monetary Cost
(SSAP/PSAP)*2―QoS- multi-connection signalling (SSAP/ Reliability
ToS Type PSAP)―QoS Ability Throughput
Delay

*1 Applies to downlink communication from the PBX main unit to the IP terminals. The QoS setting of the IP terminals is configured
individually for each terminal.
*2 Any setting changes made at a site in the multi-connection network will be applied to the settings of all sites, including the master
site.

9.5.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—FAX Card
Information and settings for the FAX Card for the PBX site can be confirmed and specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Status Indicates if a FAX Card is installed in the PBX (reference Installed, None
only).
Version Indicates the version of the FAX Card firmware Version Number
(reference only).
FAX Extension Specifies the extension number assigned to the FAX Extension number
number Card for making and receiving faxes directly from the
PBX.

PC Programming Manual 221

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—NSVM

9.5.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site

Property—NSVM
Settings related to audio quality and sound detection for the PBX site can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. -14–6 dB
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to Disable, Weak,
control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Disable,
Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 Enable
cannot be received accurately at the destination, this
feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to
enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 CNG signal.
(ON)
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the CNG signal pattern to be detected OFF, ON
Detection Pattern before the PBX proceeds the fax operation.
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of time of silence that the PBX 1000–60000
Time will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Maximum Continuous Specifies the length of time of a continuous tone that 1000–60000
Tone Time the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)
Unique Cyclic Tone Specifies whether the system will detect the end of a Disable,
Detection call when there is a unique cyclic tone. Enable
Maximum Cyclic Tone Specifies the length of time of a continuing cyclic 1000–60000
Time tone that the PBX will detect as the end of a call. (ms)

222 PC Programming Manual

 9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Property—UM System Property

9.6 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—UM Property—UM System Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system can be specified.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Cancellation Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice -14–6 dB
(Down) path.
DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice -14–6 dB
path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting Disable, Weak,
to control echo sound quality. Normal, Strong
FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability Disable, Enable
feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than
G.711 cannot be received accurately at the
destination, this feature automatically switches the
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal
relay over the network.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 1 (ON) the CNG signal.
CNG Signal Effective Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits until 20–5000 ms
Detection Width 2 another CNG signal is detected.
(OFF)
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must 1–3
Detection Counter be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax
operation.
CNG Signal Fixation Specifies whether or not the Unified Messaging OFF, ON
Detection Pattern system will respond to CNG signals.

PC Programming Manual 223

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—UM Property—UM Port Property

9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—UM Property—UM Port Property
The properties of the Unified Messaging (UM) system’s ports can be specified.

Main
The Port for each item is displayed for your reference. For details, see Common Programming Reference
Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number number of the port. of 0–9)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in PC Programming
change the status of the port, service. Manual References
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of 9.1 PBX Configuration—
column, and then select INS service. [1-1] Configuration—Slot–
or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not To change the status (INS/
This option is only available communicating with the OUS) of a card (On-line
in On-line mode. network. mode only)
External Specifies the Unified Enable, Disable
Message Messaging extensions for the
Delivery External Message Delivery
Outgoing Call feature.
UM
Extensions
COS Specifies the COS of the UM 1–512 PC Programming
port. Manual References
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings

224 PC Programming Manual

 9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property—Port Type View

9.8 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property—Port Type View
Displays the number of connected telephones, devices, and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can be
accessed from the Port Property screen of any extension cards in use in the PBX system, including
extension cards of legacy gateways. For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration
—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2. For information about extension cards for
legacy gateways, refer to the documentation for the legacy gateway PBX.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Type Indicates the types of telephones, IP-EXT, SIP, New - DPT PC Programming
devices, or CSs (reference only). (KX-DT300 series/KX-DT500 Manual References
series DPTs), Old - DPT 9.1 PBX Configuration
(DPTs other than KX-DT300 —[1-1] Configuration—
series/KX-DT500 series), APT Slot
(15V), SLT, DSS Console,
UM, Other, CS, High-density
CS, IP-CS, New-DPT
(KX-DT300 series/KX-DT500
series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs
other than KX-DT300
series/KX-DT500 series)
Total Indicates the total number of each Not applicable. PC Programming
Count type of telephone, device, and CS Manual References
connected to the PBX (reference 9.1 PBX Configuration
only). CSs are counted on the —[1-1] Configuration—
basis of the number of ports in Slot
service plus the number of
extension ports to which CSs are
connected. For details about CSs
connected to the extension cards of
legacy gateways, refer to the
documentation for the legacy
gateway PBX or the CS.

PC Programming Manual 225

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property
Common settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.
Manual programming is optional.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP Client Port Specifies the port number of the PBX 1024–65535
Number used for communications with the SIP
server.
SIP Called Specifies whether to receive a SIP trunk Disable (High->Low), Disable
Party Number call when receiving the INVITE message (Low->High), Enable
Check Ability with an incorrect target SIP-URI. The
setting specified here is also applied
when the request header is blank or
contains characters that cannot be
modified to a receivable number.
SIP Called Specifies the search mode for the notified Mode 1: Searches SIP
Party Number SIP Called Party Number information. accounts only.
Search Mode Mode 2: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the SIP
trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID
number, in ascending order
(Low → High).
Mode 3: Searches SIP
accounts, then DDI/DID
numbers. Searches the SIP
trunks of the tenant of the
search-matched DDI/DID
number, in descending order
(High → Low).
Symmetric Enables this feature to request that the Disable, Enable
Response Routing SIP server sends the response back to
Ability the source IP address and port from
which the request originated.

226 PC Programming Manual

 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

100rel Ability Specifies whether to add the option tag Disable: This feature is not
100rel to the header field of the INVITE activated.
message. Enable (Active): Activates this
feature only if the other
device supports the feature.
Enable (Passive): Activates
this feature only when
requested by the other
device.
Ringback Tone Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone Disable, Enable
to Outside Caller to an outside caller when the network
cannot send the tone.
SIP QoS Ability Specifies the type of value to be stored in ToS, DSCP, HEX
the ToS field in the IP header.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field 0–7
Priority when "ToS" is selected in Main.
SIP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type when "ToS" is selected in Main. Reliability, Throughput, Delay

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
SIP T1 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE requests 5–255 × 100 ms
and responses.
SIP T2 Specifies the retransmission interval time for INVITE responses 40–255 × 100 ms
and non-INVITE requests.

NAT Traversal 1-8

If the selected site is an expansion gateway, only the NAT Traversal 1 tab is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Name Specifies the name of NAT Traversal Max. 20
configuration. This value is displayed in NAT characters
Traversal Table in 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port
Property—NAT
NAT Traversal Specifies the NAT traversal method. Off, Fixed IP
Addr., STUN
– STUN: A STUN Server, used alongside the
SIP Server, finds out the global IP address of
the router with NAT enabled.
– Fixed IP Addr.: The global IP address of the
router with NAT enabled is fixed.

Note
Manual programming is optional except when
programming is required depending on the
network conditions.

PC Programming Manual 227

9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property

Name Description Value Range Links

NAT - Voice Specifies the starting port number of the dynamic 1024–65535
(RTP) UDP Port ports used for NAT Traversal.
No.
NAT - Keep Specifies whether to send Keep Alive packets in Disable, Enable
Alive Packet order to maintain the NAT binding information.
Sending Ability This setting may be compulsory depending on
the network conditions.
NAT - Keep Specifies the type of Keep Alive packets to be Blank UDP, None
Alive Packet Type sent out.
NAT - Keep Specifies the interval time until the next Keep 1–60 s
Alive Packet Alive packet is sent.
Sending Interval
Note
This interval must be shorter than the NAT
binding time of the router. The default value is
appropriate in most cases.
NAT - Fixed Specifies the global IP address of the router with 1.0.0.0–
Global IP Address NAT enabled. This setting is compulsory if Fixed 223.255.255.255
IP Addr. is selected in NAT Traversal.
STUN Ability Specifies whether to open a protocol port of the Disable, Enable
STUN server to enable STUN feature.
STUN Client Specifies the port number of the PBX used for 1024–65535
Port Number communications with the STUN server.
This can be changed only in the NAT Traversal 1
tab.
STUN External Specifies the number of times that a query is 0–8
Address Detection retried when no response is received from the
Retry Counter STUN server.
STUN Specifies the length of time until a query is retried 0–1600 ms
Resending Interval when no response is received from the STUN
server.

228 PC Programming Manual

 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Card Property

9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW128—Card Property
Common card settings for all of the V-SIPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
DNS SRV Record Specifies whether to request that the DNS server Disable,
Resolve Ability translates domain names into IP addresses using the DNS Enable
SRV record. Click Common Settings to change this
setting.

PC Programming Manual 229

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
Programming Port Properties
Some of the parameters can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP provider for each
virtual SIP gateway port.

Icon Description
In this section, the following icons show the different parameter type.
Icon Description for Parameter Type
Programmed automatically by selecting the desired SIP provider in Select Provider.
Manual programming is compulsory.

Manual programming is compulsory under certain conditions.

Manual programming is optional.

Automatic Programming
Some of the parameters on this screen can be automatically programmed by selecting the desired SIP
provider for each virtual SIP gateway port.
Follow the steps below to configure a SIP provider.
1. Click Select Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. From the Provider menu, select the desired SIP provider.
3. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to be assigned to the SIP provider selected in step 2.
4. Click Execute.
5. Click OK.
6. Click Apply.
Appropriate setting values designated by the SIP provider will be set in the parameters for the virtual SIP
gateway ports.

Manual Programming
Follow the steps below to programme the parameters which are not automatically programmed by selecting
a provider.
1. Click a desired tab.
2. Enter information or select from the list for each parameter.
Adding Settings to Provider Profiles
Follow the steps below to add the settings to provider profiles.
1. Click Add Provider.
A dialogue box will appear. Available virtual SIP gateway port numbers are displayed in the list.
2. Highlight the desired port numbers or click Select All to select all the virtual SIP gateway port numbers
to add the settings to provider profiles.
3. Click Execute.

230 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be
set are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click Next. The Set Trunk Adaptor window will open.
7. In Virtual SIP Gateway - Port Property - No. Range, specify From and To to select a range of SIP
connections to be used with the Trunk Adaptor. These numbers correspond to the No. column of the
main Port Property screen.
8. In Name : IP Address, select a name and IP address previously entered on the Trunk Adaptor List
screen.
9. In SIP Server Port Number, enter the SIP server’s port number.
10. In SIP Account / User Name, enter a 3- to 5-digit number in From.
11. Click Finish, and the following settings are implemented:
• Provider Name and SIP Server IP Address in the Main tab will be set to match the selected Trunk
Adaptor.
• User Name and Authentication ID in the Account tab will be set to the value specified in SIP
Account / User Name, increased by 1 for each connection (i.e. if "401" was specified, User Name
and Account for No. 1 will be set to "401", and then for No. 2 they will be set to "402", etc.).
12. In the Calling Party tab of the V-SIPGW—Port Property screen, set Calling Party to PBX-CLIP for
each port that was set to be used with the Trunk Adaptor.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS Fault: The port is not
or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Connection Specifies whether to connect SIP Provider, Trunk Adaptor Feature
Attribute a port to a Trunk Adaptor or Manual
use it as a SIP gateway. References
5.3.2 Trunk
Adaptor
Connection

PC Programming Manual 231

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Trunk Property Specifies the networking type Public, VPN, VPN (E.164)
of each SIP trunk.

Note
If Main is set to "Trunk
Adaptor" for the port, only
"Public" will be available
for this setting.
Channel Attribute Specifies the channel Basic channel: The
property of each port to subscriber channel that is
enable several sessions to be assigned the SIP registration
performed for one information.
subscription with the SIP Additional channel for SlotN
provider. (N=Slot number) ChN (N=1–
128): The subordinate
channel that uses the same
registration information as a
Basic channel for SIP
sessions. Select the Slot
number and the Basic
channel number to which the
Additional channel belongs.
Not Used: The channel is
not in use.

Note
• The Basic channel
and Additional
channel can belong to
different V-SIPGW
cards.
• When you save the
data on the Main
screen, for each
virtual SIP gateway
port that has Channel
Attribute set to Basic
channel, the following
items are checked for
duplication: SIP
Server Name, SIP
Server IP Address,
and SIP Service
Domain.
Provider Name Specifies the name of the SIP Max. 20 characters
provider.

232 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Server Name Specifies the domain name of Max. 100 characters Installation
the SIP proxy server. Manual
References
Note
6.3 SIP Trunks
Specify the domain name
of the outbound proxy
server, if provided by the
SIP provider.
SIP Server IP Specifies the IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address the SIP proxy server. This
setting is compulsory when
not using the DNS server.

Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy
server, if provided by the
SIP provider.
SIP Server IP Specifies the IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address for Failover the SIP proxy server for
failover.

Note
Specify the IP address of
the outbound proxy server
for failover, if provided by
the SIP provider.
This setting cannot be
changed while the
V-SIPGW card is set to
INS.
SIP Server Port Specifies the port number of 1–65535
Number the SIP proxy server.
SIP Service Specifies the domain name Max. 100 characters
Domain provided by the SIP provider.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting of
Number the CLIP number. 0–9, , and #)

PC Programming Manual 233

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Backup Specifies if the port will be Normal, Backup PC
used in Master Backup mode Programming
to perform the functions of a Note Manual
port on the Main Unit PBX The "Backup" setting is References
when the Main Unit PBX fails. only effective when the
1.2.3.1 Multi-
site the card is installed
connection
in is designated as the
Networking
Master Backup unit.
Survivability
Feature
Manual
References
4.2.3 Multi-
connection
Networking
Survivability

Account
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in
of the port, click the desired cell in the column, service.
and then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
User Name* Specifies the user name (SIP Account) Max. 64 characters
provided by the SIP provider.
Authentication Specifies the authentication ID required for Max. 64 characters
ID* registration with the SIP server.
Authentication Specifies the authentication password used for Max. 32 characters
Password* registration with the SIP provider.
1. Click the Edit button. The Password
screen is displayed.
2. Enter the new password and then enter it
again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.

* The available characters are following to RFC3986.

"0" － "9"
"a" － "z"
"A" － "Z"
"-", ".", "_", ":", "/", "?", "#", "[", "]", "@", "!", "$", "&", "'", "(", ")", "*", "+", ",", ";", "="

Other characters are not allowed.

234 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Register
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. INS: The port is
To change the status of in service.
the port, click the desired OUS: The port is
cell in the column, and out of service.
then select INS or OUS Fault: The port is
for the port. not
This option is only communicating
available in On-line with the network.
mode.
Register Specifies whether to send Disable, Enable
Ability the REGISTER message
to the SIP server.
Register Specifies the maximum 10–86400 s
Sending length of interval time
Interval after which the PBX
sends the REGISTER
message.
Un-Register Specifies whether to Disable, Enable
Ability when unregister the previous
port INS registration and send the
REGISTER message to
the SIP server when the
port status is set back to
INS.
Registrar Specifies the domain Max. 100 Installation Manual References
Server Name name of the SIP server. characters 6.3 SIP Trunks
Registrar Specifies the IP address 1.0.0.0–
Server IP of the SIP server. This 223.255.255.255
Address setting is compulsory
when a register IP
address is provided.

PC Programming Manual 235

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Registrar Specifies the IP address 1.0.0.0–
Server IP of the SIP registrar server 223.255.255.255
Address for for failover.
Failover
Note
Specify the IP
address of the
outbound registrar
server for failover, if
provided by the SIP
provider.
This setting cannot be
changed while the
V-SIPGW card is set
to INS.
Registrar Specifies the port number 1–65535
Server Port of the SIP server.
Number
Register Specifies the interval time 1-65535 s
Resending for resending the
Interval (s) REGISTER message.

NAT
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, click service.
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out of
then select INS or OUS for the service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
NAT Selects the NAT traversal PBX site is Main Unit: PC Programming
Traversal configuration to apply to the port. 1-8: Name, None Manual
Table For details about NAT traversal PBX site is Expansion References
settings, see 9.9 PBX Gateway: 1: Name, None
9.9 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
Configuration—[1-1]
—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf
Configuration—Slot—
Property—NAT Traversal 1-8.
V-SIPGW128—Shelf
Property—NAT
Traversal 1-8
STUN Specifies the domain name of a Max. 100 characters Installation
Server—Name STUN server. Manual
References
6.3 SIP Trunks

236 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

STUN Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Server—IP STUN server. This setting is
Address compulsory when the STUN
method is selected and a DNS
server is not used.
STUN Specifies the port number of the 1–65535
Server Port STUN server.
Number

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or OUS for the OUS: The port is out of
port. service.
This option is only available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Session Timer Enables the PBX to periodically refresh SIP Disable: This feature is
Ability sessions by sending repeated requests. not activated.
Enable (Active):
Activates this feature
only if the other device
supports the feature.
Enable (Passive):
Activates this feature
only when requested by
the other device.
Session Expire Specifies the length of time that the PBX 90–3600 s
Timer waits before terminating SIP sessions when
no reply to the repeated requests is received.
Session Refresh Specifies the type of request that the PBX UPDATE, re-INVITE
Method sends to periodically refresh SIP sessions.
Session Incoming Specifies the type of method used for UAC, UAS
Refresher Request establishing the session interval.
SIP 200 Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a SIP 0–18000 × 100 ms
Timer (*100 ms) 200 (OK) response when establishing a
connection between two parties. (Specifying
"0" will disable the timer.)
SIP 18x Response Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 18x 0–255 s
Timer (s) response when establishing a connection
between two parties.

PC Programming Manual 237

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Proxy-Require Specifies option tags in a Proxy-Require Max. 100 characters
Option header field so that the SIP server is notified
that the client is behind a router with NAT
enabled and firewall.
Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(INVITE) response for an INVITE request.
Failover Specifies the amount of time to wait for a 0–30 s
Timer(REGISTER) response for a REGISTER request.

Note
• If 0 is specified, failover operation
follows the T1/T2 timer.
• While monitoring failover with
OPTIONS, the applicable timer setting
is applied to OPTIONS as well.
• This setting cannot be changed while
the V-SIPGW card is set to INS.
• This setting cannot be changed when
an additional channel is active.

Calling Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the network.
This option is only available in On-
line mode.
Header Type Specifies the header of the SIP From Header, P-Preferred-
message in which the caller Identity Header
information is stored.
From Header— Specifies the value to be stored in User Name, Authentication ID,
User Part the username part of the SIP-URI of PBX-CLIP
the From header.
From Header— Specifies the complete SIP-URI Max. 100 characters
SIP-URI address of the From header. The
configuration in From Header—User
Part will be invalid if this parameter is
set.
P-Preferred- Specifies the value to be stored in User Name, Authentication ID,
Identity Header— the username part of the SIP-URI of PBX-CLIP
User Part the P-Preferred-Identity header.

238 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P-Preferred- Specifies the complete SIP-URI Max. 100 characters
Identity Header— address of the P-Preferred-Identity
SIP-URI header. The configuration in
P-Preferred-Identity Header—User
Part will be invalid if this parameter is
set.
Number Format Selects the format of the CLIP International, +International,
number to be sent to the called party. National
Remove Digit Specifies the number of leading digits 0–32
of the CLIP number to be removed.
This setting is compulsory when
PBX-CLIP is selected in From
Header—User Part or P-Preferred-
Identity Header—User Part.
Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to Max. 20 digits (consisting of 0–9,
the CLIP number in the place of the *, and #)
removed digits. This setting is
compulsory when PBX-CLIP is
selected in From Header—User
Part or P-Preferred-Identity Header
—User Part.
Anonymous Specifies the format of the "From" Display name and SIP-URI,
format in "From" header when not sending caller ID. Display name only
header
Note
If "Display name and SIP-
URI" is selected, the display
name part and the SIP-URI of
the "From" header will be
displayed as "Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous
<sip:anonymous@anonymo
us.invalid>
If "Display name only" is
selected, only the display
name part of the "From"
header will be displayed as
"Anonymous".
[Example]
From: Anonymous <sip:
[email protected]>

PC Programming Manual 239

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P-Asserted- Select whether to include a Disable, Enable
Identity Header P-Asserted-Identity header with caller
information. This header will be sent Note
independent of the selection for • To copy values from one
Calling Party (From Header/ location to another, click
P-Preferred-Identity Header). Copy to.
• If the Channel Attribute
setting of the port is
"Additional", the setting
cannot be changed.

Called Party
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Number Format Specifies the format of an incoming call International,
number. +International, National
Type Specifies the header of the incoming SIP Request-URI, To header
message in which the dialled number is
stored.
MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access prefix Max. 16 characters
Incoming/E.164 - for incoming calls from MEX-enabled
Prefix for own mobile devices.
system
MEX - Prefix for Specifies the Mobile Device Access Max. 16 characters
Outgoing/E.164 - outgoing prefix for calls made to MEX-
Prefix for other enabled mobile devices.
system
MEX/E.164 - Specifies additional digits to be inserted Max. 7 digits (consisting of
Additional Dial before the dialled number of an incoming 0–9, *, and #)
call from a MEX-enabled mobile device.

Voice/FAX
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

240 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A,
Priority—1st, 2nd, used. None is only available for 2nd and None
3rd 3rd priorities.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.711Mu) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms,
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data 60 ms
(G.729A) during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
Informed Specifies whether to inform that Annex B Disable, Enable
Annex B Status for the G.729 codec is not supported.
(G.729A) Note
Annex B expansion
features for the G.729
codec are not supported
by the V-SIPGW card.
However, it is necessary
to inform some carriers of
this fact to avoid having
calls disconnected.
Carriers can be informed
by enabling this feature.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit, 2400 bps,
Rate signal. 4800 bps, 7200 bps, 9600
bps, 12000 bps, 14400 bps

PC Programming Manual 241

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable
Ability Ability feature. This feature enables end-
to-end fax signal relay when the other
party prefers a codec other than G.711.
This feature functions only if the other
party supports G.711.
DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband (RFC2833),
tones. Outband (SIP INFO)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type of RFC2833 for 96–127
(DTMF) DTMF tones.

Note
Manual programming is required if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
Payload Type Specifies the payload type (RED / 8000). 96–127
(RED / 8000)
Number of Specifies the number of redundancy 0–3
Redundancy (RED / 8000).
(RED / 8000)

RTP/RTCP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or OUS for the service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line mode. communicating with the
network.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in ToS, DSCP, HEX
Ability the ToS field in the IP header.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS field. 0–7
Priority
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary Cost,
Type Reliability, Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable each port to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the interval time until the next 5–60 s
Interval RTCP packet is sent.

242 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Keep Alive Specifies the length of time to send Keep 0 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 40 s,
Timer Alive packets for the connection. Specifying 50 s, 60 s
"0 s" will disable the sending of Keep Alive
packets.

T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for messages when using the T.38 protocol.
T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for when using the T.38 protocol.
data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF, Local
Management Method when using the T.38 protocol. TCF
Reject T.38 Request Specifies whether T.38 protocol data Disable, Enable
from Network requests are rejected or accepted.
T.38 FAX NAT Specifies the NAT Traversal packet type Disable, Blank UDP
Traversal when sending or receiving faxes using the
T.38 protocol.

T.38 Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.

PC Programming Manual 243

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored in the ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available ToS field in the IP header when using the T.38
protocol.
T38 FAX Specifies the priority level in the ToS field when 0–7
QoS-ToS Priority using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field when Normal, Monetary Cost,
QoS-ToS Type using the T.38 protocol. Reliability, Throughput,
Delay
T38 FAX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a DSCP for 0–63
QoS-DSCP DiffServ when using the T.38 protocol. This
setting is compulsory when DSCP is selected in
T38 FAX QoS Available.
T38 FAX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
QoS-HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory when HEX is
selected in T38 FAX QoS Available.

DSP
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Echo Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 ms
Canceller Ability
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB
Gain (Down) down voice path.
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up -14–6 dB
Gain (Up) voice path.
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) Disable, Weak, Normal,
setting to control echo sound quality. Strong

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

244 PC Programming Manual

 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
CLIP (Receive) Specify where caller information about P-Asserted-Identity Header,
an incoming call is obtained: From Header
• Prioritised: P-Asserted-Identity→P- Note
Preferred-Identity→From Header
• To copy values from
• Fixed: From Header one location to another,
click Copy to.
• If the Channel
Attribute setting of the
port is "Additional", the
setting cannot be
changed.
CLIR Specifies whether to allow restriction of Yes, No
the display of the CLIP number on the
called party’s telephone when making a
SIP CO line call.
CNIP (Send) Specifies whether to send the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when making a SIP
CO line call.
CNIP (Receive) Specifies whether to receive the caller’s Yes, No
name to be displayed on the called
party’s telephone when receiving a SIP
CO line call.
Blind Specifies whether to allow blind Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) transfers using REFER.
Attended Specifies whether to allow attended Yes, No
Transfer(REFER) transfers using REFER.

Advanced
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status INS: The port is in service.
of the port, click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or OUS for the service.
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line mode. communicating with the
network.

PC Programming Manual 245

9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Diversion Enable this setting to allow the specified SIP Disable, Enable
Header trunks to detect incoming Mobile Device
Access calls from MEX-enabled mobile
devices.

246 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPGW128—Card Property
Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Gatekeeper Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. Disable, Enable
Available
RTCP Packet Specifies whether to enable the PBX to Disable, Enable
Sending Ability send RTCP packets.
RTCP Packet Specifies the length of time until the 5–60 s
Interval PBX retries to send RTCP packets
when no reply is received.
RTP QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field of the packet.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
Priority field.
RTP QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Normal, Monetary
Type Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
RTP QoS-DSCP Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP for DiffServ.
RTP QoS-HEX Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
hexadecimal number.
T38 FAX QoS Specifies the type of value to be stored ToS, DSCP, HEX
Available in the ToS field in the IP header when
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS-ToS Specifies the priority level in the ToS 0–7
Priority field when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX QoS-ToS Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field Normal, Monetary
Type when using the T.38 protocol. Cost, Reliability,
Throughput,
Delay
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 0–63
DSCP DSCP for DiffServ when using the T.38
protocol. This setting is compulsory
when DSCP is selected in T38 FAX
QoS Available.
T38 FAX QoS- Specifies the value in the ToS field by a 00–FF
HEX hexadecimal number when using the T.
38 protocol. This setting is compulsory
when HEX is selected in T38 FAX QoS
Available.

PC Programming Manual 247

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, 128 Feature Manual
Ability ms References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Down) down voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
DSP Digital Gain Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
(Up) up voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Weak, Feature Manual
Processor) setting to control echo sound Normal, Strong References
quality. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.4 Call
Transfer (CT)—by
QSIG
QSIG-CF Enables a call to be forwarded to a No, Yes Feature Manual
destination extension at another PBX in References
a QSIG network. 4.3.4.3 Call
Forwarding (CF)—
by QSIG
Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each Public, Private,
trunk. VPN

Outgoing Call
Name Description Value Range Links
First-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a 5–30 s
(T302-1) dial number must be dialled after seizing a virtual IP trunk.
Inter-digit Timer Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits 1–10 s
(T302-2) of a dial number must be dialled.
Dial End Code Specifies the delimiter code to be used to signal the end of 0–9, #, *
a dialled number.

248 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property

Incoming Call
Name Description Value Range Links
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for G. Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
Voice Codec Specifies the highest priority codec type. G.711A, G.711Mu,
Priority 1st For fax communications, it is necessary G.729A
to specify G.711A or G.711Mu for this
parameter.
Voice Codec Specifies the second highest priority None, G.711A, G.
Priority 2nd codec type. 711Mu, G.729A
Voice Codec Specifies the third highest priority codec None, G.711A, G.
Priority 3rd type. 711Mu, G.729A
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.711Mu measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40
Time for G.729A measurements (samples) of sound data ms, 50 ms, 60 ms
during a conversation. The smaller this
number, the higher the quality of the
transmitted sound.
FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC
Ability Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Programming
codec other than G.711 cannot be Manual
received accurately at the destination, References
this feature automatically switches the
9.12 PBX
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax
Configuration—
signal relay over the network.
[1-1]
Configuration—
Slot—V-IPGW128
—Card Property
—Incoming Call—
Voice Codec
Priority 1st
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.

PC Programming Manual 249

9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum Bit Rate Specifies the maximum bit rate of the No Speed Limit,
fax signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone to be Inband, Outband
sent out. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming
this parameter is only necessary if
DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram size 272–512
Datagram when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable
Error Correction – redundancy feature when using the T.38
Redundancy protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count messages when using the T.38 protocol.
for T.30 messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count when using the T.38 protocol.
for data
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Management when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF
Method

Timer
Name Description Value Range Links
T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–18000 × 100 ms
making a call.
T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–600 × 100 ms
incoming call. Applies to overlap receiving.
T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the SETUP (call setting) message.
T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an 0–3000 × 100 ms
outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the DISC (disconnection) message.
T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
receiving the Release message.
T309 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
the data link, before disconnecting the call.

250 PC Programming Manual

 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property

Name Description Value Range Links

T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance 0–3000 × 100 ms
message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message.
T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Connect message.
T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–3000 × 100 ms
sending the Restart message.
T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Resume message.
T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Suspend message.
T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after 0–600 × 100 ms
sending the Status enquiry message.
T3D3 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to establish 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Permanent" mode.
T3D9 Specifies the length of time after which the PBX tries to disconnect 0–3000 × 100 ms
L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

PC Programming Manual 251

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—GateKeeper Property

9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPGW128—GateKeeper Property
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Signalling Model Specifies whether to carry out a call Direct, GateKeeper
control (H.225) process directly between
the cards or through a gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper Specifies the time between periodic 0 (disabled), 1–1440
Connection Checking checks of connection to the gatekeeper.
Interval (*60s)
Terminal type to Specifies the connection service type Terminal, Gateway
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper ID to Specifies the authentication ID notified to Max. 20 Characters
Gatekeeper the gatekeeper.
Bandwidth to Specifies the used bandwidth information 0: 10 kbps
Gatekeeper notified to the gatekeeper. 1–255 kbps
Primary Gatekeeper IP Specifies the IP address of the primary 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address gatekeeper.
Primary Gatekeeper Specifies the port number of the primary 1–65535
Port Number gatekeeper.
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the IP address of the secondary 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
IP Address gatekeeper.
Secondary Gatekeeper Specifies the port number of the 1–65535
Port Number secondary gatekeeper.

252 PC Programming Manual

 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property

9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPGW128—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Incoming Settings
Clicking Incoming Settings, DN to Call Distribution Port Group screen is displayed.
See 9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call
Distribution Port Group.

Outgoing Settings
If Gatekeeper Available is set to Disable:
Clicking Outgoing Settings, DN to Gateway screen is displayed.
See 9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Gateway.
If Gatekeeper Available is set to Enable:
Clicking Outgoing Settings, GK Settings screen is displayed.
See 9.14.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—GK Settings.
*About Gatekeeper Available setting, see 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
V-IPGW128—Card Property.

Trunk Adaptor
To connect to a Trunk Adaptor, follow the steps below.
1. Ensure that the Trunk Adaptor is connected to the network and a power supply, and that all ports to be
set are OUS.
2. Click Trunk Adaptor. The Trunk Adaptor List screen is displayed.
3. Enter a name (20 characters or less) for the Trunk Adaptor in Trunk Adaptor Name.
4. Enter the Trunk Adaptor’s IP address in Trunk Adaptor IP Address.
5. To confirm that the setting is correct, click CONNECT. If the setting is correct, the Trunk Adaptor’s Web
Maintenance Console will open in a new browser window.
For details about the Trunk Adaptor’s Web Maintenance Console, refer to the documentation of the
Trunk Adaptor.
6. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of
or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Connection Specifies whether to connect a port to Gateway, Trunk Adaptor Feature Manual
Attribute a Trunk Adaptor or use it as an IP References
gateway. 5.3.2 Trunk
Adaptor
Connection

PC Programming Manual 253

9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call Distribution Port
Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies a call distribution port group 1–48 Feature Manual
Distribution to which incoming trunk calls are References
Port Group directed through the virtual VoIP 4.3.2.3 Call
gateway port. Distribution Port
Group

9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call Distribution Port Group
The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route
incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX.
A maximum of 16 hunt patterns can be programmed.

Hunt Pattern 1–16

Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading digits of Max. 30 digits
Number dialled numbers by which to (consisting of 0–9)
determine the call distribution
port group to direct incoming
calls.
Call Distribution Specifies the number of the For 1st: PC Programming Manual
Port Group— call distribution port group to CDPG1–CDPG48 References
1st–16th which incoming calls are For 2nd–16th: 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
directed in priority. None, CDPG1– Configuration—Slot—
CDPG48 V-IPGW128—Port Property—
Call Distribution Port Group
Feature Manual
References
4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port
Group

9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Gateway
The properties of the PBX system can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which Max. 30 digits
to associate calls with the appropriate destination. (consisting of 0–9)
Remaining Specifies the number of digits to be dialled following 0–29
Number of Digits the leading number to access the destination.
GW No./GW Specifies the type of destination when making calls: a GW Group, GW
Group Selection gateway device or a gateway group. No.
GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. 1–256
This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group
Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.

254 PC Programming Manual

 9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Gateway

Name Description Value Range Links

GW No. Specifies the number of the destination gateway 1–512
device. This setting is only available when GW No./GW
Group Selection on this screen is set to GW No..

GW Settings–Main
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
GW IP Address Specifies the IP address of the destination 1.0.0.0–
gateway device. 223.255.255.255
GW Group Specifies the number of the gateway group to 1–256, None
which the gateway entry belongs. A maximum of
256 gateway groups can be created.
Connection for Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable (TDE/NCP),
IP-GW feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/ Enable (TDA)
KX-TDAIP-GW cards.
Protocol Specifies the type of protocol for connectionless TCP, UDP
tunnelling between gateway devices at different
locations in a QSIG network.
Progress Tone Specifies whether to send call progress tones to External, Internal
Send Mode the destination. When selecting External, call
progress tones are audible at the destination.

GW Settings–Codec
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway Max. 20 characters
device for programming reference.
IP Codec Specifies the priority of the codecs to be used. For 1st:
Priority—1st, For fax communications, it is necessary to G.711A, G.711Mu, G.
2nd, 3rd specify G.711A or G.711Mu for 1st priority. 729A
For 2nd and 3rd:
None, G.711A, G.711Mu,
G.729A
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.711Mu) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time measurements (samples) of sound data during a ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) conversation. The smaller this number, the
higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

PC Programming Manual 255

9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Gateway

GW Settings–Voice/FAX
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20
gateway device for programming characters
reference.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Disable, Enable
Detection for Detection feature for the G.711 codec.
G.711 This feature conserves bandwidth by
detecting silent periods during a call and
suppressing the packets of silence from
being sent to the network.
FAX Sending Specifies the method of transporting the G.711 Inband, T.38
Method fax signal.
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of the fax No Speed Limit,
Rate signal. 2400 bps, 4800
bps, 7200 bps,
9600 bps, 12000
bps, 14400 bps
FAX Enables the use of the FAX Detection Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a Manual References
Ability codec other than G.711 cannot be 9.14.2 PBX
received accurately at the destination, Configuration—[1-1]
this feature automatically switches the Configuration—Slot—
codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax V-IPGW128—Port
signal relay over the network. Property—DN to
Gateway—GW
Settings–Codec—IP
Codec Priority—1st,
2nd, 3rd
DTMF Specifies the method to transport DTMF Inband, Outband
tones. (RFC2833),
Outband (H.245)
Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF 96–127
tones using RFC2833. Programming this
parameter is only necessary if DTMF is
set to Outband (RFC2833).

GW Settings–T.38
Name Description Value Range Links
GW Name Specifies the name of the destination Max. 20
gateway device for programming reference. characters
T38 FAX Max Datagram Specifies the maximum datagram size when 272–512
using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX UDPTL Error Specifies whether to enable the redundancy Disable, Enable
Correction – Redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol.

256 PC Programming Manual

 9.14.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—GK Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for T.30 0–7
Redundancy count for T.30 messages when using the T.38 protocol.
messages
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count for data 0–3
Redundancy count for data when using the T.38 protocol.
T38 FAX Rate Management Specifies the rate management method Transferred TCF,
Method when using the T.38 protocol. Local TCF

9.14.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—

V-IPGW128—Port Property—GK Settings
Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed.
Clicking Gatekeeper Property button, the Gatekeeper Property screen is displayed.
(See 9.13 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—GateKeeper Property.)
Name Description Value Range Links
Destination Specifies a telephone number to register Max. 30 digits (consisting of
Number with a gatekeeper. 0–9)
Device Name Specifies the name of the device for Max. 20 characters
programming reference.

PC Programming Manual 257

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPEXT128—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Signalling (MGCP) Indicates the UDP port used to transmit 2427 Feature Manual
UDP Port No. (IP- and receive MGCP (Media Gateway References
PT) Control Protocol) data on the IP-PT side 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
(reference only). Telephone (IP-PT)
Keep Alive Time- Specifies the length of time that the PBX Disable, 10– Feature Manual
Out will continue to consider an IP-PT to be 120 s References
active even if it receives no 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX Telephone (IP-PT)
constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs.
If no communications are received from
an IP-PT for the duration specified here,
the PBX considers the IP-PT to be
unreachable, and sets the port status to
Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and
60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable,
are used for debugging purposes, and
IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function
normally in these circumstances. Do not
use debugging settings unless
instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX 500 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Time (PTAP) waits before starting to resend PTAP 16) ms References
(Panasonic Telephony Administration 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which 150–240 s Feature Manual
Out (PTAP) the PBX terminates resending PTAP References
(Panasonic Telephony Administration 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Protocol) data. Telephone (IP-PT)
To change the value displayed here,
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX 500 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Time (MGCP) waits before starting to resend MGCP 8) ms References
(Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
To change the value displayed here, Telephone (IP-PT)
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.

258 PC Programming Manual

 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which 75–120 s Feature Manual
Out (MGCP) the PBX terminates resending MGCP References
(Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
To change the value displayed here, Telephone (IP-PT)
click Common Settings and set the
desired value.
LCD Off Timer These setting items are downloaded to Refer to the
the IP-PT. Web
Brightness when
Maintenance
colour LCD is
Console.
turned off
Automatic
switching of page
for keys
Picture display
PT Tone volume
(except the
incoming call)
NT500 series— Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, Feature Manual
Echo Canceller 128 ms References
Ability 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain down voice path. References
(Down) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 series— Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
DSP Digital Gain up voice path. References
(Up) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 series—EC Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
Gain References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT500 series— Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Feature Manual
NLP Setting Processor) setting to control echo sound Weak, References
quality. Normal, 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Strong Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300—Echo Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms, Feature Manual
Canceller Ability 128 ms References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 259

9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property

Name Description Value Range Links

NT300—DSP Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
Digital Gain down voice path. References
(Down) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300—DSP Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the -14–6 dB Feature Manual
Digital Gain (Up) up voice path. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300—EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB Feature Manual
References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
NT300—NLP Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Disable, Feature Manual
Setting Processor) setting to control echo sound Weak, References
quality. Normal, 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Strong Telephone (IP-PT)

260 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPEXT128—Port Property
The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified.

Export and Import IP-PT registration information

Clicking the Export button can export the following settings of the IP-PT (KX-NT series) in CSV file format.
• Extension Number
• Extension Name
• IP Phone Registration ID (MAC Address)
Clicking the Import button can import the above-mentioned settings of the IP-PT (KX-NT series) from the
CSV file.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.
IP-PT Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic
Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and
DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension
numbers and names are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
4. Click Next.
5. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT
will update to show "Registered".

Note
A Sub-Administrator cannot register an extension while another
Sub-Administrator is registering an extension.

PC Programming Manual 261

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and
names are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-PT will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of References
0–9) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual
port. characters References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

262 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

IP-PT Type Displays the IP-PT type of the terminal
that is currently connected or was
connected to the port. For KX-NT265, a
hyphen(-) is displayed. For IP
softphone, KX-NT3xxS is displayed.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service. References
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
OUS for the port. is out of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port
mode. is not
communicating
with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is None, Feature Manual
registered (reference only). Registered References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
IP Phone Specifies the MAC address of the IP-PT. 00:00:00:00:00: Feature Manual
Registration ID This parameter can only be modified 00– References
(MAC Address) when Connection on this screen is set FF:FF:FF:FF:FF 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
to OUS. :FF Telephone (IP-PT)
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of the 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
Address IP-PT (reference only). 223.255.255.25 References
5 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file Version number Feature Manual
version of the IP-PT (reference only). References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of References
0–9) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual
port. characters References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 263

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service. References
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
OUS for the port. is out of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port
mode. is not
communicating
with the
network.
Headset Turns on or off the use of a headset with Headset OFF, Feature Manual
OFF/ON the IP-PT. Headset ON References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
C.Waiting with When headset mode is enabled, selects PT-Tone, Feature Manual
Headset whether a call waiting tone is heard Headset References
through the telephone's speaker phone 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting
or the ear piece of the headset. Tone
However, this setting is available only
for telephones that support both EHS
headsets and waiting tone path
switching. (KX-NT556, KX-NT553 only)
Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern A: 64 ms (697 Feature Manual
of the ring tone for incoming calls. Hz), 64 ms (852 References
Hz) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
B: 32 ms (697 Telephone (IP-PT)
Hz), 32 ms (852
Hz)
C: 128 ms (697
Hz), 128 ms
(852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697
Hz), 96 ms (852
Hz)
IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for G.711, G.729A, Feature Manual
compression and decompression of G.722 References
transmitted data. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Some codecs may become unavailable Telephone (IP-PT)
depending on the value set here, as
follows:
– When G.722 is selected, the priority is
G.722 → G.711 → G.729A.
– When G.711 is selected, the priority is
G.711 → G.729A (G.722 is
unavailable).
– When G.729A is selected, both G.711
and G.722 are unavailable.

264 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, Feature Manual
Time (G.711/G. measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 60 ms References
722) during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
The smaller this number, the higher the Telephone (IP-PT)
quality of the transmitted sound.
Packet Sampling Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, Feature Manual
Time (G.729A) measurements (samples) of sound data 40 ms, 60 ms References
during a conversation. 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
The smaller this number, the higher the Telephone (IP-PT)
quality of the transmitted sound.
Announce Mode Specifies if the extension’s built-in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. A References
KX-NT300 series, or KX-NT500 series 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
phone in a remote location with Telephone (IP-PT)
ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the
PBX’s IP Address information to other
terminals in the remote location in place
of manually programming the PBX’s IP
address at each terminal.
Colour LCD Selects the Colour LCD Design Mode. Type 1, Type 2
Design Mode
IP-PT Log Sets the IP-PT Log Collection feature to Disable, Enable PC Programming
Collection Enable (KX-NT600 series only). Manual References
This item is recorded by Syslog. 7.3.2 Utility—Log—
Syslog

Voice
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the port. of 0–9) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Specifies the extension name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name the port. References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click service. References
the desired cell in the column, and OUS: The port is out of 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
then select INS or OUS for the service. Telephone (IP-PT)
port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.

PC Programming Manual 265

9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

DTMF Specifies the type of DTMF tone Inband, Outband Feature Manual
to be sent out. (RFC2833) References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Payload Specifies the payload type for 96–127 Feature Manual
Type DTMF tones using RFC2833. References
Programming this parameter is 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
only necessary if DTMF is set to Telephone (IP-PT)
Outband (RFC2833).

Remote Place (Location / P2P)

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number port. (consisting of References
0–9) 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual
port. characters References
5.2.1 IP Proprietary
Telephone (IP-PT)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service. References
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
OUS for the port. This option is only is out of service. Telephone (IP-PT)
available in On-line mode. Fault: The port
is not
communicating
with the
network.
Phone Location Specifies the type of extension Local only: The Feature Manual
connected to the port. extension is References
located on the 5.2.1 IP Proprietary
same network Telephone (IP-PT)
as the PBX
(standard
configuration).
Remote +
Local: The
extension is
accessing the
PBX remotely
(use Media
Relay
Gateway).

266 PC Programming Manual

 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

MGCP-TLS / Specifies whether to enable the MGCP- Disable, Enable
SRTP TLS / SRTP (In case of KX-NT600 (Remote only)
series with remote connection.)
The DSP resource consumption used by
the SRTP (G.711) is 1.3 times larger
than the RTP (G.711).
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group of the 1–512 PC Programming
IP-PT. Manual References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main—
Main—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group PC Programming
Name group’s name (reference only). Name Manual References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main—
Main—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

NT Local Settings
You can set the NT Local Settings from this tab. For more detail, refer to the Web Maintenance Console.

Note
For the following settings where a connecting destination PBX is specified, IP Address or FQDN can be
entered.
– Primary PBX IP Address
– Secondary PBX IP Address

PC Programming Manual 267

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Card Property

9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPEXT128—Card Property
The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
Name Description Value Range Links
Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller OFF, 64 ms, Feature Manual References
Ability ability time. 128 ms 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Down) Gain for the down voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain (Up) Gain for the up voice path. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller -14–6 dB Feature Manual References
Gain. 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non- Disable, Weak, Feature Manual References
Linear Processor) setting to Normal, Strong 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
control echo sound quality. Protocol) Extension

268 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Forced De- Forcibly de-register the SIP extension. After de-registration,
registration the following settings are deleted.
• Password
• SIP Phone Type
• Current IP Address

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number (SIP (SIP Username) of the port. 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a–z, A– References
PBX. This parameter can only be Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
modified when the virtual SIP Initiation Protocol)
extension port is set to OUS, and Extension
the programmer must be in On-line
mode.
1. Click the Edit button.
Password screen is
displayed.
2. Enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm
it.
3. Click OK.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, click OUS: The port is out of References
the desired cell in the column, and service. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
then select INS or OUS for the Fault: The port is not Initiation Protocol)
port. communicating with the Extension
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.

PC Programming Manual 269

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

SIP Phone Indicates the connected SIP phone KX-HDV/TGP600 Feature Manual
Type type (reference only). KX-NTV References
Mobile Softphone 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Other Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Feature Manual
Address the SIP Extension (reference only). References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
MWI Method Selects the method of receiving Standard, Unsolicited Feature Manual
Message Waiting Indications for References
SIP extensions. Note
2.20.1 Message
If "Standard" is Waiting
selected, a maximum 5.2.2 SIP (Session
of 64 SIP extensions Initiation Protocol)
can be used. Extension

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number (SIP Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a–z, References
PBX. This parameter can only be A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
modified when the virtual SIP Initiation Protocol)
extension port is set to OUS, and the Extension
programmer must be in On-line mode.
1. Click the Edit button. Password
screen is displayed.
2. Enter the new password and then
enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in Feature Manual
the status of the port, click the desired service References
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of 5.2.2 SIP (Session
or OUS for the port. This option is only service Initiation Protocol)
available in On-line mode. Fault: The port is not Extension
communicating with the
network.

270 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Bearer Selects the bearer mode. When Automatic, Speech, Feature Manual
Automatic is selected, the bearer Audio References
mode is set to Speech automatically. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
711/G.722) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension
Packet Specifies the time interval between 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, Feature Manual
Sampling measurements (samples) of sound 50 ms, 60 ms References
Time (G. data during a conversation. The 5.2.2 SIP (Session
729A) smaller this number, the higher the Initiation Protocol)
quality of the transmitted sound. Extension

Remote Place (Location / P2P)

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number (SIP Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of References
Username) 0–9) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. (consisting of References
This parameter can only be modified 0–9, a–z, A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
when the virtual SIP extension port is Initiation Protocol)
set to OUS, and the programmer must Extension
be in On-line mode.
1. Click the Edit button. Password
screen is displayed.
2. Enter the new password and then
enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is Feature Manual
status of the port, click the desired cell in service References
in the column, and then select INS or OUS: The port 5.2.2 SIP (Session
OUS for the port. This option is only is out of service Initiation Protocol)
available in On-line mode. Fault: The port Extension
is not
communicating
with the
network.

PC Programming Manual 271

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Phone Location Specifies the type of extension Local only: The Feature Manual
connected to the port. extension is References
located on the 5.2.2 SIP (Session
same network Initiation Protocol)
as the PBX Extension
(standard
configuration).
Remote +
Local: The
extension is
accessing the
PBX remotely
(Media Relay
Gateway).
Panasonic SIP Enable this setting to allow only P-SIP Yes (Only), No Feature Manual
Phone only phones connect to the PBX. References
5.2.2.2 Panasonic SIP
Note
Phones (P-SIP)
This setting cannot be changed
while Phone Location is set to
Local only. If Phone Location is
set to Remote + Local, this setting
will be set to Yes (Only)
automatically.
P2P Group Specifies the peer-to-peer group. 1–512 PC Programming
Manual References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main—
Main—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

272 PC Programming Manual

 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

P2P Group Indicates the selected peer-to-peer P2P Group PC Programming
Name group’s name (reference only). Name Manual References
9.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—
Site Property—Main—
Main—P2P Group
11.10 PBX
Configuration—[3-10]
Group—P2P Group
Feature Manual
References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection

FAX/T.38
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Number (SIP (SIP Username) of the port. (consisting of 0–9) References
Username) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Password Specifies the password used for 4–16 characters Feature Manual
registering a SIP Extension to the (consisting of 0–9, a– References
PBX. While it is possible to enter z, A–Z) 5.2.2 SIP (Session
a password manually for each Initiation Protocol)
SIP Extension, you can copy the Extension
value for Extension Number to
Password by clicking the Copy
to button. This parameter can
only be modified when the virtual
SIP extension port is set to OUS,
and the programmer must be in
On-line mode.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in Feature Manual
change the status of the port, service References
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out 5.2.2 SIP (Session
column, and then select INS or of service Initiation Protocol)
OUS for the port. This option is Fault: The port is not Extension
only available in On-line mode. communicating with
the network.

PC Programming Manual 273

9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

FAX Detection Enables the use of the FAX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Ability Detection Ability feature. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
FAX Sending Specifies the method of G.711 Inband, T.38 Feature Manual
Method transporting the fax signal. References
5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
Maximum Bit Specifies the maximum bit rate of No Speed Limit, 2400 Feature Manual
Rate the fax signal. bps, 4800 bps, 7200 References
bps, 9600 bps, 12000 5.2.2 SIP (Session
bps, 14400 bps Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Max Specifies the maximum datagram 272–512 Feature Manual
Datagram size when using the T.38 References
protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies whether to enable the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Error Correction redundancy feature when using References
– Redundancy the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–7 Feature Manual
Redundancy for T.30 messages when using References
count for T.30 the T.38 protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
messages Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX UDPTL Specifies the redundancy count 0–3 Feature Manual
Redundancy for data when using the T.38 References
count for data protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension
T38 FAX Rate Specifies the rate management Transferred TCF, Feature Manual
Management method when using the T.38 Local TCF References
Method protocol. 5.2.2 SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
Extension

274 PC Programming Manual

 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Card Property

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPCS16—Card Property
The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit 1024–65535
(PTAP) UDP and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration
Port No. Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network
(Server) application is using the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit 1024–65535
(MGCP) UDP and receive MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
Port No. This must be changed if another network application is using
(Server) the same port.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Signalling Indicates the UDP port used to transmit and receive MGCP 2427
(MGCP) UDP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data on the IP-CS side
Port No. (IP-CS) (reference only).
Voice (RTP) Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP 1024–65024
UDP Port No. (Real-time Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-CS side. This
(IP-CS) must be changed if another network application is using the
same port.
For voice communications, an IP-CS uses 128 contiguous
UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Keep Alive Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to Disable, 10–
Time-Out consider an IP-CS to be active even if it receives no 120 s
transmissions from that IP-CS. The PBX constantly confirms
the status of IP-CSs. If no communications are received from
an IP-CS for the duration specified here, the PBX considers
the IP-CS to be unreachable, and sets the port status to
Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60
s, and Disable, are used for debugging purposes, and IP-CSs
cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these
circumstances. Do not use debugging settings unless
instructed to do so.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting 500 × n
Time (PTAP) to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration (n=1–16) ms
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

PC Programming Manual 275

9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Card Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 150–240 s
Out (PTAP) resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration
Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
First Resending Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting 500 × n
Time (MGCP) to resend MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. (n=1–8) ms
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Resending Time Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates 75–120 s
Out (MGCP) resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data.
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.
Echo Canceller Specifies the echo canceller ability time. OFF, 64 ms,
Ability 128 ms
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. -14–6 dB
Gain (Down)
DSP Digital Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. -14–6 dB
Gain (Up)
EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. -14–6 dB
NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control Disable,
echo sound quality. Weak,
Normal,
Strong
CS Repeater Specifies the CS Repeater Mode setting. If Normal is Normal,
Mode selected, DECT communication will not be encrypted. Optional
To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings
and set the desired value.

276 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—V-IPCS16—Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP-CS port.

IP-CS Registration and De-registration

An IP-CS must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-CS before it can be used.
Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later.
IP-CS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Preparation Open 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic
Settings, and confirm that the IP addresses of the mother board and
DSP card, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
Registration Follow the steps below to register the IP-CS.
1. Connect the IP-CS to be registered to the network and, if
necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) IP-CSs are
displayed on the left.
3. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for
registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in progress, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully registered, the status of the IP-CS
will update to show "Registered".
De- Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-CS.
registration
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for de-
registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

PC Programming Manual 277

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-CS when normal
registration de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have
been changed or deleted only on the IP-CS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered IP-CSs are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight IP-CSs and click the right arrow to select them for forced
de-registration. Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the
IP-CS will update to show "None".

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is out of
select INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On- Fault: The port is not
line mode. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain IP-CS is None, Registered
registered (reference only).
Channel Specifies whether to enable channel Yes, No: NS0154 is
expansion expansion. It cannot be registered.
programmed when Status is INS. -: NS0154 is not
registered.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP address of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
Address the IP-CS (reference only).
Program Ver. Indicates the programme software Version number
file version of the IP-CS (reference
only).

278 PC Programming Manual

 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Air Sync Assigns an Air Synchronisation None, 1–16 PC Programming
Group No Group number to the IP-CS. Manual
This setting is available only if the References
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
19.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
[11-2-1] Maintenance
—CS
Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation
LAN Sync Specifies the LAN sync group None, 1–32 PC Programming
Group No. number when using an IP-CS Manual
(KX-NS0154 only) in a LAN sync References
group. A maximum of 64 IP-CSs
19.2.2 PBX
can be assigned to one group.
Configuration—
This setting is available only if the
[11-2-2] Maintenance
IP-CS’s port is set to OUS.
—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN Synchronisation
19.2.3 PBX
Configuration—
[11-2-3] Maintenance
—CS
Synchronisation—
LAN Sync Group
Setting

Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Max. 20 characters
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the status of INS: The port is in
the port, click the desired cell in the column, and service.
then select INS or OUS for the port. OUS: The port is out of
This option is only available in On-line mode. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
IP Codec Specifies the codec used for compression and G.711, G.729A
Priority decompression of transmitted data.
Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.711) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.

PC Programming Manual 279

9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property

Name Description Value Range Links

Packet Specifies the time interval between measurements 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50
Sampling Time (samples) of sound data during a conversation. ms, 60 ms
(G.729A) The smaller this number, the higher the quality of
the transmitted sound.
Voice Activity Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection Disable, Enable
Detection for G. feature for the G.711 codec. This feature
711 conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods
during a call and suppressing the packets of
silence from being sent to the network.
Announce Specifies if the IP-CS’s (KX-NS0154 only) built-in Disable, Enable
Mode ANNOUNCE feature is enabled. An IP-CS
(KX-NS0154 only) in a remote location with
ANNOUNCE enabled can provide the PBX’s IP
Address information to other terminals in the
remote location in place of manually programming
the PBX’s IP address at each terminal.

Remote Place
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
CS Name Specifies the IP-CS Max. 20 characters
(KX-NS0154 only) name of the
port.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service. Feature Manual
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of service. References
click the desired cell in the Fault: The port is not 5.2.6 IP-CS
column, and then select INS or communicating with the (KX-NS0154)
OUS for the port. network.
This option is only available in
On-line mode.
Phone Specifies the location of IP-CS Local: The IP-CS is located on Feature Manual
Location (KX-NS0154 only) connected to the same network as the PBX References
the port. (standard configuration). 5.2.6 IP-CS
Remote (MRG): The IP-CS is (KX-NS0154)
accessing the PBX remotely
(use Media Relay Gateway).

280 PC Programming Manual

 9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Card Property

9.21 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—SLC2 - Card Property
The property for the extension cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT Pulse Dial Selects the type of pulse dial transmission Normal, Sweden, New
Mode appropriate to your area. Zealand
SLT Off Hook Specifies the minimum length that a pulse 8 × n (n=3–255) ms
Time dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX
to recognise it as an off-hook signal.
SLT Off Hook Specifies the length of guard time used for 8 × n (n=12–63) ms
Guard Time off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the
PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
SLT Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the break 8 × n (n=9–20) ms
Maximum Break signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the make 8 × n (n=1–5) ms
Minimum Make signal in a pulse dial.
Width
SLT Flash Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal Disable: The PBX Feature
Detection sent when an SLT user presses the disconnects the line to Manual
hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button. prevent placing the References
call on hold.
2.13.3 Call
Enable: The PBX
Splitting
places the call on
consultation hold.
Flash Timing - Specifies the minimum length that a signal 8 × n (n=3–63) ms
Min. sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to
recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
Flash Timing - Specifies the maximum length that a signal 8 × n (n=3–191) ms
Range sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to
recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
DTMF-R STD Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF 2 × n (n=1–31) ms
Detection Time tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as
a DTMF tone.
Hook Threshold Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for 1.5–4.0 mA
PD A-law switching from Power Save mode to an
active state. Please consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.
Hook Threshold Specifies the current threshold (μ-law) for 1.5–4.0 mA
PD Mu-law switching from Power Save mode to an
active state. Please consult your certified
Panasonic dealer for more information.

PC Programming Manual 281

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property

9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—SLC2 - Port Property
Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To view the total number of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Other programming items that are displayed on this screen but not listed below are used only when
programming extensions connected to a legacy gateway (KX-TDE/KX-TDA PBX). For additional
information about programming items not described here, refer to the PC Programming Manual of the
legacy gateway PBX.
For information about legacy gateways, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). SLT: SLT port (SLC)
Telephone Indicates the connected telephone type SLT: SLT is connected (or no
Type (reference only). telephone is connected to the SLT
port).
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell OUS: The port is out of service.
in the column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the PBX.
This option is only available in On-line
mode.
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
Number port.
Extension Specifies the extension name of the Max. 20 characters
Name port.

282 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - LCO type
The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
Outgoing Guard Specifies the length of time after a 3–6 s
Time trunk is disconnected, during which
the PBX cannot seize the line.
First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the 0.5 × n (n=1–
PBX waits after seizing a trunk, 16) s
before sending the dialled digits to
the telephone company. This allows
the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled
digits correctly.
CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse No, Yes
feedback tone is turned on or not.
For outgoing trunk calls, audible
tones can be heard as the dialled
number is sent out, which informs
the extension user that the number
has been dialled.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the minimum length of a 24 × n (n=1–
Start Detection Timer bell signal that can be recognised by 50) ms
the PBX as the bell signal sent from
the telephone company, before the
PBX detects an arriving call.
Bell Detection—Bell Specifies the duration of the bell off 1.0 s–15.0 s
Off Detection Timer detection timer. If the PBX receives
no bell signal from the telephone
company for the length of time
specified here, the PBX treats the
call as lost.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the DTMF 64 + 16 × n
DTMF Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the (n=0–11) ms
Pause telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.
Pulse / DTMF Dial— Specifies the length of the pulse 630 ms, 830
Pulse Inter-digit inter-digit pause. This allows the ms, 1030 ms
Pause telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits
correctly.

PC Programming Manual 283

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Low Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a low Other, 60%, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67% Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.24 PBX
and make (off-hook) signal in a Configuration—[1-1]
pulse dial. Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - LCO
Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the 20 + (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width break signal in a low speed pulse (n=1–15) ms Manual References
dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial-Pulse 9.24 PBX
% Break on this screen determines Configuration—[1-1]
the value that can be specified here. Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - LCO
Port
Low Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width make signal in a low speed pulse ms Manual References
dial. 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] 9.24 PBX
Configuration—Slot—Card Property Configuration—[1-1]
- LCO type on this screen Configuration—Slot—
determines the value that can be Port Property - LCO
specified here. Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the % break for a high Other, 60 %, PC Programming
Dial—Pulse % Break speed pulse dial. This is the ratio 67 % Manual References
between the break (on-hook) signal 9.24 PBX
and make (off-hook) signal in a Configuration—[1-1]
pulse dial. Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - LCO
Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the maximum length of the 12+ (4 × n) PC Programming
Dial—Break Width break signal in a high speed pulse (n=1–15) ms Manual References
dial. High Speed Pulse Dial-Pulse 9.24 PBX
% Break on this screen determines Configuration—[1-1]
the value that can be specified here. Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - LCO
Port
High Speed Pulse Specifies the minimum length of the 4 × n (n=3–15) PC Programming
Dial—Make Width make signal in a high speed pulse ms Manual References
dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial-Pulse 9.24 PBX
% Break on this screen determines Configuration—[1-1]
the value that can be specified here. Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - LCO
Port
Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial Normal,
transmission appropriate to your Sweden, New
area. Zealand

284 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Option Card Indicates the type of the card that is None, Caller ID PC Programming
Equipment—Option installed on the LCOT card Card, Pay Tone Manual References
1 and Option 2 (reference only). Card Caller ID Detection
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of Caller ID FSK, FSK (with Feature Manual
Signalling signalling provided by the telephone Visual Caller References
company. ID), DTMF 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Max Specifies the maximum number of 0 (no limit), 1, Feature Manual
Receive Time Caller ID series that are sent from 2, 3 References
the network. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect the Disable, Feature Manual
(FSK) Carrier carrier when receiving Caller ID. To Enable References
Detection enable this setting, 9.23 PBX 2.19.1 Caller ID
Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type on this screen
should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the method used to detect Length + Feature Manual
(FSK) END the end of Caller ID information. Timer, Timer References
Detection 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Enables the PBX to check the Disable, Feature Manual
(FSK) Header header of received Caller ID Enable References
Examination information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type on this screen
should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the None, 80 × n Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection PBX waits before attempting to (n=1–15) ms References
Start Timer detect Caller ID information, after 2.19.1 Caller ID
receiving a call. To enable this
setting, 9.23 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type on this screen
should be set to FSK.
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the total time required by 1040 + (80 × n) Feature Manual
(FSK) Detection the PBX to detect Caller ID (n=0–37) ms References
Timer information. To enable this setting, 2.19.1 Caller ID
9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Card
Property - LCO type on this screen
should be set to FSK.

PC Programming Manual 285

9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Start Code 1 detect the beginning of a Caller ID B, C, D References
and Start Code 2 series. Start Code 1 is prior to Start 2.19.1 Caller ID
Code 2.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information detect the beginning of the B, C, D References
Start Code information segment of a Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
series.
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the DTMF code used to None, *, #, A, Feature Manual
(DTMF) End Code detect the end of a Caller ID series. B, C, D References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Caller ID Specifies the number used to Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
(DTMF) Information identify each type of information (consisting of References
Code-PRIVATE, code. 0–9, *, and #) 2.19.1 Caller ID
OUT OF AREA,
TECHNICAL
REASON,
UNKNOWN
NUMBER,
RESTRICTED
NUMBER
Caller ID—Caller ID Selects the type of the 3rd header in DDN, Caller ID Feature Manual
Header[03] a Caller ID signal. References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Selects the frequency of the pay 12 KHz, 16KHz Feature Manual
Frequency tone appropriate to your telephone References
company. 2.22.3 Call Charge
Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the signal strength of the 0–31 dB Feature Manual
Gain pay tone. References
2.22.3 Call Charge
Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the minimum length that a 8 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Pulse - MIN received pay tone signal must be for 250) ms References
the PBX to recognise it as a pay 2.22.3 Call Charge
tone signal. Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the maximum length that a None, 8 × n Feature Manual
Pulse - MAX received pay tone signal can be for (n=1–250) ms References
the PBX to recognise it as a pay 2.22.3 Call Charge
tone signal. Services
Pay Tone—Pay Tone Specifies the maximum length of 8 × n (n=1– Feature Manual
Pulse - Interval time between pay tone signals. 250) ms References
2.22.3 Call Charge
Services

286 PC Programming Manual

 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type

Name Description Value Range Links

Pay Tone—Sending Enables the PBX to send a flash Disable, Feature Manual
Flash while end talk signal at the end of call to demand a Enable References
pay tone signal. 2.22.3 Call Charge
Services

PC Programming Manual 287

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - LCO Port
Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is
select INS or OUS for the port. out of service.
This option is only available in On-
line mode.
Busy Out Indicates the Busy Out status Normal, Busy Out Feature Manual
Status (reference only). References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to DTMF, Pulse Feature Manual
dial out to the analogue trunk. References
2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
CPC Signal Specifies the length of time required None, 6.5 ms, 8 × Feature Manual
Detection by the PBX to detect a CPC signal n (n=1–112) ms References
Time— on outgoing or incoming trunk calls 2.11.9 Calling Party Control
Outgoing, before disconnecting the line. When (CPC) Signal Detection
Incoming None is selected here, the line will
not be disconnected when a CPC
signal is not detected.
DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone 80 ms, 160 ms
sent to the analogue trunk.
Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse Low, High
dials are sent to the analogue trunk.
Reverse Selects the type of trunk call for Disable: For no Feature Manual
Detection which the reverse signal from the trunk call References
telephone company is detected. Outgoing: For 2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit
outgoing trunk
calls only
Both Call: For
both outgoing and
incoming trunk
calls

288 PC Programming Manual

 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Caller ID Enables the PBX to detect a Caller Disable, Enable PC Programming
Detection ID signal from the analogue trunk. Manual References
9.23 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Card Property - LCO type
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Paytone Enables the PBX to receive a pay Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Detection tone signal from the telephone References
company. 2.22.3 Call Charge Services
Note
This feature is available for
extensions connected to legacy
gateway PBXs only.
Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, Feature Manual
4.5 s References
2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)
2.5.4.9 Special Carrier
Access Code
Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash None, 16 × n Feature Manual
signal. (n=1–255) ms References
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)
Disconnect Specifies the length of time after a 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, Feature Manual
Time trunk is disconnected, during which 4.0 s, 12.0 s References
the PBX cannot seize the line. 2.11.6 Flash/Recall/
Terminate

PC Programming Manual 289

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
—T200 command to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100 Feature
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after resending the request to ms Manual
—T202 use an ISDN line as a TIE line. References
4.3.1 TIE
Line Service
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave communication status of L2. ms
—T203
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
—T301
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
—T302 overlap receiving.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
—T303 setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
—T304 overlap sending.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
—T305 (disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
—T308 message from ISDN.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect the data link, before ms
—T309 disconnecting the call.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a continuance message after ms
—T310 receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding
message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Connect ms
—T313 message.

290 PC Programming Manual

 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
—T316 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Resume ms
—T318 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Suspend ms
—T319 message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
—T322 enquiry message.
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
—T3D3
ISDN CO / QSIG Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
Master / QSIG Slave to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms
—T3D9
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T200 waits for a reply after sending the L2 ms
command to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T201 waits for a reply after resending the TEI check ms
request to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time to detect no 0–600 × 100
T203 communication status of L2. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–18000 × 100
T301 waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–600 × 100
T302 each digit on an incoming call. Applies to ms
overlap receiving.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T303 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time allowed between 0–3000 × 100
T304 each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to ms
overlap sending.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T305 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T306 waits for a reply after sending the DISC ms
(disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting
is used when inband tones are supplied.

PC Programming Manual 291

9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–6000 × 100
T307 maintains a suspended call, before restarting. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T308 waits for a reply after receiving the Release ms
message from ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T309 to disconnect the data link, before ms
disconnecting the call.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T310 waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming ms
Call Proceeding message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T312 waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call ms
setting) message to ISDN.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T316 waits for a reply after sending the Restart ms
message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–3000 × 100
T320 waits for packet protocol. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the maximum time that the PBX 0–600 × 100
T322 waits for a reply after sending the Status ms
enquiry message.
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D3 to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. ms
ISDN Extension— Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries 0–3000 × 100
T3D9 to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. ms

292 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - BRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network Manual
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to References
one PBX and a slave port on extension
4.1.2.1
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
Integrated
belong to an incoming call private network (slave port)
Services Digital
distribution group or idle extension QSIG-Master: For connecting
Network (ISDN)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN to private network (master port)
—SUMMARY
can be assigned.
4.3.4.1 QSIG
Standard
Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
LLC Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Disable, Enable
Information Level Compatibility) information to
the network when an outgoing call is
made when the ISDN bearer mode
is speech.
Status Specifies whether the Status No Transmission: Status
Message Message is sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error
detection: Send the Status
Message when an error
(Option or Mandatory) is
detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call when Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive the Status Message from the Message from the network.
network does not match the actual Disconnect: Disconnect the
status of the call. call.

PC Programming Manual 293

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting
master port on one PBX and a to extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For
ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (slave port)
group or idle extension hunting QSIG-Master: For
group. In this case, an MSN connecting to private
can be assigned. network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. of 0–9, *, and #) References
4.1.2.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.

294 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends all PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the of the dialled digits at once Manual References
Call Type network. after the extension user 9.1 PBX Configuration
completes dialling. The —[1-1] Configuration—
PBX recognises the end of Slot
dialling when (1) # is 10.3 PBX Configuration
dialled, if programmed, (2) —[2-3] System—Timers
a pre-programmed & Counters—Dial /
telephone number is IRNA / Recall / Tone—
dialled, or (3) the inter-digit Dial / IRNA / Recall /
timer expires. Tone
Overlap: The PBX sends 10.9 PBX Configuration
dialled digits one at a time. —[2-9] System—System
Options—Option 2—
ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#]
as End of Dial for en
Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX
Configuration—[3-1-4]
Group—Trunk Group—
Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
BRI Data Assigns one or two TEIs 1-link: One TEI is assigned
Link (P-MP) (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to to the BRI CO port.
Mode the BRI CO port. To use the 2-link: Two TEIs are
ISDN Hold supplementary assigned to the BRI CO
service with point-to-multipoint port. (Available when
configuration, this parameter Network on the Network
should be set to 2-link in some tab is set to P-MP.)
countries/areas.

PC Programming Manual 295

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming
Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—
This setting is only available [9] Private Network
when ISDN CO on this screen
has been set to QSIG-Slave or
QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of
each BRI card can be assigned
to transmit extension status
information.

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public Feature
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network Manual
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting to References
one PBX and a slave port on extension
5.2.5.1 ISDN
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For connecting
Extension
belong to an incoming call to private network (slave
distribution group or idle extension port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service. Feature
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of Manual
desired cell in the column, and then service. References
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
5.2.5.1 ISDN
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
Extension
line mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature
(ISDN MSN receiving an incoming call with an Ring all ISDN extensions Manual
Last No. 0 or MSN ending with "0" or "00". This that are addressed with References
00) setting is only available when Port MSN.
5.2.5.1 ISDN
Type on this screen is set to Ring an Extension for MSN:
Extension
Extension. Ring only one of the ISDN
extensions that are
addressed with MSN.
ISDN Enables the PBX to send call Disable, Enable Feature
Extension progress tones to the ISDN Manual
Progress extension. This setting is only References
Tone available when Port Type on this
5.2.5.1 ISDN
screen is set to Extension.
Extension

296 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Network
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
Each ISDN connection in a network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a extension
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For connecting
ISDN extensions can belong to to private network (slave port)
an incoming call distribution QSIG-Master: For connecting
group or idle extension hunting to private network (master
group. In this case, an MSN can port)
be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in network.
On-line mode.
Network Selects the network type of the 0–56 Feature Manual
Type port. (2 UK (Domestic), 5 References
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 4.1.2.1 Integrated
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN Services Digital
(Standard), 14 France Network (ISDN)—
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 SUMMARY
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
National ISDN 2)
L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 1) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 Call, Permanent Feature Manual
(Layer 2) on the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Access Selects the configuration of the P-P: Point-to-Point Feature Manual
Mode BRI port. P-MP: Point-to-multipoint References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 297

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63 Feature Manual
assigned to the BRI port. References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on Extension: For connecting
one PBX and a slave port on to extension
another PBX. ISDN extensions can QSIG-Slave: For
belong to an incoming call connecting to private
distribution group or idle extension network (slave port)
hunting group. In this case, an MSN QSIG-Master: For
can be assigned. connecting to private
network (master port)
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On- communicating with the
line mode. network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the Public: Public network Feature
port. Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network
(ISDN-VPN)
Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to outgoing trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public or private Subscriber
Private networks.

298 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls Telephony, National
Numbering Plan routed through public and private Standard, Private
ID—Public, networks.
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type of applies to incoming trunk calls National, Network,
Number—Public, routed through public and private Subscriber
Private networks.

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a public network
QSIG network must have a Extension: For connecting
master port on one PBX and to extension
a slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Slave: For
ISDN extensions can belong connecting to private
to an incoming call network (slave port)
distribution group or idle QSIG-Master: For
extension hunting group. In connecting to private
this case, an MSN can be network (master port)
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the service.
port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select service.
INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available communicating with the
in On-line mode. network.

PC Programming Manual 299

9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each For COLP, CLIR, COLR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, ISDN or QSIG CNIP, CONP, CNIR, References
CONP, CNIR, supplementary service is CONR, CF (Rerouting), 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
CONR, CF used. CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC- Line Identification
(Rerouting), E: Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
CT, CCBS, No, Yes 4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge
AOC-D, AOC- (AOC)
E, 3PTY For 3PTY: 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
No, Yes-3Pty (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)
—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
and Calling/Connected
Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)
—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls
to Busy Subscriber
(CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Option
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG public network
network must have a master port on one Extension: For
PBX and a slave port on another PBX. connecting to extension
ISDN extensions can belong to an QSIG-Slave: For
incoming call distribution group or idle connecting to private
extension hunting group. In this case, an network (slave port)
MSN can be assigned. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
network (master port)

300 PC Programming Manual

 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the ALL, Unknown, Feature
network initiated by the CCBS International, National, Manual
(Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) Network specific, References
feature, from which the specified number Subscriber, Abbreviated
4.1.2.10
of digits are deleted.
Completion of
CCBS Option on this screen specifies
Calls to Busy
the number of digits to delete from the
Subscriber
received number.
(CCBS)
CCBS Specifies the number of digits to delete 0–15 Feature
Delete Digits from the received number when receiving Manual
a call of the specified type initiated by the References
CCBS feature from the network. CCBS
4.1.2.10
Option on this screen specifies the
Completion of
applicable type of call.
Calls to Busy
Subscriber
(CCBS)

PC Programming Manual 301

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Port Property - PRI Port
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to Feature
public network Manual
Note Extension: For connecting References
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG to extension
4.1.2.1
network must have a master port QSIG-Slave: For connecting
Integrated
on one PBX and a slave port on to private network (slave
Services
another PBX. port)
Digital Network
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to an (ISDN)—
connecting to private
incoming call distribution group or SUMMARY
network (master port)
idle extension hunting group. In 4.3.4.1 QSIG
this case, an MSN can be Standard
assigned. Features—
SUMMARY
Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in service.
status of the port, click the desired cell in OUS: The port is out of
the column, and then select INS or OUS service.
for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Status Specifies whether the Status Message is No Transmission: Status
Message sent to the network. Message is not sent.
When error detection
(Mandatory): Send the
Status Message when an
error (Mandatory) is
detected.
When error detection
(Option / Mandatory): Send
the Status Message when
an error (Option or
Mandatory) is detected.
Status Selects what happens to a call when the Ignore: Ignore the Status
Receive Status Message from the network does Message from the network.
not match the actual status of the call. Disconnect: Disconnect the
call.

302 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error Disable, Enable
checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy
Check) is an error checking control
technique that uses a specific binary
prime divisor that results in a unique
remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit
character. (Assignable only when using
the PRI30 card.)
Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI B8ZS, AMI
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the
port. This setting is only available when
using the PRI23 card.
Frame Selects the type of frame sequence for Extended Multi frame
Sequence the port. This setting is only available (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame
when using the PRI23 card. (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame
(F12)

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Main.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in connecting to extension
a QSIG network must QSIG-Slave: For
have a master port on connecting to private
one PBX and a slave port network (slave port)
on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For
connecting to private
• ISDN extensions can network (master port)
belong to an incoming
call distribution group or
idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in
change the status of the port, service.
click the desired cell in the OUS: The port is out of
column, and then select INS or service.
OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in communicating with the
On-line mode. network.

PC Programming Manual 303

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Subscriber Specifies the number used as Max. 16 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number the CLIP number. of 0–9, *, and #) References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected
Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Ringback Enables the PBX to send a Disable, Enable
Tone to ringback tone to an outside
Outside caller when the network cannot
Caller send the tone.
ISDN Selects the method used to En-bloc: The PBX sends PC Programming
Outgoing send dialled digits to the all of the dialled digits at Manual References
Call Type network. once after the extension 9.1 PBX Configuration—
user completes dialling. [1-1] Configuration—Slot
The PBX recognises the 10.3 PBX Configuration—
end of dialling when (1) # [2-3] System—Timers &
is dialled, if programmed, Counters—Dial / IRNA /
(2) a pre-programmed Recall / Tone—Dial—
telephone number is Extension Inter-digit
dialled, or (3) the inter- 10.9 PBX Configuration—
digit timer expires. [2-9] System—System
Overlap: The PBX sends Options—Option 2—ISDN
dialled digits one at a en Bloc Dial—[#] as End
time. of Dial for en Bloc mode
11.1.4 PBX Configuration
—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk
Group—Dialling Plan
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
ISDN Enables the use of the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Centrex telephone company’s ISDN References
Centrex Service features. 4.1.2.1 Integrated
Services Digital Network
(ISDN)—SUMMARY
Networking Enables transmission of Off, On PC Programming
Data extension status data to Manual References
Transfer connected PBXs in a network. 17 PBX Configuration—
This setting is only available [9] Private Network
when Extension Setting on this
screen has been set to QSIG-
Slave or QSIG-Master.
Loopback Enables a loopback test started Disable, Enable PC Programming
Test started from the network side, to be Manual References
by Network performed on the PRI23 card. Network Loopback Test

304 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the type of the port. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master
• ISDN extensions can belong to port)
an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN
can be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of
desired cell in the column, and then service.
select INS or OUS for the port. Fault: The port is not
This option is only available in On-line communicating with the
mode. network.
Ring Mode Selects the ring mode when receiving Ring All Extension for MSN: Feature
(ISDN MSN an incoming call with an MSN ending Ring all ISDN extensions that Manual
Last No. 0 or with "0" or "00". are addressed with MSN. References
00) Ring AN Extension for MSN:
5.2.5.1 ISDN
Ring only one of the ISDN
Extension
extensions that are addressed
with MSN.

Network Configuration
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to public
network
Note Extension: For connecting to
• Each ISDN connection in a extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For connecting to
master port on one PBX and a private network (slave port)
slave port on another PBX. QSIG-Master: For connecting
to private network (master port)
• ISDN extensions can belong
to an incoming call distribution
group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an
MSN can be assigned.

PC Programming Manual 305

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in service.
the status of the port, click the OUS: The port is out of service.
desired cell in the column, and then Fault: The port is not
select INS or OUS for the port. communicating with the
This option is only available in On- network.
line mode.
Network Selects the network type of the port. 0–56 Feature
Type (2 UK (Domestic), 5 Manual
Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 References
SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN
4.1.2.1
(Standard), 14 France
Integrated
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20
Services Digital
Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US
Network (ISDN)
National ISDN 2)
—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For connecting
• Each ISDN connection in a to extension
QSIG network must have a QSIG-Slave: For
master port on one PBX and a connecting to private
slave port on another PBX. network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For
• ISDN extensions can belong to connecting to private
an incoming call distribution network (master port)
group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can
be assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the desired service.
cell in the column, and then select INS OUS: The port is out of
or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On-line Fault: The port is not
mode. communicating with the
network.
Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Public: Public network Feature
Private: Private Network Manual
VPN: Virtual Private References
Network
4.3.1 TIE Line
Service
4.3.3 ISDN
Virtual Private
Network
(ISDN-VPN)

306 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

Calling Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to outgoing trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private
Calling Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to outgoing trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public or private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private
Called Party Selects the numbering plan ID that Unknown, ISDN-
Number— applies to incoming trunk calls routed Telephony, National
Numbering Plan through public and private networks. Standard, Private
ID—Public,
Private
Called Party Selects the type of number that Unknown, International,
Number—Type applies to incoming trunk calls routed National, Network,
of Number— through public and private networks. Subscriber
Public, Private

Supplementary Service
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Type Selects the port type. CO: For connecting to
public network
Note Extension: For
• Each ISDN connection in a connecting to
QSIG network must have a extension
master port on one PBX and QSIG-Slave: For
a slave port on another PBX. connecting to private
network (slave port)
• ISDN extensions can belong QSIG-Master: For
to an incoming call connecting to private
distribution group or idle network (master port)
extension hunting group. In
this case, an MSN can be
assigned.
Connection Indicates the port status. To change INS: The port is in
the status of the port, click the service.
desired cell in the column, and then OUS: The port is out of
select INS or OUS for the port. service.
This option is only available in On- Fault: The port is not
line mode. communicating with
the network.

PC Programming Manual 307

9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

COLP, CLIR, Specifies whether each ISDN or For COLP, CLIR, Feature Manual
COLR, CNIP, QSIG supplementary service is COLR, CNIP, CONP, References
CONP, CNIR, used. CNIR, CONR, CF 4.1.2.2 Calling/
CONR, CF The available services depend on (Rerouting), CT, Connected Line
(Rerouting), the setting of Supplementary CCBS, AOC-D, AOC- Identification
CT, CCBS, Service on this screen. E, E911: Presentation (CLIP/
AOC-D, AOC- No, Yes COLP)
E, E911, 4.1.2.3 Advice of
3PTY For 3PTY: Charge (AOC)
No, Yes-3Pty 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
4.1.2.7 Call Transfer
(CT)—by ISDN
4.1.2.8 Three-party
Conference (3PTY)—by
ISDN
4.1.2.10 Completion of
Calls to Busy
Subscriber (CCBS)
4.3.4.2 Calling/
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name
Identification
Presentation (CNIP/
CONP)—by QSIG
4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding
(CF)—by QSIG
4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
(CT)—by QSIG
4.3.4.5 Completion of
Calls to Busy
Subscriber (CCBS)—by
QSIG
CCBS Type Selects the type of call from the ALL, Unknown, Feature Manual
network initiated by the CCBS International, National, References
(Completion of Calls to Busy Network specific, 4.1.2.10 Completion of
Subscriber) feature, from which the Subscriber, Calls to Busy
specified number of digits are Abbreviated Subscriber (CCBS)
deleted.
Supplementary Service on this
screen specifies the number of
digits to delete from the received
number.

308 PC Programming Manual

 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

Name Description Value Range Links

CCBS Delete Specifies the number of digits to 0–15 Feature Manual
Digits delete from the received number References
when receiving a call of the 4.1.2.10 Completion of
specified type initiated by the Calls to Busy
CCBS feature from the network. Subscriber (CCBS)
Supplementary Service on this
screen specifies the applicable type
of call.

PC Programming Manual 309

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2

9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2
Settings for PBXs connected to the KX-NS1000 over a stacking connection can be programmed. Click
Legacy-GW1 or Legacy-GW2 on the Slot screen to view the physical card shelf of the legacy gateway.

Note
• Legacy gateways must first be pre-installed before they can be programmed. For details, see the
KX-NS1000 PC Programming Manual.
• For information about hardware configuration restrictions and conditions for legacy gateways, refer to
the KX-NS1000 Installation Manual.

To install a new physical card in a legacy gateway

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right. An image of the card will be displayed, and
information about the card will be shown.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the slot, and release it. The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click OK to confirm.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a legacy gateway

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the shelf to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the shelf to out-of-service status.

To remove a legacy gateway from the STACK-M card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the Shelf Status button. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Delete. The legacy gateway will be deleted from the system and the corresponding shelf button
will become greyed out.

Note
The legacy gateway must be set to OUS before it can be deleted.

Programming cards installed in a legacy gateway

You can access the card properties and port properties of the physical cards installed in a legacy gateway
using the KX-NS1000 Web Maintenance Console Interface. The settings, setting values, and other
information is similar to programming using the Unified PC Maintenance Console. Refer to the PC
Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for programming information.

Note
Unless noted otherwise, programming items and specifications for PBXs connected as legacy gateways
correspond to the following PBX software versions. When referencing the manuals of other PBXs, refer
to manuals matching these software versions.
• KX-TDE:PMMPR/PGMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx or later
• KX-TDA:PMPR/PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later

310 PC Programming Manual

 9.28.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3

Programming Card Properties for cards installed in legacy gateways

For your reference, the following information is included on each Card Property screen for cards installed in
legacy gateways:
Site: The site number of the KX-NS1000 PBX to which the legacy gateway is connected.
Shelf: The shelf number of the STACK-M card Legacy Gateway connection:
• 2: Legacy-GW1
• 3: Legacy-GW2
Slot: The physical slot number within the legacy gateway where the card is installed.

Programming Port Properties for cards installed in legacy gateways

When programming KX-TDE/KX-TDA PBXs using the Unified PC Maintenance Console, a Command
button is available to change the status (INS/OUS) of ports being programmed. To change the status of a
port when programming via Web Maintenance Console, click the desired cell in the Connection column,
and then select INS or OUS for the port.

9.28.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-

GW1/Legacy-GW2—Card Property - OPB3
The properties of the optional base card (OPB3) installed in a legacy gateway can be specified.

OPB3 Option Card Setup

1. Add the OPB3 card to the legacy gateway. For details, see To install a new physical card in a legacy
gateway in 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
2. Move the mouse pointer over the installed OPB3 card on the legacy gateway Slot screen. A menu will
be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Option Card.
3. Select a slot number, and click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards
from the currently selected slot. Click OK when finished. For details about the option cards that can be
used with each legacy gateway PBX, refer to the documentation of the legacy gateway PBX.

OPB3 Card Properties

The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
Move the mouse pointer over the installed OPB3 card on the legacy gateway Slot screen. A menu will be
shown under the mouse pointer. Select Card Property.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Slot—Card Property - OPB3 section in the
PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.
The following programming items are specific to when programming legacy gateways using Web
Maintenance Console:
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the KX-NS1000 for 2: Legacy-GW1
the legacy gateway in which the OPB3 card is 3: Legacy-GW2
installed (reference only).
Port Indicates the port status for installed option cards. INS: The port is in service.
Status To change the status of the port, click the desired OUS: The port is out of
cell in the column, and then select INS or OUS for service.
the port. Fault: There is a
This option is only available in On-line mode. communication error.

PC Programming Manual 311

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property

9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot

—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
The doorphone card’s settings can be programmed.
The Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Port Status Specifies the port’s status. INS: The port is in service.
This option is only available in On-line OUS: The port is out of
mode. service.
Fault: There is a
communication error.
For Output - Device Selects the type of connected output Relay, Door Opener
Type device (for output ports only).
For Sensor - Input Specifies the minimum duration of 32 × n (n=2–255) ms
Signal Decision Time continuous input from the triggered
sensor before the PBX recognises the
input and makes a sensor call.
For Sensor - Input Specifies the length of time after the 10 × n (n=1–255) s
Signal Detection sensor has been triggered during which
Reopening Time any further input from the sensor will be
ignored.

312 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—

Portable Station
Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found in the
Installation Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.
PS Registration, De-registration, and Forced De-registration can be performed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Registration Follow the steps below to register the
PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-
registered (available) extension
numbers and names are
displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and names
and click the right arrow to select
them for registration. Click Next.
3. Highlight PBX sites and click the
right arrow to select them for
registration. Click Next.
4. If the registration is still in
progress, the dialogue box will
show "Registration Executing".
If the registration is successful,
the dialogue box will show
"Registration Completed". Click
Close.
Once a PS is successfully
registered, the status of the PS
will update to show "Registered".

Note
A Sub-Administrator cannot
register a PS while another Sub-
Administrator is registering a PS.

PC Programming Manual 313

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

De-registration Follow the steps below to de-register
the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear.
Registered extension numbers
and names are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight numbers and names
and click the right arrow to select
them for de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful,
the dialogue box will show "De-
registration Succeed".
4. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-
registered, the status of the PS
will update to show "None".

Note
A Sub-Administrator cannot de-
register a PS while another Sub-
Administrator is de-registering a
PS.

314 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Forced De- Follow the steps below to forcibly de-
registration register the PS when normal de-
registration has been unsuccessful or
de-registration has been performed
only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialogue box will appear.
Registered extension numbers
and names are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight numbers and names
and click the right arrow to select
them for forced de-registration.
Click Next.
A dialogue box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialogue box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
If the de-registration is successful,
the dialogue box will show
"Forced De-registration Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-
registered, the status of the PS
will update to show "None".
Personal Specifies the Personal Identification 4 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to 0–9) References
Number avoid registering a PS to the wrong 5.2.4.1 Portable
PBX. Station (PS)
Note that the same PIN should be Connection
entered at the PS, before the PS is
registered to the PBX.

Note
Sub-Administrators cannot
change this setting.
Index Indicates the PS number (reference 1–1000 Feature Manual
only). References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection

PC Programming Manual 315

9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension No. Specifies the extension number of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
PS. (consisting of 0–9) References
If the extension number of the PS is 5.2.4.1 Portable
associated with a user container, the Note
Station (PS)
PS can be used as a sub telephone • If the extension Connection
with a wired main telephone (PT/ number of the
SLT), and two of them will share one PS is associated
extension number of the main with a user
telephone. container, the
extension
Note number cannot
Sub-Administrators can specify be changed.
only PS numbers that they are
authorised to manage. • Sub-
Administrators
can specify only
the extension
numbers of
users that
belong to user
groups that they
are authorised to
manage.
Extension Specifies the name of the PS Max. 20 characters PC
Name (reference only). Programming
Note Manual
"Display Name" of References
the associated user
8.1.1 Users—User
container will be
Container—Add
displayed.
User/Edit User—
Display Name
Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection
Status Indicates whether a certain PS is None, Registered Feature Manual
registered (reference only). References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection

316 PC Programming Manual

 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Name Description Value Range Links

Sub- Specifies which Sub-Administrator will None, 1:-32: PC
Administrator be authorised to manage the PS’s Programming
settings. Manual
References
Note
8.9 Maintenance
This setting is available when the
Personnel—Sub
Installer logs in alone or logs in
Administrator
using Exclusive Login Mode.
Setting
Feature Manual
References
5.2.4.1 Portable
Station (PS)
Connection

PC Programming Manual 317

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—

Option
System options can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
System Wireless Indicates the radio system ID used Not applicable.
—System ID to register a PS (reference only).
To clear the System ID
1. Click the Clear Master CS
button.
2. A warning will be displayed.
Confirm the contents of the
warning, and then click Yes.
System Wireless Selects whether to display the CO Enable, Disable
—CO Status status on the LCD of the PS when in
Display in Standby stand-by mode (KX-WT125 only).
(KX-WT125 only)
(Need System Note
Restart) • For users in Canada, this
setting is also available for the
KX-WT126.
• The KX-WT125 is available
only in Canada.
New Card Selects the initial status of cards In Service, Out of
Installation—Card after installation. Service
Status for any
Card
New Card Selects whether extension numbers Disable, Enable
Installation— are assigned to extension ports
Automatic automatically or manually.
Extension Number
Set for Extension
Card

318 PC Programming Manual

 9.31 PBX Configuration—[1-3] Configuration—Option

Name Description Value Range Links

New Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is ISDN Standard Feature Manual
Installation—ISDN automatically set to ISDN Standard Mode: The CCBS, References
Standard Mode for Mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is CF, CT, and Unified 2.1.1.2 Direct In
PRI23 Card installed for the first time. Messaging features Line (DIL)
are supported. DIL 2.1.1.3 Direct
and DID call Inward Dialling
distribution are (DID)/Direct Dialling
available for the D In (DDI)
channel. 4.3.4.3 Call
T1-LCOT mode: DIL Forwarding (CF)—
and DID call by QSIG
distribution are 4.3.4.4 Call Transfer
available for all 23B (CT)—by QSIG
channels. The 4.3.4.5 Completion
CCBS, CF, CT, and of Calls to Busy
Unified Messaging Subscriber (CCBS)
features are not —by QSIG
available in this
mode.

PC Programming Manual 319

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—Clock Priority

9.32 PBX Configuration—[1-4] Configuration—

Clock Priority
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf- Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI and PRI None, Shelf and Slot
Slot cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an number
Number external source to the PBX. Shelf and slot numbers
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the are listed using the
telephone company provides. pattern "X-Y":
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
• X: Shelf number (1–3
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each slot. [2 and 3 correspond
to Legacy Gateway 1
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to or 2])
"OUS", then "INS".
• Y: Slot number (1–11)
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private
network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.) without
being connected through the telephone company,
assign only one PBX as the clock source on the
network. That PBX should have a card connected to a
telephone company line selected as its clock source.
All other PBXs should have cards connected to the
network selected as the clock source. This enables all
PBXs on the network to synchronise their timing.

320 PC Programming Manual

 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP

Resource
IP communications that are handled by the PBX require DSP resources. DSP resources can be reserved for
various functions of the PBX.
The DSP resource advisor is a tool that analyses the configuration and user requirements for the system in
order to recommend which DSP card(s) should be used. Click DSP Resource Advisor to access this
feature. (See 9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting—DSP Resource
Advisor.)

9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource

—Setting
Set the amount of DSP resources to reserve for each PBX function that uses DSP resources.
Name Description Value Range Links
Total DSP Indicates the total amount of Resource amount (3 digits) Feature Manual
Resource available DSP resources based References
on the installed DSP card(s) 5.5.3 DSP
(reference only). Resource Usage
The number of resources
provided by each type of DSP
card is as follows:
• DSP S card: 63
• DSP M card: 127
• DSP L card: 254
Up to 3 DSP cards can be
installed on the mother board.
Because the system reserves 2
resources for internal system
functions, the total amount of
available resources indicated will
be 2 less than the total resources
of the installed card(s).
Type of DSP Indicates the type of the installed KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000, Feature Manual
#1, Type of DSP card(s) (reference only). KX-NS500/KX-NS700/ References
DSP #2, Type KX-NS1000: 5.5.3 DSP
of DSP #3 None, DSP-S, DSP-M, DSP- Resource Usage
L
KX-NS300:
None, DSP-S
Services—VoIP Specifies the number of KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
(G.711) simultaneous VoIP calls to 0-760 ports References
reserve DSP resources for. KX-NS300: 0-61 ports 5.5.3 DSP
KX-NS500/KX-NS700: 0-252 Resource Usage
ports
KX-NS1000: 0-506 ports

PC Programming Manual 321

9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Services— Specifies the number of UM ports KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
Unified to reserve DSP resources for. 0-128 ports References
message KX-NS1000: 0-1 ports 5.5.3 DSP
Resource Usage
Services—Two- Specifies the number of UM ports KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
way Recording reserved in 9.33.1 PBX 0-85 ports References
Configuration—[1-5-1] KX-NS300/KX-NS500/ 5.5.3 DSP
Configuration—DSP Resource KX-NS700: 0-24 ports Resource Usage
—Setting to use for Two-way KX-NS1000: 0-30 ports
Recording.
Services— Specifies the number of OGM KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
OGM ports to reserve DSP resources 0-128 ports References
for. KX-NS300/KX-NS500/ 5.5.3 DSP
KX-NS700/KX-NS1000: 0-64 Resource Usage
ports
Services— Specifies the number of KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
Conference conference rooms to reserve DSP 0-85 conference rooms References
trunk resources for. KX-NS300/KX-NS500/ 5.5.3 DSP
KX-NS700/KX-NS1000: 0-24 Resource Usage
conference rooms
Services—Free Indicates the amount of free DSP KX-NSX1000/KX-NSX2000: Feature Manual
resources (G. resources available to allocate 0-760 DSP resources References
711) (reference only). KX-NS300: 0-61 DSP 5.5.3 DSP
resources Resource Usage
KX-NS500: 0-252 DSP
resources
KX-NS1000: 0-506 DSP
resources
Select a time to Specifies when the settings made • Set: Specify a date and
apply the set on this screen are applied. time to apply the changes,
values and click OK. The
Note changes will be applied at
Any calls being made that use the specified date and
DSP resources will be time.
disconnected when setting • Apply now: The changes
values are changed and are applied immediately.
applied. Click OK to apply the
settings immediately.

9.33.1.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—DSP Resource—

Setting—DSP Resource Advisor
The DSP Resource Advisor assists programmers in the allocation of DSP resources to various PBX
functions.
1. Note the value of Total Power. This is the total capacity for allocating DSP resources, depending on
the DSP cards installed in the PBX.
2. In the Ports column, enter the number of ports to allocate to each PBX function.

322 PC Programming Manual

 9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

3. For voice calls, it is useful to estimate how often each call function is used, as every extension or trunk
is not in use all the time. In the Busy Ratio (%) column, specify the anticipated ratio of time the type of
voice call function will be used.
4. As values are entered, the values in the Power column will increase to reflect the resource required for
the input amounts. Likewise, the value for Free resources (G.711) will decrease.

Note
Click Clear to reset the input values and start again.
5. When all items are allocated, confirm that the amount of resources input does not exceed the value
indicated in Total Power.
• Click Apply to insert the specified allocation settings into the DSP Resource—Setting screen.
• Click Cancel to return to the DSP Resource—Setting screen without making any changes.
For details, refer to "5.5.3.2 DSP Resource Advisor" in the Feature Manual.

9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource

—Usage
The Usage screen is a graphical display of DSP resource usage. This information is useful to analyse usage
patterns over time to determine DSP resource needs and optimal configuration settings.
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
• The graph displays DSP resource usage over time. The time frame displayed can be displayed in
increments of 1 hour, 4 hours, or 24 hours. Up to 30 days of usage data can be stored.
• Each site of a Multi-connection network can be viewed.
• The DSP report feature is only accessible from the Main Unit.
• Only DSP resources that have been reserved in 9.33.1 PBX Configuration—[1-5-1] Configuration—
DSP Resource—Setting are displayed.

PC Programming Manual 323

9.33.2 PBX Configuration—[1-5-2] Configuration—DSP Resource—Usage

324 PC Programming Manual

 Section 10
PBX Configuration—[2] System

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 325

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date & Time

10.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1] System—Date &

Time
10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date &
Time Setting
The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of
extensions (e.g., PT, PS).
This screen can be accessed only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Date & Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by Year: 2000–2035
Time clicking the parameter you want to change and typing the new Month: 01–12
value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and Day: 01–31
time. Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Note Second: 00–59
• When this setting is changed and applied, it may take
between 1 minute and several hours (depending on the
configuration of the PBX network) for all connected IP-PTs
to reflect this change on their displays.

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—

SNTP / Daylight Saving
Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be
programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
To set Summer time, click 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight
Saving—Daylight Saving.

Note
The NTP server function of the PBX must be enabled for connected KX-UT series SIP phones to receive
automatic time adjustment information from the PBX. See 28.2.4 Network Service—[2-6] Server
Feature—NTP.
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Time Specifies the synchronisation of Disable (Stand-alone): Feature Manual
Adjustment— the time between the Main Unit Synchronisation is not References
Synchronisation and Expansion Units of a Multi- enabled (for the Main 5.5.4 Automatic
mode connection network. For the Unit and Stand-alone Setup
Main Unit, only "Disable (Stand- units)
alone)" can be selected. Enable (Master
Synchronisation):
Synchronisation is
enabled (for Expansion
Units)

326 PC Programming Manual

 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Time Enables the PBX to Disable, ISDN & Caller Feature Manual
Adjustment— automatically adjust its clock ID (FSK), SNTP References
Automatic Time every day according to the time 5.5.4 Automatic
Correction on Stand- information provided by the Setup
alone mode network.
SNTP—SNTP Server Specifies the IP address or host 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
—IP Address name of the SNTP server. 223.255.255.255 (IP References
address), Max. 253 5.5.4 Automatic
characters (host name) Setup
SNTP—SNTP Server Indicates the port number used 1–65535 Feature Manual
—Port Number for communication with an References
SNTP server (reference only). 5.5.4 Automatic
Setup
SNTP—Version Specifies the SNTP version. 3, 4
Time Zone—Time Specifies your local UTC -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Zone (Coordinated Universal Time) References
time zone using the up and 5.5.4 Automatic
down arrows. Setup
Note
If KX-UT series SIP phones
are connected to the PBX,
and this setting is changed,
they must be restarted for
the new time zone setting to
take effect.
Time Zone—Time Indicates the UTC (Coordinated -14:00–+14:00 Feature Manual
Zone for PC Universal Time) time zone of the References
PC (reference only). 5.5.4 Automatic
Setup

10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /

Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start
date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different
summer times can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 327

10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving

Name Description Value Range Links

Setting Enables Summer time. Disable, Enable PC Programming
Manual
References
10.1.2 PBX
Configuration—
[2-1-2] System—
Date & Time—
SNTP / Daylight
Saving
Feature Manual
References
5.5.4 Automatic
Setup
Start Date—Year, Specifies the start date of Year: 2000—2036 PC Programming
Month, Day daylight savings time. Month: 1–12 Manual
Day: 1–31 References
10.1.2 PBX
Configuration—
[2-1-2] System—
Date & Time—
SNTP / Daylight
Saving
Feature Manual
References
5.5.4 Automatic
Setup
End Date—Year, Specifies the end date of Year: 2000—2036 PC Programming
Month, Day daylight savings time. Month: 1–12 Manual
Day: 1–31 References
10.1.2 PBX
Configuration—
[2-1-2] System—
Date & Time—
SNTP / Daylight
Saving
Feature Manual
References
5.5.4 Automatic
Setup

328 PC Programming Manual

 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator &

BGM
Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Operator—Day, Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting PC Programming
Lunch, Break, Night number or floating of 0–9) Manual References
extension number of 10.4 PBX Configuration
incoming call —[2-4] System—Week
distribution group to be Table
designated as the PBX 10.6.1 PBX
operator in each time Configuration—[2-6-1]
mode (day/lunch/break/ System—Numbering
night). To select an Plan—Main
extension number, click 11.5.1 PBX
Destination Setting Configuration—[3-5-1]
(see 2.1.7 Extension Group—Incoming Call
Number Setting). Distribution Group—
If Automatic copy to Group Settings
UM Operator (No.1) is 23.2 UM Configuration
checked here, the PBX —[4-2] Service Settings
Operator extension —Parameters—
number(s) set for Day/ Automated Attendant—
Lunch/Break/Night will Operator Service
be copied to the Unified
Messaging service’s Feature Manual
Operator Extension for References
Operator Service No. 1 5.1.5 Operator Features
(see 23.2 UM
Configuration—[4-2]
Service Settings—
Parameters—
Automated Attendant
—Operator Service).
BGM and Music on Selects the audio External BGM 1,
Hold—Music Source of source of BGM/MOH 1. Internal BGM/MOH 1
BGM/MOH 1 If the NSX server is
selected as the current
site, this setting will not
be displayed.
BGM and Music on Selects the audio External BGM 2,
Hold—Music Source of source of BGM/MOH 2. Internal BGM/MOH 2
BGM/MOH 2 If the KX-NSX server is
selected as the current
site, this setting will not
be displayed.

PC Programming Manual 329

10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

Name Description Value Range Links

BGM and Music on Selects the audio KX-NSX1000/ Feature Manual
Hold—Music on Hold source for Music on KX-NSX2000: BGM/ References
Hold. MOH1–BGM/MOH8, 2.13.4 Music on Hold
Tone
KX-NS300/
KX-NS500/
KX-NS700/KX-NS1000:
BGM1—BGM8, Tone
BGM and Music on Selects the audio Same as Music on Feature Manual
Hold—Sound on source for Music for Hold, Ringback Tone References
Transfer Transfer (either the 2.12.1 Call Transfer
same music source
chosen for the Music on
Hold, or ringback tone).

330 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers &

Counters
Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Automatic Redial Specifies the number of times Automatic 0–10 Feature Manual
—Repeat Redial is attempted before being References
Counter cancelled. 2.6.3 Last Number
Redial
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time between 10 × n Feature Manual
—Repeat repeated Automatic Redial attempts. (n=1–120) References
Interval s 2.6.3 Last Number
Redial
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time that the PBX 10 × n Feature Manual
—Redial Call waits for the called party to answer an (n=1–30) s References
Ring Duration Automatic Redial attempt. This is the 2.6.3 Last Number
length of time that the called party’s Redial
extension will ring for each attempt.
Automatic Redial Specifies the length of time before the 0–15 s Feature Manual
—Analogue CO PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and References
Mute / Busy cancels busy tone detection when 2.6.3 Last Number
Detection Timer Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is Redial
performed (reference only).
Dial—Hot Line Specifies the length of time between going 0–180 s Feature Manual
(Pickup Dial) off-hook and the start of automatic dialling References
Start when the Hot Line feature is set. 2.6.7 Hot Line
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time after going off- 1–250 s Feature Manual
First Digit hook within which the first digit of a feature References
number or destination must be dialled 2.5.2 Automatic
before a reorder tone is heard. Extension Release
Dial—Extension Specifies the length of time within which 1–250 s Feature Manual
Inter-digit subsequent digits must be dialled before References
the PBX sends a reorder tone. 2.5.2 Automatic
Extension Release
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO First Digit the first digit of a telephone number must
be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is
sent before this time expires, the PBX
recognises end of dialling and stops
muting the caller’s voice over the
analogue trunk.

PC Programming Manual 331

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time within which 1–15 s
CO Inter-digit subsequent digits of a telephone number
must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no
digit is sent before this time expires, the
PBX recognises end of dialling and stops
muting the caller’s voice over the
analogue trunk.
Dial—Analogue Specifies the length of time between the 0–60 s Feature Manual
CO Call Duration end of dialling and the start of the SMDR References
Start timer for outgoing analogue trunk calls. 2.22.1.1 Station
Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Intercept Routing Specifies the length of time until an 1–240 s PC Programming
No Answer unanswered trunk call is redirected to the Manual References
(IRNA)—Day, intercept routing destination in each time 8.2 Users—Advanced
Lunch, Break, mode. Extension Settings—
Night Note that this setting is only valid for Intercept No Answer
extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Intercept No
Time is set to "0". Answer Time—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
Recall—Hold Specifies the length of time until the 0 (disable Feature Manual
Recall holding extension receives a Hold Recall the Hold References
ring or alarm tone when a held call Recall)– 2.13.1 Call Hold
remains unretrieved. 240 s
Recall—Transfer Specifies the length of time that a 1–240 s PC Programming
Recall transferred call waits to be answered, Manual References
before being redirected to the Transfer 8.2 Users—Advanced
Recall destination assigned to the original Extension Settings
transferring extension.
Feature Manual
References
2.12.1 Call Transfer
Recall—Call Specifies the length of time that a parked 1–240 s PC Programming
Park Recall call waits to be retrieved, before the Manual References
Transfer Recall destination assigned to the 8.2 Users—Advanced
extension that parked the call hears a Call Extension Settings
Park Recall ring.
Feature Manual
References
2.13.2 Call Park

332 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Recall— Specifies the length of time after an 60 × n (n = Feature Manual
Disconnect after extension with a trunk call on hold 1–30) s References
Recall receives a Hold Recall tone that the held 2.13.1 Call Hold
call is disconnected.
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a 1–15 s Feature Manual
Busy Tone / DND busy/DND tone is heard when a call is References
Tone made to an extension in busy status or 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb
DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent (DND)
when this timer expires. (For a call through 2.10 Busy Line/Busy
DISA, the call will be disconnected when Party Features
this timer expires.)
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a reorder 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone for tone is heard when using a PT handset. References
PT Handset The PT will return to idle status when this 2.5.2 Automatic
timer expires. Extension Release
Tone Length— Specifies the length of time that a reorder 1–15 s Feature Manual
Reorder Tone for tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a References
PT Hands-free PT in hands-free mode. The PT will return 2.5.2 Automatic
to idle status when this timer expires. This Extension Release
setting is applied to PSs as well as PTs. 2.11.1 Hands-free
Operation

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—Delayed Specifies the length of time that 0–30 s PC Programming Manual
Answer Timer the caller hears a ringback tone References
before hearing an OGM. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—Mute & Specifies the length of time until 0.0–12.0 s PC Programming Manual
OGM Start Timer the caller hears an OGM after References
after answering reaching the DISA line. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 333

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—No Dial Specifies the length of time after 0–120 s PC Programming Manual
Intercept Timer the OGM finishes playing in References
which the caller must begin 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
dialling before the call is System—Operator & BGM
redirected to the operator. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant—Operator
(Extension Number)—Day/Lunch/
Break/Night
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—2nd Dial Specifies the length of time in 0–5 s PC Programming Manual
Timer for AA which the caller must dial the References
second digit before the DISA AA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Service activates. Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—Intercept Specifies the length of time until 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Timer—Day, an unanswered DISA call is References
Lunch, Break, intercepted and redirected to the 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Night intercept routing destination after Settings—Advanced Extension
the original destination receives Settings—Intercept Destination—
the call in each time mode. Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA— Specifies the length of time that 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Disconnect Timer an intercepted DISA call rings at References
after Intercept the intercept routing destination 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
before being disconnected. Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)

334 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the number of times 0–15 PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong that the caller can prolong a References
Counter trunk-to-trunk line call on a DISA 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
line. (Selecting "0" enables the Optional Device—Voice Message
caller to prolong the trunk-to- —DISA Message
trunk line call without restriction.)
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—CO-to-CO Specifies the length of time that 60 × n (n PC Programming Manual
Call Prolong Time a trunk-to-trunk line call on a = 0–7) s References
DISA line is prolonged each time 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
that the caller prolongs the call. Optional Device—Voice Message
(Selecting "0" prevents the caller —DISA Message
from prolonging the trunk-to-
trunk line call.) Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
DISA—Progress Specifies the length of time that 0–60 s PC Programming Manual
Tone Continuation a progress tone is sent to the References
Time before manager extension before 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Recording recording an OGM. Optional Device—Voice Message
Message —DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
DISA—Reorder Specifies the length of time that 0–15 s PC Programming Manual
Tone Duration a reorder tone is sent to the References
caller before the call is 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
disconnected. If "0" is specified, Optional Device—Voice Message
no reorder tone is sent and the —DISA Message
call is disconnected immediately.
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time that 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Ring Duration a call from a doorphone rings (n=1–15) References
until the call is cancelled when s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
there is no answer. Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 335

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Doorphone—Call Specifies the length of time until 10 × n PC Programming Manual
Duration an answered doorphone call is (n=0–30) References
disconnected. s 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone— Specifies the length of time that 2–7 s PC Programming Manual
Open Duration a door stays unlocked after References
being opened from an extension. 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
Timed Reminder Specifies the number of times 1–15 Feature Manual References
—Repeat Counter that an alarm is repeated. 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
Timed Reminder Specifies the length of time 10 × n Feature Manual References
—Interval Time between the repeated alarms. (n=1–120) 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
s
Timed Reminder Specifies the length of time that 10 × n Feature Manual References
—Alarm Ringing an alarm rings. (n=1–30) 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
Duration s
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 60 × n (n Feature Manual References
Conference— the conference originator = 0–60) s 2.14.2 Conference
Recall Start Timer receives an Unattended
Conference Recall tone.
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— the parties involved in an 2.14.2 Conference
Warning Tone Unattended Conference receive
Start Timer a warning tone after the
conference originator receives
the Unattended Conference
Recall tone but does not return
to the conference.
Unattended Specifies the length of time until 0–240 s Feature Manual References
Conference— an Unattended Conference is 2.14.2 Conference
Disconnect Timer disconnected after the parties
involved in the conference
receive a warning tone but the
conference originator does not
return to the conference.

336 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Miscellaneous
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Caller ID—Waiting to Specifies the length of time that the 0–15 s PC Programming
receive PBX waits to receive Caller ID from Manual References
an analogue trunk. If the Caller ID is 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
received through an analogue trunk [3-1-3] Group—Trunk
card on which no Caller ID card is Group—Caller ID
mounted or through a port to which Modification
Caller ID Detection is disabled, this 14.1 PBX Configuration—
timer is not applicable. [6-1] Feature—System
Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID—Visual Specifies the length of time that a 0–250 s Feature Manual
Caller ID Display Caller ID number, with the Call References
Waiting tone offered by an analogue 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
line from the telephone company, is 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
shown on the display. The Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
number flashes on the display for five
seconds, followed by a 10-second
pause, then flashes again for five
seconds.
External Sensor— Specifies the length of time that the 10 × n Feature Manual
Ring Duration PBX waits for the called party to (n=1–15) References
answer before cancelling a sensor s 2.18.3 External Sensor
call.
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 0–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—DDI / digits when receiving a DDI/DID Manual References
DID number from a public network. The 18.3 PBX Configuration—
call will be redirected to a PBX [10-3] CO & Incoming Call
operator when this timer expires. —DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward
Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Incoming Call Inter- Specifies the length of time between 3–30 s PC Programming
digit Timer—TIE digits when receiving a dialled Manual References
number from a TIE line. The call will 17.1 PBX Configuration—
be redirected to a PBX operator when [9-1] Private Network—TIE
this timer expires. Table
Feature Manual
References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 337

10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
PT Display—PT Last Specifies the length of time that the 1–15 s
Display Duration in current information remains on the
Idle Mode display after the extension returns to
idle status.
Air Synchronisation Specifies the length of time that a 60 × n PC Programming
—Watching Slave CS can maintain an ongoing (n=0– Manual References
Degeneracy (x60s) call after air synchronisation is lost. 300) s 19.2.1 PBX Configuration—
[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air
Synchronisation
Voice Mail (Caller Specifies the length of time from 1–30 s Feature Manual
from VM to CO)— when the voice mail seizes a trunk References
On-hook Wait Time (for example, to transfer a call) until 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
the voice mail goes on hook. If the System Overview
time specified here is too short, the
voice mail will be unable to dial the
number and make a connection.
During Conversation Specifies the length of time that a 80 ms,
—DTMF Signal DTMF signal is sent when a number 160 ms,
Length is dialled from a PT or PS during a 240 ms,
conversation. 320 ms
During Conversation Specifies the length of time between 64 + 16 ×
—DTMF Inter-digit DTMF signals when numbers are n (n=0–
Pause dialled in succession from a PT or PS 15) ms
during a conversation.
During Conversation Specifies the length of the pause 1.5 s, 2.5 Feature Manual
—Pause Signal Time inserted when the PAUSE button is s, 3.5 s, References
pressed during a conversation. 4.5 s 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
System Wireless— When the destination of an incoming 0–30 s PC Programming
PS Out of Range call is a PS, specifies the length of Manual References
Timer time the PBX searches for the PS 10.9 PBX Configuration—
before setting its status to Out of [2-9] System—System
Range. Options—Option 4
If "0" is assigned, the timer is
controlled by the cell station.

338 PC Programming Manual

 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Conference Group Specifies the length of time that a 0–120 s PC Programming
Call—Ring Duration conference group call will ring. The Manual References
conference group call will be 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
established with members who [2-6-1] System—
answer within this time. If no Numbering Plan—Main—
members answer the call before this Features—Conference
timer expires, the call is cancelled. Group Call Operation
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call
Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—
[3-9] Group—Conference
Group
Feature Manual
References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Call Pickup Group Specifies how long the indication of 5, 10, 15 Feature Manual
Monitor—LCD an incoming call that can be s References
Display Duration (s) answered by an extension in a call 2.4.3 Call Pickup
pickup group is shown on PTs’
displays.

PC Programming Manual 339

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of
day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode
from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select the
desired Tenant from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension (determined by
COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table—Time

Setting
The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected
Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
1. Day/Lunch/Night Enables the setting of the start time for Disable, Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch each time block. Enable References
Start, Day2 Start, 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Setting 5.1.4 Time Service
1. Day/Lunch/Night Specifies the start time for each time 00:00– Feature Manual
—Day1 Start, Lunch block. Times can only be set when 23:59 References
Start, Day2 Start, 10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Night Start—Hour, System—Week Table—Time Setting is 5.1.4 Time Service
Minute set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Enables the setting of the start time for Disable, Feature Manual
Start—Setting each break period. Enable References
5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the start time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
Start—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 23:59 References
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] 5.1.3 Tenant Service
System—Week Table—Time Setting is 5.1.4 Time Service
set to Enable.
2. Break—Break 1–3 Specifies the end time for each break 00:00– Feature Manual
End—Hour, Minute period. Times can only be set when 23:59 References
10.4.1 PBX Configuration—[2-4] 5.1.3 Tenant Service
System—Week Table—Time Setting is 5.1.4 Time Service
set to Enable.

340 PC Programming Manual

 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday

Table
A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the
desired time mode from the PBX Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
You can click the UM Parameter tab to open the Holiday Table used for features of the Unified Messaging
system. These settings are synchronised with Unified Messaging system Holiday settings.

Holiday Table
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables the setting of the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
holiday. Enable 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
Holiday Table—UM Parameter
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Name of Specifies the name of the Max. 32 PC Programming Manual References
Holiday holiday setting for later characters 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
reference. Holiday Table—UM Parameter
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Start Date Specifies the month and day Month and PC Programming Manual References
(Month of the holiday start date. This Day 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
Day) setting synchronises with the Holiday Table—UM Parameter
PBX’s Holiday Table.
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
Start Time Specifies the time of day on Hour and PC Programming Manual References
the specified date at which to Minute 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
begin the holiday service. Holiday Table—UM Parameter
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
End Date Specifies the month and day Month and PC Programming Manual References
(Month of the holiday end date. This Day 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
Day) setting synchronises with the Holiday Table—UM Parameter
PBX’s Holiday Table.
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service
End Time Specifies the time of day on Hour and PC Programming Manual References
the specified date at which to Minute 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
end the holiday service. Holiday Table—UM Parameter
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

PC Programming Manual 341

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Retain If "Yes" is selected, the No, Yes PC Programming Manual References
Holiday holiday will not end 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—
regardless of the end time Holiday Table—UM Parameter
setting.
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

UM Parameter
Holidays can be set for and assigned to service groups and Unified Messaging ports. When a call is
received from a certain service group or by a certain subscriber during the time frame set for an assigned
holiday, the call handling settings for that holiday will be used. This screen is similar to the table found in
10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table. You can also access the Holiday Table directly
by clicking the Holiday Table tab. A maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Setting Enables the setting of the holiday. Enable, Disable PC Programming
This setting synchronises with the Manual References
PBX’s Holiday Table. 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday Table
—Holiday Table—Setting
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Name of Specifies the name of the holiday Max. 32 Characters Feature Manual
Holiday setting for later reference. References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Start Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday start date. Manual References
Day) 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday Table
→Holiday Table—Start Date
—Month
→ Holiday Table—Start Date
—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Start Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute Feature Manual
specified date at which to begin References
the holiday service. 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

342 PC Programming Manual

 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

End Date Specifies the month and day of the Month and Day PC Programming
(Month holiday end date. Manual References
Day) 10.5 PBX Configuration—
[2-5] System—Holiday Table
→ Holiday Table—End Date
—Month
→Holiday Table—End Date
—Day
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
End Time Specifies the time of day on the Hour and Minute Feature Manual
specified date at which to end the References
holiday service. 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Retain If "Yes" is selected, the holiday will No, Yes Feature Manual
Holiday not end regardless of the end time References
setting. 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Company Specify the greeting callers hear None (do not Feature Manual
Greeting when calling the affected trunks or playback): No References
No. ports during the holiday. greeting is heard. 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
No. 1–32: The
selected company
greeting is heard.
System Greeting:
The following
greeting is heard:
"Good morning/Good
afternoon/Good
evening. Welcome to
the Unified
Messaging System".

PC Programming Manual 343

10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Service One of 4 incoming call services Voice Mail Service: Feature Manual
(Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, The caller is References
Interview, or Custom Service) can transferred to the 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
be assigned to each holiday. After Voice Mail Service.
a greeting is played (if specified), Automated
the call will be transferred to the Attendant Service:
selected service. The caller is
transferred to the
Automated Attendant
Service.
Interview Mailbox:
The caller is
transferred to an
Interview Mailbox.
Custom Service
Menu: The caller is
transferred to a
Custom Service
Menu.
Interview If "Interview Mailbox" or "Custom Interview Mailbox Feature Manual
Mailbox/ Service Menu" was selected for number: 2-8 digits, References
Custom Service, specify the Interview Custom Service 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
Service Mailbox or Custom Service here. number: 1-200
Menu
Trunk In this screen, trunk number No. 1-384, All Feature Manual
Affected means service group number. References
Specify which service groups will 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
be subject to the holiday setting.
Click Edit, and then select the
check boxes for the service
groups to be subject to the holiday
setting, or select the All check box
to apply the holiday to all service
groups. Click OK to finish.
Port Specify which UM ports will be Port No. 1–128, All Feature Manual
Affected subject to the holiday setting. Click References
Edit, and then select the check 3.2.1.21 Holiday Service
boxes for the UM ports to be
subject to the holiday setting, or
select the All check box to apply
the holiday to all UM ports. Click
OK to finish.

344 PC Programming Manual

 10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering Plan

10.6 PBX Configuration—[2-6] System—Numbering

Plan
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—
Main
Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, and numbers to access other PBXs
in a network can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.

Note
• Numbering does not necessarily have to be uniform; varying numbers of digits can be used for each
setting.
• To programme these settings, all installed V-SIPEXT cards must first be set to OUS. For details, see
9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of 128
different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number of Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual
Number extension numbers and floating (consisting of References
extension numbers. 0–9) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Note
Group—Group Settings
Changing this value will also 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2]
affect the following settings. Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
• Extension Number as set 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
in User Container and UM Settings
Configuration 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Optional Device—Voice Message
—DISA Message
19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Maintenance—Main
20.1 UM Configuration—[1]
Mailbox Settings—Mailbox
Number
No. of Specifies the number of additional None: 0 digit
Additional digits following the leading X: 1 digit
Digits number. XX: 2 digits

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available
while hearing a dial tone.

PC Programming Manual 345

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to call the operator. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
System—Operator & BGM
14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant
Feature Manual
References
5.1.5 Operator Features
Idle Line Access Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Local Access) used to make a trunk call by (consisting of 0– References
Idle Line Access (selects an 9, *, and #) 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—
idle trunk automatically). [3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—
Local Access Priority
Feature Manual
References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Trunk Group Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to make a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
using an idle trunk from a 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—
certain trunk group. [10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to make a TIE line call. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1]
Private Network—TIE Table
Feature Manual
References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Redial Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
used to redial the last number (consisting of 0– References
dialled. 9, *, and #) 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
System Speed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dialling / used to make a call using a (consisting of 0– References
Personal Speed System/Personal Speed 9, *, and #) 8.4 Users—Speed Dial
Dialling Dialling number. 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System

346 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Personal Speed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Dialling - used to programme Personal (consisting of 0– References
Programming Speed Dialling numbers at an 9, *, and #) 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
extension. Personal/System
DOORPHONE Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Call used to make a call to a (consisting of 0– References
doorphone. 9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual
References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Group Paging Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to page a certain paging (consisting of 0– References
group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging
External BGM Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
On / Off available for manager (consisting of 0– References
extensions, used to turn on or 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
off the external BGM. System—Operator & BGM
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual
References
2.28.1 Background Music
(BGM)
OGM Record / Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Clear / Playback available for manager (consisting of 0– References
extensions, used to record or 9, *, and #) 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—
play back a certain OGM. [5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA Message
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual
References
2.28.2 Outgoing Message
(OGM)

PC Programming Manual 347

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Single CO Line Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to make a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
using a certain trunk. 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—
[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
Parallel Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits
Telephone (Ring) used to set or cancel an SLT (consisting of 0–
Mode Set / connected in parallel with a 9, *, and #)
Cancel DPT to ring when receiving an
incoming call.

Note
This feature is restricted to
extensions connected to
legacy gateway PBXs. For
information about
connecting SLTs and
DPTs in parallel, refer to
the documentation of the
connected legacy gateway
PBX.
Group Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup used to answer a call ringing (consisting of 0– References
at a certain call pickup group. 9, *, and #) 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3]
Group—Call Pickup Group
Feature Manual
References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
Directed Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Pickup used to answer a call ringing (consisting of 0– References
at a certain extension. 9, *, and #) 8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Extension Settings—Advanced
Extension Settings—Option 3
—Call Pickup Deny
Feature Manual
References
2.4.3 Call Pickup

348 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

TAFAS Answer Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to answer a trunk call (consisting of 0– References
notified through an external 9, *, and #) 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2]
pager. Optional Device—External
Pager
Feature Manual
References
2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any
Station (TAFAS)
Group Paging Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Answer used to answer a page to a (consisting of 0– References
paging group. 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
Group—Paging Group
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging
Automatic Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Callback Busy used to cancel Automatic (consisting of 0– References
Cancel Callback Busy. 9, *, and #) 2.10.1 Automatic Callback
Busy (Camp-on)
User Remote Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Operation / used to change the COS of an (consisting of 0– References
Walking COS / extension temporarily, and 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Verification Code also change the feature [2-7-1] System—Class of
settings (for example, FWD, Service—COS Settings—
DND) of an extension from Optional Device & Other
another extension or through Extensions—Remote
DISA. Operation by Other Extension
Feature Manual
References
2.7.5 Walking COS
2.7.6 Verification Code Entry
Account Code Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Entry used to enter an Account (consisting of 0– References
Code. 9, *, and #) 2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
Call Hold / Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Hold Retrieve used to hold a call or retrieve (consisting of 0– References
a call on hold from the holding 9, *, and #) 2.13.1 Call Hold
extension.
Call Hold Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Retrieve : used to retrieve a held call (consisting of 0– References
Specified with a from a different extension by 9, *, and #) 2.13.1 Call Hold
Holding specifying a holding extension
Extension number.
Number

PC Programming Manual 349

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Park / Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Park Retrieve used to hold a call in a parking (consisting of 0– References
zone or retrieve a call held in 9, *, and #) 2.13.2 Call Park
a parking zone.
Hold Retrieve : Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Specified with a used to retrieve a held trunk (consisting of 0– References
Held CO Line call from a different extension 9, *, and #) 2.13.1 Call Hold
Number by specifying the held trunk
number.
Door Open Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to open a door. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1]
Optional Device—Doorphone
Feature Manual
References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Relay Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Access used to activate a relay. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4]
Optional Device—External
Relay
Feature Manual
References
2.18.4 External Relay Control
External Feature Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Access used to access the features of (consisting of 0– References
a host PBX or the telephone 9, *, and #) 2.11.7 External Feature Access
company. (EFA)
SIP Refer(Blind) Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
used to perform a blind (consisting of 0– References
transfer from a SIP extension. 9, *, and #) 5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation
Protocol) Extension
ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
used to hold a call using the (consisting of 0– References
ISDN service of the telephone 9, *, and #) 4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by
company, instead of the PBX ISDN
feature.

350 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

COLR Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel COLR, (consisting of 0– References
which suppresses the 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
presentation of the called Configuration—Slot—Port
party’s number to the caller. Property - BRI Port—
Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP,
CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-
D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP,
CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-
D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—
by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 351

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

CLIR Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel CLIR, (consisting of 0– References
which suppresses the 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
presentation of the caller’s Configuration—Slot—Port
number to the called party. Property - BRI Port—
Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP,
CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-
D, AOC-E, 3PTY
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—
Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP,
CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-
D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)
4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—
by QSIG
Switch CLIP of Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
CO Line / used to send either the CLIP (consisting of 0– References
Extension number of the trunk in use 9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
(subscriber’s number) or the Configuration—Slot—Port
extension to the network. Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
—Subscriber Number
9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—Subscriber Number
8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Extension Settings—Advanced
Extension Settings—CLIP—
CLIP ID
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(CLIP/COLP)

352 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

MCID Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
used to ask the telephone (consisting of 0– References
company to trace a malicious 9, *, and #) 4.1.2.9 Malicious Call
call. This feature can be used Identification (MCID)
during a call or while hearing
a reorder tone after the caller
hangs up.
ISDN-FWD Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
(MSN) Set / used to set or cancel the FWD (consisting of 0– References
Cancel / Confirm of incoming ISDN calls to an 9, *, and #) 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—
outside party using the ISDN by ISDN (P-MP)
service of the telephone 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—
company (instead of the by ISDN (P-P)
PBX), or confirm the FWD
setting.
Extension users can set the
FWD destination to the
network on an MSN basis.
Message Waiting Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Set / Cancel / used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Call Back Message Waiting, or call back 9, *, and #) 2.20.1 Message Waiting
the caller.
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension FWD/DND for incoming trunk 9, *, and #) 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
and intercom calls. Add User/Edit User—
Telephony Feature
29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming
Call Control
Feature Manual
References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD/DND Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
CO FWD/DND for incoming trunk 9, *, and #) 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
calls. Add User/Edit User—
Telephony Feature
29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming
Call Control
Feature Manual
References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features

PC Programming Manual 353

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Extension FWD/DND for incoming 9, *, and #) 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
intercom calls. Add User/Edit User—
Telephony Feature
29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming
Call Control
Feature Manual
References
2.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND) Features
FWD No Answer Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Timer Set used to set the length of time (consisting of 0– References
before a call is forwarded. 9, *, and #) 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
Add User/Edit User—
Telephony Feature
29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming
Call Control
Feature Manual
References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
CO & Extension incoming trunk and intercom 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
calls to an incoming call [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
distribution group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—
SUMMARY
Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
CO incoming trunk calls to an 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
incoming call distribution [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—
SUMMARY

354 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Group FWD Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel: Call from used to set or cancel FWD for (consisting of 0– References
Extension incoming intercom calls to an 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
incoming call distribution [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
group. Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—
SUMMARY
Call Pickup Deny Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel Call (consisting of 0– References
Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing 9, *, and #) 2.4.3 Call Pickup
other extensions from picking
up calls to your extension).
Paging Deny Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel Paging (consisting of 0– References
Deny (i.e., preventing other 9, *, and #) 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4]
extensions from paging your Group—Paging Group
extension).
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging
Data Line Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Security Set / used to set or cancel Data (consisting of 0– References
Cancel Line Security (i.e., preventing 9, *, and #) 2.11.5 Data Line Security
signals from other extensions
during data transmission).
Manual Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Waiting for used to set or change the (consisting of 0– References
Extension Call method of receiving a Call 9, *, and #) 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Waiting notification from an
extension.
Automatic Call Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Waiting used to set or cancel a Call (consisting of 0– References
Waiting notification from a 9, *, and #) 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
trunk, doorphone, or a call via
an incoming call distribution
group.

PC Programming Manual 355

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Executive Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Override Deny used to set or cancel (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
preventing other extensions [2-7-1] System—Class of
from joining your Service—COS Settings—
conversation). Executive—Executive Busy
Override
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Executive—Executive Busy
Override Deny
Feature Manual
References
2.10.2 Executive Busy
Override
Not Ready Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Manual Wrap- used to enter or leave Not (consisting of 0– References
up) Mode On / Ready mode. 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
Off [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to join or leave an (consisting of 0– References
incoming call distribution 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
group. [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group
Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Incoming Call Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Queue Monitor available only for extensions (consisting of 0– References
assigned as a supervisor, 9, *, and #) 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—
used to monitor the status of [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
an incoming call distribution Distribution Group—Group
group with the extension Settings—Miscellaneous—
display. Supervisor Extension Number
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

356 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Hot Line (Pickup Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Dial) Program used to set/cancel the Hot (consisting of 0– References
Set / Cancel Line feature, or programme 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
the number to be System—Timers & Counters—
automatically dialled. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—
Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Start
Feature Manual
References
2.6.7 Hot Line
Absent Message Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel the (consisting of 0– References
display of an Absent 9, *, and #) 2.20.2 Absent Message
Message.
BGM Set / Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Cancel used to set or cancel the BGM (consisting of 0– References
heard through the telephone 9, *, and #) 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
speaker while on-hook. System—Operator & BGM
Feature Manual
References
2.28.1 Background Music
(BGM)
Remote Timed Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Reminder used to set or cancel a Timed (consisting of 0– References
(Remote Wakeup Reminder remotely (Wake-up 9, *, and #) 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
Call) Call).
Timed Reminder Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Set / Cancel used to set or cancel a Timed (consisting of 0– References
Reminder. 9, *, and #) 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
Printing Message Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to select a Printing (consisting of 0– References
Message to be output on 9, *, and #) 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
SMDR. Feature—Hotel & Charge—
Main—SMDR for External
Hotel Application 2—Printing
Message 1–8
Feature Manual
References
2.22.2 Printing Message

PC Programming Manual 357

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Dial Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Lock Set / Cancel used to lock or unlock an (consisting of 0– References
extension to make certain 9, *, and #) 2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
trunk calls and change the
forwarding destination, using
the Extension Dial Lock
feature.
Time Service Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
(Day / Lunch / available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Break / Night) extensions, used to change 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Switch the time mode manually. [2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Time Service Switch
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual
References
5.1.4 Time Service
Remote Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Lock Off extensions, used to unlock 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
other extensions using the [2-7-1] System—Class of
Extension Dial Lock feature. Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual
References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Remote Specifies the feature number, Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Extension Dial available for manager (consisting of 0– References
Lock On extensions, used to lock other 9, *, and #) 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
extensions using the [2-7-1] System—Class of
Extension Dial Lock feature. Service—COS Settings—
Manager—Manager
Feature Manual
References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock
Extension Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Feature Clear used to reset certain features (consisting of 0– References
of an extension to the default 9, *, and #) 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
values.
Extension PIN Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Set / Cancel used to set a PIN for an (consisting of 0– References
extension. 9, *, and #) 2.24.1 Extension Personal
Identification Number (PIN)

358 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial Information Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
(CTI) used to send dial information (consisting of 0– References
to the CTI feature instead of 9, *, and #) 2.26.1 Computer Telephony
the PBX. Integration (CTI)
Conference Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
Group Call used to make a conference (consisting of 0– References
Operation group call. 9, *, and #) 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call—Ring Duration
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of
Service—COS Settings—
Miscellaneous—Conference
Group Call Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9]
Group—Conference Group
Feature Manual
References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
used to cancel the Busy Out (consisting of 0– References
status of an analogue trunk. 9, *, and #) 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options—
Option 5—Busy Out—Busy
Out for Analogue CO
Feature Manual
References
2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out
Main device Specifies the Access Code for Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Service-in Service-in as a main device. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 2.24.4.1 Service-in Feature
Sub device Specifies the Access Code for Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Service-in Service-in as a sub device. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 2.24.4.1 Service-in Feature
PS Service-in Specifies the Access Code for Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Service-in as a wireless (consisting of 0– References
device. 9, *, and #) 2.24.4.1 Service-in Feature
Service-out Specifies the Access Code for Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Service-out. (consisting of 0– References
9, *, and #) 2.24.4.2 Service-out Feature
Device in use (for Specifies the device in use Max. 4 digits
CTI) (for CTI). (consisting of 0–
9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 359

10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different
locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be
entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the leading Max. 3 digits PC Programming Manual References
extension number of (consisting of 0–9, *, 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private
the other PBX. and #) Network—TIE Table—Priority 1–Priority 8
Feature Manual References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

KX-T7710
The settings of the MESSAGE key and one-touch keys on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

Note
• This tab is for programming extensions connected to legacy gateways. For information about setting
up a legacy gateway, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/
Legacy-GW2.
• For further information about programming for KX-T7710 phones, refer to the documentation of the
connected legacy gateway.
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial B: For MESSAGE Key
required by the PBX to recognise it A1: For One-touch Dial 01
and dial the pre-programmed Key
number for each key (reference A2: For One-touch Dial 02
only). Key
A3: For One-touch Dial 03
Key
A4: For One-touch Dial 04
Key
A5: For One-touch Dial 05
Key
A6: For One-touch Dial 06
Key
A7: For One-touch Dial 07
Key
A8: For One-touch Dial 08
Key

360 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies the feature number or Max. 32 digits (consisting of PC Programming
Key— telephone number dialled when the 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] Manual
Phone MESSAGE key on the KX-T7710 is [Secret], P [Pause], and F References
Number pressed. By default, this is set to [Flash])
10.6.1 PBX
the feature number used to call
Configuration—
back a caller who left a message
[2-6-1] System—
waiting indication, Message
Numbering Plan—
Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
Main—Features—
This is available only when the
Message Waiting
position of the Mode switch lever on
Set / Cancel / Call
the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".
Back
One-touch Specifies the number dialled when Max. 32 digits (consisting of
Dial 01–08 a one-touch key on the KX-T7710 is 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ]
—Phone pressed. [Secret], P [Pause], and F
Number This is available only when the [Flash])
position of the Mode switch lever on
the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—

Quick Dial
Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without
having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other
registered numbers (refer to "4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network" in the Feature Manual).
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Name Description Value Range Links
Memory Selects the Quick Dialling Table to Basic Memory: the
be programmed. Whether a tenant standard table
uses the basic Quick Dialling Table Expansion for Tenant
or the additional table depends on 1–128: additional
the setting of Quick Dial in 14.6 PBX tables
Configuration—[6-6] Feature—
Tenant.
Use quick Specifies whether Quick Dialling can On, Off Feature Manual
dial for be used for rerouting to a public References
rerouting to trunk when a TIE line is not 2.6.6 Quick Dialling
public CO operating.
when TIE
line does not
work.

PC Programming Manual 361

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Name Description Value Range Links

Dial Specifies the Quick Dialling number. Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
The number of Quick Dialling that (consisting of 0–9, *, References
can be set for the system is 4,000, or and #) 2.6.6 Quick Dialling
for a tenant is 1,000. 4.3.2 Voice over Internet
Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.6 Flexible
Numbering/Fixed
Numbering
Phone Specifies the number to be dialled Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Number when the corresponding Quick (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Dialling number is used. #, T [Transfer], [ ] 2.6.6 Quick Dialling
[Secret], P [Pause], 4.3.2 Voice over Internet
and F [Flash]) Protocol (VoIP) Network
5.5.6 Flexible
Numbering/Fixed
Numbering

10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—

B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "5.5.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature
Manual.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
BSS / Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, Feature Manual References
OHCA / to notify a busy extension of a *, or #) 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Whisper second call by Call Waiting, or call 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / DND an extension in DND mode. 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
Override 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Executive Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, PC Programming Manual
Busy to interrupt an existing call to *, or #) References
Override establish a three-party conference 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
call. [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
—COS Settings—Executive—
Executive Busy Override
8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Extension Settings—Advanced
Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Alternate Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, Feature Manual References
Calling - to allow a caller to change the called *, or #) 2.5.3 Intercom Call
Ring / Voice extension’s preset call receiving
method to ring tone or voice.

362 PC Programming Manual

 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Message Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, Feature Manual References
Waiting Set to leave a Message Waiting *, or #) 2.20.1 Message Waiting
notification.
Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, PC Programming Manual
to listen to a busy extension’s *, or #) References
conversation. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
[2-7-1] System—Class of Service
—COS Settings—Executive—
Call Monitor
8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Extension Settings—Advanced
Extension Settings—Option 3—
Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor
Automatic Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, Feature Manual References
Callback to reserve a busy line and receive *, or #) 2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy
Busy callback ringing when the line (Camp-on)
becomes idle.
BSS / Specifies the feature number used 1 digit (0–9, Feature Manual References
OHCA / to notify a busy extension of a *, or #) 2.1.3.3 Call Waiting
Whisper second call by Call Waiting, or call 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
OHCA / DND an extension in DND mode. This is 2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
Override-2 the same setting as 10.6.3 PBX 2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Configuration—[2-6-3] System—
Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call
Feature on this screen, and can be
used to provide two methods of
activating the specified features.
This can be useful, for example, if
users prefer to use a separate
feature number to activate DND
Override.

PC Programming Manual 363

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of Service

10.7 PBX Configuration—[2-7] System—Class of

Service
10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—
COS Settings
Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of
Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A
maximum of 512 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
TRS Level Specifies the Toll 1: Allows all trunk calls PC Programming Manual
—Day, Restriction (TRS)/ 2–6: Restricts trunk References
Lunch, Call Barring (Barring) calls according to the 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System
Break, Night level for making trunk combination of the —Week Table
calls in each time Denied and Exception 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
mode. Code Tables Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
7: Restricts all trunk Main—COS
calls 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1]
Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Group Settings—Main—COS
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional
Device—Doorphone—COS
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
Denied Code
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk calls PC Programming Manual
on Barring level for 2–6: Restricts trunk References
Extension making trunk calls calls according to the 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Lock when an extension is combination of the Settings—COS
locked using the Denied and Exception 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—
Extension Dial Lock Code Tables Denied Code
feature. 7: Restricts all trunk 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—
calls Exception Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

364 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Level Specifies the TRS/ 1: Allows all trunk calls PC Programming Manual
for System Barring level for 2–6: Restricts trunk References
Speed making a trunk call calls according to the 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Dialling using System Speed combination of the Settings—COS
Dialling numbers, Denied and Exception 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature
which overrides the Code Tables —System Speed Dial
TRS/Barring set for 7: Restricts all trunk 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—
the current time calls Miscellaneous—TRS Override by
mode. System Speed Dialling
Feature Manual References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

CO & SMDR
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Extension-CO Enables the extension-to- Disable, PC Programming Manual
Line Call trunk call duration feature. Enable References
Duration Limit The maximum call duration 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—
can be set using Main on System Options—Option 2—Extension -
11.1.1 PBX Configuration CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
Group—TRG Settings. Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—
Main—COS
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Transfer to Enables the transferring of Disable, PC Programming Manual
CO calls to trunks. Enable References
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
2.12.1 Call Transfer
Call Forward Enables the forwarding of Disable, PC Programming Manual
to CO calls to trunks. Enable References
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add
User/Edit User—Telephony Feature
Feature Manual References
2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 365

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Account Code Specifies whether the entry Option, PC Programming Manual
Mode of an account code is Forced References
optional or mandatory when 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
making a trunk call. Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry
CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN Disable, Feature Manual References
calls to an outside party Enable 4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN
using the ISDN service of the (P-MP)
telephone company, instead 4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN
of the PBX, on an MSN (P-P)
basis.
Outgoing CO Enables the automatic Disable, PC Programming Manual
Call Printout recording of information Enable References
(SMDR) about outgoing trunk calls on 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
SMDR. Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)

Assistant
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Pickup Enables using a DSS Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
by DSS button to pick up a call References
to a specified 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
extension. Settings—COS
8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—
Wired Extension
8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—
Portable Station
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
DND Enables making a call Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Override to an extension in DND References
mode by entering the 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
feature number. Settings—COS
8.1.1 Users—User Container—
Add User/Edit User—Telephony
Feature
Feature Manual References
2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

366 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

OHCA / Enables using OHCA/ Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Whisper Whisper OHCA as a References
OHCA method of second call 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
notification by entering Settings—COS
the feature number.
Feature Manual References
2.10.4 Second Call Notification to
Busy Extension
2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA
Transfer to Enables a transferred Disable: The call is not PC Programming Manual
busy call to be queued when transferred. (If the transfer References
Extension the transfer destination destination has enabled 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
w/o BSS is busy. the call waiting notification System—Timers & Counters—
Operation feature, it is possible to Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
inform the destination
about the call transfer.) Feature Manual References
Enable: The transferred 2.12.1 Call Transfer
call is queued for the time
period specified in Dial /
IRNA / Recall / Tone in
10.3 PBX Configuration
—[2-3] System—Timers
& Counters.
Automatic Enables a caller to Disable: Even if the Feature Manual References
Answer have calls automatically destination has set 2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback
(Caller) answered when the Hands-free Answerback,
destination has set the call will not be
Hands-free automatically answered.
Answerback. Enable: The call will be
automatically answered.

Executive
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Call Monitor Enables listening to a Disable, PC Programming Manual
busy extension’s Enable References
conversation. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
—COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.3 Call Monitor

PC Programming Manual 367

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Executive Enables interrupting an Disable, PC Programming Manual
Busy Override existing call to establish a Enable References
three-party conference 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
call. —COS
Feature Manual References
2.10.2 Executive Busy Override
Executive Enables preventing other Disable, PC Programming Manual
Busy Override extensions from Enable References
Deny interrupting calls. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name Max. 20 characters Feature Manual References
of the COS. 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Group Forward Enables setting call Disable: An extension PC Programming Manual
Set forwarding for calls cannot set call References
to an incoming call forwarding for any group. 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—
distribution group. Enable-All: An extension [3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
can set call forwarding Distribution Group—Group
for all groups. Settings—Member List
Enable-Group: An 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
extension can only set Settings—COS
call forwarding for the
group to which the Feature Manual References
extension belongs. 2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
PT Specifies the level of Disable: PC Programming Manual
Programming authorisation for A PT user cannot References
Mode performing PT perform any 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
programming. programming. Settings—COS
Enable:
A PT user can perform Feature Manual References
only personal 5.5.2 PT Programming
programming.
Manager Specifies the Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
authorisation to use References
manager features. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.6 Manager Features

368 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Time Service Enables manual Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Switch switching of time References
modes. 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
System—Week Table
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—COS
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN
An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick
up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for
extensions at each COS level.
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an Enhanced DSS: Feature Manual References
extension user presses an The registered 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
SDN button while on hook. (owner) (PDN)/Secondary Directory
extension is Number (SDN) Extension
called.
Standard SDN:
A dial tone is
heard.
Making call by Selects whether an extension Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
COS of SDN that uses an SDN button to References
key’s owner make calls is given the COS of 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
the SDN button’s registered [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
(owner) extension. —COS Settings—PDN/SDN—
This setting is only available COS Name
when PDN/SDN above is set to
"Standard SDN". Feature Manual References
2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary Directory
Number (SDN) Extension
SDN Key Selects whether PT users can Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
Assignment by create SDN buttons on their 2.9.1 Primary Directory Number
PT Program own extensions using PT (PDN)/Secondary Directory
programming. Number (SDN) Extension

Optional Device & Other Extensions

Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 Feature Manual References
the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 369

10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Door Unlock Enables using the door Disable, PC Programming Manual References
opener feature. Enable 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
COS
Feature Manual References
2.18.2 Door Open
External Relay Enables access to Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Access external relays. Enable 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional
Device—External Relay
Feature Manual References
2.18.4 External Relay Control
Accept the Enables reception of Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Call from calls from DISA. Enable 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
DISA COS
13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional
Device—Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Remote Allows the Walking COS Allow, Deny PC Programming Manual References
Operation by feature to be used from 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
Other a remote location (inside COS
Extension the PBX, or outside the
PBX using DISA). Feature Manual References
2.7.5 Walking COS

CA
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Max. 20 Feature Manual References
characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
CA Chat Enables the chat feature when Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
using CA (Communication 2.26.2 CA (Communication
Assistant) Operator Console. Assistant) Operator Console
CA ICD Enables logging out of ICD groups Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
Group Log when using CA (Communication 2.26.2 CA (Communication
Out Assistant) Operator Console. Assistant) Operator Console

Smart Desk
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
5.1.1 Class of
Service (COS)

370 PC Programming Manual

 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block

Name Description Value Range Links

Password Authorisation Specifies whether to enable Enable, Disable
for Service-out Password Authorisation for
Service-out.
Smart Desk Availability Specifies whether to enable Smart Enable, Disable
Desk Availability.
Smart Desk Availability Specifies whether to enable Smart Enable, Disable
for Sub Device/PS Desk Availability for sub devices
and PSs.
ICD Group Log-in/out Specifies whether to enable ICD Enable, Disable
when Service-in/out Group Log-in/out when performing
Service-in/Service-out.

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
COS Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 Feature Manual References
the COS. characters 5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)
Conference Enables making Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Group Call conference group References
Operation calls. 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System
—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
—Conference Group Call—Ring
Duration
10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1]
System—Numbering Plan—Main—
Features—Conference Group Call
Operation
11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—
Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Accept a collect Enables accepting Disable, Enable
call (for Brazil) collect calls.
User Operation in Specifies whether to Disable: Do not
System allow users to use allow use
Congestion telephones while the Enable: Allow
system is congested. use

10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—

External Call Block
Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

PC Programming Manual 371

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Name Description Value Range Links

TRG 1– Specifies the Block (blue), PC Programming Manual References
128 available trunk Non Block 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
groups. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—

Internal Call Block
Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming
call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive
intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
COS Number of Specifies the Block PC Programming Manual References
the Extension combinations of (blue), 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—
Which Receive the COS levels for which Non Block Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group
Call from Other intercom calls are Settings—Main—COS
Extension 1–512 blocked. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
COS
13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional
Device—Doorphone—COS
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

372 PC Programming Manual

 10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone Patterns

10.8 PBX Configuration—[2-8] System—Ring Tone

Patterns
10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns
—Call from CO
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the
calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table
can be selected for use by an extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern Plan tone pattern for Double, 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming
1–8 incoming trunk Triple, Call—CO Line Settings—Trunk Group Number
calls. Option1, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
Option2 Advanced Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
Pattern Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from DOORPHONE
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port
that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any
pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Ring Tone Specifies the ring Single, Double, PC Programming Manual References
Pattern Plan tone pattern for Triple, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—
1–8 incoming S-Double, Advanced Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring
doorphone calls. Option 1, Pattern Table
Option 2 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device
—Doorphone
Feature Manual References
2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns

—Call from Others
Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX
features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables
can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature Manual.

PC Programming Manual 373

10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension—Ring Specifies the ring tone Single, Double, PC Programming Manual
Tone Pattern Plan pattern for incoming Triple, References
1–8 intercom calls. Option 1, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Option 2 Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table
Timed Reminder— Specifies the ring tone Single, Double, PC Programming Manual
Ring Tone Pattern pattern for Timed Triple, References
Plan 1–8 Reminder alarms. Option 1, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Option 2 Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table
Call Back—Ring Specifies the ring tone Single, Double, PC Programming Manual
Tone Pattern Plan pattern for callback Triple, References
1–8 ringing by Automatic S-Double, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Callback Busy. Option 1, Settings—Advanced Extension
Option 2 Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table
Live Call Screening Specifies the ring tone Single, Double, PC Programming Manual
—Ring Tone Pattern pattern for LCS Triple, References
Plan 1–8 warning tones. Option 1, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Option 2 Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table
External Sensor— Specifies the ring tone Single, Double, PC Programming Manual
Ring Tone Pattern pattern for calls from Triple, References
Plan 1–8 an external sensor. Option 1, 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Option 2 Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table

374 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System

Options
Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
PT LCD—Date Selects the order that the Date-Month, Month-
Display month and date are shown on Date
the displays of extensions.
PT LCD—Time Selects the time format 12H, 24H Feature Manual
Display shown on the displays of References
extensions. The time display 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
format assigned here applies
when setting the Timed
Reminder feature.
PT LCD— Selects whether passwords Hide, Display Feature Manual
Password / PIN and PINs (Personal References
Display Identification Number) are 2.24.1 Extension Personal
hidden or shown on the Identification Number (PIN)
displays of extensions while
being entered.
PT Fwd / DND— Selects the light pattern of the On (Solid): Red on PC Programming
Fwd LED FWD/DND button while the Flash: Slow red Manual References
FWD feature is activated. flashing 8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit
User—Telephony Feature
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication
PT Fwd / DND— Selects the light pattern of the On (Solid): Red on PC Programming
DND LED FWD/DND button while the Flash: Slow red Manual References
DND feature is activated. flashing 8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit
User—Telephony Feature
Feature Manual
References
2.3.1 Call Forwarding
(FWD)/Do Not Disturb
(DND)—SUMMARY
2.21.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual 375

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Fwd / DND— Selects the function of the FWD/DND Setting PC Programming
Fwd/DND key FWD/DND button (fixed Mode: Enter Manual References
mode when Idle button) when it is pressed in programming mode for 8.1.1 Users—User
idle status. (A FWD/DND the FWD/DND setting. Container—Add User/Edit
button customised on a FWD/DND Cycle User—Telephony Feature
flexible button is always in Switch: Switch the
FWD/DND Cycle Switch FWD on/DND on/Off Feature Manual
mode, and the mode cannot mode instead of References
be changed.) entering the 2.3.1 Call Forwarding
programming mode for (FWD)/Do Not Disturb
the FWD/DND setting. (DND)—SUMMARY
(When there are
separate FWD/DND
settings for calls from
trunks and calls from
extensions, mode
switching cannot be
performed.)
PT Fwd / DND— Specifies whether extensions Do Not Page, Page PC Programming
Paging to DND can receive paging when in Manual References
Extension DND mode. 8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit
User—Telephony Feature
11.4 PBX Configuration—
[3-4] Group—Paging
Group
Feature Manual
References
2.17.1 Paging
PT Operation— Enables the use of Off-Hook Disable: The PT user’s Feature Manual
Off Hook Monitor with D-PTs and voice is sent through References
Monitor IP-PTs. the handsfree 2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor
microphone. The other
party’s voice is heard
through the hands-free
speaker.
Enable: The PT user’s
voice is sent through
the handset
microphone. The other
party’s voice is heard
through both the
hands-free speaker
and the handset.

376 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

PT Operation— Selects the function of the S- Enable: Pressing the Feature Manual
Privacy Release CO button during a trunk call. S-CO button activates References
by SCO key the Privacy Release 2.14.3 Privacy Release
feature
Disable: Pressing the
S-CO button switches
the information shown
on the PT display.
PT Operation— Specifies whether calls in Enable, Disable Feature Manual
One-touch Busy progress can be joined References
Override by (Executive Busy Override) 2.10.2 Executive Busy
SCO key simply by pressing the S-CO Override
button.
PT Operation— Selects the speed at which Normal, High Speed
JOG Dial Speed items scroll on the display
when the Jog Dial is used.
PT Operation— Specifies whether incoming Disable, Enable Feature Manual
PT Ring Off call ringing can be turned off References
Setting at individual extensions. If 2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern
disabled, users cannot Selection
prevent incoming calls from
ringing.
PT Operation— Specifies the number of times No Ring, 1 Ring, Feature Manual
Automatic a PT in Hands-free 2 Rings, 3 Rings References
Answer for Call Answerback mode will ring 2.4.4 Hands-free
from CO after before a conversation is Answerback
established automatically
when it receives a call from a
trunk.
PT Operation— Selects whether calls are Disable (Disconnect), PC Programming
Automatic Hold disconnected or held when an Enable Manual References
by ICM / CO / INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or 8.3.1 Users—Flexible
ICD Group Key ICD Group button is pressed Button—Wired Extension
while having a conversation. 8.3.2 Users—Flexible
Button—Portable Station
Feature Manual
References
2.13.1 Call Hold
PT Operation— Selects which extensions can Hold: Any extension Feature Manual
Hold key mode retrieve a held call or a call can retrieve a held call. References
that is transferred by Call Exclusive Hold: Only 2.13.1 Call Hold
Transfer without the holding extension
Announcement feature. can retrieve a held call.

PC Programming Manual 377

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 2
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Call Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Call Waiting Waiting setting is cleared when clear References
Extension Feature Clear is 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Fwd/DND FWD/DND setting is cleared clear References
when Extension Feature Clear 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
is performed.
Extension Clear Specifies whether the Hot Line Clear, Do not Feature Manual
—Hot Line (Pick- setting is cleared when clear References
up Dial) Extension Feature Clear is 2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear
performed.
CODEC—System Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
CODEC PSs.
CODEC— Selects the codec type for A-Law, Mu-Law
Network CODEC ISDN lines.
CODEC—Priority Specifies whether the priority Enable, Disable
Notification from notification from the SIP
SIP Network (for network is used in place of the
Incoming Call) PBX’s codec priority for SIP
trunks.
ISDN en Bloc Specifies whether to Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Dial—[#] as End automatically send "#" as an References
of Dial for en Bloc end code when dialling to an 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
mode ISDN line; if used as the end Configuration—Slot—Port
code, "#" will not be dialled out Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO
as part of a number even —ISDN Outgoing Call Type
when the "#" key is pressed. 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting—ISDN Outgoing Call
Type
Feature Manual
References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services
Digital Network (ISDN)—
SUMMARY
Redial— Selects whether Automatic Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an ISDN line is References
when No Answer performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
(ISDN) party does not answer within a System—Timers & Counters—
pre-programmed time period. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial

378 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Redial— Selects whether Automatic Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Automatic Redial Redial to an analogue trunk is References
for Analogue CO performed when the called 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
party does not answer within a System—Timers & Counters—
pre-programmed time period. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
Feature Manual
References
2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial—Save Specifies whether any digits Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Dial After dialled after the called party References
Connection to answers (for example, to 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
Redial Memory access a specific extension
within another company) are
also saved as part of the redial
number.
Redial—Call Log Enables display of the Enable, Disable Feature Manual
by Redial key Outgoing Call Log on a display References
PT by pressing the REDIAL 2.6.3 Last Number Redial
button while on hook.
Extension - CO Selects whether the time limit Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
Call Limitation— for extension-to-trunk calls References
For Incoming Call applies to outgoing calls only 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
or for both outgoing and [2-7-1] System—Class of
incoming calls. COS Service—COS Settings—CO &
determines the use of this SMDR—Extension-CO Line
feature, and the length of the Call Duration Limit
time limit can be assigned on a 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—
trunk group basis. [3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—
TRG Settings—Main—
Extension-CO Duration Time
(*60s)
Feature Manual
References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
CO - CO Call Selects whether to allow a call Enable: The call Feature Manual
Limitation—After between 2 outside destinations will be References
Conference to continue after the originator disconnected. 2.14.2 Conference
of the conference has left the Disable: The call
conference. will continue.
Applying logical Selects whether to use the Enable, Disable PC Programming Manual
partitioning logical partitioning feature. References
7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control
Log
9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property—Main—Main—Area
ID for logical partition

PC Programming Manual 379

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Option 3
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 1 : Called by Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Enable References
Voice Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
receives a call in voice-calling mode. 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 2 : Paged / Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Enable References
Automatic Answer Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it 2.4.4 Hands-free
receives a call in Hands-free Answerback
Answerback mode, or paging. 2.17.1 Paging
2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-1 : Start Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Enable References
Talking after Making Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Call / Call from when, for example, it pages another
DOORPHONE extension, or from a doorphone
when the doorphone button is
pressed.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 3-2 : Start Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Enable References
Talking after Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
Answering Call when answering a call by, for
example, the Call Pickup feature.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-1 : Start Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a new party joins a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 4-2 : Finish Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Enable References
Conference Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension 2.14.2 Conference
when a party leaves a conference 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
call.
Confirmation Tone— Enables the PBX to send Disable, Feature Manual
Tone 5 : Hold Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Enable References
Tone 5 is heard from an extension 2.25.2 Confirmation Tone
when it holds a call.
Dial Tone—Distinctive Enables the PBX to send dial tones Disable, Feature Manual
Dial Tone at different frequencies depending Enable References
on the setting of the extension. 2.25.1 Dial Tone
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX sends Type A, Feature Manual
for Extension to extensions to inform about the Type B References
features activated on them. 2.25.1 Dial Tone

380 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dial Tone—Dial Tone Selects the dial tone the PBX Type A, PC Programming
for ARS (instead of the network) sends to the Type B Manual References
caller when a call is made using the 9.26 PBX Configuration—
ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc [1-1] Configuration—Slot—
dialling. Port Property - BRI Port
9.27 PBX Configuration—
[1-1] Configuration—Slot—
Port Property - PRI Port
16.1 PBX Configuration—
[8-1] ARS—System Setting
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
2.25.1 Dial Tone
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable, Feature Manual
Conference for conference calls. Enable References
2.14.2 Conference
Echo Cancel—CO-to- Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
CO for trunk-to-trunk calls. Enable
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Analogue for extension-to-analogue trunk Enable
Line calls.
Echo Cancel— Enables the use of echo cancelling Disable,
Extension to Digital for extension-to-ISDN line calls. Enable
Line If set to "Enable", echo cancelling is
used for extension-to-ISDN line
calls.
If set to "Disable", echo cancelling is
not used for extension-to-ISDN line
calls.

Option 4
Name Description Value Range Links
DSS Key—DSS Enables the use of a DSS button On or Flash, Off Feature Manual
key mode for to pick up an incoming call to References
Incoming Call another extension or an ICD 2.4.3 Call Pickup
group. 2.21.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual 381

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for Direct rings at the specified extension. when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Incoming Call To enable this setting, DSS Key but pressing it will
—DSS key mode for Incoming not pick up the call.
Call on this screen must be set to Enable: The DSS
"ON or Flash". button will flash
when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key—Call Specifies whether a DSS button Disable: The DSS Feature Manual
Pick-up by DSS will light up or flash when a call button will light up References
key for ICD Group rings at the specified incoming when a call arrives, 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call call distribution group. but pressing it will
To enable this setting, DSS Key not pick up the call.
—DSS key mode for Incoming Enable: The DSS
Call on this screen must be set to button will flash
"ON or Flash". when a call arrives,
and pressing it will
pick up the call.
DSS Key— Specifies whether pressing a Disable: The PBX Feature Manual
Automatic DSS or SDN button during an disconnects the References
Transfer for extension-to-extension call current call, and 2.12.1 Call Transfer
Extension Call disconnects the current call or calls the extension
places the call on consultation assigned to the
hold. DSS or SDN button.
Enable: The PBX
places the current
call on consultation
hold.
DSS Key—Caller Specifies whether incoming caller Enable: Pressing Feature Manual
Information information is displayed after the DSS button References
Display before pressing the DSS button when a displays the caller’s 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Call Pick-up call is ringing at the designated information.
extension, instead of answering Disable: Pressing
the call. the DSS button
answers the call.
Private Network— Specifies the minimum length of 0–15 Feature Manual
Public Call Caller ID required for a call from a References
through Private private network to be considered 2.19.1 Caller ID
Network— as a call from a public network.
Minimum Public
Caller ID Digits

382 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Private Network— Enables extensions at two PBXs Disable, Enable PC Programming
TIE Call by connected in a network to have Manual References
Extension the same leading number. For 17.1 PBX Configuration
Numbering example, extension 101 is —[9-1] Private Network
registered at PBX 1, and —TIE Table—Leading
extension 102 is registered at Number
PBX 2. Only the Extension
Number Method is supported. Feature Manual
If disabled, different leading References
numbers need to be assigned for 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
extensions at each PBX.
Send CLIP of CO Enables the transfer of related Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Caller—when call CLIP information when a party on References
is transferred to hold is transferred. When set to 4.1.2.2 Calling/
CO (CLIP of Held "Enable", the transfer destination Connected Line
Party) will receive the original caller’s Identification
CLIP information, not the Presentation (CLIP/
information of the extension that COLP)
performed the transfer.
Send CLIP of CO Selects whether the CLIP number Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Caller—when call of the calling party or the CLIP number assigned to References
is forwarded to number of the forwarding the forwarding 2.29.2.5 Public (Mobile
CO extension is sent to the extension is sent. Phone) Device
forwarding destination to identify Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/
the origin of a trunk call. number of the Connected Line
calling party is sent. Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Send CLIP of Selects whether the CLIP number Disable: The CLIP Feature Manual
Extension Caller of the calling extension or the number assigned to References
—when call is CLIP number of the forwarding the forwarding 2.29.2.5 Public (Mobile
forwarded to CO extension is sent to the extension is sent. Phone) Device
forwarding destination to identify Enable: The CLIP 4.1.2.2 Calling/
the origin of a call. number of the Connected Line
calling extension is Identification
sent. Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
System Wireless Selects whether the PBX can set Disable, Enable PC Programming
—Out of Range the status of a PS to Out of Manual References
Registration Range if no signal is received 10.3 PBX Configuration
from the PS for a preset length of —[2-3] System—Timers
time. This feature must be & Counters—
enabled to allow PS roaming. Miscellaneous

PC Programming Manual 383

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

System Wireless Selects whether call information Disable, Enable PC Programming
—SDN Delayed (such as Caller ID) is shown on Manual References
Ringing with LCD the display of a PDN extension 8.3.2 Users—Flexible
PS (i.e., a PS with one or more Button—Portable
PDN buttons) when a call is Station—Parameter
received while delayed ringing is Selection (for Single
set. CO)
Feature Manual
References
2.9.1 Primary Directory
Number (PDN)/
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Extension
Transfer— Enables transferred calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Automatic Answer (including direct extension calls) References
for Transferred to be automatically answered, 2.4.4 Hands-free
Call when using the Hands-free Answerback
Answerback feature.
Display If Automatic Walking COS is Extension Number, Feature Manual
Information from being used, this selects whether MEX CLIP References
Mobile Extension to show the CLI destination's 2.16.1 Direct Inward
(MEX)—when extension number as the CLIP System Access (DISA)
using Automatic information (Extension Number),
Walking COS or the MEX CLIP information
(MEX CLIP) when the incoming
call is recognised as coming from
a MEX terminal.

Option 5
Name Description Value Range Links
SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and Mode 1, Mode 2, Feature
transfer a call with an SLT. For Mode 3, Mode 4 Manual
details of each mode, see "2.13.1 References
Call Hold" in the Feature Manual.
2.13.1 Call Hold
SLT—Message Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp 1–12 Feature
Waiting Lamp Pattern light pattern of SLTs. Manual
References
Note
2.20.1 Message
This setting is not applied to Waiting
Message Waiting by FSK.
Whisper OHCA—for Enables the use of Whisper OHCA Disable, Enable Feature
SLT/PS to SLTs, PSs, and IP-PTs Manual
References
2.10.4.4 Whisper
OHCA

384 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Waiting— Selects whether Busy Station Disable, Enable Feature
Automatic Call Signalling (BSS) is automatically Manual
Waiting for Extension performed when an extension user References
Call calls a busy extension.
2.1.3.3 Call
Waiting
Busy Out—Busy Out Enables the PBX to automatically set Disable, Enable Feature
for Analogue CO a trunk to Busy Out status when a Manual
loop current is not detected, References
preventing that trunk from being
2.5.4.6 Trunk
used.
Busy Out
ISDN Voice Path Enables the voice path of an ISDN Disable, Enable
Connection—Connect line to connect even when an "Alert"
when "Alert" is sent signal is received from the telephone
from ISDN company.
PT Feature Access— Specifies the System Feature None, Service-out,
No. 1–8 Access Menu (1–8) shown on the Call Back Cancel,
display of an extension. Call Pickup Direct,
Call Pickup Group,
DOORPHONE Call,
Door Open, Relay
On, External BGM,
Paging
ISDN Option—Fwd Specifies whether alert messages Mode1: Disable
from ISDN to ISDN are sent to the ISDN network. This Mode 2: Enable
setting should be enabled for
networks that disconnect a call if an
alert message is not received.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies whether the name of the Enable, Disable
Party Name calling party is displayed when
Presentation to PRI23 making a call to the ISDN network.
ISDN Option—Calling Specifies the sending format of the Display, Facility
Party Name Sending calling party name when making a
Format call to the ISDN network.

Option 6 (CTI)
Value
Name Description Links
Range
3rd Party CTI— Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
System status check is retried when no response is References
retry interval received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. 2.26.1 Computer
timer Telephony Integration
(CTI)

PC Programming Manual 385

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Value
Name Description Links
Range
3rd Party CTI— Specifies the number of times that the alive 0–10 Feature Manual
System status check is repeated for Third Party Call Control References
retry counter CTI. When the alive check has been 2.26.1 Computer
attempted the programmed number of times Telephony Integration
without success, the PBX assumes that the (CTI)
logical connection with the CTI application
software has been lost.
3rd Party CTI— Specifies the length of time until the alive 0–60 s Feature Manual
CDR retry check of CDR is retried when no response is References
interval timer received, for Third Party Call Control CTI. 2.26.1 Computer
Telephony Integration
(CTI)
3rd Party CTI— Specifies the number of times that the alive 0–10 Feature Manual
CDR retry check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call References
counter Control CTI. When the alive check has been 2.26.1 Computer
attempted the programmed number times, the Telephony Integration
association is released automatically. (CTI)
CTI Make Call— Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call Enable,
SLT Ring is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Disable
CTI Hold— Selects whether to force an extension to Enable, Feature Manual
Forced Idle when become idle while having a call held on a Disable References
Hold by PDN/SDN button. 2.9.1 Primary
PDN/SDN Key Directory Number
(PDN)/Secondary
Directory Number
(SDN) Extension

Option 7
Name Description Value Range Links
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Busy/Intercept calls are recorded in the incoming call log Answered), References
(when Called Party of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
is Busy)
• Calls received when the extension is Log
busy.
• Calls rerouted via the Intercept Routing
—Busy feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".

386 PC Programming Manual

 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Call Log Specifies whether the following types of Enable (Not Feature Manual
—Fwd All/Fwd calls are recorded in the incoming call log Answered), References
Busy of the original destination. Disable 2.19.2 Incoming Call
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—All Calls Log
feature.
• Calls rerouted via the FWD—Busy
feature.
If this setting is enabled, calls are
recorded as "Not Answered".
Incoming Call Log Specifies how calls answered using the Answered, Not Feature Manual
—Call Pickup Call Pickup feature are recorded in the Answered References
incoming call log of the original 2.19.2 Incoming Call
destination. Log
Incoming Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension / TIE recorded in the answering extension’s Disable References
Call incoming call log. 2.19.2 Incoming Call
Log
Outgoing Call Log Specifies whether extension/TIE calls are Enable, Feature Manual
—Extension Call recorded in the calling extension’s Disable References
outgoing call log. 2.6.3 Last Number
Redial

Option 8
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group— Specifies the order of priority of the Priority Voice Feature Manual
Priority Voice 1/ codecs to use for P2P groups. 1: G.729, G. References
Priority Voice 2/ 711, G.722 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
Priority Voice 3 Priority Voice (P2P) Connection
2/Priority
Voice 3: G.
729, G.711, G.
722, None
P2P Group— Specifies the availability of video Disable, Feature Manual
Video Conference conferencing for capable extensions Enable References
within P2P groups. 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer
(P2P) Connection
Call Preservation In this mode, IP-PTs on a P2P call will Enable,
for P2P calls continue exchanging voice data (RTP) Disable
even if the connection to the NSX server
is disconnected, therefore continuing the
call. If Disable is selected, this feature
will not function.

PC Programming Manual 387

10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options

Name Description Value Range Links

Conference Group Specifies the maximum number of 8 Party, 32 Feature Manual
—Maximum participants that can speak during a Party References
Number of Conference Group Call. 2.14.1 Conference
Speakers During a Features—SUMMARY
Conference Group 2.14.2 Conference
Call
Display extension Specifies whether to enable the Enable,
name on key respective features. Disable
(KX-NT)
Use Message key
as VM key
LCD zoom display

Option 9
Name Description Value Range Links
FWD Setting - FWD setting when Specifies whether to enable FWD setting Enable, Disable
user's devices are service-out when all devices are service-out.

Option 10
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Please specify the If you check one of the check boxes to “On”, the system data On /Off
time to save the will be saved automatically at the selected time. Also, when the
system data NSX server in active mode and the NSX server in standby
automatically. mode are connected, and the Hot Standby configuration is
established, the data will be synchronised.

Note
The actual data saving process will be run approximately 5
minutes after the specified time. As frequent data writing
affects the life span of an SSD, the default is set to 2 times
per day. However, the automatic saving time can be
specified for a maximum of 6 times per day.

388 PC Programming Manual

 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—

Extension CID Settings
Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Caller Specifies the modulation V.23(ETSI), Feature Manual
ID Modulation frequency to be used when Bell202(Bellcore) References
Type sending Caller ID information to 2.19.1 Caller ID
an SLT.
Channel Seizure Specifies the number of seizure 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
Signal Bits bits to send when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Mark Signal Bits Specifies the number of mark 10 × n (n=3–40) bits Feature Manual
bits to send when sending Caller References
ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Channel Seizure Specifies the length of time that 64 × n (n=5–35) ms Feature Manual
Wait Time the PBX waits before starting to References
send the seizure signal following 2.19.1 Caller ID
the first ring when sending Caller
ID information to an SLT.
Caller ID Signal Specifies the type of signal FSK Feature Manual
Type modulation to be used when References
sending Caller ID information to 2.19.1 Caller ID
an SLT (reference only).
Additional Local Enables the PBX to Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Trunk Access automatically add a Trunk References
Code to Extension Access number to the received 2.19.1 Caller ID
Caller ID telephone number when sending
the Caller ID number of an
incoming trunk call to an SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Date & Time to date and time of an incoming call References
Extension when sending Caller ID 2.19.1 Caller ID
information to an SLT.
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Name to Extension caller’s name when sending References
Caller ID information to an SLT. 2.19.1 Caller ID
Send Caller ID Enables the PBX to send a call Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Long Distance to qualifier (Long Distance) (if References
Extension received from the trunk) when 2.19.1 Caller ID
sending Caller ID information to
an SLT.
FSK Transmission Specifies the transmission level -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, Feature Manual
Level for FSK signal modulation. -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 References
dB, 0 dB 2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 389

10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

FSK Transmission Specifies the transmission level -14 dB, -12 dB, -10 dB, Feature Manual
Level (for MCSLC for FSK signal modulation for -8 dB, -6 dB, -4 dB, -2 References
Card) MCSLC cards. dB, 0 dB 2.19.1 Caller ID

390 PC Programming Manual

 10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio Gain

10.11 PBX Configuration—[2-11] System—Audio

Gain
10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—
Paging/MOH
Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Model Selects the PBX model KX-NSX1000/2 PC Programming Manual
that performs paging/MOH 000, References
gain settings. KX- 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
Settings that cannot be NS1000/NSX Paging Group
performed by the selected Expansion
PBX model will be greyed Box, Feature Manual References
out. The gain values of KX-NS700, 2.17.1 Paging
those settings will be the KX-NS500, 4.2 Multi-connection Networking
same for the whole KX-NS300
system. Therefore, when
operating in a Multi-
connection network, if
different PBX models are
registered as Expansion
Units, the corresponding
common values are used.
Paging— Specifies the paging -15.5–15.5 dB PC Programming Manual
EPG 1–6 volume for External Pager References
(External port. 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
Pager 1–6) EPG numbers that cannot Paging Group
be set according to the
model selected in Feature Manual References
10.11.1 PBX Configuration 2.17.1 Paging
—[2-11-1] System—Audio
Gain—Paging/MOH will be
greyed out.
Paging— Specifies the volume when -15 dB, -12 dB, PC Programming Manual
Paging paging is broadcast -9 dB, -6 dB, -3 References
Level from through the speaker of a dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—
PT Speaker PT. 6 dB Paging Group
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
External Specifies the music -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual
MOH— volume for External BGM References
MOH 1–8 port. 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—
(Music On MOH numbers that cannot Operator & BGM
Hold 1–8) be set according to the
model selected in PBX Feature Manual References
Model will be greyed out. 2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 391

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Name Description Value Range Links

Internal Specifies the music -31.5–31.5 dB PC Programming Manual
MOH— volume for each internal References
MOH 1–8 BGM (MOH 1–8). 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—
(Music on MOH numbers that cannot Operator & BGM
Hold 1–8) be set according to the
model selected in PBX Feature Manual References
Model will be greyed out. 2.13.4 Music on Hold
2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card

Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Model Selects the PBX model that performs gain KX-NSX1000/2000/6000,
level setting for each type of card. KX-NS1000/NSX Expansion Box,
KX-NS700, KX-NS500, KX-NS300
Up Gain (To Specifies the volume for audio signals -31.5–31.5 dB
PBX) from the selected type of card to the PBX.
Down Gain Specifies the volume for audio signals -15.5–15.5 dB
(From PBX) from the PBX to the selected type of card.

10.12 PBX Configuration—[2-13] System—Security

Value
Name Description Links
Range
User PIN / Mailbox Specifies whether to enable the password lock Disable,
Password—Password feature for mailbox passwords. Enable
Lock
User PIN / Mailbox Specifies the number of failed login attempts before 1–99
Password—Login Failures the password lock is engaged.
before Password Lock If Disable is selected for User PIN / Mailbox
(1-99 times) Password—Password Lock, this setting is greyed
out.
My Portal Login Password Specifies whether to enable the password lock Disable,
—Password Lock feature for My Portal login password. Enable
My Portal Login Password Specifies the number of failed login attempts before 1–99
—Login Failures before the password lock is engaged.
Password Lock (1-99 If Disable is selected for My Portal Login
times) Password—Password Lock-Password Lock, this
setting is greyed out.

392 PC Programming Manual

 Section 11
PBX Configuration—[3] Group

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Group menu of the PBX Configuration Menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 393

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1] Group—Trunk Group

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG
Settings
Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of a trunk group are applied to all trunks in the
group. A maximum of 128 trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "5.1.2 Group" in the Feature Manual.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
group for programming characters References
reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
COS Specifies the COS of the trunk 1–512 PC Programming Manual
group, applied when making a References
call from a trunk to another 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
trunk with TIE Line Service. System—Class of Service—COS
If you wish to prevent such Settings
calls from being made, ensure 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
that the COS specified here Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
has a TRS level of "7"
assigned for all relevant time Feature Manual References
modes in 10.7.1 PBX 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Configuration—[2-7-1]
System—Class of Service—
COS Settings.
Line Hunting Specifies the trunk hunting High -> Low, PC Programming Manual
Order sequence for the trunk group. Low -> High, References
The hunting sequence can be Rotation 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
programmed to start from the Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
lowest or highest numbered
trunks, or to rotate uniformly Feature Manual References
among all trunks. 2.5.5.3 Trunk Access
CO-CO Specifies the length of time None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be (× 60 s) References
(*60s) maintained before being 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
disconnected. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

394 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension-CO Specifies the length of time None, 1–60 PC Programming Manual
Duration Time that an extension-to-trunk call (× 60 s) References
(*60s) can be maintained before 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
being disconnected. System—Class of Service—COS
Settings
10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
System—System Options
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation
Caller ID Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Modification for modifying caller information References
Table (telephone number). 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3]
Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID
Modification
18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Dialling Plan Specifies the table to be used 1–4 PC Programming Manual
Table for en-bloc dialling. References
11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4]
Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Tone Detection
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Group Name Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
the trunk group for characters 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
programming reference. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Silence originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by silence detection. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 395

11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Continuous originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by continuous signal 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
detection. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Tone Enables the Disable, PC Programming Manual References
Detection— disconnection of a DISA- Enable 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional
Cyclic originated trunk-to-trunk Device—Voice Message—DISA System
call by cyclic signal 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
detection. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Host PBX Access Code

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the name of Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name the trunk group for characters References
programming reference. 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Host PBX Specifies the feature Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
Access number used to access (consisting of 0– References
Code 1–10 a trunk from the host 9, *, and #) 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
PBX. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access
Code to the Telephone Company from a
Host PBX)

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)

Name Description Value Range Links
Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group Max. 20 PC Programming
for programming reference. characters Manual
References
18.1 PBX
Configuration—[10-1]
CO & Incoming Call—
CO Line Settings
Collect Call Enables the PBX to automatically reject Disable, Enable
Reject (for collect calls. This setting is only for
Brazil)—Mode users in Brazil.

396 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Name Description Value Range Links

Collect Call Selects the length of time that the PBX 500 ms, 1000 ms,
Reject (for waits before sending a flash signal to 1500 ms, 2000
Brazil)—Wait reject a collect call. This setting is only ms
Time for users in Brazil.
Collect Call Selects the length of the flash signal 1000 ms, 1500
Reject (for that the PBX sends to reject a collect ms, 2000 ms,
Brazil)—Flashing call. This setting is only for users in 2500 ms
Time Brazil.

11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local

Access Priority
Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line Access,
the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Trunk Specifies the trunk group assigned Trunk PC Programming Manual
Group No. to the corresponding priority level. Group No. References
& Name Select the blank option to not 1-128 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO &
assign a trunk group to the priority. Incoming Call—CO Line Settings
Feature Manual References
2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller

ID Modification
The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to pre-programmed
modification tables, and then recorded for calling back.

Leading Digits
After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables,
the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID
Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and adds a number
to the modified number. If this number is stored as a System Speed Dialling number, the caller’s name can
be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of
4 Caller ID Modification Tables, each containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code,
can be programmed. Each trunk group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here, the PBX applies the Long
Distance Code settings to the modified number.
Name Description Value Range Links
Area Code (for Specifies the leading Max. 6 digits Feature Manual References
Local / number (area code) to (consisting of 0– 2.19.1 Caller ID
International Call look for in the incoming 9, *, and #)
Data 1–10) caller’s number.

PC Programming Manual 397

11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Name Description Value Range Links

Removed Specifies the number of 0–9 PC Programming Manual
Number of Digits digits to be removed References
from the beginning of the 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
incoming caller’s Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
number. —Main
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual
be added to the (consisting of 0– References
incoming caller’s number 9, *, and #) 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
in the place of the Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
removed digits. —Main
14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

Length of Digits
The PBX adds a certain number of digits to the caller’s number depending on the length of digits, as
programmed in the Length of Digits Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. This modification is
applied to incoming trunk calls routed through public networks when the type of network numbering plan is
Unknown or not specified.
A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.
If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National), the
caller’s number is not modified.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Specifies the minimum 1–31 PC Programming Manual References
Caller ID Digits number of digits required in 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
(for the caller’s number for it to —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
International) be recognised as an Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—
international call. The value Type of Number—Public, Private
specified here must be 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
larger than Minimum Caller —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
ID Digits (for National). Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—
Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

398 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Minimum Specifies the minimum 0–30 PC Programming Manual References
Caller ID Digits number of digits required in 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
(for National) the caller’s number for it to —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
be recognised as a national Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—
call. The value specified Type of Number—Public, Private
here must be smaller than 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
Minimum Caller ID Digits —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
(for International). Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—
Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to be Max. 8 PC Programming Manual References
(for added to the incoming digits (0– 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
International) telephone number when the 9, *, and —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
total number of digits #) Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—
exceeds Minimum Caller Type of Number—Public, Private
ID Digits (for 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
International). —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—
Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Number Specifies the number to be Max. 8 PC Programming Manual References
(for National) added to the incoming digits (0– 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
telephone number when the 9, *, and —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
total number of digits #) Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—
exceeds Minimum Caller Type of Number—Public, Private
ID Digits (for National) but 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration
does not exceed Minimum —Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
Caller ID Digits (for Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—
International). Type of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

CLIP
When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering plan
is International, National, or Subscriber, the caller’s number can be modified as programmed in the
Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and it is used
for sending to the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from the
Modification Table list.

PC Programming Manual 399

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Name Description Value Range Links

Removed Specifies the number 0–9 PC Programming Manual References
Number of of leading digits to be 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Digits removed from the Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
incoming caller’s Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—Type
number for each type of Number—Public, Private
of network numbering 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
plan. Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—Type
of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID
Added Specifies the number Max. 4 digits PC Programming Manual References
Number to be added to the (consisting of 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
incoming caller’s 0–9, *, and #) Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
number in the place of Numbering Plan—Calling Party Number—Type
the removed digits for of Number—Public, Private
each type of network 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
numbering plan. Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network
Numbering Plan—Called Party Number—Type
of Number—Public, Private
Feature Manual References
2.19.1 Caller ID

11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—

Dialling Plan
The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can
recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number
and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of the
caller’s voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of dialling, the
PBX mutes the caller’s voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last digit is dialled until the
analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to programme
from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

400 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.4 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan

Name Description Value Range Links

Leading Specifies the leading Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number to be regarded (consisting of 0–9, *, #, References
as the beginning of N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
dialling. 1], and X [0–9, *, and System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
#]) IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO First Digit
10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3]
System—Timers & Counters—Dial /
IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue
CO Inter-digit
11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1]
Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings
—Main—Dialling Plan Table
Feature Manual References
4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
Removed Specifies the number 0–15 Feature Manual References
Number of of leading digits to be 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
Digits removed from the Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
number dialled by en-
bloc dialling.
Added Specifies the number Max. 32 digits Feature Manual References
Number to be added to the (consisting of 0–9, *, 4.1.2.1 Integrated Services Digital
number dialled by en- and #) Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
bloc dialling in the
place of the removed
digits.

11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling

Plan—Auto Assign
It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

PC Programming Manual 401

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Select Auto Selects the set of preset leading Type A: PC Programming
Assigning number values to assign to the Manual References
• 1: N11
Table active dialling plan table. When 11.1.4 PBX
Type D is selected, you will be • 2: NXX XXXX
Configuration—[3-1-4]
prompted to enter a 3-digit area • 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX Group—Trunk Group—
code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through Dialling Plan
47 of the dialling plan table. • 4–50: Not stored
Type B:
• 1: N11
• 2: NNX XXXX
• 3: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored
Type C:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NNX XXXX
• 4: 1NPX NXX XXXX
• 5–50: Not stored
Type D:
• 1–47: Not stored
• 48: N11
• 49: NXX XXXX
• 50: 1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E:
• 1: N11
• 2: NXX NXX XXXX
• 3: 1NXX NXX XXXX
• 4–50: Not stored

11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—

Charge Rate
The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk
group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Indicates the name of the trunk group Max. 20
Group (reference only). characters
Name

402 PC Programming Manual

 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Name Description Value Range Links

Rate Specifies the call charge rate. 0–9999999 PC Programming Manual
The number of decimal places that can be References
specified here depends on the value set in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Feature—Hotel & Charge
Point in 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge. Feature Manual
References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 403

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group
can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups
and several paging groups.

Note
Sub-Administrators can edit only user group numbers that they are authorised to manage.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
User Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension user group. characters References
11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group
—Call Pickup Group
11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group
—Paging Group
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings—User Group
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Group
Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which 1–128 PC Programming Manual
the extension user group References
belongs. 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
5.1.2 Group
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sub- Specifies which Sub- None, 1:-32: PC Programming Manual
Administrator Administrator is authorised References
to manage the user group. 8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub
Administrator Setting
Note
This setting is available
when the Installer logs in
alone or logs in using
Exclusive Login Mode.

404 PC Programming Manual

 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group

11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup

Group
11.3.1 PBX Configuration—[3-3-1] Group—Call Pickup Group—
Main Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Pickup Specifies the name of the call Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group Name pickup group. characters References
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.4.3 Call Pickup
5.1.2 Group
Main—Call For a pickup group, specifies Enable, Feature Manual References
Pickup Group whether display indications and Disable 2.4.3 Call Pickup
Monitor tones are enabled to notify
Feature extension users when a call that
can be answered by an extension
in the pickup group arrives.

11.3.2 PBX Configuration—[3-3-2] Group—Call Pickup Group—

Priority Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension
user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 512 user groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.
Name Description Value Range Links
User Group Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference Max. 20
Name only). characters
Pickup Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group 01:–200:
Group—1st– belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned to a
8th maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen.
To assign an extension user group to more than 8 call pickup
groups, click All Setting.

Note
When Apply is clicked and the configuration is saved, call
pickup groups will be sorted in each user group in
alphabetical order.
User Group Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the ON (blue), OFF
1-512 corresponding pickup group.

PC Programming Manual 405

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group

11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging

Group
11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4-1] Group—Paging Group—
Priority Setting
Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers
can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple
paging groups. A maximum of 200 paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups to
paging groups easily, click All Setting.
Name Description Value Range Links
User Group Indicates the name of the extension user group Max. 20 characters
Name (reference only).
Paging Group Selects the paging groups that the extension user group None, 01–200
—1st–8th belongs to. One extension user group can be assigned
to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To
assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.
User Group Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to ON (blue), OFF
1-512 the corresponding paging group. (white)

11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—

External Pager
External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups.
Name Description Value Range Links
Paging Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Group Name paging group (reference characters References
only). 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group
External Specifies whether the ON (blue), OFF PC Programming Manual
Pager 1–96 external pager belongs to References
the corresponding paging 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
group. Settings
Feature Manual References
2.17.1 Paging
5.1.2 Group

406 PC Programming Manual

 11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group

11.5 PBX Configuration—[3-5] Group—Incoming

Call Distribution Group
11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Group Settings
Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call
distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 256 incoming
call distribution groups can be programmed.
To set the Call Forwarding (FWD) settings of ICD groups easily, click Group FWD. To assign extensions to
ICD groups and change extension settings, click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY"
in the Feature Manual.

Note
Sub-Administrators can edit only ICD group numbers that they are authorised to manage.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of
Number distribution group. 0–9)
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
incoming call distribution group. characters
Distribution Selects the method for Ring, UCD, Feature Manual References
Method distributing calls to idle Priority Hunting 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
extensions of the incoming call
distribution group.
Call Waiting Selects the call waiting All, Distribution Feature Manual References
Distribution distribution method for busy 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
extensions of the incoming call
distribution group.
FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
FWD mode ring when a call is References
received at the incoming call 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
distribution group. Add User/Edit User—Telephony
Feature
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
DND Mode Specifies whether extensions in No Ring, Ring PC Programming Manual
DND mode ring when a call is References
received at the incoming call 8.1.1 Users—User Container—
distribution group. Add User/Edit User—Telephony
Feature
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

PC Programming Manual 407

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Tenant Specifies the tenant to which the 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number incoming call distribution group References
belongs, to determine the Time 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2]
Table and the audio source for System—Operator & BGM
the group. (The tenant number 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
corresponds to the Time Table System—Week Table
number.) 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6]
Feature—Tenant—Music On Hold
Feature Manual References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the COS of the 1–512 PC Programming Manual
incoming call distribution group. References
Depending on the COS, calls 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
from certain extensions are System—Class of Service—COS
restricted as determined by the Settings
Internal Call Block feature. Also, 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2]
when calls are forwarded or System—Class of Service—
overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/ External Call Block
Barring assigned for the COS of 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3]
the incoming call distribution System—Class of Service—
group applies. Internal Call Block
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
CLIP on ICD Specifies the CLIP number sent Max. 16 digits Feature Manual References
Group Button to the network when making (consisting of 4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line
calls using the ICD Group 0–9, *, and #) Identification Presentation (CLIP/
button. COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Number extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
incoming call distribution
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution
group.

408 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Queuing Busy— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming
Destination-Day, destination of calls that (consisting of 0–9, *, Manual References
Lunch, Break, cannot be queued in each #, [ ] [Secret], and P 10.4 PBX Configuration—
Night time mode. [Pause]) [2-4] System—Week
Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
Queuing Busy— Specifies the number of calls None, 1–100 Feature Manual
Queue Call that can wait in a queue. References
Capacity 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0–9)
Number incoming call distribution
group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20
incoming call distribution characters
group.
Time out & Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Manual Queue destination of queued calls (consisting of 0–9, References
Redirection— when they are not answered *, #, [ ] [Secret], 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
Destination-Day, or are redirected by Manual and P [Pause]) System—Week Table
Lunch, Break, Queue Redirection in each
Night time mode. Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
Time out & Specifies the length of time None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Manual Queue calls wait in a queue before (n=1–125) s References
Redirection they are redirected to the 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
Overflow Time overflow destination. 2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls None, 1–30 PC Programming Manual
to hold in the queue before References
prompting Manual Queue 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button
Redirection by flashing the —Wired Extension
Hurry-up button. 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button
—Portable Station
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual 409

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
Number distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming Max. 20
call distribution group. characters
Queuing Time Specifies the Queuing Time Table to None, Table 1– PC Programming
Table—Day, be used in each time mode. Table 256 Manual References
Lunch, Break, 10.4 PBX Configuration
Night —[2-4] System—Week
Table
Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.3 Queuing
Feature
Queuing Time Enables the PBX to play Disable (Ringback
Table When messages/BGM to the caller Tone), Enable
Extension according to the Queuing Time
Ringing Table, when the call arrives at an
extension without being queued or
after being queued.

Miscellaneous
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Extension number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–
Number distribution group. 9)
Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming Max. 20
call distribution group. characters
Extension No Specifies the length of time that a call None, 10 × n Feature Manual
Answer queues at an extension before it is (n=1–15) s References
Redirection Time redirected to the next member 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension of the incoming call Distribution
distribution group, in UCD or Priority 2.2.2.3 Queuing
Hunting distribution method. Feature
No. of Specifies the number of consecutive None, 1–15 Feature Manual
Unanswered unanswered calls before a member References
Calls for extension is automatically logged out 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Automatic Log- from the incoming call distribution
out group.

410 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Maximum No. of Specifies the number of extensions Max.: Call arrives Feature Manual
Busy Extension that can accept calls simultaneously at an idle References
in the incoming call distribution extension. 2.2.2.2 Group Call
group. 1–32: Call will not Distribution
arrive at an idle
extension when
the number of
busy extensions
exceeds the
assigned number.
Status of FWD for Specifies whether a virtual PS in an Idle, Busy Feature Manual
Virtual PS ICD group is shown as idle or busy References
when it forwards a call to a trunk on 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
no answer. (FWD)
Last Extension Specifies whether the last extension Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Log-out logged-in to the incoming call References
distribution group is allowed to log 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
out.
VIP Call Mode Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise Disable, Enable Feature Manual
calls received from multiple incoming References
call distribution groups. 2.2.2.5 VIP Call
Supervisor Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension the incoming call distribution group’s (consisting of 0– References
Number supervisor. The supervisor can 9) 2.2.2.8 Supervisory
monitor and control the status of Feature
each member of the group using a 6-
line display PT. The supervisor
extension need not belong to the
group.
Programmed Specifies the programmed mailbox Max. 16 digits
Mailbox No. (16 number. (consisting of 0–
Digits) 9, *, #)
Sub- Specifies which Sub-Administrator is None, 1:-32: PC Programming
Administrator authorised to manage the ICD group. Manual References
8.9 Maintenance
Note
Personnel—Sub
This setting is available when the Administrator Setting
Installer logs in alone or logs in
using Exclusive Login Mode.

Group Log / Group FWD

Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Extension Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits
Number number of the incoming call (consisting of 0–9)
distribution group.
Group Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters
incoming call distribution group.

PC Programming Manual 411

11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Incoming Call Log Specifies the number of 0–100 Feature Manual
Memory unanswered calls to the incoming References
call distribution group that can be 2.19.2 Incoming Call
logged in the call log memory. Log
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from CO Setting for incoming trunk calls (reference References
only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from CO of incoming trunk calls directed to (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination the incoming call distribution #, [ ] [Secret], and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
group. [Pause]) (FWD)
Group FWD Call Indicates the current FWD status Off, On Feature Manual
from Extension for incoming intercom calls References
Setting (reference only). 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
(FWD)
Group FWD Call Specifies the forward destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
from Extension of incoming intercom calls (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Destination directed to the incoming call #, [ ] [Secret] and P 2.3.2 Call Forwarding
distribution group. [Pause]) (FWD)

11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member
of multiple incoming call distribution groups. Select the desired ICD group (1–256) from the ICD Group No.
list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and
click OK.

Note
Sub-Administrators can edit only ICD group numbers that they are authorised to manage.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number each member. In addition to the (consisting of References
extension numbers of PT, SLT, and 0–9) 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8]
PS extensions, floating extension Group—PS Ring Group
numbers of PS Ring groups can
also be specified. Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY

412 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Indicates the name of the extension Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name (reference only). characters References
11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8]
Group—PS Ring Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution
Group Features—SUMMARY
Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing Immediate, 1– Feature Manual References
Ring setting of each member. 6 Rings, No 2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
(Applicable when the call Ring
distribution method of the incoming
call distribution group is set to
Ring.)
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that 10 × n (n=0– PC Programming Manual
Timer must pass after completing a call 300) s References
before the member extension can 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3]
accept another call. Group—Incoming Call Distribution
This timer is used when "Options Group—Miscellaneous—Options
—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set —Wrap-up Timer based on
to "ICD Group Member" in 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
11.5.3 PBX Configuration— Settings—Advanced Extension
[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up
Distribution Group— Timer
Miscellaneous.
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are
handled. A maximum of 256 Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

PC Programming Manual 413

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Queuing Specifies the None: Redirects the call to the next sequence. Feature Manual
Sequence— command Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow References
Sequence activated by the destination when there is no answer. 2.2.2.3 Queuing
01–16 corresponding Disconnect: Disconnects the line. Feature
sequence. Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a 2.2.2.6 Overflow
different sequence. Feature
Wait 5 × n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, 2.13.4 Music on
plays the Music on Hold for the specified period Hold
of time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a 2.28.2 Outgoing
ringback tone for the specified period of time. Message (OGM)
OGM 001-128: Sends a certain OGM.
Queue No.: Announces how many calls precede
the caller in the waiting queue.
Queue No. and Time: Announces how many
calls precede the caller in the waiting queue and
the estimated wait time.

11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Options—Call Log to Selects whether answered calls Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when ICD to an ICD Group are also logged References
Member Answered in the Incoming Call Log for the 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
group, in addition to the log of the Distribution Group
extension that answered the call. Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log to Selects whether the calls to an Disable, Enable Feature Manual
ICD Group when ICD Group that are redirected References
Overflow Destination and are answered by the overflow 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Answered destination are also logged in the Distribution Group
Incoming Call Log for the group, Features—SUMMARY
in addition to the log of the
extension that answered the call.
Options—ICD Group Selects whether ICD Group Group DN, PC Programming
Key Mode buttons at extensions operate as Enhanced Manual References
normal or in Enhanced Phantom Phantom 11.5.1.1 PBX
button mode. Configuration—[3-5-1]
When set to Enhanced Phantom Group—Incoming Call
mode, creating an ICD Group Distribution Group—
button at an extension using PT Group Settings—
personal programming Member List—Delayed
automatically registers the Ring
extension as a member of the
relevant ICD Group. The Feature Manual
extension user can also specify References
the delayed ringing settings. 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY

414 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—Longest Selects whether incoming calls Disable (UCD), Feature Manual
Idle Distribution are distributed to idle extensions Enable (ACD) References
evenly in order (UCD), or to the 2.2.2.2 Group Call
extension that has been idle the Distribution
longest (ACD).
Options—Wrap-up Selects whether the ICD Group Extension: The PC Programming
Timer based on member wrap-up timer or timer is activated Manual References
extension wrap-up timer is used. after all calls to 11.5.1.1 PBX
If Extension is selected here, or from the Configuration—[3-5-1]
Wrap-up Timer on 11.5.1.1 PBX extension, Group—Incoming Call
Configuration—[3-5-1] Group— including a Distribution Group—
Incoming Call Distribution retrieved call on Group Settings—
Group—Group Settings— hold. Member List—Wrap-up
Member List becomes ICD Group Timer
unavailable. If ICD Group Member: The 8.2.1 Users—Advanced
Member is selected, Option 8 on timer is only Extension Settings—
8.2.1 Users—Advanced activated after Advanced Extension
Extension Settings—Advanced calls to the Settings—Option 8—
Extension Settings become extension Wrap-up Timer
unavailable. through an ICD
Group. Feature Manual
References
2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
Options—Overflow Specifies whether overflow Enable (Queuing Feature Manual
immediately when All redirection is processed when all Busy References
Logout members of an ICD group are Destination), 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
logged out. Disable (Keep Distribution Group
Queuing) Features—SUMMARY
Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information for the Built-in ACD (Logging), References
Report Report. This feature requires an Disable 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
activation key. Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Note
2.2.2.9 Supervisory
When this setting is enabled, Feature (ACD)
certain hospitality features 2.23.2 Room Status
cannot be used. For details, Control
refer to the relevant chapter in 2.23.3 Call Billing for
the Feature Manual. Guest Room
Options—Call Log Specifies whether to log call Enable, Disable Feature Manual
for Built-in ACD information of unanswered calls References
Report—ICD Group when the ICD group distribution 2.2.2.9 Supervisory
Unanswered Call method is set to Uniform Call Feature (ACD)
Log Distribution or Priority Hunting, for
the Built-in ACD Report.

PC Programming Manual 415

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Name Description Value Range Links

Options—ICD Group Specifies the screen update 5–60 Feature Manual
Call Monitor View— interval time for the ICD Group References
Screen Update Time Call Monitor View. 2.2.2.1 Incoming Call
(s) Distribution Group
Features—SUMMARY
Options— Specifies the method to Average waiting Feature Manual
Announcement of announce the estimated wait time time: The References
Estimated Waiting to calls waiting in an ICD group average wait 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
Time—Calculated queue. The amount of time time is used for
based on (the announced is calculated using calculating the
following time x the time set here for each call in announced
number of calls in the queue. amount of wait
queue) time.
Predefined
time: A set
amount of time
(10–3600 s) is
used for
calculating the
announced
amount of wait
time.
Options— Specifies the threshold wait time 10–60 min Feature Manual
Announcement of for when calls waiting in an ICD References
Estimated Waiting group queue will hear the special 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
Time—Threshold announcement.
Time for Special
Announce (10-60
min)
Options—UM Specifies the announcement Guidance No.1– Feature Manual
System Guidance— heard by callers in an ICD queue 8 References
UM System about the estimated wait time. 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
Guidance for Queue Select an announcement from the
No. / Queue No. and specified Unified Messaging
Time System Guidance messages.
Options—ICD Group Select the distribution method for FIFO, Circular Feature Manual
Distribution order member extensions that belong to References
multiple ICD groups and become 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
idle.
Options—2nd line Select the information displayed Last destination, Feature Manual
LCD display on the second line of the PT's First destination References
information for ICD display when an incoming call is 2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
Group redirected call redirected to the ICD group that
the extension belongs to.

11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor
This screen is only available at Installer level.

416 PC Programming Manual

 11.5.5 PBX Configuration–[3-5-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Description
After specifying an ICD Group to be monitored, specify a User (User) or User (Administrator) as an ACD
supervisor to begin monitoring. The ACD supervisor can monitor an ICD Group, manage and analyse
statistical information, and create an ACD report.
For details about ICD Group management by the ACD supervisor, see 8.7 Supervisors—ICDG
Management.

To set the ACD Supervisor

1. Click the button. The Set ACD Supervisor screen is displayed.
2. From the users listed in the Normal User window, click a user to select it as the ACD supervisor, and
then click the right arrow button to move the selected user to the ACD Supervisor window. To remove a
selected user, click a user on the ACD Supervisor window to select it, and then click the left arrow
button.
3. Click OK.
The ACD supervisor selected above is displayed as follows.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
First The first name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name
Last The last name of the ACD supervisor (reference only).
Name
Ext. No. The extension number of the ACD supervisor (reference only). Feature
To assign the ICD Groups that are monitored by the ACD Manual
Supervisor. References
1. In the ICD Group column, click the Edit button for the ACD 2.2.2.9
supervisor. The Set ACD Supervisor ICD Group screen is Supervisory
displayed. Feature (ACD)

2. From the ICD Groups listed in the Available ICD Group

window, click an ICD Group to select it for assignment to the
ACD supervisor, and then click the right arrow button to
move the selected ICD Group to the Selected ICD Group
list. To remove a selected ICD Group, click an ICD Group on
the Selected ICD Group list to select it, and then click the
left arrow button.
3. Click OK.

11.5.5 PBX Configuration–[3-5-5] Group—Incoming Call

Distribution Group—Member
This screen is only available at Administrator level.
Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and
each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member
of multiple incoming call distribution groups. Select the desired ICD group (1–256) from the ICD Group No.
list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
To copy the members to another group, click Member list copy, select the group, and click OK.

PC Programming Manual 417

11.5.5 PBX Configuration–[3-5-5] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Specifies the extension number of each member. In Max. 5 digits
Number addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, and PS (consisting of 0–9)
extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups
can also be specified.
Extension Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Max. 20 characters
Name To assign an extension user group to more than 8 paging
groups, click All Setting.
Delayed Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. Immediate, 1–6
Ring (Applicable when the call distribution method of the Rings, No Ring
incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)
Wrap-up Specifies the length of time that must pass after 10 × n (n=0–300) s
Timer completing a call before the member extension can accept
another call. This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up
Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call
Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

418 PC Programming Manual

 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group

11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension

Hunting Group
If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the call can
be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a pre-programmed hunting type.
If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which
can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 256 hunting groups
can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily,
click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Hunting Group Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Name hunting group. References
2.2.1 Idle Extension
Hunting
Hunting Type Specifies the hunting type Circular: Circulates until the Feature Manual
for the hunting group. call is answered or overflowed References
Terminated: Terminates at the 2.2.1 Idle Extension
last extension Hunting
5.1.2 Group
Overflow— Specifies the overflow Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, destination of an 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
Break, Night unanswered call in each [Secret], P [Pause], and F 2.2.1 Idle Extension
time mode. [Flash]) Hunting

11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting

Group—Member List
Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the
Hunting Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension
No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of the hunting (consisting of 0– References
group member. 9) 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
Extension Hunting Group
Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an characters References
extension number is 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—
specified in Extension Extension Hunting Group
Number above (reference
only). Feature Manual References
2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual 419

11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7 PBX Configuration—[3-7] Group—UM Group

11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System
Settings
The Unified Messaging (UM) ports of a PBX make up a group, called a UM group. This group has a floating
extension number, which can be the destination for incoming calls, redirected calls, transferred calls, etc.
When a call is received at the UM group, the Unified Messaging system can direct the caller to leave a voice
message or dial a number to reach the desired party.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Call Enables the queuing of calls when all Disable, PC Programming Manual
Waiting on extension ports of the UM group are busy. Enable References
UM Group (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any UM 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
port.) Configuration—Slot—UM Property
—UM Port Property
Feature Manual References
2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Intercept Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
to Mailbox number of the called extension to the Enable References
for Call to Unified Messaging system when a call is 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Extension redirected to the UM group by Intercept Configuration—Slot—UM Property
Routing. When the Unified Messaging —UM Port Property
system receives the mailbox number, the 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
Unified Messaging system answers the Settings—Advanced Extension
call with the appropriate mailbox. Settings—Intercept Destination—
Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Overflow Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, Feature Manual References
to Mailbox number of the called extension to the UM Enable 2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution
for Call to when a call is redirected from an Group Features
ICD Group incoming call distribution group to the UM
group by Intercept Routing. When the
Unified Messaging system receives the
mailbox number, it answers the call with
the appropriate mailbox.

420 PC Programming Manual

 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Transfer Enables the PBX to send the mailbox Disable, PC Programming Manual
Recall to number of the transfer destination Enable References
Mailbox extension to the Unified Messaging 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
system in these situations: (1) when a call Configuration—Slot—UM Property
is transferred to an extension by the Call —UM Port Property
Transfer without Announcement feature
using the Automated Attendant (AA) Feature Manual References
service of the Unified Messaging system, 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
and the call is not answered within a Overview—UM Ports and the UM
programmed time period; (2) when the Group
Unified Messaging system is assigned as
the Transfer Recall destination of a
certain extension. When the Unified
Messaging system receives the mailbox
number, the Unified Messaging system
answers the call with the appropriate
mailbox.

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings
A UM group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls
and incoming calls. In a Multi-connection network, each PBX has its own UM group, and each group has its
own floating extension number.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—Extension List View).
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Floating Specifies the floating extension number Max. 5 PC Programming Manual
Extension of the UM group. digits References
No. (consisti 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
ng of 0– Configuration—Slot—UM Property
9) —UM Port Property
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group
Group Specifies the name of the UM group, Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
Name which will be shown on the display of character References
extensions that call the UM group. s 9.7 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—UM Property
—UM Port Property
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group

PC Programming Manual 421

11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

11.7.2.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit

Settings—Member List
Displays information about all UM ports that belong to the selected UM group.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
No. Indicates the UM port number (reference 1–128 PC Programming Manual
only). References
11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2]
Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
Extension Indicates the extension number assigned Max. 5 PC Programming Manual
No. to the UM port (reference only). digits References
(consisti 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2]
ng of 0– Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
9)
Feature Manual References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
Overview—UM Ports and the UM
Group

422 PC Programming Manual

 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group

11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring

Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating
extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring
groups can be programmed, each containing up to 1000 PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating extension number of Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension the PS ring group. (consisting of 0– References
Number 9) 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Group
Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group, Max. 20 Feature Manual
which will be shown on the display of characters References
extensions that call the PS ring group when 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Incoming Trunk Call Information Display Group
on this screen is set to Called Number.
Incoming Specifies the information of the incoming Caller ID, Called Feature Manual
Trunk Call trunk call to be shown on the displays of the Number References
Information PSs that belong to the PS ring group. If the 5.2.4.2 PS Ring
Display caller’s name or called party’s name is not Group
recognised, the telephone number will be
shown.

11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—

Member List
Each PS Ring Group can have up to 1000 PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the
PS Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see
2.1.7 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member list copy, select the
group, and click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Specifies the extension number Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number of the PS assigned to the PS References
Ring Group. 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8]
Group—PS Ring Group
8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
Settings
Feature Manual References
5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group
First Name Indicates the first name of the Max. 20
PS (reference only). characters
Last Name Indicates the last name of the Max. 20
PS (reference only). characters

PC Programming Manual 423

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group

11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference

Group
A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a
conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up
to 31 members can be assigned to each of 48 conference groups. To assign members to a group, click
Member List.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
Name Description Value Range Links
Conference Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Group Name conference group. References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Broadcast Specifies whether only the original Disable: The Feature Manual
Mode caller can speak or up to 8 people original caller and References
can speak at the start of a up to 7 participants 2.15.1 Conference Group
conference group call. can speak at the Call
start of a
conference group
call.
Enable: Only the
original caller can
speak at the start
of a conference
group call.
Ability to Talk Enables PT, SLT and PS users to Disable, Enable PC Programming
use the push-to-talk feature during a Manual References
conference group call, when 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Broadcast Mode is set to "Enable". [3-9] Group—Conference
The push-to-talk feature allows PT, Group— Broadcast Mode
SLT and PS users to speak during
the call by pressing any of their dial Feature Manual
keys. References
2.15.1 Conference Group
Call
Automatic Specifies if the extensions of the Disable, Enable PC Programming
Answer w/o conference will automatically Manual References
Extension answer a conference group call, 11.9 PBX Configuration—
Setting even if Hands-free Answerback is [3-9] Group—Conference
not set for those extensions. This Group— Broadcast Mode
setting can be used with PTs and
KX-WT125 (Canada only)/ Feature Manual
KX-TCA175/KX-TCA275/ References
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/ 2.15.1 Conference Group
KX-TCA385 PSs. Call

424 PC Programming Manual

 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—

Member List
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the
Conference Group No. list.
When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these
members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK.
To assign destinations for conference groups easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Dial Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number of each member of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
the conference group. #, [ ] [Secret], and P 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9]
[Pause]) Group—Conference Group
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call
Extension Indicates the name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming Manual
Name extension, when an References
extension number is 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension
specified in Dial Number Settings
above (reference only).
Feature Manual References
2.15.1 Conference Group Call

PC Programming Manual 425

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P

Group
Settings for peer-to-peer (P2P) groups can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
P2P Group Specifies the name of the P2P Max. 20 Feature Manual
Name group. characters References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
Connection
Bandwidth Specifies whether to use the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Control bandwidth precedence setting of References
the P2P group for calling among 5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P)
different P2P groups. Connection

426 PC Programming Manual

 Section 12
PBX Configuration—[4] Extension

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Extension menu of the PBX Configuration Menu
of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 427

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—DSS Console

12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—DSS

Console
A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT connected to the same PBX. The DPT Type—Type of
the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in the Port Property screen of the
extension card that the DSS console is connected to. For details, see To access port properties in 9.1
PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
Unless noted otherwise, the programming information is the same as described in the PC Programming
Manual of the legacy gateway PBX. Refer to the corresponding Extension—DSS Console section in
the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway PBX for more information.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy to button.
For Sub-Administrators
• DSS Console No./Name can be specified for DSS consoles connected to a site that they are authorised
to manage.
• Pair Extension can be set to None or the extension number of a user that they are authorised to
manage.

428 PC Programming Manual

 Section 13
PBX Configuration—[5] Optional Device

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Optional Device menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 429

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—

Doorphone
The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
DOORPHONE Indicates the number of the Doorphone Feature Manual References
Number doorphone (reference only). number 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Name Specifies the doorphone name. Max. 20 Feature Manual References
characters 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Destination— Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
Day, Lunch, number of doorphone calls for (consisting of References
Break, Night each port in each time mode. 0–9, *, #, [ ] 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
[Secret], and P System—Week Table
[Pause])
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for 1–128 PC Programming Manual
the doorphone port in order to References
apply the Time Table (day/ 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
lunch/break/night). System—Week Table
Feature Manual References
2.18.1 Doorphone Call
5.1.3 Tenant Service
COS Specifies the Class of Service 1–512 PC Programming Manual
(COS) number. COS References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
doorphone ports that are able [2-7-1] System—Class of Service
to make trunk calls, and sets —COS Settings— TRS— TRS
restrictions on intercom calls Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
from certain extensions 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—
(Internal Call Block). [2-7-3] System—Class of Service
—Internal Call Block
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.1 Doorphone Call

430 PC Programming Manual

 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Name Description Value Range Links

Service Group Specifies the Service Group None, 1–384 Feature Manual References
Number number sent to the Unified 2.18.1 Doorphone Call
Messaging system when the 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
incoming call destination is the Overview
floating extension number of a
UM group.
The Service Group number is
used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send the
applicable greeting message to
the caller.

PC Programming Manual 431

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—

External Pager
Settings for the external pager (external speaker) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 6.4 Tool—
Extension List View).
Name Description Value Range Links
Pager Indicates the Site ID 1–96
Number corresponding to the site
numbers of PBXs in the Multi-
connection network (reference
only).
Site Specifies the site ID. None, Site XX : site
name*1
Port Type Specifies the port type. Site is KX-NS300/
If None is selected for Site, this KX-NS500: Pager 1–6
setting is greyed out. Site is KX-NS700: Mini
Jack #1–#2
Site is KX-NS1000: EPG
Floating Specifies the floating extension Max. 5 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Extension number of the external pager. of 0–9) References
Number 2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer
From Any Station
(TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background
Music (BGM)
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
external pager. References
2.17.1 Paging
2.17.2 Trunk Answer
From Any Station
(TAFAS)
2.28.1 Background
Music (BGM)

*1 "XX" is the site ID (2–32).

432 PC Programming Manual

 13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—Voice Message

13.3 PBX Configuration—[5-3] Optional Device—

Voice Message
13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA System
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller
were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Manual.

Option 1
Name Description Value Range Links
DISA Security— Selects the DISA security mode to None: Intercom calls, Feature Manual
DISA Security prevent unauthorised access to TIE line calls, and trunk References
Mode the PBX. In Trunk or All Security calls can be made. 2.7.5 Walking COS
mode, the caller is required to Trunk: Intercom calls 2.7.6 Verification Code
override security by Walking COS and TIE line calls Entry
or Verification Code Entry in order without PBX code can
to enable the restricted feature be made. TIE line calls
temporarily. with PBX code and
trunk calls are
restricted.
All: All calls are
restricted.
DISA Security— Enables registered caller ID Disable, Enable
Remote numbers to be automatically
Walking COS recognised as PBX extensions
through DISA when calling through DISA, and to
without PIN use the Walking COS features
(Activation Key without entering a PIN.
Required)
DISA Intercept Selects how DISA calls are Busy Tone, Enable,
—Intercept handled if the destination sets Busy Message
when DND, and disables Idle Extension
destination Hunting.
through DISA
sets DND
DISA Intercept Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
—Intercept handled if all DISA ports are AA-9, Disable (Busy
when all DISA currently in use. Tone)
ports are busy
DISA Intercept Selects how DISA calls are to Operator, to AA-0, to
—Intercept handled if the caller does not AA-9, Disable (Reorder
when No Dial select any option from the menu. Tone)
after DISA
answers

PC Programming Manual 433

13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA port is Disable (Release PC Programming
DISA—DISA to released when a trunk-to-public DISA): The DISA port is Manual References
Public CO trunk call using DISA is released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
established. To enable this to-public trunk call Configuration—[5-3-1]
setting, "CO-CO with DISA— using DISA is Optional Device—
Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on established. Voice Message—DISA
this screen should be set to Enable: DISA stays System—Option 1—
"Enable". connected for the CO-CO with DISA—
Setting this to "Disable" will free duration of the call, to Fwd/Transfer to Public
up DISA ports faster, but prevent allow detection of the CO
DISA being used to detect the end of the call.
end of a call and disconnect the
trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Specifies whether the DISA port is Disable (Release PC Programming
DISA—DISA to released when a trunk-to-private DISA): The DISA port is Manual References
Private Network trunk call using DISA is released when a trunk- 13.3.1 PBX
established. to-private trunk call Configuration—[5-3-1]
To enable this setting, "CO-CO using DISA is Optional Device—
with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to established. Voice Message—DISA
Private Network" on this screen Enable: DISA stays System—Option 1—
should be set to "Enable". connected for the CO-CO with DISA—
Setting this to "Disable" will free duration of the call, to Fwd/Transfer to
up DISA ports faster, but prevent allow detection of the Private Network
DISA being used to detect the end of the call.
end of a call and disconnect the
trunk quickly.
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls Disable: Trunk-to-public PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ to be established using DISA. trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to established without 13.3.1 PBX
Public CO Note using DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
This will be enabled only Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
when the CO-CO connection Trunk-to-public trunk Voice Message—DISA
is established via Virtual PS calls are established System—Option 1—
that belongs to the Incoming using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
Call Distribution Group, using can be used to detect DISA to Public CO
the FWD-to-CO function. the end of the call.
CO-CO with Enables trunk-to-private trunk Disable: Trunk-to- PC Programming
DISA—Fwd/ calls to be established using private trunk calls are Manual References
Transfer to DISA. established without 13.3.1 PBX
Private Network using DISA. Configuration—[5-3-1]
Note Enable (Get DISA): Optional Device—
This will be enabled only Trunk-to-private trunk Voice Message—DISA
when the CO-CO connection calls are established System—Option 1—
is established via Virtual PS using DISA, and DISA CO-CO with DISA—
that belongs to the Incoming can be used to detect DISA to Private
Call Distribution Group, using the end of the call. Network
the FWD-to-CO function.

434 PC Programming Manual

 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Name Description Value Range Links

CO-CO with Specifies whether an outside Disable: "#" is ignored if
DISA—Transfer party such as a cellular phone can dialled.
by DTMF "#" transfer a trunk call to an Enable (as "Flash"):
(Activation Key extension within the PBX by The current trunk call
Required) dialling "#" + extension number. will be placed on hold,
then transferred to the
extension whose
number is entered.
CO-CO with Enables a trunk caller to return to Disable, Enable
DISA—Return the DISA top menu by pressing
to DISA Top " " while hearing a ringback,
Menu by DTMF reorder, or busy tone. If disabled,
"*" retrying the call is possible by
pressing " ".

Option 2
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Timed Reminder Specifies the pre- None, 1– PC Programming Manual
Message—Day, recorded message to play 128 References
Lunch, Break, when a Timed Reminder 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Night call is answered in each Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA
time mode. Message
Feature Manual References
2.24.3 Timed Reminder
OGM for Specifies the OGM None, PC Programming Manual
Congestion number for congestion 1-128 References
Guidance—OGM guidance. 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2]
Number Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA
Message
Feature Manual References
5.6.8 Congestion Control

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice

Message—DISA Message
Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 128 OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 6.4 Tool—
Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Floating Specifies the floating Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Extension extension number of the (consisting of 0– 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Number OGM. 9) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
5.5.7 Floating Extension

PC Programming Manual 435

13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Name Description Value Range Links

Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 Feature Manual References
OGM. characters 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
1 Digit AA Specifies the destination for Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
Destination each DISA Automated (consisting of 0– 2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)
(Extension Attendant (AA) number. After 9, *, and #) 2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Number)—Dial listening to an OGM, the Access (DISA)
0–9 caller can be directed to the
destination by dialling a 1-
digit DISA AA number.
Busy / DND Selects the OGM to be None, 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Message No. played for the caller when the References
destination party is busy or 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—
sets DND. [5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice
Message—DISA System
Feature Manual References
2.16.1 Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
Fax Extension Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits Feature Manual References
number to which to transfer a (consisting of 0– 2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer
call when a fax signal is 9)
detected.

436 PC Programming Manual

 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—

External Relay
Settings related to external relays can be programmed.
Before programming these settings, For Output—Device Type must be set to "Relay" in the DOORPHONE
card’s property settings. (→ 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—
Card Property)
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Indicates the number of the 1–124 Feature Manual References
Relay No. external relay (reference 2.18.4 External Relay Control
only).
Name Specifies the relay name. Max. 20 Feature Manual References
characters 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Relay Specifies the length of time 1–7 s Feature Manual References
Activate that the relay stays on when 2.18.4 External Relay Control
Time activated.
COS Specifies the Class of Service 1–512 PC Programming Manual
Number (COS) number. COS References
programming determines the 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1]
extensions that are able to System—Class of Service—COS
activate relays. Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access
Feature Manual References
2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
2.18.4 External Relay Control

PC Programming Manual 437

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—

External Sensor
Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
External Sensor Indicates the number of the 1–124 Feature Manual
No. external sensor (reference References
only). 2.18.3 External Sensor
Name Specifies the sensor name. Max. 20 Feature Manual
characters References
2.18.3 External Sensor
Destination— Specifies the destination Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Day, Lunch, number of sensor calls for each (consisting of 0– References
Break, Night port in each time mode. 9, *, #, [ ] 2.18.3 External Sensor
[Secret], and P
[Pause])
Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which 1–128 PC Programming Manual
the sensor belongs, to References
determine the Time Table for 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
the sensor. (The tenant number System—Week Table
corresponds to the Time Table
number.) Feature Manual
References
2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Enables e-mail notification Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Email notification when the sensor detects an References
alarm. 2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Specifies the e-mail address Max. 128 Feature Manual
Email Address that will receive a notification characters References
when the sensor detects an 2.18.3 External Sensor
alarm. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Sensor Alarm— Specifies comments in the e- Max. 256 Feature Manual
Email Comment mail received when the sensor characters References
detects an alarm. 2.18.3 External Sensor
5.1.3 Tenant Service

438 PC Programming Manual

 13.6 PBX Configuration—[5-6] Optional Device—Optional IP Device

13.6 PBX Configuration—[5-6] Optional Device—

Optional IP Device
Settings for optional IP devices. Up to 128 devices can be programmed.
To view information about the number of licences (channels) for peripheral devices and the number of
channels being used (activated) by peripheral devices, click Optional IP Device Info.
To copy the settings of an IP Device to another IP Device, click Copy to.

Note
Sub-Administrators can edit only sites that they are authorised to manage. For more information, see
8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting. Also, Sub-Administrators can edit the Optional
IP Device settings that belong to user groups that they are authorised to manage. For details about
assigning user groups, see 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group.
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Number Specifies the extension number of Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)
the IP device.
Name Specifies the name of the IP Max. 20 characters
device.
User Group Selects the extension user group 1–512
to which the extension belongs.
COS Selects a the COS of the IP 1–512
device.
CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *,
the public network to show on the and #)
called party's telephone display
when making a trunk call.
CLIP on Selects the CLIP number to show Extension: Show the CLIP number
Extension/CO on the called party’s telephone. specified in CLIP ID.
CO: Show the CLIP number
specified in Subscriber Number in
9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property -
BRI Port—ISDN CO or 9.27 PBX
Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO
Setting.
FWD setting - call Specifies the FWD/DND setting None, Busy
from CO Mode for calls from trunks.
FWD setting - call Specifies the FWD destination for Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *,
from CO calls from trunks. #, P, [, and ])
Destination
FWD setting - call Specifies the FWD/DND setting None, Busy
from Ext. Mode for calls from extensions.
FWD setting - call Specifies the FWD destination for Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *,
from Ext. calls from extensions. #, P, [, and ])
Destination

PC Programming Manual 439

13.6 PBX Configuration—[5-6] Optional Device—Optional IP Device

440 PC Programming Manual

 Section 14
PBX Configuration—[6] Feature

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Feature menu of the PBX Configuration menu of
the Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 441

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System

Speed Dial
The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should
be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution).
The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
In Basic Memory, a maximum of 5000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature
numbers) can be programmed with other related parameters. Up to 300 numbers are displayed at a time.
Name Description Value Range Links
Memory Selects the System Speed Basic Memory: the PC Programming
Dialling Table to be standard table Manual References
programmed. Whether a Expansion for Tenant 1– 14.6 PBX Configuration—
tenant uses the basic 128: additional tables [6-6] Feature—Tenant—
System Speed Dialling System Speed Dial/Quick
Table or the additional Note
Dial
table depends on the • If "Expansion for
setting of System Speed Tenant" is selected, Feature Manual
Dial in 14.6 PBX a maximum of 5000 References
Configuration—[6-6] System Speed 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Feature—Tenant. Dialling numbers Personal/System
can be saved for 2.19.1 Caller ID
each tenant. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Name Specifies a name for the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
System Speed Dialling References
number. 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System
2.19.1 Caller ID
Number of Displays the number of the 0/59000–59000/59000
System Speed registered system speed
Dial for Tenant dial entries for tenant
versus the total number of
available system speed
dial entries for tenant
(reference only).
CO Line Specifies the telephone Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Access number (including the of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] References
Number + Trunk Access number) or [Secret], P [Pause], and F 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Telephone feature number assigned [Flash]) Personal/System
Number to the System Speed 2.19.1 Caller ID
Dialling number.

442 PC Programming Manual

 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Name Description Value Range Links

CLI Specifies the CLI Max. 5 digits (consisting of PC Programming
Destination destination (extension) to 0–9) Manual References
which incoming calls from 18.2 PBX Configuration—
the programmed telephone [10-2] CO & Incoming Call
number are routed. If a —DIL Table & Port
Caller ID Modification Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI
Table is being used, the Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch,
modified number must Break, Night
match the telephone 18.3 PBX Configuration—
number above (CO Line [10-3] CO & Incoming Call
Access Number + —DDI / DID Table—CLI
Telephone Number) in Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
order for the call to be Lunch, Break, Night
routed correctly.
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution
2.19.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 443

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &

Charge
Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main
Name Description Value Range Links
Hotel Operator— Specifies the numbers of the Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
Extension 1–4 extensions designated as hotel (consisting of References
operators. 0–9) 2.23.1 Hospitality Features—
SUMMARY
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether check-in and No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 check-out data is output on References
—Room Status SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
Control Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
SMDR for External Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 1 Reminder data is output on References
—Timed Reminder SMDR. 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
(Wake-up Call) Maintenance—Main
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.3 Timed Reminder
SMDR for External Specifies the text of the Max. 16 PC Programming Manual
Hotel Application 2 message output on SMDR characters References
—Printing Message when this Printing Message is 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
1–8 selected from an extension. Maintenance—Main
The "%" character can be used
in a message, and requires a Feature Manual
number to be entered in its References
place when the message is 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
selected from an extension. Recording (SMDR)
This character can be used a 2.22.2 Printing Message
maximum of seven times in a
Printing Message.
Timed Reminder Specifies the message Max. 20 Feature Manual
Message for displayed on a SIP-MLT or characters References
Standard SIP Standard SIP Phone LCD 2.24.3 Timed Reminder
Phone—Message screen for the Timed Reminder
feature.

444 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Bill
Name Description Value Range Links
Checkout Billing— Activates call billing features OFF, ON PC Programming Manual
Billing for Guest for the PBX. References
9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Site
Property
Feature Manual
References
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Telephone" item 1 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Minibar" item 2 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing— Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
LCD for "Others" item 3 as shown on the display characters References
of the hotel operator extension 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
when entering room charges. Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for item 1 as printed on the guest characters References
"Telephone" bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for "Minibar" item 2 as printed on the guest characters References
bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
Checkout Billing—Bill Specifies the name of charge Max. 12 Feature Manual
(SMDR) for "Others" item 3 as printed on the guest characters References
bill. 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room
SMDR for External Specifies the language used Language 1– Feature Manual
Hotel Application— for standard items shown on Language 5 References
Language for Bill guest bills printed out using the 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
(SMDR) Call Billing feature. Room
SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at the Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— top of the guest bill. characters References
Header 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

PC Programming Manual 445

14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

SMDR for External Specifies the text printed at the Max. 80 Feature Manual
Hotel Application— bottom of the guest bill. characters References
Footer 1–3 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest
Room

Charge
Name Description Value Range Links
Margin & Tax— Specifies the percentage 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Margin Rate for margin to be added to 2.22.3 Call Charge Services
"Telephone" (%) telephone charges 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
displayed on the guest
bill.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the percentage 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for tax rate to be used when 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Telephone" (%) calculating guest
telephone charges.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the percentage 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for tax rate to be used when 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Minibar" (%) calculating guest charges
for charge item 2.
Margin & Tax— Specifies the percentage 0.00–99.99 % Feature Manual References
Tax Rate for tax rate to be used when 2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
"Others" (%) calculating guest charges
for charge item 3.
Charge Options Specifies the number of 0–6 PC Programming Manual
—Digits After digits to display after the References
Decimal Point decimal point for the 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
currency in use. Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3]
Feature—Verification Code—
Budget Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

446 PC Programming Manual

 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge

Name Description Value Range Links

Charge Options Specifies the currency Max. 3 PC Programming Manual
—Currency characters shown on the characters References
display of the extension 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
and the SMDR. Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3]
Feature—Verification Code—
Budget Management
Feature Manual References
2.21.4 Display Information
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room
Charge Options Specifies whether the Head, Tail PC Programming Manual
—Currency currency characters are References
Display Position displayed before or after 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
the call charge. Settings—Advanced Extension
Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3]
Feature—Verification Code—
Budget Management
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services
Charge Options Selects what happens Alarm: Only a PC Programming Manual
—Action at when the amount of the warning tone is References
Charge Limit call charge reaches the heard. 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
pre-programmed limit Alarm + Settings—Advanced Extension
during a conversation. Disconnect: A Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
warning tone is
heard, and then Feature Manual References
the call is 2.7.2 Budget Management
disconnected.
Charge Options Enables the PBX to start Disable, Enable PC Programming Manual
—Meter Start on counting the call charge References
Answer Detection when the answer signal 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension
from the telephone Settings—Advanced Extension
company is detected. Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
Feature Manual References
2.22.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 447

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification

Code
A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in
use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 2000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Verification Specifies the verification code. Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Code (consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the Max. 20 Feature Manual
verification code. characters References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
Verification Specifies the PIN to be entered when Max. 10 digits Feature Manual
Code PIN making a trunk call with the verification (consisting of References
code. 0–9) 2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent
telephone calls will be made if a third
party discovers a personal
identification number (PIN)
(verification code PIN or extension
PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of
fraudulent use, we strongly
recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random
PINs that cannot be easily
guessed.
c. Changing PINs frequently.

448 PC Programming Manual

 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Name Description Value Range Links

COS Number Specifies the COS that applies when 1–512 PC Programming
making a trunk call with the verification Manual References
code. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration
—[2-7-1] System—Class
of Service—COS Settings
Feature Manual
References
2.7.6 Verification Code
Entry
5.1.1 Class of Service
(COS)
Itemised Specifies the itemised billing code used Max. 10 digits PC Programming
Billing Code by the ARS feature for identifying calls (consisting of Manual References
for ARS made with a verification code for 0–9, *, and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—
accounting and billing purposes. [8-5] ARS—Carrier
Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Budget Specifies the limit of the call charge that 0-99999 Feature Manual
Management will be counted on the verification code. References
The number of decimal places that can 2.7.2 Budget
be specified here depends on the value Management
set in Charge Options—Digits After
Decimal Point in 14.2 PBX
Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel &
Charge.

PC Programming Manual 449

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second

Dial Tone
A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and
the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a
pre-programmed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Second Dial Tone Specifies the Second Dial Tone Max. 4 digits Feature Manual
Waiting Code Waiting code. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
and #) 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
Pause Repeating Specifies the number of pauses 0–20 Feature Manual
Counter to be inserted when waiting for References
the second dial tone. 2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

450 PC Programming Manual

 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent

Message
When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing
the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user
can select one of them.

Note
When using this feature in conjunction with the Unified Messaging (UM) system, changing a message
here will create a difference between the displayed message and the UM’s pre-recorded greeting that
corresponds to the absent message. To use both features in synchronisation, you must record a
corresponding greeting for each absent message changed. For details about changing UM system
prompts, see 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation.
Name Description Value Range Links
Absent Message Specifies the message for Max. 16 characters Feature Manual References
display. 2.20.2 Absent Message

PC Programming Manual 451

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

A maximum of 128 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user
groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension Number
Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Music On Specifies the audio Same as System Setting, PC Programming Manual
Hold source to be used for BGM1-8, Tone References
Music on Hold. 10.2 PBX Configuration—
[2-2] System—Operator &
BGM
Feature Manual
References
2.13.4 Music on Hold
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Operator Specifies the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0– PC Programming Manual
(Extension number or the floating 9) References
Number)— extension number of an 10.2 PBX Configuration—
Day/Lunch/ incoming call [2-2] System—Operator &
Break/Night distribution group to be BGM
designated as the
tenant operator. When Feature Manual
this parameter is left References
unspecified, the PBX 5.1.3 Tenant Service
operator serves as the 5.1.5 Operator Features
tenant operator.
ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode Off: ARS is disabled. PC Programming Manual
used when making a On for Local Access References
trunk call. Operation: ARS operates 16.1 PBX Configuration—
when an extension user [8-1] ARS—System Setting
makes a call using any Idle
Line Access method. Feature Manual
On for Any CO Access References
Operation: ARS operates 2.8.1 Automatic Route
when an extension user Selection (ARS)
makes a call using any Trunk 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Access method.
Same as System Setting: The
setting specified in ARS
Mode in 16.1 PBX
Configuration—[8-1] ARS—
System Setting is applied.

452 PC Programming Manual

 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

Name Description Value Range Links

System Specifies which system Same as System Setting: PC Programming Manual
Speed Dial/ speed dialling table is PBX common system speed References
Quick Dial used by the tenant. dialling numbers are used. 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Tenant Exclusive: Individual [6-1] Feature—System
tenant system speed dialling Speed Dial
numbers are used.
Feature Manual
References
2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
Personal/System
5.1.3 Tenant Service
Call Park Specifies whether Call System, Tenant Exclusive Feature Manual
Park is for the entire References
system or Tenant 2.13.2 Call Park
exclusive. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
Time Specifies which PBX’s Normal: Use the clock of the Feature Manual
Service clock in a Multi- PBX to which the device or References
Mode connection network is trunk for a service (e.g., 5.1.3 Tenant Service
used as reference for incoming call features) is 5.1.4 Time Service
the tenant’s Time connected.
Service functions and 1–32: Use the clock of the
for ICD Group functions. PBX in the Multi-connection
network with the selected Site
ID.
Extension Specifies whether the System: All system Speed Feature Manual
Directory display for the Speed Dialling numbers are References
Dialling numbers is for displayed. 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
the entire system, or Tenant: Only the extensions Personal/System
only for the extensions of the tenant group that the 5.1.3 Tenant Service
of the tenant group that extension belongs to are
the extension belongs displayed.
to.

PC Programming Manual 453

14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant

454 PC Programming Manual

 Section 15
PBX Configuration—[7] TRS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the TRS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 455

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes
here and excepted codes in 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code. If the leading digits of
the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code tables, the call is made.
A maximum of 600 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 leading digits of toll (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
restricted numbers *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS
for each level. Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

456 PC Programming Manual

 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code

15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception

Code
Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each
time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the
maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are
allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination of denied codes in
15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code and excepted codes here. A call denied by the
applicable Denied Code tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code tables, and if a match is
found, the call is made.
A maximum of 600 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time. To
display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Level 2– Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual References
Level 6 digits of the numbers to (consisting of 0–9, 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—
be exempted from toll *, #, and X) Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—
restriction/call barring TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
for each level. 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied
Code
Feature Manual References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)

PC Programming Manual 457

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special

Carrier
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required each
time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes and looking at the
telephone number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will
look only at the following digits.
A maximum of 128 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Special Specifies a Special Carrier Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Access Access Codes and Host PBX and #) 2.5.4.9 Special Carrier
Code Access codes should be Access Code
unique. 2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/
Call Barring (Barring)

458 PC Programming Manual

 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency

Dial
Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The
restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—
Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 20 emergency numbers can be programmed.

Name Description Value Range Links

Emergency Specifies the numbers used for Max. 32 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number making emergency calls. It is not 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P References
necessary to start the emergency [Pause], and F [Flash]) 2.5.4.2 Emergency
number with a Trunk Access Call
number.

PC Programming Manual 459

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The
following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or
switch between TRS/Barring methods.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRS Override Enables an outgoing trunk call Disable, Enable PC Programming
by System to override TRS/Barring when Manual References
Speed Dialling the call is made using System 14.1 PBX Configuration—
Speed Dialling. [6-1] Feature—System
Speed Dial
Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
TRS Check for Enables a TRS/Barring check No Check, Check Feature Manual
Dial " * # " for the user-dialled " " and References
"#". This is useful in preventing 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
unauthorised calls which could (TRS)/Call Barring
possibly be made through (Barring)
certain telephone company
exchanges.
Mode when Selects whether a trunk is Disconnect: The trunk PC Programming
Dial Time-out disconnected if the TRS/ is disconnected as soon Manual References
before TRS Barring check has not been as the timer expires. 10.3 PBX Configuration—
Check completed when the trunk Keep: The TRS/Barring [2-3] System—Timers &
Inter-digit timer expires. check is performed Counters
when the timer expires.
Feature Manual
References
2.7.1 Toll Restriction
(TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed None, 1–7 Feature Manual
Limitation After on the number of digits which References
Answering— can be dialled after an 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
Dial Digits extension user receives a (TRS)/Call Barring
trunk call. If the number of (Barring)
dialled digits exceeds the 2.11.8 Trunk Call
programmed limit, the line will Limitation
be disconnected.
TRS Check Enables TRS/Barring to check Disable, Enable Feature Manual
after EFA the digits dialled after External References
Feature Access (EFA) during a 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
trunk call. (TRS)/Call Barring
(Barring)
2.11.7 External Feature
Access (EFA)

460 PC Programming Manual

 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Name Description Value Range Links

TRS Table Selects the method of TRS/ Deny Table 2_N + Feature Manual
Mode for Level Barring to be used for Except Table N_6: The References
N (N=2_6) restricting calls. The level of Denied Code Tables for 2.7.1 Toll Restriction
TRS/Barring is determined by the higher levels are (TRS)/Call Barring
the telephone codes set in the applied to all levels (Barring)
Denied Code Tables and below it, and the
Exception Code Tables. Exception Code Tables
for the lower levels are
applied to all levels
above it.
Deny Table N + Except
Table N: Each level has
its own separate set of
denied codes and
exception codes, which
are only applied to that
level.

PC Programming Manual 461

15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

462 PC Programming Manual

 Section 16
PBX Configuration—[8] ARS

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the ARS menu of the PBX Configuration menu of the
Setup screen of Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 463

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting

16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System

Setting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is
made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in
order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
ARS Mode Selects the condition to Off: ARS is disabled. Feature Manual
determine when to On for Local Access Operation: References
operate ARS. ARS operates when an extension 2.5.5.3 Trunk
user makes a call using Idle Line Access
Access method. 2.8.1 Automatic
On for Any CO Access Operation: Route Selection
ARS operates when an extension (ARS)
user makes a call using Idle Line
Access, Trunk Access, or S-CO
Line Access method.
Mode When Any Selects what happens Disconnect: the line will be Feature Manual
Carrier is not when the dialled number disconnected. References
programmed for is not found in Leading Local Access: the dialled number 2.8.1 Automatic
the Dial Number in 16.2 PBX will be handled by Idle Line Access Route Selection
Configuration—[8-2] method. (ARS)
ARS—Leading
Number.

464 PC Programming Manual

 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number

16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading

Number
Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS
feature. A maximum of 5000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can
select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The additional
(remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after the dialled
number. The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled number (excluding
the leading number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the applicable
tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Number number. (consisting of 0–9, *, References
#, and X) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Additional Specifies the additional 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of (remaining) number of digits References
Digits following each leading 2.8.1 Automatic Route
number. Selection (ARS)
Routing Plan Specifies the Routing Plan 1–240 Feature Manual
Number Table number used for each References
leading number. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 465

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time

16.3 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan

Time
The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There
are 48 Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired
Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or deleting time
blocks, click Time Setting.

16.3.1 PBX Configuration—[8-3] ARS—Routing Plan Time—Time

Setting
The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for
the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Time-A–D— Enables the setting of the start time for each time Disable, Feature Manual
Setting block. Enable References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Time-A–D— Specifies the start time for each time block. 00:00– Feature Manual
Hour, 23:59 References
Minute Note
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Time-A must be the earliest block in the day, Selection (ARS)
and the following blocks must be set in
chronological order.

Correct programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 17:00
Time-C: 21:00

Incorrect programming example:

Time-A: 8:00
Time-B: 13:00
Time-C: 11:30
Time-D: 17:00

466 PC Programming Manual

 16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan Priority

16.4 PBX Configuration—[8-4] ARS—Routing Plan

Priority
The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of each day
of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired
day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Time-A–Time- Specifies the carrier to be given None, 1–128 Feature Manual References
D priority for each time zone. 2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection
(ARS)

PC Programming Manual 467

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—Carrier

16.5.1 PBX Configuration—[8-5-1] ARS—Carrier—Main Setting
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A
maximum of 128 different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
Name Description Value Range Links
Carrier Name Specifies the carrier name. Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
References
2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Removed Specifies the number of leading 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of digits to remove from the user- References
Digits dialled number. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)
Modify Specifies the commands to modify Max. 16 characters Feature Manual
Command the user-dialled number to access (consisting of 0–9, References
the carrier. For details of each *, #, C, P, A, G, I 2.8.1 Automatic Route
command, see the Feature Manual. and H) Selection (ARS)
CLIP Table Sets the CLIP numbers established 1–8 Feature Manual
No. for each extension (wired/wireless) References
of a carrier. The CLIP IDs for each 2.8.1 Automatic Route
CLIP number are set in 8.5 Users— Selection (ARS)
CLIP ID Table.
Carrier Specifies the carrier access code. Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Access Code The carrier access code can be (consisting of 0–9, References
added to the user-dialled number by *, #, and P [Pause]) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
specifying "C" in Modify Command Selection (ARS)
on this screen.

468 PC Programming Manual

 16.5.2 PBX Configuration—[8-5-2] ARS—Carrier—TRG Priority

16.5.2 PBX Configuration—[8-5-2] ARS—Carrier—TRG Priority

TRG Priority
Selects the order in which trunk groups are seized when making calls via each carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
Trunk Group— Specifies which trunk group is None, 1–128 Feature Manual
Priority 1–Priority seized in the order of priority 1 to References
4 priority 4. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 128

Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRG 01– Enables each trunk group for each carrier. OFF (white), ON Feature Manual
TRG 128 If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk (blue) References
group is enabled for use with that carrier. 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

16.5.3 PBX Configuration—[8-5-3] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation

Code for Tenant
Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-dialled
number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the 16.5.1 PBX Configuration—[8-5-1] ARS
—Carrier—Main Setting.
Name Description Value Range Links
Authorisation Code for Specifies the Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Tenant—Tenant 1– Authorisation code of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Tenant 32/Tenant 128 each carrier for each and #) 2.8.1 Automatic Route
tenant. Selection (ARS)
5.1.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 469

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading Number Exception

16.6 PBX Configuration—[8-6] ARS—Leading

Number Exception
Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled
number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access
method if ARS Mode in 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting is "on".
A maximum of 1000 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 100 leading number
exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading Max. 16 digits (consisting of Feature Manual
Number number exception. 0–9, *, #, and X) References
Exception 2.8.1 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS)

470 PC Programming Manual

 16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation

Code for TRG
An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be
added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the 16.5.1 PBX
Configuration—[8-5-1] ARS—Carrier—Main Setting.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
TRG—TRG Specifies the Max. 10 digits PC Programming Manual
01–TRG Authorisation code of (consisting of 0–9, *, References
128 each carrier for each and #) 16.5 PBX Configuration—[8-5] ARS—
trunk group. Carrier—Main Setting—Modify
Command
Feature Manual References
2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 471

16.7 PBX Configuration—[8-7] ARS—Authorisation Code for TRG

472 PC Programming Manual

 Section 17
PBX Configuration—[9] Private Network

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Private Network menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 473

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—

TIE Table
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make
unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to
be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the network
are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given a unique code,
which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the applicable
tab.
Name Description Value Range Links
Own PBX Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, Max. 7 digits Feature Manual
Code when using PBX Code Method numbering on (consisting of 0–9) References
a TIE line network. If this cell is left empty, 4.3.1 TIE Line
the Extension Number Method is used. Service

Priority 1–Priority 8
Name Description Value Range Links
Leading Specifies the leading number for Max. 3 digits Feature Manual
Number other PBX extension numbers or the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
PBX code of others in the TIE line and #) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
network.
Removed Specifies the number of leading digits 0–15 Feature Manual
Number of of the dialled number to be removed References
Digits for each priority. 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Added Specifies the number to be added to Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Number the dialled number in place of the (consisting of 0–9, *, References
removed digits for each priority. #, and P [Pause]) 4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used None, 1–128 Feature Manual
for TIE line calls for each priority. References
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

474 PC Programming Manual

 Section 18
PBX Configuration—[10] CO & Incoming Call

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the CO & Incoming Call menu of the PBX
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 475

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings

18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call

—CO Line Settings
Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 640 (KX-NSX1000) or 960 (KX-NSX2000)
trunk groups.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is Card type
connected (reference only).
CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the Max. 20 Feature Manual
extension’s display when receiving a call from characters References
the trunk. 2.21.4 Display
Information
Trunk Specifies the trunk group number to which the 1–128 Feature Manual
Group trunk belongs. References
Number When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is 5.1.2 Group
automatically set to "7" for the corresponding
trunks.

476 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming

Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as
the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL
distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/
night). If desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in conjunction with DIL distribution.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on
the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue
trunks. Tenant number and service group number can also be programmed for each trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card type Card type Feature Manual
(reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Indicates the networking type Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual
Property of each trunk (reference only). VPN References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the trunk References
calls. The value range of this through which the 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
setting depends on the card calls arrive Features—SUMMARY
type and Trunk Property DDI/DID: Distribution
assigned for each trunk. depends on the
DDI/DID number of
the calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the MSN
of the calls
TIE: Distribution
depends on the TIE

PC Programming Manual 477

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DIL Specifies the DIL destination Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— in each time mode. (consisting of 0–9) References
Day, Lunch, 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—
Break, Night [2-6-1] System—Numbering
Plan—Main
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Specifies the tenant number, 1–128 Feature Manual
Number to determine the Time Table References
by which calls are distributed 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
depending on the time of day. 5.1.3 Tenant Service
5.1.4 Time Service
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–384 Feature Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
incoming call destination is 3.2.1.40 Service Group
the floating extension number
of a UM group.
The Service Group number is
used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send the
applicable greeting message
to the caller.

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be
distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller’s identification number is
found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card Card type Feature Manual
type (reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual
type of each trunk VPN References
(reference only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)

478 PC Programming Manual

 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the trunk References
calls. The value range of through which the calls 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
this setting depends on the arrive Features—SUMMARY
card type and Trunk DDI/DID: Distribution
Property assigned for depends on the
each trunk. DDI/DID number of the
calls
MSN: Distribution
depends on the MSN of
the calls
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, Enable Feature Manual
DIL—Day, each time mode. References
Lunch, Break, 2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
Night 2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose DDI / DID / TIE / MSN on this
screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be
programmed.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.
Name Description Value Range Links
Card Type Indicates the trunk card type Card type Feature Manual
(reference only). References
2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
Trunk Property Indicates the networking Public, Private(TIE), Feature Manual
type of each trunk (reference VPN References
only). 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
Features—SUMMARY
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private
Network (ISDN-VPN)
Distribution Selects the distribution DIL: Distribution Feature Manual
Method method for incoming trunk depends on the trunk References
calls. The value range of this through which the 2.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call
setting depends on the card calls arrive Features—SUMMARY
type and Trunk Property DDI/DID: Distribution 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
assigned for each trunk. depends on the (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI/DID number of 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
the calls Number (MSN) Ringing Service
MSN: Distribution
depends on the MSN
of the calls

PC Programming Manual 479

18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number of 0–15 Feature Manual
MSN— leading digits to be removed References
Remove Digit from the incoming called 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
number for DDI/DID (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
distribution or for TIE line 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
service. Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
DDI/DID/TIE/ Specifies the number to be Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
MSN— added to the incoming called (consisting of 0–9, *, References
Additional Dial number in the place of the and #) 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
removed digits for DDI/DID (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
distribution or for TIE line 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
service. Number (MSN) Ringing Service
4.3.1 TIE Line Service

480 PC Programming Manual

 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call

—DDI / DID Table
Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID
number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will
be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table. CLI distribution
can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 7000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are
displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time
mode (day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration, or
to programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate.

Note
Sub-Administrators can edit only DDI/DID tables that they are authorised to manage.
Name Description Value Range Links
DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID Max. 32 PC Programming Manual
Number number. digits References
(consisting of 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
0–9, *, and #) & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
DDI / DID Name Specifies the name for the Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID number which is characters References
shown on the extension’s 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
display when receiving a call & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
with the DDI/DID number. Name Generate
The name of the DDI/DID 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1]
number can be printed out Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options
on SMDR. —Option—DDI/DID Number & Name
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 481

18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Name Description Value Range Links

DDI / DID Specifies the DDI/DID Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— destination in each time (consisting of References
Day, Lunch, mode. 0–9) 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1]
Break, Night System—Numbering Plan—Main
18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO
& Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—
Automatic Registration
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
4.3.1 TIE Line Service
Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, 1–128 PC Programming Manual
to determine the Time Table References
by which calls are distributed 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
depending on the time of System—Week Table
day.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–384 Feature Manual References
Group No. number sent to the Unified 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Messaging system when the Direct Dialling In (DDI)
incoming call destination is 3.1.1 Unified Messaging System
the floating extension Overview
number of a UM group.
The Service Group number
is used to allow the Unified
Messaging system to send
the applicable greeting
message to the caller.
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in Disable, PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID—Day, each time mode. Enable References
Lunch, Break, 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1]
Night Feature—System Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/
Direct Dialling In (DDI)
2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification
(CLI) Distribution
Sub- Specifies which Sub- None, 01:-32: PC Programming Manual
Administrator Administrator is authorised to References
manage the DDI/DID table. 8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub
Administrator Setting
Note
This setting is available
when the Installer logs in
alone or logs in using
Exclusive Login Mode.

482 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration

18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Automatic Registration
Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

Note
This setting is available when the Installer logs in alone or logs in using Exclusive Login Mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Beginning Specifies the number of the first 1–7000 PC Programming Manual
Entry Location location to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Generate Specifies the DID number of the Max. 32 PC Programming Manual
DDI/DID first location to be programmed. digits References
Number DDI/DID numbers for subsequent (consisting of 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
(From) locations will be generated 0–9) CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
automatically, by adding one to Table
the value of the previous location.
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
Number of Specifies the number of locations 1–1000 PC Programming Manual
Registration to be programmed. References
18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
(DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 483

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Name Description Value Range Links

Destination— Specifies the number of the Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Day, Lunch, DDI/DID destination in each time (consisting of References
Break, Night mode for the first location to be 0–9) 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3]
programmed. If the same CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID
destination is to be used for all Table
locations for a certain time mode,
click the appropriate Same all Feature Manual References
check box. If the Same all check 2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling
box for a certain time mode is not (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
clicked, the destination numbers
for subsequent locations will be
generated automatically, by
adding one to the value of the
previous location for that time
mode.

18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID

Table—Name Generate
Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

Note
This setting is available when the Installer logs in alone or logs in using Exclusive Login Mode.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Beginning Specifies the number of 1–7000 PC Programming Manual References
Entry the first location to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
Location programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Number to Specifies the number of 1–1000 PC Programming Manual References
Generate locations to be 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
programmed. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
No. of Digits Specifies the number of 0–32 PC Programming Manual References
to Delete digits to be deleted from 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
the start of a DDI/DID Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
number when using it as
part of the DDI/DID name. Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)

484 PC Programming Manual

 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Name Prefix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the start of characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
each DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)
Name Suffix Specifies the text to be Max. 20 PC Programming Manual References
included at the end of each characters 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO &
DDI/DID name. Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct
Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 485

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming

Call—MSN Table
Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be
distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

MSN
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.7 Extension
Number Setting).
Name Description Value Range Links
Site Indicates the site number of the 2–32
PBX in the Multi-connection
network (reference only).
Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or Shelf number
position (reference only).
Slot Indicates the slot position of the Slot number
BRI card that is set to MSN
distribution (reference only).
Port Indicates the port number of the Port number
BRI card that is set to MSN
distribution (reference only).
MSN Number Specifies the MSN. Max. 16 digits PC Programming Manual
(consisting of References
0–9, *, and #) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
MSN Name Specifies the name for the MSN Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
which is shown on the characters References
extension’s display when 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
receiving a call with the MSN. Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service

486 PC Programming Manual

 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Name Description Value Range Links

MSN Specifies the MSN destination Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Destination— in each time mode. (consisting of References
Day, Lunch, 0–9) 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Break, Night Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
Tenant Specifies the tenant number, to 1–128 PC Programming Manual
Number determine the Time Table by References
which calls are distributed 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
depending on the time of day. Configuration—Slot—Port Property
- BRI Port
10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4]
System—Week Table
Feature Manual References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
(MSN) Ringing Service
UM Service Specifies the Service Group None, 1–384 PC Programming Manual
Group No. number sent to the Unified References
Messaging system when the 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
incoming call destination is the Configuration—Slot—Port Property
floating extension number of a - BRI Port
UM group.
The Service Group number is Feature Manual References
used to allow the Unified 2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number
Messaging system to send the (MSN) Ringing Service
applicable greeting message to
the caller.

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls
will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller’s identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Site Indicates the site number of the PBX in 2–32
the Multi-connection network (reference
only).
Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position Shelf
(reference only). number
Slot Indicates the slot position of the BRI Slot number
card that is set to MSN distribution
(reference only).

PC Programming Manual 487

18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Port Indicates the port number of the BRI Port number
card that is set to MSN distribution
(reference only).
CLI Ring for Enables CLI distribution in each time Disable, PC Programming Manual
MSN—Day, mode. Enable References
Lunch, 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1]
Break, Night Configuration—Slot—Port
Property - BRI Port
Feature Manual
References
2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber
Number (MSN) Ringing
Service
2.1.1.5 Calling Line
Identification (CLI) Distribution

488 PC Programming Manual

 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call

—Miscellaneous
The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when
there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.
Name Description Value Range Links
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a Feature Manual
Routing - DND Routing—DND feature busy tone to the caller. References
(Destination sets to activate when the (However, a call through an 2.1.1.6 Intercept
DND.) original destination is in LCOT card will ring at the Routing
DND mode. original destination while the 2.3.3 Do Not Disturb
caller hears a ringback tone.) (DND)
Enable: Redirects the call to
the intercept destination
Intercept—Routing to Enables the Intercept Disable (Reorder Tone): Feature Manual
Operator - No Routing—No Sends a reorder tone to the References
Destination Destination feature to caller. (However, a call 2.1.1.7 Intercept
(Destination is not activate when there is through an LCOT card will ring Routing—No
programmed.) no destination for the at the original destination Destination
call. while the caller hears a
ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to
an operator
Intercept—Intercept Enables the Intercept Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Routing for Routing feature to References
Extension Call operate for extension 2.1.1.7 Intercept
calls. Routing—No
Destination

PC Programming Manual 489

18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

490 PC Programming Manual

 Section 19
PBX Configuration—[11] Maintenance

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Maintenance menu of the PBX Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 491

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and
outgoing calls.
Name Description Value Range Links
SMDR Format— Selects the format of SMDR Type A: 80 digits Feature Manual
Type output. without call charge References
information 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Type B: 80 digits Recording (SMDR)
with call charge
information
Type C: 120 digits
SMDR Format— Selects the Serial Interface None, Feature Manual
Port port that is used to output LAN(TELNET) References
the SMDR data. 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of 4–99 Feature Manual
Page Length lines on a page of output References
(Number of paper. Match the SMDR 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Lines) output to the paper size Recording (SMDR)
being used in the printer.
SMDR Format— Specifies the number of 0–95 Feature Manual
Blank Footer lines to be skipped at the References
Length (Number end of every page. The 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
of Lines) number of lines for the skip Recording (SMDR)
perforation should be
shorter than the page
length.
SMDR Format— Selects the printed date MM-DD-YY, DD- Feature Manual
Date Format format. MM-YY, YY-MM- References
DD, YY-DD-MM 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
SMDR Format— Selects whether times are 12H, 24H Feature Manual
Time Format displayed using the 12- or References
(12H / 24H) 24-hour format. 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)

492 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Outgoing Call dialled digits of outgoing References
trunk calls are printed. 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—
Class of Service (COS) [2-7-1] System—Class of
programming determines Service—COS Settings—CO &
the printable records. SMDR—Outgoing CO Call
Printout (SMDR)
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual
—Incoming Call information relating to References
incoming trunk calls, such 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
as caller’s identification Recording (SMDR)
name and number, is
printed.
Print Information Specifies whether the No Print, Print Feature Manual
—Intercom Call dialled digits of outgoing References
intercom calls are printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Specifies whether the log- No Print, Print Feature Manual
—Log-in / Log- in/log-out status is printed. References
out 2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
Print Information Selects whether check-in No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Hotel Room and check-out data is References
Status output on SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.23.2 Room Status Control
Print Information Selects whether Timed No Print, Print PC Programming Manual
—Timed Reminder data is output on References
Reminder (Wake- SMDR. 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2]
up Call) Feature—Hotel & Charge
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
2.24.3 Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual 493

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Print Information Specifies whether PBX No Print, Print Feature Manual
—Error Log error log information is References
output to SMDR. 2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR)
5.6.3 Local Alarm Information

SMDR Options
Name Description Value Range Links
Option—ARS Selects the type of the dialled Dial before ARS Feature Manual
Dial number to be printed for a call Modification: The References
with the ARS feature. user-dialled number 2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access
Dial after ARS Code (Access Code to the
Modification: The Telephone Company from a
ARS modified Host PBX)
number 2.8 Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) Features
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
ID Number & caller identifications for Name, Name + References
Name incoming trunk calls. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Selects the printing format of None, Number, Feature Manual
DDI/DID incoming trunk calls with a Name, Name + References
Number & DDI/DID number. Number 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Name Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Secret Selects the printing format of Print "...." (Secret), Feature Manual
Dial calls with a secret dial. The Print Dialled Number References
secret dial conceals all or part 2.6.1 Memory Dialling
of the dialled number. Note that Features—SUMMARY
selecting Dial before ARS 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Modification in Option-ARS Detail Recording (SMDR)
Dial on this screen indicates
the dialled numbers as dots
regardless of this setting.

494 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Option—Privacy Selects whether private dialling Print Dialled PC Programming
Mode is enabled or disabled, and Number: Disables Manual References
how many digits to hide when private dialling; all 19.1 PBX Configuration—
enabled. dialled numbers are [11-1] Maintenance—Main—
To enable this setting, Print shown on SMDR. SMDR—Print Information—
Information—Outgoing Call No Print: No dialled Outgoing Call
on the SMDR tab should be set number will be
to Print. shown on SMDR. Feature Manual
Print "X", Print "XX", References
Print "XXX", Print 2.22.1.1 Station Message
"XXXX": The Detail Recording (SMDR)
selected number of
digits at the end of
dialled telephone
numbers, and any
additional digits
dialled after
connection, are
shown on SMDR as
"X".
Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code receiving an incoming trunk References
"RC" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option— Specifies whether the time of No Print, Print Feature Manual
Condition Code answering an incoming trunk References
"AN" call is printed. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Option—Caller Specifies whether Caller ID Before Modification, PC Programming
ID Modification numbers are recorded on After Modification Manual References
SMDR as received (before 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—
being modified by the PBX) or [3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group
after being modified. —Caller ID Modification
Feature Manual
References
2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
Emergency Call Specifies if an emergency call End of Call, Start Feature Manual
Notification is recorded on SMDR only and End of Call References
when the call is completed, or 2.22.1.1 Station Message
when the call is initially dialled Detail Recording (SMDR)
as well.
LAN—SMDR Specifies the port number used 1–65535 Feature Manual
Port Number to output SMDR data via the References
LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual 495

19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

LAN—SMDR Specifies the password used to Max. 10 characters Feature Manual
Password output the SMDR data via the References
LAN. 2.22.1.1 Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR)
LAN—New Line Specifies the new line code for CR + LF, CR Feature Manual
Code for Telnet a terminal emulator. References
If the terminal emulator 2.22.1.1 Station Message
automatically feeds lines with a Detail Recording (SMDR)
carriage return, select CR
(Carriage Return).
If not, select CR + LF (Line
Feed).

Maintenance
Name Description Value Range Links
Local Alarm Display Specifies the extension numbers of PTs Max. 5 digits Feature Manual
—Extension 1, that will be notified by the PBX about (consisting of References
Extension 2 local alarms. When the PBX detects a 0–9) 5.6.3 Local Alarm
PBX error, the System Alarm button on Information
the PT turns on red. When this button is
pressed, the display will show the error
number, and the button light will turn off
automatically.
Daily Test Start Time Enables the daily self check of the PBX Disable, Feature Manual
—Set for local alarm and error log. Enable References
5.6.3 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Time Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self 0–23 Feature Manual
—Hour check start time. References
5.6.3 Local Alarm
Information
Daily Test Start Time Specifies the minute of the PBX daily 0–59 Feature Manual
—Minute self check start time. References
5.6.3 Local Alarm
Information
Error Log for UM Enables error information to be logged Disable, PC Programming
Port Busy— in the PBX if UM ports were all busy Enable Manual
Detection of All UM specified in Detection of All UM Port References
Port Busy Busy. This item is recorded by Syslog.
7.3.2 Utility—Log—
If this Log is frequently recorded in your
Syslog
customer, it indicates insufficiency of
UM port. Recommend to purchase
Activation Keys for expand UM port.

496 PC Programming Manual

 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main

Name Description Value Range Links

Error Log for UM Enables error information to be logged 3-300 (sec) PC Programming
Port Busy— in the PBX if UM ports were all busy Manual
Detection Busy time specified in Detection Busy References
Threshold Time Threshold Time. This item is recorded
7.3.2 Utility—Log—
by Syslog. If this Log is frequently
Syslog
recorded in your customer, it indicates
insufficiency of UM port. Recommend to
purchase Activation Keys for expand
UM port.
Error Log for PT/ Specifies whether to enable Error Log Disable,
IP-CS connection— for PT/IP-CS connection-Error Log for Enable
Error Log for connection failure.
connection failure
Error Log for PT/ Specifies whether to enable Error Log Disable,
IP-CS connection— for PT/IP-CS connection-Error Log for Enable
Error Log for connection recovery.
connection recovery
Error Log for IP Specifies whether to enable Error Log Disable,
Softphone for IP Softphone connection-Error Log Enable
connection—Error for connection failure.
Log for connection
failure
Error Log for IP Specifies whether to enable Error Log Disable,
Softphone for IP Softphone connection-Error Log Enable
connection—Error for connection recovery.
Log for connection
recovery

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer.
Name Description Value Range Links
Manager Password - Specifies the manager 4–10 digits (consisting Feature Manual
PT Programming— password to authorise the of 0–9, *, and #) References
Prog *1 PT user to access manager 5.1.6 Manager
programming. Features

PC Programming Manual 497

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation
19.2.1 PBX Configuration—[11-2-1] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—Air Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for Air Synchronisation Groups.
Select an Air Synchronisation Group (1-16) to programme from the Air Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the air synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs with traditional CSs first, followed by IP-CSs.
To open the screen described in 7.4.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group,
click CS Status Monitor.
Air Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
CSs connected to legacy gateways can be used together with IP-CSs connected to the KX-NS1000
system. CSs connected to legacy gateways must be registered to Air Synchronisation Group Number 1.
Do not register CSs connected to legacy gateways to any other Air Synchronisation Group Number.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the air synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the air synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Air Synchronisation Select the air synchronisation group to 1–16
Group Number programme.
Index Indicates the CS number (reference only). 1–16
CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference Max. 20 characters
only).

498 PC Programming Manual

 19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

Name Description Value Range Links

Connection Indicates the port status. To change the INS: The port is in
status of the port, click the desired cell in service.
the column, and then select INS or OUS OUS: The port is out of
for the port. service.
Fault: The port is not
communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS is -, Registered
registered (reference only).
CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. Sync Master CS1, Sync
This parameter can only be modified Master CS2, Sync Slave
when Connection on this screen is set to CS
OUS.
Primary CS—Index Specifies the number of the primary CS. 1–16
Primary CS—Site Indicates the site position of the primary Site Number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the primary Shelf Number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the primary Slot number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary Port number
CS (reference only).
Primary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the primary CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Secondary CS—Index Specifies the number of the secondary 1–16
CS.
Secondary CS—Site Indicates the site position of the Site Number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—Shelf Indicates the shelf position of the Shelf Number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the Slot number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the Port number
secondary CS (reference only).
Secondary CS—CS Indicates the name of the secondary CS Max. 20 characters
Name (reference only).

19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation
You can programme and view settings for LAN Synchronisation Groups.
Select a LAN Synchronisation Group (1-32) to programme from the LAN Synchronisation Group Number
drop-down list.
It is possible to synchronise CSs with each other within the LAN synchronisation group.
Click Sort to reorder CSs.

PC Programming Manual 499

19.2.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Synchronisation

To open the screen described in 7.4.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group,
click CS Status Monitor.
LAN Synchronisation Groups can be programmed only in On-line mode.
The Site, Shelf, Slot, and Port for each item are displayed for your reference. For details, see Common
Programming Reference Items in 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot.

Note
Only KX-NS0154 IP-CSs can be added to a LAN synchronisation group.

Adding CSs
Follow the steps below to add CSs to the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Connect the CS to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Add.
A dialogue box will appear. Non-registered (available) CSs are displayed on the left.
3. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for addition.
4. Click OK.

Deleting CSs
Follow the steps below to delete CSs from the LAN synchronisation group.
1. Click Delete.
A dialogue box will appear. Registered CSs are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight CSs and click the right arrow to select them for deletion.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Select the LAN 1–32 PC Programming
Synchronisation synchronisation group to Manual
Group Number programme. References
Note 19.2.1 PBX
Configuration—
You must specify a LAN [11-2-1] Maintenance
synchronisation group —CS
number or an air Synchronisation—Air
synchronisation group Synchronisation—Air
number for each IP-CS. Do Synchronisation
not leave both of these Group Number
settings unspecified.
IP Address for Specifies the IP address for 239.0.0.0–
Group Control the group. This is the same 239.255.255.255
value specified in Group
Control Setting—IP Address
for Group Control in
19.2.3 PBX Configuration—
[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS
Synchronisation—LAN Sync
Group Setting.
Index Indicates the CS number 1–64
(reference only).

500 PC Programming Manual

 19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

CS Name Indicates the name of the CS Max. 20 characters
(reference only).
Connection Indicates the port status. To INS: The port is in service.
change the status of the port, OUS: The port is out of
click the desired cell in the service.
column, and then select INS or Fault: The port is not
OUS for the port. communicating with the
network.
Status Indicates whether a certain CS -, Registered
is registered (reference only).
CS Class Specifies the classification of Sync Master CS1, Sync
each CS. This parameter can Master CS2-1, Sync
only be modified when Master CS2-2, Sync Slave
Connection on this screen is
set to OUS. Note
Sync Master CS1,
Sync Master CS2-1,
and Sync Master
CS2-2 can each be
assigned to only 1
IP-CS in the same
LAN synchronisation
group.
MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of 00:00:00:00:00:00–
the IP-CS (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Current IP Indicates the current IP 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
Address address of the IP-CS
(reference only).

19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS

Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting
You can programme the settings for a LAN synchronisation group.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Synchronisation Group Select the LAN synchronisation 1-32
Number group to programme.
Group Control Setting—Type of Select the method for performing Multicast, Broadcast
Control Packet LAN synchronisation.
Group Control Setting—IP Specifies the IP address for the 239.0.0.0–
Address for Group Control group. 239.255.255.255
If Broadcast is selected for Group
Control Setting—Type of Control
Packet, this setting is greyed out.
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the threshold for 0–8192 ns
Level of Synchronisation establishing LAN synchronisation.
Establish (ns)

PC Programming Manual 501

19.2.3 PBX Configuration—[11-2-3] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation—LAN Sync Group Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the limit for determining 0–8192 ns
Limit level of Synchronisation synchronisation holding.
holding (ns)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the maximum duration for 0–256 s
Maximum duration of synchronisation holding.
Synchronisation holding (s)
Synchronisation Level Setting— Specifies the level at which re- 0–32768 ns
Level of Synchronisations Lost synchronisation is performed.
and Restart (ns)
Synchronisation Monitoring Specifies the number of hours 2–168 hours
Report Setting—Long Term between performing in-operation
Diagnosis Monitoring timer (h) monitoring (long term).

502 PC Programming Manual

 19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—

Power Failure Transfer
Notice
This screen is for programming legacy gateway PBXs. For information about setting up a legacy
gateway PBX, see 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2.
For information about programming Power Failure Transfer settings, refer to the corresponding
Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer section in the PC Programming Manual of the legacy gateway
PBX. The following programming items are available, when a KX-NS1000 is selected in the Site Selection
menu.
Using the Site selection drop-down list, select the site where the legacy gateway PBX is connected, and
then programme the settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Shelf Specifies the legacy gateway PBX shelf 2: Legacy- PC Programming
(reference only). GW1 Manual References
3: Legacy- 9.28 PBX Configuration
GW2 —[1-1] Configuration—
Slot—Legacy-GW1/
Legacy-GW2
PFT Card Specifies the position of the card(s) with Pair - 1–Pair -
Position power failure transfer ports (reference only). 12

Note
The number of available PFT cards and
PFT ports depends on the model of the
legacy gateway PBX. For details, refer to
the documentation for the legacy gateway
PBX.

PC Programming Manual 503

19.3 PBX Configuration—[11-3] Maintenance—Power Failure Transfer

504 PC Programming Manual

 Section 20
UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Mailbox Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 505

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Each mailbox can be edited based upon the needs of the subscriber.
Click each tab on the Mailbox Settings screen to specify the desired parameters.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a specific mailbox, select the desired mailbox, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Settings screen.

Deleting Mailboxes
To delete a mailbox from the ICD Group, delete the floating extension number of the ICD Group and then
operate the icon as shown below.
The mailboxes for the auto 2 way recording can be deleted by the following icon operation. The mailboxes
for users cannot be deleted by the following operation.
1. Select a mailbox.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click OK.
With Mailbox Settings, you can set the necessary minimum settings for Unified Messaging mailboxes. This
setting is available at the User (Administrator) level.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Displays the subscriber's mailbox 2–8 digits PC Programming Manual
Number number (reference only). References
If the mailbox is created at a user 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
container, the extension number of the System—System Options—
user's main devise is displayed. Option 9
Feature Manual
References
3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
3.2.2.20 Mailbox
Extension Specifies the extension number of the Max. 8 digits PC Programming Manual
mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid References
extension number including an 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9]
Extension Group number can be System—System Options—
assigned. Option 9
Note Feature Manual
If an Extension Group number is References
assigned to a mailbox, all group 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
members are able to access the System Overview
messages stored in the mailbox. 3.2.2.20 Mailbox

506 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

First Name Displays the first name of the subscriber Max. 20 PC Programming Manual
(reference only). characters References
If the mailbox was created with a user 21.1 UM Configuration—[2]
container, the first name specified in the Class of Service—Directory
user container is displayed. Listing
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name
Last Name Displays the last name of the subscriber Max. 20
(reference only). characters
If the mailbox was created with a user
container, the last name specified in the
user container is displayed.

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Mailbox Parameters
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the subscriber’s mailbox 2–[the value set in PC Programming
Number number. The maximum number of Mailbox No. Max. Length Manual
digits that can be used for mailbox (3-8)] digits References
numbers is set in 24.4 UM
10.9 PBX
Configuration—[5-4] System
Configuration—[2-9]
Parameters—Parameters—
System—System
Mailbox—Mailbox No. Max.
Options—Option 9
Length (3-8), or when you initialise
the system. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.1.1 Unified
The mailbox number can only be Messaging System
set when adding a mailbox; Overview
when editing a mailbox, you 3.2.2.20 Mailbox
cannot change the assigned
mailbox number.
Extension Specifies the extension number of Max. 8 digits PC Programming
the mailbox’s subscriber. Any valid Manual
extension number including an References
Extension Group number can be
10.9 PBX
assigned.
Configuration—[2-9]
Note System—System
Options—Option 9
If the mailbox was created with a
user container, this setting Feature Manual
cannot be changed. References
If an Extension Group number is 3.1.1 Unified
assigned to a mailbox, all group Messaging System
members are able to access the Overview
messages stored in the mailbox. 3.2.2.20 Mailbox

PC Programming Manual 507

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

First Name Specifies the first name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Note Class of Service—
Directory Listing
If the mailbox was created with a
user container, this setting Feature Manual
cannot be changed. References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name
Last Name Specifies the last name of the Max. 20 characters PC Programming
subscriber. If there are non- Manual
alphabetical characters in the first 4 References
letters of the first name, the mailbox
21.1 UM
is not included in the directory.
Configuration—[2]
Note Class of Service—
General
If the mailbox was created with a
user container, this item cannot Feature Manual
be changed. References
3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name
Mailbox Specifies the password needed to Max. 16 digits PC Programming
Password access the mailbox. If a default Manual
password is programmed by an References
administrator, that password will be
26.1 UM
assigned automatically when
Configuration—[7]
creating all mailboxes.
System Security—
Administrators can change and
Subscriber
delete the password.
To change a password for a mailbox: Feature Manual
1. On the Mailbox Parameters References
Screen, click Edit under 3.1.2.3 Password
Mailbox Password for the Administration
mailbox extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.

Note
If the mailbox was created with a
user container, this setting
cannot be changed.

508 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Mailbox Specifies the password needed to 4–16 characters (A–Z, a– PC Programming
Password access the mailbox when using a z, 0–9) Manual
(Message client software programme. If a References
Client) default password is programmed by
26.1 UM
an administrator, that password will
Configuration—[7]
be assigned automatically when
System Security—
creating all mailboxes.
Subscriber
Administrators can change and
delete the password. Feature Manual
To change a password for a mailbox: References
1. On the Mailbox Parameters 3.1.2.3 Password
Screen, click Edit under Administration
Mailbox Password (Message
Client) for the mailbox
extension to change.
2. In the window that appears,
enter the new password and
then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Class of Determines the set of services COS No. 1–514 PC Programming
Service available to the subscriber. Manual
(Mailbox) References
Note
10.9 PBX
• We recommend that Configuration—[2-9]
parameters for each COS System—System
number be defined before Options—Option 9
assigning a Class of Service 21.1 UM
(COS) to each mailbox or Configuration—[2]
creating new mailboxes. Class of Service
• COS No. 513 and 514 are Feature Manual
assigned by default to the References
Message Manager and to the
System Manager, 3.1.1 Unified
respectively. No other Messaging System
mailboxes can be assigned to Overview
COS No. 513 and 514. 3.2.1.11 Class of
Service (COS)
• If the mailbox was created
with a user container, this
setting cannot be changed.

PC Programming Manual 509

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Covering Forwards calls to a second Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
Extension extension when the first extension’s References
subscriber is not available to take 3.2.1.14 Covering
the call. The Covering Extension is Extension
one of the Incomplete Call Handling
options that can be enabled or
disabled by the subscriber. The
caller can also be transferred the
Covering Extension by pressing [0]
while a Personal Greeting is being
played, or while leaving a message.

Note
Extension Groups or Logical
Extensions (extensions whose
calls are set to always be
directed their mailboxes) cannot
be assigned as covering
extensions.
Interview Assigns an interview mailbox to the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Mailbox subscriber’s mailbox. In order for it Mailbox] digits References
to function properly, the interview 3.2.1.25 Interview
mailbox number must not be the Service
same number as an existing mailbox
and an existing mailbox group.

Note
Each caller’s replies to an
interview session are saved as
one message.
All Calls If this parameter is set to "Yes", the No, Yes Feature Manual
Transfer to extension is considered to be a References
Mailbox Logical Extension and therefore calls 3.2.1.3 Automated
directed to the extension via Attendant (AA)
Automated Attendant service are
automatically forwarded to the
extension mailbox. The extension
does not ring when a call is
received.

510 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies the method for the Call System, Other PC Programming
Transfer Transfer Sequence used by the Manual
Sequence mailbox. Allows each mailbox to be Note References
(Selection) assigned its own Call Transfer When "System" is 24.4 UM
Sequence (Personal Transfer selected, the Unified Configuration—[5-4]
Sequence). Messaging system System Parameters
uses the extension —Parameters—PBX
Note transfer sequence pre- Parameters—PBX
This sequence has higher programmed in 24.4 Environment—
priority than the alternate UM Configuration— Alternate Extension
extension transfer sequence [5-4] System Transfer Sequence
specified in 24.4 UM Parameters— (Up to 16 digits / [0-9
Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—PBX * # D R F T X , ;])
Parameters—Parameters— Parameters—PBX
PBX Parameters—PBX Environment— Feature Manual
Environment—Alternate Alternate Extension References
Extension Transfer Sequence Transfer Sequence 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 Status
T X , ;]). * # D R F T X , ;]).
Call Specifies the Call Transfer Enter a maximum of 16 Feature Manual
Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Only characters consisting of References
Sequence specified if Mailbox Parameters is 0–9, , # and special 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
(Other) set to "Other". codes: Status
D: Disconnecting
F: Flash (Recall)
R: Ringback Tone
Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
, : Dial Pause (default 1 s)
; : Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
No Answer Specifies the length of time that the System, Other (If "Other" PC Programming
Time Unified Messaging system waits is selected, specify 10–60 Manual
(Selection/ before handling unanswered calls to s) References
Other) the extension.
24.4 UM
Note Configuration—[5-4]
System Parameters
When "System" is selected, the —Parameters—
Unified Messaging system uses Dialling
the time pre-programmed in Parameters/MSW
24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] Notification—Dialling
System Parameters— Parameters—Call
Parameters—Dialling Transfer No Answer
Parameters/MSW Notification Time (10-60 s)
—Dialling Parameters—Call
Transfer No Answer Time
(10-60 s).

PC Programming Manual 511

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Transfer Messaging system handles a call subscriber’s extension. References
Status when it reaches the subscriber’s Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.8 Call Transfer
extension. Click Edit for the the call according to the Status
extension to change, programme the Incomplete Call Handling
settings, and click OK to finish. for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s
Note extension. The
This setting can be changed by subscriber’s extension will
subscribers. not ring.
Call screening: The caller
is prompted to record his
or her name. The Unified
Messaging system then
calls the subscriber and
plays back the caller
name. The subscriber can
choose whether to answer
the call.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to Mailbox:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Transfer to specified
telephone number 1–5:
Transfers the caller to one
of the specified telephone
numbers in numerical
order of priority.

512 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Messaging Leave a Message: Allows Feature Manual
Call system handles a call when there is the caller to record a References
Handling for no answer. Click Edit for the message. 3.2.2.18 Incomplete
No Answer extension to change, programme the Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
settings, and click OK to finish. extension: Transfers the
caller to a covering
Note extension.
• This setting can be changed Page the mailbox owner
by subscribers. by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
• More than one option can be intercom.
selected. Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu: Lets
the caller return to top
menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Incomplete Specifies how the Unified Messaging Leave a Message: Allows Feature Manual
Call system handles a call when the the caller to record a References
Handling for extension is busy. Click Edit for the message. 3.2.2.18 Incomplete
Busy extension to change, programme the Transfer to a covering Call Handling Service
settings, and click OK to finish. extension: Transfers the
caller to a covering
Note extension.
• This setting can be changed Page the mailbox owner
by subscribers. by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
• More than one option can be intercom.
selected. Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu: Lets
the caller return to top
menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Call Specifies whether callers can input Enable, Disable
Transfer an extension number to transfer their
Anytime in call while the Automated Attendant
Incomplete service is playing an Incomplete Call
Handling Handling menu.
Menu

PC Programming Manual 513

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Prompt Registration
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Prompt Click Edit to open the User Prompt PC Programming
Registration Registration screen. For more information, see Manual References
Prompt Registration in 8.1.1 Users—User 8.1.1 Users—User
Container—Add User/Edit User—Unified Container—Add User/Edit
Message. User
If the following mailboxes is selected, this —Unified Message
setting will be in-active:
• Message Manager
• System Manager
• Automatic Two-way Recording

Notification Parameters
The Unified Messaging system is able to notify a subscriber when a new message is recorded in his or her
mailbox. There are 3 methods the system can use for notification:
– Lighting the Message Waiting Lamp on the subscriber’s extension telephone.
– Calling a pre-programmed device (external telephone, etc.). A maximum of 3 devices (Device 1, 2, 3) can
be programmed per mailbox.
– Sending an e-mail to a designated address.
Name Description Value Range Links
Message If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of Disable, Enable Feature
Waiting Lamp the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a new Manual
message is recorded. References
3.2.1.30
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Lamp
Telephone Specifies the Message Waiting Notification Feature
Device schedule for each device. The following Manual
parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, References
and 3. Click Edit for the extension to change,
3.2.1.31
set Device Notification for Unreceived
Message
Message to "Yes", and programme the settings,
Waiting
then click OK to finish.
Notification—
Telephone
Device

514 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Specifies the type of message for which All Messages, Feature
Device— notification is sent. Notification can be sent for Voice Messages, Manual
Device No. 1, all messages, or voice messages or fax Fax Messages References
2, 3— messages only.
3.2.1.31
Notification
Message
Type
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies if notifications will be sent only for Yes, No Feature
Device— messages designated as urgent. Manual
Device No. 1, References
2, 3—Only
3.2.1.31
Urgent
Message
Messages
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or Max. 32 digits Feature
Device— 3. The subscriber can also specify the number consisting of 0–9, Manual
Device No. 1, to be dialled by entering it from his or her , # and special References
2, 3—Dial telephone, allowing the subscriber to set this codes:
3.2.1.31
Number [0-9 * feature on a case by case basis. ,: Dial Pause
Message
# T X , ;] (default 1 s)
Note Waiting
;: Dial Pause
Notification—
When the Unified Messaging system calls a (default 3 s)
Telephone
trunk via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" T: Dial Tone
Device
after the telephone number (1112223333 in Detection
the example here): X: Callback
9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial Number Entry
Pause) Code
0–9, , #: Dial
Code
Telephone Specifies the number of times the Unified 0–4 times Feature
Device— Messaging system will try to send notification if Manual
Device No. 1, the device is busy or if there is no answer. References
2, 3—No. of
3.2.1.31
Retries
Message
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device

PC Programming Manual 515

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 2–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device is References
2, 3—Busy busy.
3.2.1.31
Delay Time
Message
(min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified 2–120 min Feature
Device— Messaging system waits before retrying Manual
Device No. 1, message notification when the called device References
2, 3—No does not answer.
3.2.1.31
Answer Delay
Message
Time (min)
Waiting
Notification—
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Device— message notification. The subscriber can also selected device is Manual
Device No. 1, specify the use mode from his or her telephone. not used for References
2, 3—Use Schedule: If Scheduled is selected here, follow message
3.2.1.31
Mode the steps below to specify the time frame: notification.
Message
Continuously:
1. Select a day from the Day drop-down list Waiting
The device is
(Sunday – Saturday). Notification—
called whenever
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Telephone
a message is
Device
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start recorded in the
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. mailbox. If Only
Urgent
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be Messages is set
programmed, and then click OK. to "Yes", the
device is called
whenever an
urgent message
is recorded in the
mailbox.
Scheduled: The
selected device is
called only during
the selected
times.

516 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Telephone Specifies the length of time the system waits 0–120 min Feature
Device— after a new message is received before sending Manual
Device message waiting notification. References
Notification
3.2.1.31
Timer—
Message
Device Start
Waiting
Delay Time
Notification—
(0-120 min)
Telephone
Device
Telephone Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending 0–120 min Feature
Device— Message Waiting Notification to Device 1, 2, or Manual
Device 3 before sending notification to the next device. References
Notification
3.2.1.31
Timer—
Message
Device
Waiting
Interval Time
Notification—
between
Telephone
Device 1, 2, 3
Device
and Next
Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the name of the user of the device. Max. 64 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—User
Message
Name
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the e-mail address of the device. Max. 128 Feature
Message characters Manual
Device— Note References
Device No. 1, • In the mailbox user’s profile (See 3.2.1.29
2, 3—E-mail 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add Message
Address User/Edit User) if Email 1–3 is input in Waiting
the Contact tab, and Use for voice mail Notification—E-
notification is checked, the e-mail mail Device
address(es) will be copied to this setting
and overwrite any previously input data
here.
E-mail/Text Specifies the type of Message Waiting All Messages, Feature
Message Notification to be sent. Notification can be sent Voice Messages, Manual
Device— for all messages, or voice messages or fax Fax Messages References
Device No. 1, messages only.
3.2.1.29
2, 3—
Message
Notification
Waiting
Type
Notification—E-
mail Device

PC Programming Manual 517

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will Yes, No Feature
Message be sent only for urgent messages. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Only
Message
Urgent
Waiting
Messages
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the format of the title of the Title-ID-Name, Feature
Message notification. Title-Name-ID, Manual
Device— ID-Title-Name, References
Device No. 1, Name-Title-ID,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Title ID-Name-Title,
Message
Order Name-ID-Title
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the text string to be included as part of Max. 30 Feature
Message the title of the notification. characters Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Title
Message
String
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the callback number to be included in Max. 32 digits (0– Feature
Message the notification. 9, , #) Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Callback
Message
Number
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies the delay between the message being 0–120 min Feature
Message left and the sending of the Message Waiting Manual
Device— Notification. References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Send
Message
Wait Time
Waiting
[0-120 min]
Notification—E-
mail Device

518 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

E-mail/Text Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the Yes, No Feature
Message voice message to the notification e-mail. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Attach
Message
Voice File
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies whether to attach a fax image file of Yes, No Feature
Message fax messages to the notification e-mail. Manual
Device— References
Device No. 1,
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Attach
Message
Fax File
Waiting
Notification—E-
mail Device
E-mail/Text Specifies if and how each device is used for Not use: The Feature
Message message notification. selected device is Manual
Device— If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps not used for References
Device No. 1, below to specify the time frame: message
3.2.1.29
2, 3—Use notification.
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab. Message
Mode Continuously:
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2. Waiting
The device is
Notification—E-
3. Enter the start and end times in the Start called whenever
mail Device
At (HH:MM) and End At (HH:MM) fields. a message is
recorded in the
4. To specify if sent voice message or fax mailbox. If Only
image files are deleted from the Unified Urgent
Message system after they are sent by e- Messages is set
mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send to "Yes", the
(Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax device is called
File). whenever an
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each day to be urgent message
programmed, and then click OK. is recorded in the
mailbox.
Note Scheduled: The
If voice message or fax image files are set selected device is
to be deleted after they are sent by e-mail, called only during
be aware that a deleted file cannot be the selected
recovered in the event that the e-mail is not times.
sent successfully.

External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/Personal Custom Serv

This tab contains programming items for External Message Delivery, Auto Forwarding, and Personal
Custom Service settings.

PC Programming Manual 519

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

External If set to "Yes", subscribers are able No, Yes Feature Manual
Message to utilise the External Message References
Delivery Delivery feature. 3.2.2.13 External
Active Message Delivery
Service
External When an external message is Primary, Selective, PC Programming
Message delivered, the receiver will be Guidance No. 1–8 Manual
Delivery greeted by the system in the References
Prompt specified language. If set to
22.1 UM
Mode "Primary", the default language will
Configuration—[3-1]
be used. If set to "Selective", the
UM Extension / Trunk
receiver has a choice of prompts.
Service—Service
See related explanation in 22.1 UM
Group— Day, Night,
Configuration—[3-1] UM
Lunch, and Break
Extension / Trunk Service—
Mode - Incoming Call
Service Group— Day, Night,
Service Prompt
Lunch, and Break Mode -
Incoming Call Service Prompt. Feature Manual
References
Note
3.2.1.42 System
If set to "Selective" and the Prompts
receiver uses a rotary telephone,
the no-entry selection is
specified by 22.1 UM
Configuration—[3-1] UM
Extension / Trunk Service—
Service Group— Day, Night,
Lunch, and Break Mode -
Prompt for No DTMF Input
Callers.
Auto If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging No, Yes Feature Manual
Forwarding system automatically forwards References
Active messages that have not been played 3.2.1.2 Auto
for a specified length of time to Forwarding
another mailbox.
Auto Specifies the mailbox to which the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Forwarding messages will be forwarded. Mailbox] digits References
Mailbox 3.2.1.2 Auto
Number Note
Forwarding
A Mailbox Group number cannot
be specified as a destination.

520 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Specifies the length of time in hours 00:00–99:59 Feature Manual
Forwarding and minutes that the system waits References
Delay Time before forwarding unplayed 3.2.1.2 Auto
(hours:minu messages. The maximum delay time Forwarding
tes) is 99 h, 59 min.

Note
The delay time must be shorter
than the New Message
Retention Time, or else
messages will be deleted before
being forwarded.
Auto Specifies whether all messages, or All Messages, Voice Feature Manual
Forwarding only voice messages or only fax Messages, Fax References
Message messages are forwarded. Messages 3.2.1.2 Auto
Type Forwarding
Auto Specifies whether only urgent Yes, No Feature Manual
Forwarding messages are forwarded. References
Message 3.2.1.2 Auto
Type Forwarding
Urgent
Auto Specifies if forwarded messages are Copy, Move Feature Manual
Forwarding to be retained in the original mailbox. References
Mode When set to "Copy", copies of the 3.2.1.2 Auto
messages are retained in the original Forwarding
mailbox after forwarding. When set
to "Move", messages are forwarded
to the receiving mailbox and are not
retained in the original mailbox.
Auto Specifies if the forwarded messages Yes, No Feature Manual
Forwarding remain marked as new. This setting References
Mode - is available only when Auto 3.2.1.2 Auto
Message Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy". Forwarding
Remains
New
Auto Specifies the date and time of day Date and time Feature Manual
Forwarding for when forwarding of messages will References
Expires expire. 3.2.1.2 Auto
Forwarding

PC Programming Manual 521

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Personal Specifies the Personal Custom Service. The System • Transfer to Feature
Custom Administrator can assign an operation to each key. specified Manual
Service mailbox: 2– Reference
Note [the value set s
• These settings can be changed by subscribers. in Mailbox]
3.2.2.24
digits
• Make sure to add a trunk access number when Personal
you store an outside telephone number. • Transfer to Custom
specified Service
• When the Unified Messaging system calls a trunk extension:
via the PRI card, be sure to add "#" after the 2–8 digits
telephone number (1112223333 in the example
here): 9P1112223333#PP123PP456PPX# (P: Dial • Transfer to
Pause) specified
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Custom
Service. Service
Menu: 1–200
1. Click Edit.
• Transfer to
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation. outside
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, (specified
specify a Value number):
Outside
4. Click OK when finished.
Number 1–4
Assigned Operation
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to
leave messages in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller
to a specified extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to
access Voice Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows
the caller to access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified
here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an
operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers
the caller to a specified outside telephone number.
Enter a number from the Outside Numbers list (1–4).
• Page the party: Pages the subscriber.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.

522 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Specifies the outside telephone Outside Number #1–#4: Feature Manual
Numbers numbers that can be used for the Max. 32 digits consisting References
"Transfer to outside (specified of 0–9, , #, and special 3.2.2.24 Personal
number)" operation in the Custom codes Custom Service
Service settings. Click OK when T: Dial Tone Detection
finished. ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
0–9, , #: Dial Code
No DTMF Specifies the operation taken when Recording: The caller will Feature Manual
Input no DTMF input (a caller does not dial be guided to leave a References
Operation anything) is received after the message. 3.2.2.24 Personal
Personal Greeting. Disconnect (All Day): Custom Service
The line will be
disconnected, regardless
of the time of day.
Disconnect (Only After
Hours): The line will be
disconnected only after
hours.
No DTMF Specifies the duration of time to wait 0–10 s Feature Manual
Input for DTMF input before the action set References
Operation in No DTMF Input Operation is 3.2.2.24 Personal
Wait Time performed. Custom Service

Personal Distribution List

Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation.
A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Name Description Value Range Links
List 1 Name– Specifies a list name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
List 4 Name characters References
3.2.2.17 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 523

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

List 1 Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the Max. 40 Feature Manual
Members–List list. mailboxes References
4 Members Follow the steps below to edit list members. per list 3.2.2.17 Group
1. Click Edit for a List Members item. Distribution Lists
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the
checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox
owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a
list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4)
Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No.
for each mailbox to add, referring to the
mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’
names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.

Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct Service

This tab contains programming items for Remote Call Forwarding, Automatic Login, and Direct Service
settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Call Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits (consisting PC Programming
Telephone of destinations to which callers of 0–9 and " ") Manual
Number 1, 2 are forwarded when the References
subscriber sets Remote Call
21.1 UM
Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers
Configuration—[2]
can be specified per mailbox.
Class of Service—
Telephone numbers can contain
Call Transfer
the digits "0–9" and " ". These
telephone numbers should begin Feature Manual
with a trunk access number. References
3.2.2.29 Remote
Note
Call Forwarding Set
Class of Service programming
determines if the subscriber is
able to use this feature.

524 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login When this item is set to "Enable", Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Extension subscribers are able to access References
their mailbox directly without 3.2.2.3 Automatic
entering the mailbox number. Login
Subscribers can automatically log
in from their extensions, by calling
from an outside telephone whose
number is stored as a Caller ID
number, or by dialling a telephone
number assigned to a specified
DID number or trunk. When
logging in from outside
telephones, the Toll Saver feature
is also available.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Extension for the Automatic Login Extension References
Password feature. 3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry Login
Requirement Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure
that unauthorised third-parties
are not allowed access to that
mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the telephone number Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
Caller ID 1, 2 from which the subscriber can References
automatically be logged in from. 3.2.2.3 Automatic
When Caller ID information is Login
received that matches one of
these numbers, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this telephone number must be
unique for each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
Caller ID for entry when automatic login is References
Password performed using the Caller ID of Notice
3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry the number set in Auto Login If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ensure that
ID 2. unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to that mailbox
using the number
assigned to Auto
Login Caller ID 1 or
Auto Login Caller ID
2.

PC Programming Manual 525

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Auto Login Specifies the DDI/DID number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
DDI/DID Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.3 Automatic
receives this DDI/DID number Login
from the PBX, the caller
(subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies the trunk number for 1–128 Feature Manual
TRG No. Automatic Login. When the References
Unified Messaging system 3.2.2.3 Automatic
receives a call on this trunk, the Login
caller (subscriber) is automatically
logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this number must be unique for
each mailbox.
Auto Login Specifies if a password is required Yes, No Feature Manual
DDI/DID, TRG for entry when automatic login is References
No. Password performed using the trunk group Notice
3.2.2.3 Automatic
Entry number or the DID number. If this is set to "No", Login
Requirement ensure that
unauthorised third-
parties are not allowed
access to any
extensions using the
specified trunk group
number.
Auto Login Toll Allows subscribers to call the Disable: Disables the Toll Feature Manual
Saver Unified Messaging system and Saver feature. References
know whether or not new DID: Toll Saver functions 3.2.2.33 Toll Saver
messages have been recorded in when the system receives
their mailboxes by the number of the pre-programmed DID
rings they hear before the Unified number from the PBX.
Messaging system answers their Caller ID: Toll Saver
calls. Toll Saver is available under functions when Caller ID
the same conditions as Automatic information is received that
Login; subscribers can use Toll matches one of the pre-
Saver when calling from an programmed numbers
outside telephone whose number (Caller ID 1 or 2).
is stored as a Caller ID number, or Trunk: Toll Saver functions
by dialling a telephone number when the system receives
assigned to a specified DID a call on the pre-
number or trunk. programmed trunk.

526 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Direct Service Specifies which features can be Record No Answer PC Programming
UM Extension directly accessed by dialling a Greeting: The subscriber Manual
Unified Messaging extension can record the greeting References
number. This setting can only be played when there is no
9.7 PBX
specified for Unified Messaging answer.
Configuration—[1-1]
extension numbers. Record Busy Greeting:
Configuration—Slot
The subscriber can record
Note —UM Property—UM
the greeting played when
Port Property
Automatic Login must be their extension is busy.
20.1.1 UM
enabled for extensions to use Record After Hours
Configuration—[1-2]
this feature. Greeting: The subscriber
Mailbox Settings—
can record the greeting
Basic Setting—
played when the system is
Remote Call/
in night mode.
Automatic Login/
Record Temporary
Direct Service—
Greeting: The subscriber
Auto Login
can record a greeting that
Extension
is used exclusively until the
subscriber disables it. Feature Manual
Change Day Main Menu: References
The subscriber can change 3.2.2.12 Direct
the Day Main Menu Service Access
greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Night Main
Menu: The subscriber can
change the Night Main
Menu greeting. Only the
Message Manager may
make this change.
Change Emergency
Greeting: The subscriber
can change the
Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager
may make this change.

Fax Options
Name Description Value Range Links
Automatic Specifies whether Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Delivery Status Automatic Delivery is used References
to automatically forward 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
received faxes to a Delivery
specified fax machine.

PC Programming Manual 527

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Specifies the default Max. 32 digits consisting of 0– Feature Manual
Delivery Status number for which to send 9, , # and special codes: References
Default Fax automatically delivered ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s) 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
Number [0-9 * # faxes. ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s) Delivery
T,;] T: Dial Tone Detection
X: Callback Number Entry
Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Automatic Specifies if automatically Delete Automatically, Save as Feature Manual
Delivery Status forwarded faxes are Old, Save as New References
Printed Fax marked as "old" or "new", 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
Message or deleted. Delivery
Play Voice/Fax Specifies if the subscriber Yes, No Feature Manual
Selection Menu will be prompted to References
choose which messages 3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax
will be played: either voice Delivery
messages, information
about waiting fax
messages, or all
messages.
Fax Number Specifies if a dialled fax Disable, Enable
Confirmation number must be re-
entered for confirmation
before sending.
No Space for Specifies the action taken Transfer to Fax Extension: PC Programming
Receiving when there is not enough Transfers the fax to a Manual References
Coverage Mode free space in the mailbox specified fax extension. 24.4 UM
to save a fax message in Receive in GDM: The fax is Configuration—[5-4]
the mailbox. redirected to the general System Parameters—
delivery mailbox. Parameters—Fax
No Receiving: The fax Management
message is not received and
the system goes on hook.

Note
If no fax extension is
specified but Transfer to
Fax Extension is
selected, the system will
go on hook.
Cover Page Specifies the language English (US), English (UK), Feature Manual
Language used for the set German, French, Italian, References
information generated for Spanish, Dutch, Portuguese, 3.2.2.14 Fax Cover
fax cover pages. Swedish, Greek, Danish, Page
Hungarian, Czech,
Norwegian, Russian, Polish,
French (Canada)

528 PC Programming Manual

 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Announce Number of Messages

Name Description Value Range Links
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All New Messages number of only new messages in their mailbox when
the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
All Messages number of all messages in their mailbox when the
subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Voice Messages number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Fax Messages number of only new fax messages in their mailbox
when the subscriber logs in.
Subscriber Service - Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
New Urgent number of only new messages marked as urgent in
Messages their mailbox when the subscriber logs in.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All New number of only new messages in their mailbox when
Messages the subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - All number of all messages in their mailbox when the
Messages subscriber has selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Voice number of only new voice messages in their mailbox
Messages when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Fax number of only new fax messages in their mailbox
Messages when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Receiving Message Specifies if the system announces to subscribers the Yes, No
Service - New Urgent number of only new urgent messages in their
Messages mailbox when the subscriber has selected to listen to
messages.
Message Client Specifies the language of information generated by English,
Display Language the UM system for the mail (IMAP) client. Deutsch,
Français,
italiano, espańol,
Nederlands,
Português,
русский

PC Programming Manual 529

20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting

Quick Menu and Greeting Recording

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Quick Menu When this setting is enabled for the Message Enable, PC Programming
and Manager mailbox, the following features are Disable Manual References
Greeting enabled for the Message Manager to access 23.3 UM Configuration—
Recording greeting and recording management menus [4-3] Service Settings—
quickly. Custom Service
• Custom Service Menu messages for Custom
Feature Manual
Service 1 and 2 can be recorded and changed
from the Top Menu. References
3.2.1.17 Emergency
• Company Greeting No. 1 can be recorded and Greeting
changed from the Top Menu. This is useful for
recording the Emergency Greeting.

Note
If the mailbox was created with a user
container, this setting cannot be changed.

530 PC Programming Manual

 Section 21
UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Class of Service menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 531

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Each mailbox is assigned a Class of Service (COS) that determines the set of services that are available to
its subscriber. There are 514 classes. Mailboxes can be assigned to their own or to the same COS as
needed. COS No. 513 and 514 are assigned by default to the Message Manager and to the System
Manager, respectively.
No other mailboxes can be assigned to COS No. 513 and 514.

General
Name Description Value Range Links
Class Of Specifies the Class of Service’s name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Service characters References
Name 3.2.1.11 Class of
Service (COS)
Prompt Mode Specifies the language used for system Primary, PC Programming
prompts played for the subscriber during Guidance No. 1– Manual References
Subscriber Service. If set to "Primary", 8 24.4 UM Configuration
the default language which is selected —[5-4] System
from all installed languages will be used. Parameters—
Parameters—Prompt
Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Directory If set to "Yes", the subscriber’s name and No, Yes Feature Manual
Listing extension number will be listed in the References
directory (Dialling by Name). 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name
Note
This setting is not available for COS
514 (System Manager).

532 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Tutorial The tutorial is a series of voice prompts Normal: A Feature Manual
for setting up the mailbox that is played navigation voice References
to subscribers when they first log in to menu is given for 3.2.2.31 Subscriber
their mailbox. This item specifies if each step. Tutorial
subscribers in the Class of Service hear Simplified: Only
a normal tutorial, a simplified tutorial, or direct prompts
no tutorial when they first log in to their are given for
mailbox. making each
In the tutorial, subscribers are asked to setting. For
provide: Personal
Greetings, only a
– A password
No Answer
– The mailbox owner’s name Greeting can be
– Personal Greetings (No Answer set.
Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After None: No tutorial
Hours Greeting) is played and
settings for the
mailbox must be
made manually.
Call-through Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Service Service can make outside calls by References
accessing the subscriber service menu 3.2.2.6 Call-through
(from an outside telephone) and dialling Service
an outside destination.
Remote Call Select if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Forward to Service can perform a Remote Call References
CO Forward to CO. 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
System Overview
E-mail Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Option Service can receive notifications by e- References
mail when they have a new message 3.2.1.29 Message
waiting. Waiting Notification—E-
mail Device
Fax Option Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No
Service can use the fax functions of the
Unified Messaging system, such as
sending and receiving faxes.
Desktop Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No
Messaging Service can access the contents of their
mailboxes with an e-mail application
using IMAP. This includes the Microsoft
Outlook® e-mail client plug-in.
System Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a System 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview

PC Programming Manual 533

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Yes, No Feature Manual
Manager Service have access to the Unified References
Authority Messaging system as a Message 3.1.1 Unified Messaging
Manager. System Overview

Mailbox
Name Description Value Range Links
Personal Greeting Defines the maximum length (in seconds) of 1–360 s Feature
Length (s) Personal Greetings for subscribers in the Class Manual
of Service. References
Note 3.2.2.25
Personal
This setting is not available for COS 513 Greetings
(Message Manager) and COS 514 (System
Manager).
Message Length Specifies if the length of messages left for Unlimited,
(Selection) subscribers in the Class of Service are Limited
unlimited in duration or have a specified time
limit. If set to "Unlimited", the maximum
recording time is 60 minutes, and the maximum
recording time for two-way conversations (Two-
way Record and Two-way Transfer) is unlimited.
Message Length Specifies the maximum recording time for 1–60 min
(Limited) (min) messages left to subscribers in the Class of
Service. Only specified if Mailbox is set to
"Limited".
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if a maximum limit is applied to the Unlimited,
Maximum total amount of messages (new and saved) for Limited
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Selection) Service.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies the total number of available minutes 1–600 min
Maximum for storing messages (both new and saved) for
Message Time mailboxes of subscribers in the Class of
(Limited) (min) Service. Only specified if Mailbox Capacity
Maximum Message Time (Selection) is set to
"Limited".
New Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time new messages in mailboxes of subscribers in Limited
(Selection) the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected,
new messages will remain in the mailbox until
erased by the subscriber.
New Message Defines the number of days that new messages 1–30 days
Retention Time will remain in mailboxes for subscribers in the
(Limited) (days) Class of Service. The storage period begins the
day after the message reception. Only specified
if New Message Retention Time (Selection) is
set to "Limited".

534 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Saved Message Specifies if a retention time limit is applied to Unlimited,
Retention Time saved messages in mailboxes of subscribers in Limited
(Selection) the Class of Service. If "Unlimited" is selected,
saved messages will remain in the mailbox until
erased by the subscriber.
Saved Message Defines the number of days that saved 1–30 days
Retention Time messages will remain in mailboxes for
(Limited) (days) subscribers in the Class of Service. Only
specified if Saved Message Retention Time
(Selection) is set to "Limited".
Message Retrieval Specifies the order in which messages will be LIFO:
Order retrieved for subscribers in the Class of Service Messages are
(played back for listening). retrieved
starting with
the most
recent (Last In
First Out).
FIFO:
Messages are
retrieved
starting with
the oldest
(First In First
Out).
Number of CIDs Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service None, Other
for Caller Name can assign telephone numbers for the Personal
Announcement Caller Name Announcement feature.
(Selection)
Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514 (System
Manager).
Number of CIDs Specifies the maximum number of telephone 1–30
for Caller Name numbers that subscribers in the Class of
Announcement Service can assign for the Personal Caller
(Other) Name Announcement feature. Only specified if
Number of CIDs for Caller Name
Announcement (Selection) is set to "Other".

PC Programming Manual 535

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Message Specifies when message envelopes (message Before: The
Envelope Setting date and time, name of the person who system
recorded or transferred the message, telephone announces the
number of the caller) are announced. message
envelope
before playing
the recorded
message.
After: The
system
announces the
message
envelope after
playing the
recorded
message.
Require: The
system
announces the
message
envelope when
the user
presses the
appropriate
dial key as
prompted
when listening
to the
message.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies if the system alerts mailbox None, Other
Warning subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(Selection) programmed recording time for their mailboxes
is reaching its set amount of message storage
time. If set to "None", the warning will not be
announced.
Mailbox Capacity Specifies when the system alerts mailbox 1–60 min
Warning (Other) subscribers in the Class of Service that the
(min) programmed recording time for mailboxes is
reaching its set amount of message storage
time. The setting indicates the remaining
recording time capacity threshold for when the
announcement is heard. Only specified if
Mailbox Capacity Warning (Selection) is set
to "Other".

536 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play System If set to "Yes", directions for recording a No, Yes
Prompt after message are given to the caller immediately
Personal Greeting after the personal greeting of the subscriber in
the Class of Service has been played.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514 (System
Manager).
Message Cancel If set to "Yes", the caller’s message will be No, Yes Feature
for Live Call deleted when a subscriber in the Class of Manual
Screening Service answers a call via Live Call Screening References
while the caller is leaving a message.
3.2.2.19 Live
Note Call Screening
(LCS)
This setting is not available for COS 514
(System Manager).
Delete Message If set to "Yes", the system requests confirmation No, Yes
Confirmation from subscribers in the Class of Service before
erasing a message in the mailbox. If set to "No",
the message is erased immediately.
Personal Greeting If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
for Caller ID Service can record personal greetings that are Manual
played for specific callers only (Personal References
Greeting for Caller ID).
3.2.2.25
Note Personal
Greetings
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager) and COS 514 (System
Manager).
Caller ID Callback If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can call the caller back while listening Manual
to the caller’s message (Caller ID Callback). References
3.2.2.10 Caller
ID Callback
Auto Receipt If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature
Service can request to receive confirmation Manual
when their message has been listened to by the References
message recipient.
3.2.2.1 Auto
Receipt
Autoplay New If set to "Yes", the system plays new messages No, Yes
Message automatically when subscribers in the Class of
Service log into their mailboxes.

PC Programming Manual 537

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Play New If set to "Yes", the system plays all new No, Yes
Messages messages for subscribers in the Class of
Sequentially Service sequentially without system prompts.
The subscriber’s Service Top Menu will be
heard after all of the messages are played. This
feature is only available when Autoplay New
Message is set to "Yes".
First Playback If set to "Yes", the system plays urgent No, Yes Feature
Urgent Message messages before regular messages for Manual
subscribers in the Class of Service. References
3.2.2.35
Urgent
Message
Announce If set to "Yes", the system plays the information No, Yes
Message of transferred messages to subscribers in the
Transferred Class of Service before playing the messages.
Information
Caller ID Number Specifies whether or not the system announces No, Yes
Announcement the Caller ID number when a subscriber in the
Class of Service plays a message left by a
caller, if their name has not been recorded for
the Caller Name Announcement feature. If the
name has been recorded, it will be announced
regardless of this setting.

Note
If "Caller ID Callback" is set to "Yes", Caller
ID numbers will be announced regardless of
this setting (see 21.1 UM Configuration—
[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller ID
Callback).
Announce Option If set to "Yes", the system plays the option No, Yes
Menu after Erasing menu after erasing a message for subscribers
Message in the Class of Service. If set to "No", the
system plays the next message automatically
without playing the option menu.
New Message If set to "Yes", the system announces the total No, Yes
Length length of new messages when the number of
Announcement new messages is announced for subscribers in
the Class of Service.
Two-way Specifies whether two-way recording sessions Save as Old, Feature
Recorded are saved in the mailboxes of subscribers in the Save as New Manual
Message Save Class of Service as "old" or "new" messages. References
Mode
3.2.2.34 Two-
way Record/
Two-way
Transfer

538 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Call Transfer
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Intercom Specifies the Intercom Paging group number 1-200, PC Programming
Paging available to subscribers in the Class of Service. ALL Manual References
Group 24.4 UM Configuration
Note
—[5-4] System
This setting is not available for COS 513 Parameters—
(Message Manager). Parameters—Intercom
Paging Parameters
Use Call If set to "Yes", the system signals subscribers in No, Yes
Waiting on the Class of Service when they are on a call and
Busy another call is received.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).
Caller ID If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes Feature Manual
Screen can hear the pre-recorded names of callers when References
they receive calls (Caller ID Screening). 3.2.1 System Features
—3.2.1.9 Caller ID
Note
Screening
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).
Notify of If set to "Yes", subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes
Transfer will hear "You have a call." when they answer
transferred calls.
Call Transfer If set to "Yes", the system allows calls to be No, Yes Feature Manual
to Outside transferred to a trunk via the following features: References
Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call Transfer 3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to
Service, Personal Custom Service, Call-through Outside
Service.

Note
This setting is not available for COS 513
(Message Manager).

PC Programming Manual 539

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Hospitality Mode
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Hospitality Specifies whether subscribers in the Class of No, Yes Feature Manual
Mode Service have the Hospitality Mode enabled. References
(For use with extensions for hotel rooms, etc.) 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
This setting must be set to "Yes" to enable
other Hospitality Mode settings. When this
item is set to "Yes", only the following options
are made available to subscribers:
• Listen to Messages
• Password
• Personal Greetings
• Owner Name
Password Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes PC Programming
are given a voice prompt selection to change Manual References
their password when accessing their mailbox. 20.1.1 UM Configuration—
[1-2] Mailbox Settings—
Basic Setting—Mailbox
Parameters
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
Personal Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes Feature Manual
Greeting are given a voice prompt selection to change References
their Personal Greeting when accessing their 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
mailbox. 3.2.2.25 Personal
Greetings
Note
For the Personal Greeting of subscribers
in a Class of Service with Hospitality mode
enabled, only No Answer and Busy
greetings can be set.
Owner Name Specifies if subscribers in the Class of Service No, Yes Feature Manual
are given a voice prompt selection to change References
the mailbox owner’s name when accessing 3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
their mailbox.
Erase When Specifies if the password of the subscriber in No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - the Class of Service is erased when the References
Password subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

540 PC Programming Manual

 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Erase When Specifies if the Personal Greeting of the No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - subscriber in the Class of Service is erased References
Personal when the subscriber’s extension is set to the 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Greeting "Check Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode
Erase When Specifies if the Owner Name of the subscriber No, Yes Feature Manual
Check Out - in the Class of Service is erased when the References
Owner Name subscriber’s extension is set to the "Check 2.23.1 Hospitality Features
Out" status. —SUMMARY
3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

PC Programming Manual 541

21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service

542 PC Programming Manual

 Section 22
UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk
Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Port/Trunk Service menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 543

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Service Group
The parameters of Service Groups determine how calls are handled throughout the day. Each Service
Group (therefore each port) can have a different call service for each time mode (day, night, lunch, break).
One of 6 incoming call services (Voice Mail, Automated Attendant, Interview, Custom Service, Fax, or
Transfer to Mailbox) can be assigned to each call service.
Once one or more service groups are set, you can assign the service groups to each UM port in 22.2 UM
Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment.
Select a tenant number from the drop-down list to view the settings for that tenant.
Name Description Value Range Links
Day, Night, Specifies the greeting to be heard by None, System, Feature Manual
Lunch, and callers, the System Greeting, another Other References
Break Mode - message, or no greeting. The System 3.2.1.12 Company
Company Greeting is "Good morning/Good Greeting
Greeting No. afternoon/Good evening. Welcome to
(Selection) the Unified Messaging System.". Each
call service can have its own setting.
Day, Night, Specifies the number of the greeting 1–32 Feature Manual
Lunch, and message to use when "Other" is References
Break Mode - specified for the greeting selection. 3.2.1.12 Company
Company Greeting
Greeting No.
(Other)
Day, Night, Specifies the incoming call service Voice Mail Service,
Lunch, and used to handle calls. Automated
Break Mode - Attendant Service,
Incoming Call Interview Mailbox,
Service Custom Service
Menu, Fax
Service, Transfer
to Mailbox

544 PC Programming Manual

 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Day, Night, Specifies the parameter for the type of Interview
Lunch, and Incoming Call Service specified. This Mailbox: Mailbox
Break Mode - is disabled if "Voice Mail Service" or number
Incoming Call "Automated Attendant" is selected for Custom Service
Service the Incoming Call Service. Menu: Custom
Parameter Service number
(1–200)
Fax Service:
Mailbox number
Transfer to
Mailbox: Mailbox
number

Note
Mailbox
numbers are
between 2
digits and the
value set in
Mailbox.
Day, Night, Specifies the language of system Primary, Selective, PC Programming
Lunch, and prompts used by this call service. If Guidance No. 1–8 Manual
Break Mode - set to "Primary", the default language References
Incoming Call which is selected from all installed
24.4 UM
Service Prompt languages will be used. When set to
Configuration—[5-4]
"Selective", the caller can select the
System Parameters—
language of his or her choice,
Parameters—Prompt
provided the System Administrator or
Setting—Primary
the Message Manager has recorded
Language
the Multilingual Selection Menu. To
specify a Prompt Selection Number, Feature Manual
see 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] References
System Parameters—Parameters— 3.2.1.42 System
Prompt Setting. Prompts
Note
If "Selective" is specified, you will
need to select a prompt available
for callers that cannot input DTMF
signals, such as rotary phone
callers. See "Prompt for No DTMF
Input Callers" below.

PC Programming Manual 545

22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Name Description Value Range Links

Day, Night, Specifies which language is used Primary, Guidance PC Programming
Lunch, and when a caller cannot enter any digits No. 1–8 Manual
Break Mode - to select a language after the References
Prompt for No Multilingual Selection Menu has been
24.4 UM
DTMF Input played. If set to "Primary", the default
Configuration—[5-4]
Callers language which is selected from all
System Parameters—
installed languages will be used.
Parameters—Prompt
Setting—Primary
Language
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Day, Night, Specifies whether the Unified 0–60 s
Lunch, and Messaging system answers calls on
Break Mode - the port or trunk immediately (0) or
Delayed Answer after a delay (1 s–60 s).
Time

546 PC Programming Manual

 22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk

Service—Port Assignment
You can assign a Service Group created in 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service
—Service Group to each UM port.
1. For each UM port number, select a Service Group number (1–64) from the Service Group drop-down
list.
2. Click OK when finished.

PC Programming Manual 547

22.2 UM Configuration—[3-2] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Port Assignment

548 PC Programming Manual

 Section 23
UM Configuration—[4] Service Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Service Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 549

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—

Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
A maximum of 200 Caller ID/PIN numbers can be assigned so that callers are automatically forwarded to a
pre-programmed destination. A different destination can be set for each time mode (day, night, lunch,
break). For Mode, select Caller-ID Mode or PIN Mode from the drop-down list, and then click the button
to assign a routing destination. PIN Call Routing is only available when the Call Transfer Anytime of a
Custom Service is set to "PIN".
Select a tenant number from the drop-down list to view the settings for that tenant.

Wild card input for Caller IDs/PINs

• The wild card, " ", can be used as a substitute for any numbers in the following ways.
1. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include one " ":
" " matches any number, regardless of the actual numbers of digits. For example, registering " "
by itself matches all numbers, and registering "201 " matches any number that starts with "201".
2. When Caller ID/PIN numbers include more than one " ":
Each " " matches a single digit. For example, registering " " matches any 10-
digit number, and registering "201 " matches any 10-digit number that starts with "201".

Note
• If Automatic Login or Holiday Service is used, these will take priority over Caller ID Call Routing
settings. Also note that Caller ID Call Routing takes priority over the Trunk Service and Port Service.
• Received Caller ID/PIN numbers are searched for in each service setting table in order from the first
registered number to last. When programming Caller ID/PIN routing, note the order of registration,
and remember that wild card entries should be entered after any specific routing entries.

Caller-ID Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller ID No. Specifies the Caller ID number setting so Private, Out of Area, Feature Manual
(Selection) that callers are automatically forwarded Long Distance, Other References
to a pre-programmed destination. 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Call Routing
Caller ID No. Specifies a Caller ID number (or range of 0–9, (Max. 20 Feature Manual
(Other) numbers using the wild card, " ") for digits) References
callers from a specific number or range of 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
numbers that are to be automatically Call Routing
forwarded to a pre-programmed
destination. Only specified if Caller ID
No. (Selection) is set to "Others".
Description Specifies a name and/or description of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
the Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Note
Call Routing
When no data is specified in this
parameter, the caller’s name will be
automatically entered here if the
caller’s name is received from the
telephone company.

550 PC Programming Manual

 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer for Specifies the destination to which the call None: disables this Feature Manual
Day, Night, from an assigned Caller ID number is feature. References
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination Custom Service 3.2.1.8 Caller ID
Break service can be set for each time mode. To Menu: forwards Call Routing
(Selection) disable the setting, select "None". A callers to the
Mailbox Group number can be entered specified Custom
here instead of a mailbox number. Service menu.
Extension: forwards
callers to the
specified extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the
specified mailbox.
Fax Service:
Forwards callers to
the fax service.
Call Transfer for Specifies the parameter for the type of Custom Service
Day, Night, Call Transfer Service specified. This is Menu: Custom
Lunch, and disabled if "None" is selected for the Call Service number (1–
Break service Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break 200)
(Parameter) service (Selection). Extension:
Extension number
Fax Service:
Mailbox number
Mailbox: Mailbox
number

PIN Mode
Name Description Value Range Links
PIN No. Specifies a PIN number (or range of 0–9, (Max. 20 digits) Feature
PIN numbers using the wild card, " ") Manual
for callers from a specific number or References
range of numbers that are to be
3.2.1.36 PIN Call
automatically forwarded to a pre-
Routing
programmed destination. For more
information on using " " with pin
numbers, refer to Wild card input for
Caller IDs/PINs.
Description Specifies a name and/or description of Max. 20 characters Feature
the PIN number. Manual
References
3.2.1.36 PIN Call
Routing

PC Programming Manual 551

23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Transfer for Specifies the destination to which the None: disables this Feature
Day, Night, call using an assigned PIN number is feature. Manual
Lunch, and automatically forwarded. A destination Custom Service References
Break service can be set for each time mode. To Menu: forwards callers
3.2.1.36 PIN Call
(Selection) disable the setting, select "None". A to the specified
Routing
Mailbox Group number can be entered Custom Service menu.
here instead of a mailbox number. Extension: forwards
callers to the specified
extension.
Mailbox: forwards
callers to the specified
mailbox.
Fax Service: Forwards
callers to the fax
service.
Call Transfer for Specifies the parameter for the type of Custom Service
Day, Night, Call Transfer Service specified. This is Menu: Custom Service
Lunch, and disabled if "None" is selected for the number (1–200)
Break service Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, Fax Service: Mailbox
(Parameter) and Break service (Selection). number
Mailbox: Mailbox
number

552 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—

Parameters
Select a tenant number from the drop-down list to view the settings for that tenant.

Automated Attendant
Name Description Value Range Links
Wait Time for Specifies the length of time the 0–20 s
First Digit (0-20 system waits for the caller to dial a
s) digit before assuming the caller
cannot input a DTMF signal and
therefore activates No DTMF Input
Call Coverage.
Menu Repeat Specifies the number of times the 1–5 times Feature Manual
Cycle (1-5 times) system will play the Automated References
Attendant top menu if the caller does 3.2.1.3 Automated
not make a selection. Attendant (AA)
Play Owner’s Determines whether "Transferring you Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Name during to (name)" is announced to the caller References
Transfer before transferring the caller to an 3.2.1.3 Automated
extension. Attendant (AA)
Operator Service When operator calls are made, calls Operator Service for PC Programming
are connected to the lowest- Day, Operator Manual
numbered operator that is available. Service for Night, References
To enable/disable the operator setting Operator Service for
10.2 PBX
for each time mode, check/uncheck it. Lunch, Operator
Configuration—[2-2]
Service for Break
Note System—Operator
& BGM—PBX
• The extension assigned as Operator—Day,
Operator 1 for day mode is Lunch, Break, Night
automatically designated as the
Message Manager. Because Feature Manual
the extension number assigned References
for Operator Service No. 1 in 3.2.1.35 Operator
the Day Mode is for the Service
Message Manager, you cannot
assign this extension to any
other mailbox.
• Extensions assigned as
operators can be called by
dialling [0], however, when
setting features such as
Message Waiting Notification
and Remote Call Forwarding,
the extension number (not "0")
must be specified.

PC Programming Manual 553

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies the extension number for Max. 8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator’s Operator 1, 2, and 3 for the checked References
Extension time setting. 3.2.1.35 Operator
Service
Note
• The default extension number
of Operator 1 in day mode
cannot be used with the
Message Waiting Notification
Lamp feature.
• Since the extension number
assigned as Operator Service
No. 1 for Day is automatically
designated as the Message
Manager (mailbox number
998), do not assign an
individual mailbox to this
extension number. Assigning
an individual mailbox to this
extension will result in the
following operations:
– Any messages recorded for
the extension will be sent to
the Message Manager
mailbox instead of the
extension’s assigned
mailbox.
– The Message Manager COS
(513) will be applied to call
transfers, etc., instead of the
COS of the assigned
mailbox.
– If the extension user tries to
access their mailbox using
the Automatic Login feature,
the user will access the
Message Manager mailbox
instead of the assigned
mailbox.
• If Operator Service No.1 is
selected, this item is reference
only. PBX Operator's
Extension Number in PBX
Configuration-6.Feature-6.Te
nant is displayed. Also if PBX
Operator's Extension
Number is deleted, the
operator's feature number is
displayed.

554 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies the mailbox number for 2–8 digits Feature Manual
—Operator’s Operator 1, 2, and 3. Callers to References
Mailbox Operator 1, 2, or 3 are prompted to 3.2.1.35 Operator
leave a message in this mailbox Service
depending upon how the Busy
Coverage Mode or No Answer
Coverage Mode is set.
Operator Service Specifies how to handle calls when Hold: Automatically Feature Manual
—Busy the operator is busy. places the caller on References
Coverage Mode hold and the 3.2.1.35 Operator
operator is called Service
again.
No Answer
Coverage: Offers
the option specified
by the No Answer
Coverage Mode to
the caller.
Call Waiting:
Signals the operator
when another call is
waiting using the
Call Waiting feature
of PBX.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling".

PC Programming Manual 555

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Operator Service Specifies how to handle operator calls Caller Select: PC Programming
—No Answer when they are not answered within Allows the caller to Manual
Coverage Mode the time period set in Operator leave a message or References
Service—Operator No Answer Time call another
20.1.1 UM
(10-60 s). extension. In the
Configuration—[1-2]
following cases, the
Mailbox Settings—
caller cannot call
Basic Setting—
another extension:
External MSG
1. No input to Delivery/Auto FWD/
Automated Personal Custom
Attendant. Serv
2. When the No Feature Manual
DTMF Input References
Operation
3.2.1.35 Operator
setting of a
Service
Custom Service
is set to
"Operator".
Leave Message:
Instructs the caller to
leave a message in
the operator’s
mailbox.
Disconnect
Message:
Disconnects the
caller after playing
"Thank you for
calling.".
Next Operator:
Transfers the caller
to the next operator.
Operator Service When a call to an operator is not 10–60 s Feature Manual
—Operator No answered within the time set, the References
Answer Time system will offer other options as 3.2.1.35 Operator
(10-60 s) defined by Automated Attendant. Service
Note
• This time applies to Operator 1,
2, and 3.
• If more than one operator is
assigned, we recommend
setting this value to 15 s.

556 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Hold Mode If Call Hold Mode is checked, the Enable (checked), Feature Manual
system gives callers the option of Disable (unchecked) References
either holding for a specific extension 3.2.1.3 Automated
or selecting one of several Incomplete Attendant (AA)
Call Handling Service options. While
on hold, the system periodically gives
callers the choice to either continue to
hold or select one of the Incomplete
Call Handling Service options. If Call
Hold Mode is not checked, the
system immediately offers callers the
Incomplete Call Handling Service and
callers are not put on hold.
Call Hold Mode If set to "Enable", callers on hold are Enable, Disable Feature Manual
—Call Queuing informed of their current position in References
Announcement the call hold queue. 3.2.1.3 Automated
Mode Example: "One other person is Attendant (AA)
waiting to connect."
Call Hold Mode Specifies the interval between the 1–30 s Feature Manual
—Call Retrieval voice guidance message that asks References
Announcement whether or not calls are to be 3.2.1.3 Automated
Timing (1-30 s) retrieved during call holding. Attendant (AA)
Example: "To cancel holding, press 2
now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party
again."

PC Programming Manual 557

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Alternate Specifies extensions that require a Max. 32 extensions PC Programming
Extension different transfer sequence than (max. 5 digits per Manual
normal. Calls to these extensions will extension) References
be transferred according with the
24.4 UM
setting for 24.4 UM Configuration—
Configuration—[5-4]
[5-4] System Parameters—
System Parameters
Parameters—PBX Parameters—
—Parameters—PBX
PBX Environment—Alternate
Parameters—PBX
Extension Transfer Sequence (Up
Environment—
to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D R F T X , ;]).
Alternate Extension
Click Edit and follow the steps below
Transfer Sequence
to edit an alternate extension.
(Up to 16 digits /
Adding an Alternate Extension [0-9 * # D R F T
1. Click New. X , ;])

2. Enter an extension number. Feature Manual

References
3. Click OK.
3.2.1.3 Automated
Deleting an Alternate Extension Attendant (AA)
1. Select the desired alternate
extension.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes.
Changing the order of Alternate
Extensions
Select an extension and click Move
up or Move down to change its order
in the list. Alternate extensions will be
dialled in order from top to bottom.

Note
Extension Groups and Logical
Extensions cannot be assigned.
List All Names If set to "Enable", callers can listen to Enable, Disable Feature Manual
all subscriber names and extension References
numbers in the Automated Attendant 3.2.1.3 Automated
service or Custom Service. Attendant (AA)
Operator Specifies the timing of the operator Transfer Feature Manual
Transfer Mode transfer. immediately, Do not References
transfer immediately 3.2.1.3 Automated
Attendant (AA)

558 PC Programming Manual

 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

No DTMF Input Operation

Name Description Value Range Links
No DTMF Input Call Specifies where a caller will G.D.M.: The caller is Feature Manual
Coverage for Day, be transferred when there is transferred to the General References
Night, Lunch, and no DTMF input in response to Delivery Mailbox. 3.2.1.33 No DTMF
Break (Selection) system guidance (for Operator: The caller is Input Operation
example, the caller is using a transferred to an operator.
rotary phone) for each time Mailbox: The caller is
mode. transferred to the
designated mailbox
extension.
Extension: The caller is
transferred to the
designated extension.
No DTMF Input Call Specifies the transfer 1–8 digits (for extensions) Feature Manual
Coverage for Day, destination if "Mailbox" or 2–[the value set in Mailbox] References
Night, Lunch, and "Extension" is selected for No digits (for mailboxes) 3.2.1.33 No DTMF
Break (Parameter) DTMF Input Call Coverage Input Operation
for Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break (Selection).

Name Entry
Name Description Value Range Links
Number of Specifies the number of digits (letters) that 3–4 digits Feature Manual
Digits to must be entered when using the Dial by Name References
Entry Name feature, which allows callers to connect 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
(3-4 digits) themselves with the desired party by entering Name
the first 3 or 4 letters of the party’s name.
Name Entry Specifies the length of time that the system 1–10 s Feature Manual
Time Out waits for the caller to enter the first 3 or 4 References
(1-10 s) digits (letters) of the desired party’s name. If 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
the required number of digits are not dialled Name
within this time, the previous menu will be
played again for the caller.
Key Mode Specifies the standard used for keypad text North American Feature Manual
entry. If set to use the North American Standard, References
Standard, press [7] for "Q" and [9] for "Z", If Australasian 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
set to use the Australasian Standard, press [1] Standard Name
for "Q" and "Z".
Name Specifies one of Last Name, First Name, or Last, First, Both Feature Manual
Directory Both to be used when entering the name. References
Mode 3.2.1.16 Dialling by
Name

PC Programming Manual 559

23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters

Toll Saver
Name Description Value Range Links
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s
for New Message (5-60 system answers the call when there are
s) new messages.
Delayed Answer Time Specifies the time period before the 5–60 s Feature Manual
for No New Message system answers the call when there are References
(5-60 s) no new messages. 3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

560 PC Programming Manual

 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—

Custom Service
A Custom Service allows callers to perform specific functions by pressing dial buttons on their telephones
while listening to voice guidance (Custom Service Menu). Custom Services allow callers to connect
themselves to an extension, mailbox, Mailbox Group, operator, fax machine, etc., without the assistance of
an operator. A Custom Service Menu ("Press 1 for Sales, press 2 for Service", etc.) can be recorded by the
System Manager or the Message Manager, and can be recorded in several languages if needed. The
System Manager can create a maximum of 200 Custom Services.
Common uses for Custom Services include:
– callers press a button to connect themselves with the desired destination
– callers press buttons to navigate through a series of other Custom Services before being connected with
the desired destination
– callers enter PIN numbers to connect themselves with the desired destination (PIN Call Routing)
– callers enter the first few letters of the desired parties (Dial by Name) to connect themselves with the
desired destination

Custom Service Builder

The Custom Service Builder is a utility that allows the System Administrator to create Custom Services
visually. Select a tenant number from the drop-down list to view the settings for that tenant.
Each Custom Service and its functions can be edited, arranged using a familiar drag-and-drop interface.
The following Custom Service types are available:
– Menu & Transfer
– Date Control
– Time Control
– Day Control
– Password

Creating a Custom Service

1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Click the desired Custom Service type under Custom Service Type.
3. Click on an area within the workspace to the right of the menu to place the Custom Service (it can be
moved later).
4. Double-click the Custom Service icon you placed in the grid.
5. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
6. Click OK.

Note
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, and you become unable to create new Custom Services with
the Custom Service Builder, click the browser’s Refresh button.

Editing a Custom Service

Custom Services parameters can be connected to other Custom Services. To connect a parameter to
another Custom Service, click and hold the parameter’s blue handle, drag it to the desired Custom Service,
then release the mouse button.
You can edit each Custom Service in the following ways.

PC Programming Manual 561

23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

[From the Custom Service List]

1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Enter the desired Custom Service number under Quick Search and click Edit Custom Service.
3. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
4. Click OK.
[From the Custom Service Diagram]
1. Select a custom service sheet.
2. Double-click the desired Custom Service icon in the diagram, or right-click on the desired icon and
select Edit.
3. Edit the parameters in the Custom Service parameters dialogue box.
4. Click OK.
Example: Setting "Menu & Transfer"
1. Click Menu & Transfer under Custom Service Type and drag it to the right side of the screen.
2. Drop Menu & Transfer on to a position of your choice in the Custom Service diagram. The parameters
dialogue box for the Custom Service opens.
3. Enter or select a value for each item.
For each parameter, refer to the description in the following section.
4. Click Record A Prompt For This Custom Service.
This feature is only available when setting "Menu & Transfer" or "Password". You can also skip this step,
and go to step 7.
5. Select Record from extension or Import from recorded file.
When Record from extension is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When Import from recorded file is selected:
a. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open.
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK.

562 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Menu & Transfer
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This Custom Service type guides callers to press certain buttons to connect themselves with the designated
party. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Prompt Specifies the language None, Primary, Guidance No. 1-8 PC
Mode for prompts used by this Programming
Custom Service. Manual
References
Note
22.1 UM
• This parameter Configuration—
overrides a set [3-1] UM
"Incoming Call Extension /
Service Prompt". Trunk Service—
• If "Primary" is Service Group
selected, the —Day, Night,
default language Lunch, and
which is selected Break Mode -
from all installed Incoming Call
languages will be Service Prompt
used. Feature
• If "None" is Manual
selected, the References
prompt mode of 3.2.1.15 Custom
previous process Service
will be continued,
or "Primary"
language will be
selected.
Menu Specifies the number of 1–3 times Feature
Repeat times the Custom Manual
Cycle (1-3) Service menu message References
will be repeated for the
3.2.1.15 Custom
caller.
Service

PC Programming Manual 563

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies the type of Extn: enables callers to be transferred Feature
Transfer dialling that the system directly to their intended party by dialling Manual
Anytime accepts during the the extension number. References
Custom Service in Mbx: enables callers to leave messages in
3.2.1.15 Custom
addition to the single- a mailbox by entering the mailbox number.
Service
digit Custom Service PIN: enables callers to be transferred
options. This setting directly to the specified party according to
allows callers to dial the setting for PIN Call Routing Service by
numbers to connect dialling a PIN.
themselves to an No: disables extension transfer and
extension or mailbox or mailbox transfer; only 1-digit entries will
enter a PIN. function (following the Custom Service
menu)
Note
If you only need to
allow callers to dial
single-digit Custom
Service option
numbers, set this
parameter to "No".
When set to a value
other than "No", the
system always waits
for the amount
determined by the
Wait for Second
Digit (1-5 s) setting
before handling the
call. This will cause
a delay between the
time the caller dials
a single-digit
Custom Service
option number and
when the call is
actually handled.
Wait for First Specifies the length of 0–10 s Feature
Digit (0-10 time that the system Manual
s) waits for the caller to References
dial the first digit after a
3.2.1.15 Custom
Custom Service menu
Service
is played for the caller. If
this time expires, the No
DTMF Operation
settings determines how
the call is then handled.
If this parameter is set
to "0", No DTMF Input
Operation handles the
call immediately after
the menu is played for
the caller.

564 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Wait for This parameter is only 1–5 s Feature
Second valid when Call Manual
Digit (1-5 s) Transfer Anytime is set References
to a value other than
3.2.1.15 Custom
"No". After the caller
Service
dials a digit (the first
digit) after listening to a
Custom Service menu,
the system waits for a
second digit to be
dialled. This gives the
caller time to continue
dialling a mailbox
number, extension
number, or PIN. If this
time expires without a
second digit being
entered, the system
assumes the caller has
selected a Custom
Service menu option
and handles the call
according to the digit
dialled by the caller.
No DTMF Determines how calls Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave Feature
Input are handled when messages in a specified mailbox. Manual
Operation callers do not dial any Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a References
numbers after listening specified extension.
3.2.1.15 Custom
to the menu message Operator: Connects the caller to an
Service
(most likely because operator.
they are using rotary Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a
telephones) The default specified outside telephone number. Enter
setting is "Operator", the trunk access number of the PBX then
which allows the caller the destination telephone number.
to be automatically Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt
connected to an and disconnects the caller.
operator after the menu Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the
message plays back previous menu (if there was a previous
("Press the desired menu).
number, or stay on the CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom
line to be connected to Service specified here.
an operator."). Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax
service.

PC Programming Manual 565

23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer

Name Description Value Range Links

Key – Any of the 16 Trf to Mbx: Allows the caller to leave Feature
Assigned operations listed below messages in a specified mailbox. Manual
Operation: can be assigned to the Trf to Ext: Transfers the caller to a References
0–9, *, # 0 through 9, , and # specified extension.
3.2.1.15 Custom
keys on the telephone Operator: Connects the caller to an
Service
keypad. Callers are able operator.
to access these Trf to Out: Transfers the caller to a
operations by pressing specified outside telephone number. Enter
the corresponding keys the trunk access number of the PBX then
on their telephones. the destination telephone number.
Exit: Plays the Custom Service exit prompt
and disconnects the caller.
Prev Menu: Returns the caller to the
previous menu (not available if there was
no previous menu).
CS: Transfers the caller to the Custom
Service specified here.
VM Serv: Allows the caller to access Voice
Mail Service.
Call Trf Serv: Allows the caller to access
Automated Attendant Service.
Subscriber Serv: Allows the caller to
access the Subscriber Service. The caller
needs to press the assigned key followed
by the mailbox number that he or she
wants to log in. If this option is enabled, it is
strongly recommended that each
subscriber set a password for his or her
mailbox; this will prevent unauthorised
callers from accidentally or intentionally
accessing subscribers’ mailboxes.
Dial by Name: Requests the caller to enter
the first 3 or 4 letters of a first or last name
of the person the caller wishes to reach,
then transfers the caller to the
corresponding extension.
Repeat Menu: Repeats the Custom
Service menu.
Main Menu: Returns the caller to the
Custom Service top menu.
Trf to Fax Extn: Allows the caller to send
fax messages to an extension specified as
the fax extension.
List All Names: The system will announce
the names and extensions numbers of all
subscribers (except those whose Class of
Service General parameter is set to "No").
Fax Service: Forwards callers to the fax
service.
None: No operation assigned.

566 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Date Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Example: Assigning key [1] to transfer
to extension 101
1. Click the check box next to key [1].
2. Select "Trf to Ext" in the "Assigned
Operation" column.
3. Enter "101" in the "Value" column.
Example: Cancelling the setting for key
[1]
1. Clear the check box next to key [1].
Value Trf to Mbx: 2-8 digits
Trf to Ext: 1-8 digits
Trf to Out: 1-16 digits
CS: 1-200
Fax Service: 2–[the value set in Mailbox]
digits (for mailboxes)

23.3.2 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Date Control
The below parameters are set for the Date Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 time periods. The caller makes no
selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed Max. 32 characters Feature
in this field is for Manual
reference only. References
3.2.1.15
Custom Service

PC Programming Manual 567

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Time Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
date period for From/To: Select the check box, and then References
reference, start and click the input field to select a date (month
3.2.1.15
end date, and an and day) from the calendar. You can specify
Custom Service
operation. a beginning date (From), ending date (To), or
both for each period.
Outside: Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Allows you to specify Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
an operation that is VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
enabled on all other by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to
dates not included in Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service, None
the set periods. (see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu
& Transfer—Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)

Outside:
Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial
by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu, Trf to
Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax Service, None
(see 23.3.1 UM Configuration—[4-3]
Service Settings—Custom Service—Menu
& Transfer—Key – Assigned Operation:
0–9, *, #)
Value Trf to Mbx: 2-8 digits
Trf to Ext: 1-8 digits
Trf to Out: 1-16 digits
CS: 1-200
Fax Service: 2–[the value set in Mailbox]
digits (for mailboxes)

23.3.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Time Control
The below parameters are set for the Time Control Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for up to 5 blocks of time during the day. The caller
makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in Max. 32 characters Feature
this field is for reference Manual
only. References
3.2.1.15
Custom Service

568 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Day Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Period 1–5, Period 1–5: Period 1–5: Feature
Outside Specifies the name of Name: Max. 16 characters Manual
time period for reference, From/To: Select the check box, click the References
start and end time, and an input field, and then specify a time (hour
3.2.1.15
operation. and minute). You can specify a beginning
Custom Service
time (From), ending time (To), or both for
Note each period.
When the start time is Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
specified and the end Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
time is "None", the VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
period will end at Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
"00:00". Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Outside: Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings
Allows you to specify an —Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
operation that is enabled Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)
for all other times not
included in the set time Outside:
periods. Name: Max. 16 characters
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext,
Operator, Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS,
VM Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv,
Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings
—Custom Service—Menu & Transfer—
Key – Assigned Operation: 0–9, *, #)
Value Trf to Mbx: 2-8 digits
Trf to Ext: 1-8 digits
Trf to Out: 1-16 digits
CS: 1-200
Fax Service: 2–[the value set in Mailbox]
digits (for mailboxes)

23.3.4 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Day Control
The below parameters are set for the Menu Transfer Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service allows you to assign a different operation for each day of the week, and for all holidays. The
caller makes no selection and no menu is announced.
Name Description Value Range Links
Description The information typed in this field is for Max. 32 characters Feature
reference only. Manual
References
3.2.1.15
Custom
Service

PC Programming Manual 569

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Sunday– Specifies a service for each day of the Assigned Operation: Trf to Feature
Saturday, week and for all holidays. Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Manual
Holiday Trf to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, References
Note CS, VM Serv, Call Trf Serv,
3.2.1.15
If an operation is assigned to Subscriber Serv, Dial by
Custom
"Holiday" here, either one of the Name, Repeat Menu, Main
Service
following settings is required in order Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List
to activate the operation for the All Names, Fax Service,
"Holiday" Custom Service: None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3]
a. In the Holiday Table, select
Service Settings—Custom
"Custom Service Menu" and
Service—Menu & Transfer
specify the number of this Date
—Key – Assigned
Control—"Holiday" Custom
Operation: 0–9, *, #)
Service, or the number of its
higher layered Custom Service
(see 10.5 PBX Configuration
—[2-5] System—Holiday
Table).
b. Assign the desired Date Control
—"Holiday" Custom Service or
its higher layered Custom
Service to the desired Port/
Trunk (see 22.1 UM
Configuration—[3-1] UM
Extension / Trunk Service—
Service Group).
For "Port Affected/Trunk
Affected", exclude the Port/
Trunk numbers that are
assigned to the Date Control
—"Holiday" Custom Service or
the number of its higher layered
Custom Service.
Value Trf to Mbx: 2-8 digits
Trf to Ext: 1-8 digits
Trf to Out: 1-16 digits
CS: 1-200
Fax Service: 2–[the value
set in Mailbox] digits (for
mailboxes)

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom

Service—Password
The below parameters are set for the Password Custom Service in the Custom Service Builder.
This service requires that callers enter a password, followed by "#". Each password is assigned an
operation. If a password is entered correctly, the caller is handled by the password’s pre-programmed
operation. The prompt for this service can be recorded in the CS No. dialogue box.
Custom Service prompts can be recorded only in On-line mode.

570 PC Programming Manual

 23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Description The information typed in this Max. 32 characters Feature
field is for reference only. Manual
References
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Menu Repeat Specifies the number of 1–3 times Feature
Cycle (1-3) times the Custom Service Manual
menu message will be References
repeated to the caller.
3.2.1.15 Custom
Service
Wait for First Specifies the length of time 1–10 s Feature
Digit (0-10 s) that the system waits for the Manual
caller to dial the first digit References
after a Custom Service menu
3.2.1.15 Custom
is played for the caller. If this
Service
time expires, the No DTMF
Operation setting determines
how the call is then handled.
Maximum Specifies the number of 1–10 times Feature
Number of times an invalid password is Manual
Invalid Entry entered before the operation References
(1-10) assigned for Entry Failure is
3.2.1.15 Custom
executed.
Service
No DTMF Determines how calls are Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature
Input handled when callers do not to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, Fax Manual
Operation dial any numbers in response Service (see 23.3.1 UM References
to system guidance (often Configuration—[4-3] Service
3.2.1.15 Custom
because they are rotary Settings—Custom Service—Menu
Service
telephone users). The default & Transfer—No DTMF Input
setting is "Operator", which Operation)
allows the caller to be
automatically connected to
an operator after the
message is played.
Entry Failure Determines what operation is Trf to Mbx, Trf to Ext, Operator, Trf Feature
activated when a caller to Out, Exit, Prev Menu, CS, VM Manual
enters an invalid password X Serv, Call Trf Serv, Subscriber Serv, References
times. (X= the value set for Dial by Name, Repeat Menu, Main
3.2.1.15 Custom
Maximum Number of Menu, Trf to Fax Extn, List All
Service
Invalid Entry (1-10)) Names, Fax Service (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu
& Transfer—Key – Assigned
Operation: 0–9, *, #)

PC Programming Manual 571

23.3.5 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Pass1–5, Pass1–5: Pass1–5: Feature
Cancel Specifies a password and an Password: Max. 12 digits Manual
operation for the specified Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf References
password. to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit,
3.2.1.15 Custom
Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf
Service
Cancel: Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial by
Determines the operation Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
that is activated when a caller Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
presses "#" to cancel Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
password entry. Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu
& Transfer—Key – Assigned
Operation: 0–9, *, #)

Cancel:
Assigned Operation: Trf to Mbx, Trf
to Ext, Operator, Trf to Out, Exit,
Prev Menu, CS, VM Serv, Call Trf
Serv, Subscriber Serv, Dial by
Name, Repeat Menu, Main Menu,
Trf to Fax Extn, List All Names, Fax
Service, None (see 23.3.1 UM
Configuration—[4-3] Service
Settings—Custom Service—Menu
& Transfer—Key – Assigned
Operation: 0–9, *, #)
Value Trf to Mbx: 2-8 digits
Trf to Ext: 1-8 digits
Trf to Out: 1-16 digits
CS: 1-200
Fax Service: 2–[the value set in
Mailbox] digits (for mailboxes)

572 PC Programming Manual

 Section 24
UM Configuration—[5] System Parameters

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Parameters menu of the UM
Configuration menu of the Setup screen of Web
Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 573

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—

Mailbox Group
Also called System Group Distribution Lists. Mailbox Groups allow a caller or subscriber to record a
message and have it sent to several mailboxes. Messages sent to a Mailbox Group are sent to all
subscribers in the group. The system can maintain a maximum of 40 Mailbox Groups. Each group can have
a maximum of 200 members. For Personal Group Distribution Lists, see 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2]
Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Personal Distribution List.
Follow the steps below to create or edit a Mailbox Group.

Adding Mailbox Groups

1. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for each Mailbox Group to be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Mailboxes
To edit a mailbox group, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Mailbox Group list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select a mailbox group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Adding Mailboxes to a Group

1. In the Group Members column, click the Edit button of the group to add mailboxes to.
2. In the Subscribers To Add column, select the check boxes for the mailbox numbers to add to the
group.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
5. Click OK.

Recording a Name for the Group in the Edit Mailbox Group dialogue box
1. Select the desired Mailbox Group and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that there is at least 1 member in the group and that you have
clicked Apply since adding members to the group.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file". When "Record from extension" is
selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a. Click the folder icon.

574 PC Programming Manual

 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

The Open dialogue box appears.

b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec
– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate
– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Mailbox Group number. This 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
List No. number is similar to a mailbox number and Mailbox] digits References
is used to send a message to all 3.2.2.17 Group
subscribers of the group. It must be a Distribution Lists
unique number; no other group or mailbox
can be assigned this number.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Name characters References
3.2.2.17 Group
Distribution Lists

PC Programming Manual 575

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—

Extension Group
An Extension Group is a group of extensions that share a common mailbox. Each group has an Extension
Group number. If the group number is assigned as the owner of a mailbox, then all members cannot be
assigned their own personal mailboxes.
Up to 40 Extension Groups can be created, and each group can consist of 100 extensions (members). You
can add, delete, and review the extensions. Members of an Extension Group are able to share the same
mailbox and be notified by the Message Waiting Notification feature when a message is received.
Follow the steps below to edit an Extension Group.

Adding Extension Groups

1. Click the icon.
2. Specify the Group List No. and Group Name for the Extension Group.
3. Click OK.

Editing Extension Groups

To edit Extension Group settings, select the desired Group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the Extension Group list.

Deleting Extension Groups

1. Select an Extension Group.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Editing Extension Group Members

1. In the Extension No. column, click the Click To Edit.. button to open the Group Members window.
2. Click the icon.
3. Enter the extension to add in Extension, and click OK.
4. Click OK.
The table on this screen will list any extensions that cannot be added, as well as the reason that extension
cannot be added to the group (i.e. it is already in another extension group, etc.).
Name Description Value Range Links
Group Specifies the Extension Group number. 2–8 digits Feature Manual
List No. References
Note
3.2.1.18 Extension
In order to configure an Extension Group, Group
set a group number here, then assign the
group number as the owner of a mailbox.
The Extension Group number is effectively
the extension number that is the owner of
the group’s mailbox.
Group Specifies the group name. Max. 32 Feature Manual
Name characters References
3.2.1.18 Extension
Group

576 PC Programming Manual

 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—

System Caller Name Announcement
Allows the System Administrator to store a maximum of 400 telephone numbers and record a caller name
for each telephone number. The caller name is announced when playing a message in their mailbox from
one of the pre-programmed callers, when the system transfers a call to the subscriber from one of the pre-
programmed callers (Caller ID Screening), and when the system pages the subscriber by intercom
(Intercom Paging).
Caller ID Screening feature is only available when the Call Transfer parameter of the subscriber’s Class of
Service is set to "Yes". This feature is also enabled when subscribers select "Call screening" as the Call
Transfer method (see "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status" in the Feature Manual).
The Intercom Paging feature is enabled by selecting "Intercom Paging" as the Call Transfer method (see
"3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status" and/or "3.2.2 Subscriber Features—3.2.2.18
Incomplete Call Handling Service" in the Feature Manual).
Follow the steps below to edit System Caller Name Announcements.

Adding a Caller Extension and Description

1. Specify the Caller-ID No. and Description for each entry that will be used.
2. Click OK.

Editing Caller ID Entries

To edit an entry, select the desired mailbox group, then click the icon. You can also edit specific
parameters directly from the list.

Deleting Mailboxes
1. Select an entry.
2. Click the icon.
3. Click Yes.

Recording a Name for the extension in the Caller Information dialogue box
1. Select the desired Caller ID number and click the icon.

Note
Before you can record, confirm that you have clicked Apply since you added the Caller ID No.
2. Select "Record from extension" or "Import from recorded file".
When "Record from extension" is selected:
1. Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording, then click Connect.
2. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
3. Click Record, Play, or Stop to record or play a voice label through the extension.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a. Click the folder icon.
The Open dialogue box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you want to open.
WAV files must meet the following specifications:
– G.711 PCM codec

PC Programming Manual 577

24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

– 8 kHz, 8-bit sampling rate

– Monaural
– A-law or µ-law encoding
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open to import the file.
3. Click OK.
Name Description Value Range Links
Caller-ID No. Assigns the telephone number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
which the system announces the consisting of 0–9 References
pre-recorded caller name to 3.2.1.10 Caller Name
extension users. Announcement
Description Enters a name and/or description of Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
the Caller ID number. References
3.2.1.10 Caller Name
Announcement

578 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters

—Parameters
Daily Hours Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
Tenant Number Select a tenant number from drop down 1-128
list.
Clock Format Specifies the time format (12-hour or 24- 12 H, 24 H
hour).

Note
The selected time format (12-hour or
24-hour) affects the time format of
reports as well as the time that
appears in e-mail notifications for new
messages.
Morning Hours Specifies the starting time of the morning HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Afternoon Hours Specifies the starting time of the afternoon HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting
Evening Hours Specifies the starting time of the evening HH:MM (HH: Feature Manual
Start Time greeting. Hour, MM: References
(HH:MM) Minute) 3.2.1.12 Company
Greeting

Prompt Setting
These settings are required when Multilingual Service is enabled.
Name Description Value Range Links
Primary Language Specifies the default language to Guidance No. 1–8 Feature Manual
be used when another language References
is not selected in the Multilingual 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Selection Menu. Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts

PC Programming Manual 579

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Language 1–5— Assigns a selection number (1– Language 1–5 PC Programming
Language (1–5) 9) to each language. Callers use Manual References
the numbers to select the 22.1 UM Configuration
desired languages for their —[3-1] UM Extension /
message prompts. This setting Trunk Service—
is required when either one or Service Group—Day,
both of the following parameters Night, Lunch, and
are set to "Selective": Break Mode - Prompt
a. Day, Night, Lunch, and for No DTMF Input
Break Mode - Incoming Callers
Call Service Prompt 24.4 UM Configuration
—[5-4] System
b. External MSG Delivery/
Parameters—
Auto FWD/Personal
Parameters—External
Custom Serv
Message Delivery
For each selection of this
setting, related items within Feature Manual
"Language 1–5" can be set. References
3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the language for the None, Guidance No. Feature Manual
Language current language selection 1–8 References
number. 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Language 1–5— Specifies the number to be input None, 1–9 Feature Manual
DTMF to select the language set for the References
current language selection 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
number. Service
3.2.1.42 System
Prompts
Selection Menu Specifies the length of time that 0–20 s Feature Manual
Wait Time (0-20 s) the system waits for the caller to References
select a language by pressing 3.2.1.42 System
the appropriate dial key. If this Prompts
time period expires without the
selection number being entered,
the system uses the Primary
Language.
Selection Menu Specifies the number of times 1–3 Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 the system will play the References
times) Multilingual Selection Menu. 3.2.1.32 Multilingual
Service

580 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.42 System
Incoming (0-10 s) incoming calls before playing the Prompts
prompt.
Delay Time After Specifies the length of time (in 0–10 s Feature Manual
Connected seconds) that the system waits References
Received for after the line is connected for 3.2.1.42 System
Outgoing (0-10 s) outgoing calls before playing the Prompts
prompt.
System Guidance— Specifies the parameters which Guidance No. 1–8 PC Programming
System Guidance vary depending on the language Manual References
assigned as the System 24.4 UM Configuration
Guidance language. For each —[5-4] System
selection of this setting, related Parameters—
items within "System Guidance Parameters—Prompt
1–8" can be set. Setting—Primary
Language
System Guidance— Specifies the position of the Before: the system
Select Language— "AM/PM" announcement. announces "AM/PM"
Position of "AM/PM" before the time,
in Time Stamp such as P.M. 3:42.
After: the system
announces "AM/PM"
after the time, such
as 3:42 P.M.
24-h: the system
announces the time
in 24-h format, such
as 15:42.
System Guidance— Specifies when and if "O’clock" When at :00: the
Select Language— is announced. system announces
O’clock Prompt "O’clock" only on the
hour, such "one
o’clock".
Always: the system
announces "O’clock"
always.
None: No
announcement
System Guidance— Specifies the order of the month MM:DD: Month and
Select Language— and day for date Day
Month/Day Prompt announcements. DD:MM: Day and
Month
System Guidance— Specifies the way of POUND, HASH
Select Language—# announcement for the "#"
Announcement character when "US-English" or
Mode "English (UK)" is selected as
System Guidance.

PC Programming Manual 581

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

PBX Parameters
Specifies how the system will initiate and control call transfers, setup outgoing calls, and control message
waiting lamps on extensions.
Name Description Value Range Links
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Operator Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls to D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T an operator’s F: Flash (Recall)
X , ;]) extension. R: Ringback Tone Detection
T: Dial Tone Detection
,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,#
Extension Transfer sequence for and special codes
Sequence (Up to 16 transferring calls to D: Disconnecting
digits / [0-9 * # D R F T any extension F: Flash (Recall)
X , ;]) except an R: Ringback Tone Detection
operator’s T: Dial Tone Detection
extension. ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
PBX Environment— Specifies the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, ,# Feature
Alternate Extension sequence for and special codes Manual
Transfer Sequence transferring calls to D: Disconnecting References
(Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * extensions in the F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.1
# D R F T X , ;]) Alternate R: Ringback Tone Detection
Alternate
Extension Group. T: Dial Tone Detection
Extension
,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
Group
;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
X: Extension Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code

582 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the system 10–60 s PC Programming
—Call Transfer No waits before retrieving the transferred call Manual
Answer Time (10-60 when there is no answer at the destination References
s) extension.
8.1 Users—User
Note Container—
FWD/DND—FWD
Make sure that the duration of Call No Answer Time (s)
Transfer No Answer Time is longer than
the duration of Call Forwarding No
Answer Time at the PBX. Otherwise, the
PBX may forward the call immediately to
the extension’s Intercept Routing
destination according to PBX
programming, rather than return the call
to the system.
Dialling Parameters Specifies the length of time that the system 10–90 s
—Outgoing Call No waits before concluding that there is no
Answer Time (10-90 answer at the outside number called.
s)
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for "," used in call 1–99
—Pause Time for "," sequences.
(100-9900 ms, *100
ms)
Dialling Parameters Specifies the pause time for ";" used in call 1–99
—Pause Time for ";" sequences.
(100-9900 ms, *100
ms)
Message Waiting Specifies a callback number to be displayed Max. 32 Feature Manual
Notification—System with text reports of messages waiting digits References
Callback No. (Up to notifications. The system callback number is 3.2.1.31 Message
32 digits) displayed when the caller does not enter his Waiting Notification
or her telephone number when prompted by —Telephone Device
the system.

External Message Delivery

Determines how essential External Message Delivery features are carried out.
Name Description Value Range Links
Retry Times Specifies the number of times the system 0–3 times (E/NE: Feature Manual
(times) will attempt to deliver an external message 0–4 times, NZ: References
when the destination is busy or does not 0–5 times, C: 0– 3.2.2.13 External
answer. 9 times, Taiwan/ Message Delivery
Malaysia: 0–2 Service
times)

PC Programming Manual 583

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Busy Delay Specifies the length of time (in minutes) 1–60 min Feature Manual
(min) the system waits to try to deliver an (Malaysia: 2– References
external message again when the 120 min) 3.2.2.13 External
destination is busy. Message Delivery
Service
No Answer Specifies the length of time (in minutes) 60–120 min Feature Manual
Delay (min) the system waits to try to deliver an References
external message again when the 3.2.2.13 External
destination is not answering. Message Delivery
Service
Message Specifies the maximum length (in minutes) 1–6 min Feature Manual
Length (1-6 of messages recorded for the External References
min) Delivery Message. 3.2.2.13 External
Message Delivery
Service
Max. Messages Specifies the maximum number of 1–100 Feature Manual
for Mailboxes External Delivery Messages that can be References
(1-100 msgs) stored in one mailbox. 3.2.2.13 External
Message Delivery
Service
System Specifies the maximum length of External 1–9 min Feature Manual
External Message Delivery calls. The timer begins References
Message counting when the called party answers 3.2.2.13 External
Delivery the call, and if the called party has not Message Delivery
Duration Time pressed the appropriate dial key to initiate Service
(1-9 min) message playback, the system terminates
the call when this timer expires.
Company Specifies the company’s telephone Max. 32 digits
Telephone No. number. When the recipient has failed to
(Up to 32 digits) retrieve the sender’s message because of
he or she did not enter the correct
password, the system announces the
company’s telephone number to the caller.
The caller can later call the company for
assistance or to speak to the message
sender.

Intercom Paging Parameters

Unified Messaging Intercom Paging functions in conjunction with the Intercom Paging feature of the PBX. It
allows the system to page the called party (announce the caller’s name, line number, etc.) while the caller is
placed on hold. To utilise this feature, Intercom Paging must be available for the PBX, and the Unified
Messaging system must be properly programmed.

584 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
No Answer Time Specifies the length of time (in 1–30 s Feature Manual
for Intercom Paging seconds) the system waits before References
(1-30 s) concluding Intercom Paging when 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
there is no answer. The system will
return to the caller if the paged party
does not respond before this timer
expires.
Announcement Specifies the number of times the 1–3 times Feature Manual
Repeat Cycle (1-3 system announces the page. References
times) 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
Example:
"I have a call for (name)".
Intercom Paging Specifies the number of times to 1–10 PC Programming Manual
Retry (1-10 times) retry paging when the called times References
subscriber has set Incomplete Call 20.1.1 UM Configuration—
Handling for No Answer/ [1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Setting—Mailbox Parameters
to "Page the mailbox owner by —Incomplete Call Handling
intercom paging" and the subscriber for No Answer
is busy or if there is no answer. 20.1.1 UM Configuration—
[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic
Setting—Mailbox Parameters
—Incomplete Call Handling
for Busy
Feature Manual
References
3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
Caller Recorded Determines whether or not the Disable, Feature Manual
Name Announce system announces the caller’s name Enable References
Mode during paging. (In order for the name 3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging
to be announced, it must be
recorded beforehand.)

Fax Management
You can programme the system to automatically detect incoming fax calls and forward those calls to a fax
extension. You can specify a maximum of 2 fax extensions as the destination for faxes; if the main fax
extension is not available to receive a fax, the system will forward the fax call to the alternate fax extension.
Name Description Value Range Links
Tenant Number Select a tenant number from drop 1-128
down list.

PC Programming Manual 585

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Automatic Transfer Specifies the detection and Disable, Transfer to Feature Manual
of Incoming Fax destination of incoming fax calls. Fax Extension, References
Call Receive Fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
Note
The system can detect
incoming fax signals during the
first 30 seconds after it answers
incoming calls.
Automatic Transfer Specifies the mailbox to receive the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
of Incoming Fax fax if "Receive Fax" is selected for Mailbox] digits References
Call—Mailbox Fax Management. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Number
Main Fax Extension Specifies the extension number of 1–8 digits Feature Manual
No. (1-8 digits) the main fax machine. References
3.1.3 Fax Server
Alternate Fax Specifies the extension number of 1–8 digits Feature Manual
Extension No. (1-8 the alternate fax machine. When References
digits) the main fax extension is busy or 3.1.3 Fax Server
does not answer within the time
specified under Fax Management,
the system forwards the fax call to
the alternate fax extension.
Fax No Answer Specifies the length of time (in 5–60 s Feature Manual
Time (5-60s) seconds) that the system waits for References
the main or alternate fax extension 3.1.3 Fax Server
to answer a fax call before taking
other action, such as notifying the
Fax Manager that the fax could not
be received.
Fax Manager Specifies the mailbox number of the 2–[the value set in Feature Manual
Mailbox No. Fax Manager. The system will notify Mailbox] digits References
the Fax Manager of the status of 3.1.3 Fax Server
fax calls depending upon the
settings of the Fax Management
and Fax Management parameters.

586 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax No Answer Determines what action the system No: The system will Feature Manual
Coverage Mode takes when an incoming fax call not notify the Fax References
could not be answered by the main Manager when fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
or alternate fax extension. The calls were not
system can announce to the Fax answered.
Manager the number of Mbx: The system will
unanswered fax calls. The number announce the number
announced is the number of of unanswered fax
unanswered fax calls since the last calls to the Fax
time the system notified the Fax Manager when the
Manager. This announcement is Fax Manager logs in
heard when the Fax Manager logs to his or her mailbox.
in to his or her mailbox. Ext: The system will
announce the number
of unanswered fax
calls to the Fax
Manager by calling
the Fax Manager’s
extension.
Fax Notification Determines what action the system No: The system will Feature Manual
Mode takes when an incoming fax call is not notify the Fax References
successfully received by the main Manager when fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
or alternate fax extension. The calls are answered.
system can announce to the Fax Mbx: The system will
Manager the number of received announce the number
fax calls. The number announced is of successfully
the number of received fax calls received fax calls to
since the last time the system the Fax Manager
notified the Fax Manager. when the Fax
Manager logs in to his
or her mailbox.
Ext: The system will
announce the number
of successfully
received fax calls to
the Fax Manager by
calling the Fax
Manager’s extension.
Mailbox for Fax If a DISA line detects a fax tone and Mailbox no. (2–8 Feature Manual
Receiving forwards the call to the UM group’s digits) References
floating extension number, the call 2.16.2 Automatic
is forwarded to the specified Fax Transfer
mailbox. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the system name for the Max. 25 characters Feature Manual
System Name (Up fax server. This name will appear References
to 25 characters) on the cover page of fax messages 3.1.3 Fax Server
sent by the fax server.

PC Programming Manual 587

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Properties— Specifies the system fax number for Max. 20 digits Feature Manual
System Fax the fax server. This number will References
Number (Max. 20 appear on the cover page of fax 3.1.3 Fax Server
digits) messages sent by the fax server.
Fax Properties— Specifies the number of times a fax 0–99 times Feature Manual
Number of Retries will be re-sent if initial sending fails. References
(0-99) If the fax cannot be sent within the 3.1.3 Fax Server
set number of retries, a non-
delivery notification voice message
will be sent to the target mailbox.
Fax Properties— Specifies the interval between 1–60 min Feature Manual
Retry Interval (1-60 retries when the initial sending of a References
min) fax fails. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies if a document will be re- Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Page transmitted if for any reason the fax References
Retransmission transmission is interrupted. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the starting page of a fax From First Page: The Feature Manual
Page transmission that was interrupted entire fax document is References
Retransmission— and is being re-transmitted. re-transmitted. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Retransmission From Error Page:
Start Page The fax document is
re-transmitted, starting
from the page that
was interrupted.
Fax Properties— Specifies the amount of time the 0–255 s Feature Manual
Delayed Answer system waits before going off-hook References
Time (0-255 s) when receiving a call. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the amount of time the 0–90 s Feature Manual
Response Wait system will wait for an answer when References
Interval (s) trying to send a fax. 3.1.3 Fax Server
Fax Properties— Specifies the information printed on LOG ID: The cover Feature Manual
Printed Information the cover page of sent faxes. page will include the References
time of sending, 3.1.3 Fax Server
sender information,
the sender’s fax
number (System Fax
Number), and the
number of pages.
From/To: The cover
page will include the
time of sending,
sender information,
the receiver’s name
and/or fax number,
and the number of
pages.

588 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Fax Properties— Specifies where the printed Inside: Printed Feature Manual
Printed Information information for the fax is positioned information is References
Position positioned inside the 3.1.3 Fax Server
print area of the fax
document.
Outside: Printed
information is
positioned outside of
the margins of the
print area of the fax
document.
Fax Properties— Specifies if sent faxes will have a Default Cover Page, Feature Manual
Cover Page cover page attached. If "Default No Cover Page References
Cover Page" is selected, the cover 3.1.3 Fax Server
page includes the following
information:
• Title: "FACSIMILE COVER
SHEET"
• Sending start time.
• Receiver’s name
• System name and system fax
number of sender
• Number of pages sent
Fax Properties—No When the system’s recording Transfer to Fax Feature Manual
Space for Receiving capacity is full and cannot receive Extension, No References
Coverage Mode faxes, the system can transfer Receiving 3.1.3 Fax Server
incoming faxes to a fax extension,
or not answer the incoming call (not
go off-hook).
Fax Properties— When the system is busy and Transfer to Fax Feature Manual
Fax Busy Coverage cannot receive faxes, the system Extension, No References
Mode can transfer incoming faxes to a fax Receiving 3.1.3 Fax Server
extension, or not answer the
incoming call (the extension will be
busy).

Disconnect Parameters
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Maximum Silence Specifies the length of silence detected by the system 0–60 s
Time (0-60 s) before the system disconnects the call.
Maximum Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Continuous Tone continuous tone is detected before it disconnects the
Time (0-60 s) call.
Maximum Cyclic Specifies the length of time the system waits when a 0–60 s
Tone Time (0-60 s) cyclic tone is detected before it disconnects the call.

PC Programming Manual 589

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Maximum Call Specifies the maximum duration of calls. If the system 0–60 min
Duration (0-60 min) detects no DTMF signals for the specified amount of
time, it terminates the call. Calls will not be terminated
while playing or recording messages. If this setting is set
to "0", calls will not be terminated.

Transfer to Outside
These parameters determine how the system will transfer calls to a trunk via the following features: Call
Transfer Service, Custom Service, Personal Custom Service, Caller ID Callback, Call-through Service.
Name Description Value Range Links
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9, Feature
Sequence—Call system uses to transfer calls to , # and special codes Manual
Transfer to trunks. D: Disconnecting References
Outside Sequence F: Flash (Recall)
3.2.1.7 Call
(Up to 16 digits / R: Ringback Tone Detection
Transfer to
[0-9 * # D F R T , ; T: Dial Tone Detection
Outside
N]) ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to transfer calls to , # and special codes
Transfer trunks using EFA (External D: Disconnecting
Sequence (Up to Feature Access). This setting F: Flash (Recall)
16 digits / [0-9 * # should match the settings of R: Ringback Tone Detection
D F R T , ; N A]) the PBX. T: Dial Tone Detection
,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on Access) is busy. This setting R: Ringback Tone Detection
Busy (Up to 16 should match the settings of T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D F the PBX. ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
R T , ; N A]) ;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code

590 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Outside Transfer Specifies the sequence the Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
Sequence—EFA system uses to reconnect the , # and special codes
Transfer line when the party transferred D: Disconnecting
Reconnect with EFA (External Feature F: Flash (Recall)
Sequence on No Access) does not answer. This R: Ringback Tone Detection
Answer (Up to 16 setting should match the T: Dial Tone Detection
digits / [0-9 * # D F settings of the PBX. ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
R T , ; N A]) ;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
N: Telephone Number Dialling
A: Feature Access Code
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Outside Transfer Specifies the answering Guidance: The system plays the Feature
Sequence—Call method the system uses to following guidance before Manual
Transfer to detect whether the destination connecting the line to the References
Outside Answer party has answered the destination party: "You have a
3.2.1.7 Call
Mode transferred trunk call. call. To answer the call, press [1].
Transfer to
Otherwise, press [2] and hang
Outside
up." If the destination party
presses "1", he or she will be
able to answer the transferred
trunk call. The system continues
playing this guidance for the time
specified in Dialling Parameters
—Outgoing Call No Answer
Time (10-90 s) in Dialling
Parameters/MSW Notification.
If the transferred party does not
answer the call within this time,
the system considers it as a No
Answer call.
Analyze: The system monitors
the status of the trunk,
recognises that the destination
party goes off-hook, and
connects the line.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies a trunk group for 1–128
128)—Trunk making settings for EFA
Group No. Transfer, Caller ID Callback,
and Outside Line Access
Sequence for Caller ID
Callback. Selecting different
trunk groups from this drop-
down list allows settings to be
made for each trunk group.

PC Programming Manual 591

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
128)—EFA system uses EFA (External
Transfer Feature Access) when
transferring incoming trunk
calls to another trunk. If set to
"Enable", the system transfers
incoming trunk calls to another
trunk according to "EFA
Transfer Sequence" specified
in "Transfer to Outside". If set
to "Disable", the system
transfers incoming trunks calls
to another trunk according to
Outside Transfer Sequence
—Call Transfer to Outside
Sequence (Up to 16 digits /
[0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])
specified in Transfer to
Outside.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies whether or not the Enable, Disable
128)—Caller ID system allows a subscriber to
Callback call back the party who left a
message in his or her mailbox
by using the caller ID
information sent from the PBX.
This setting applies to the
trunk number used when the
message with Caller ID
information was left in his or
her mailbox.
Trunk Group (1– Specifies the sequence of Max. 16 digits consisting of 0–9,
128)—Outside trunk access numbers for , # and special codes
Line Access Caller ID Callback. This D: Disconnecting
Sequence for parameter is available when F: Flash (Recall)
Caller ID Callback the system executes Caller ID R: Ringback Tone Detection
(Up to 16 digits / Callback without using EFA. T: Dial Tone Detection
[0-9 * # D F R ,: Dial Pause for 1 s (default)
T , ; ]) ;: Dial Pause for 3 s (default)
0–9, , #: Dial Code
Number of Digits Specifies the number of digits 1–20
in Telephone for local area telephone
Number (1-20) numbers. According to this
parameter, telephone numbers
dialled by the system can be
distinguished as either local
calls or long distance calls.

E-mail Option
E-mail Integration allows the system to send new message notification or to send recorded voice messages
or fax message data as file attachments to subscribers via e-mail. The following settings must be made in
order for the system to use E-mail Integration features.

592 PC Programming Manual

 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

Name Description Value Range Links

Mail Address (Up Specifies the mail address of the Max. 128 Feature Manual
to 128 ASCII Unified Messaging system. characters References
characters) 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Full Name (Up to Specifies the full name that will Max. 64 Feature Manual
64 ASCII appear in e-mail messages sent by characters References
characters) the Unified Messaging system. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Maximum Specifies whether voice messages Unlimited, Feature Manual
Message Length sent as e-mail attachments will have Other References
(Selection) a limit to their length. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Maximum Specifies the maximum length of 1–30 min Feature Manual
Message Length voice messages sent as e-mail References
(Other) (1-30 min) attachments. 3.2.1.29 Message Waiting
Notification—E-mail Device
Note
If you attach a voice message
that is longer than this setting,
surplus parts of the message
may be discarded when sending
the e-mail.

Message Client
Name Description Value Range Links
Password Lockup Specifies the amount of time access will be locked after 5–60 min
Time (5-60 min) a password has been incorrectly entered 3 consecutive
times.

Mailbox
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Mailbox No. Specifies the maximum allowed number of digits for a mailbox 3–8 digits
Max. Length number.
(3-8)
Note
This setting cannot be changed to a smaller value if mailboxes
exist with a number of digits greater than that smaller value.
Those mailboxes must be re-numbered or deleted before this
setting can be changed to a smaller value.

PC Programming Manual 593

24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters

594 PC Programming Manual

 Section 25
UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the H/W Settings menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 595

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

25.1 UM Configuration—[6] H/W Settings

Global Parameters
Global parameters define the settings that affect integration with other PBX operations.
Name Description Value Range Links
Maximum Time to Wait Specifies the length of time that the system waits 5–200 (× 100
for Dial Tone (500-20000 for dial tone detection. ms)
ms, *100 ms)
Delay After Dialling Specifies the length of time that the system waits 0–250 s
Before Onhook (0-250 s) for an answer when making an outside call. If no
answer is detected, the system disconnects the
call.
DTMF Cut Length (0-500 Specifies the length of time for DTMF to be 0–500 ms
ms) deleted when it is detected while recording.
Minimum Message Specifies the minimum message recording length. 0–9 s
Length (0-9 s) Messages shorter than the specified minimum
recording length are discarded from the mailbox.

596 PC Programming Manual

 Section 26
UM Configuration—[7] System Security

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the System Security menu of the UM Configuration
menu of the Setup screen of Web Maintenance
Console.

PC Programming Manual 597

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Manager
Name Description Value Range Links
Tenant Number Select a tenant number from drop 1-128
down list.
Login Failures before Specifies the number of times an 1–99 times
Disconnection (1-99 invalid password can be entered, when
times) the System Manager or Message
Manager tries to log in to the system
using a telephone, before the call is
disconnected.
System Manager Enables or disables access to the Disable, Enable
Access from Unified Messaging system from the
Telephone System Manager’s telephone.
Password for System If "Enable" is selected in System Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Manager (Up to 16 Manager Access from Telephone, References
numeric digits) assign a numerical password here for 3.1.2.6 System
the System Manager to login to the Security
system.
Password for System Specifies the password for the System 0–16 characters Feature Manual
Manager (Message Manager for accessing the Unified (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) References
Client) Messaging system from the messaging 3.1.2.6 System
client. Security
Message Manager Enables or disables access to the Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Access from system from the Message Manager’s References
Telephone telephone. 3.1.2.6 System
Security
Password for If "Enable" is selected in Message Max. 16 digits Feature Manual
Message Manager Manager Access from Telephone, References
(Up to 16 numeric assign a numerical password here for 3.1.2.6 System
digits) the Message Manager to login to the Security
system.
Password for Specifies the password for the 0–16 characters Feature Manual
Message Manager Message Manager for accessing the (A–Z, a–z, 1–9) References
(Message Client) Unified Messaging system from the 3.1.2.6 System
messaging client. Security
Automatic login Selects a mailbox to log in to during Manager
automatic login. Mailbox, User
Mailbox
Broadcast Message Selects the target to send broadcast All, Tenant
messages to.

598 PC Programming Manual

 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Subscriber
Name Description Value Range Links
Minimum Password Specifies the minimum length (number of digits) of 0–8
Length (0-8 digits) mailbox passwords.
Enable Login Failure Specifies whether the system disconnects a call Disable,
Disconnection when the subscriber enters an invalid password n Enable
times. (n=the value specified under Subscriber)

PC Programming Manual 599

26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

600 PC Programming Manual

 Section 27
Router Configuration

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Router Configuration menu of the Setup screen
of Web Maintenance Console. The following
programming items are available when a KX-NS1000 is
selected in the Site Selection menu.

PC Programming Manual 601

27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router Information

27.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1] Router

Information

27.1.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-1] Router Information

—Connection Status
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection This screen shows the connection status of the
Status built-in router function.
Connection Indicates the connection mode of the WAN Disable, Static IP, DHCPc,
Mode (reference only). PPPoE
Router Status Indicates the operation status of the router In-Service, Out-of-Service,
function (reference only). Fault
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
“Out-of-Service” is displayed.
WAN IP Indicates the IP address of the WAN (reference Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Subnet Mask Indicates the subnet mask of the LAN (reference Blank, 0–
only). 255.0-255.0-255.0–255
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode, (except 0.0.0.0 and
information will not be displayed on this screen. 255.255.255.255)
Gateway Indicates the IP address of the gateway on the Blank, 1.0.0.1–
LAN (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Preferred DNS Indicates the IP address of the primary DNS Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.
Alternative Indicates the IP address of the secondary DNS Blank, 1.0.0.1–
DNS IP (reference only). 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for Connection Mode,
information will not be displayed on this screen.

27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information

—PPPoE Status

Name Description Value Range Links

PPPoE Session Indicates the PPPoE session name (reference Max. 20 characters
Name only).

602 PC Programming Manual

 27.1.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-1-2] Router Information—PPPoE Status

Name Description Value Range Links

Status Indicates the PPPoE connection status (reference No Connect: The
only). session is not
To change the status, click the button next to the connected.
Status display (It will display Connect or Connecting: The
Disconnect depending on the current status). session is in the process
of being connected (not
Note yet connected with the
• If IP Address Configuration Mode shows server).
"-", the button will be greyed out. Connected: The
session is connected.
• If Connection Mode (refer to 27.2.1 Router Fault: A fault has
Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN— occurred (before or
Connection Settings—Connection Mode) is during connection).
PPPoE, and Session Enabled (refer to Disconnected: The
27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup— session was
[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings— disconnected by the
PPPoE—Session Enabled) is set to user.
Disable, the button will be greyed out.
• The button is available only for Installer
level and User (Administrator) level
accounts.
IP Address Indicates the IP address configuration mode - (hyphen), Dynamic IP,
Configuration (reference only). Static IP, Unnumbered
Mode
IP Address Indicates the PPPoE IP address provided by the 0.0.0.0, 1.0.0.1–
ISP (reference only). 223.255.255.254
If Connection Mode (refer to 27.2.1 Router
Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection
Settings—Connection Mode) is not PPPoE, "-" is
displayed.
Elapsed Time Indicates the time elapsed since this port acquired 00:00:00–99:59:59
the link (reference only).
Detail Indicates the number of packets sent from this 0–9999999
Information— port since the last reset or manual clear
Sent Packets (reference only).
Detail Indicates the number of packets received on this 0–9999999
Information— port since the last reset or manual clear
Received (reference only).
Packets
Detail Indicates the largest packet size permitted for 256–1500, [hyphen]
Information— network transmission (reference only).
MTU If the MTU value range for PPPoE is outside of
256–1492, "-" is displayed.
If the MTU value range for PPP/Ethernet is
outside of 256–1500, "-" is displayed.

PC Programming Manual 603

27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN

27.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2] WAN

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection

Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Mode Selects the connection mode of the Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE,
WAN. Disable

Static IP
Allows the PBX to assign a specific IP address.
If Static IP is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
WAN IP Specifies the IP address of the WAN. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Address 223.255.255.254
Subnet Specifies the subnet mask of the WAN. Blank, 0–255.0–
Mask 255.0–255.0–255
(except 0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255)
Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default Blank, 1.0.0.1–
gateway of the WAN. 223.255.255.254
Preferred Specifies the IP address of the primary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Address For details, refer to Installation Manual for Manual
KX-NS1000. References
Note 28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
• Since communication over a VPN will Address/Ports—
not be possible, do not set a Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN for
this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP
Address

604 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Address For details, refer to Installation Manual for Manual
KX-NS1000. References
Note 28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
• Since communication over a VPN will Address/Ports—
not be possible, do not set a Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN for
this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP
Address

DHCP
Allows the PBX to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server.
If DHCP is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Host Name Specifies the host name if a host name is 1–63 characters
assigned by the ISP.
Obtain Selects whether to obtain the IP address of Enable, Disable
Gateway the default gateway assigned by the DHCP
address server.
automatically
Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default Blank, 1.0.0.1–
gateway of the WAN. 223.255.255.254
DNS Setting Selects the method of specifying the IP Auto, Static
address of a DNS server.

PC Programming Manual 605

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Preferred DNS Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
IP Address server. 223.255.255.254 Programming
If the DNS server address is set manually, Manual
that value takes priority over the value set by References
DHCP.
28.1 Network
For details, refer to Installation Manual for
Service—[1] IP
KX-NS1000.
Address/Ports—
Note Basic Settings

• Since communication over a VPN will

not be possible, do not set a
destination IP address in the VPN for
this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting, the
following setting takes precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—DNS
Setting—Preferred DNS IP Address
Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
DNS IP DNS server. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Address If the DNS server address is set manually, Manual
that value takes priority over the value set by References
DHCP.
28.1 Network
For details, refer to Installation Manual for
Service—[1] IP
KX-NS1000.
Address/Ports—
Note Basic Settings

• Since communication over a VPN will

not be possible, do not set a
destination IP address in the VPN for
this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting, the
following setting takes precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—DNS
Setting—Alternative DNS IP Address

PPPoE
Allows the PBX to receive an IP address from a PPPoE server.
If PPPoE is selected for Connection Mode, this screen is displayed.
Name Description Value Range Links
PPPoE Session If requested by the ISP, enter the PPPoE Max. 20 Characters
Name session name.
Session Selects whether to initiate the PPPoE Enable, Disable
Enabled session.

606 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

User name Specifies the user name provided by the 0–64 characters
ISP.
Password Specifies the password provided by the 0–64 characters
ISP.
Service Name If requested by the ISP, enter the PPPoE 0–24 characters
service name.
Authentication Selects the authentication method. Auto, CHAP
Method Auto means that PAP, CHAP or None is
selected for the necessary authentication.
IP Address Selects the IP address configuration mode. Dynamic IP, Static
Configuration IP, Unnumbered
– Dynamic IP: Select this if the IP
Mode
address is assigned by the ISP.
– Static IP: Select this if the ISP requires
you to use a single global IP address.
– Unnumbered: Select this if the ISP
requires you to use the multiple global
IP addresses.
IP Address Specifies the IP address when IP Address Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Configuration Mode is set to Static IP or 223.255.255.254
Unnumbered.
If Static IP is selected for IP Address
Configuration Mode, enter the IP address
assigned by the DHCP server.
If Unnumbered is selected for IP Address
Configuration Mode, enter one of the
global IP addresses provided by the ISP.
Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask when IP 0–255.0–255.0–
Address Configuration Mode is set to 255.0–255 (except
Static IP or Unnumbered. 0.0.0.0 and
If Static IP is selected for IP Address 255.255.255.255)
Configuration Mode, enter the subnet
mask assigned by the DHCP server.
If Unnumbered is selected for IP Address
Configuration Mode, enter one of the
subnet mask provided by the ISP.
DNS Setting Selects the method of setting the DNS Auto, Static
address.
– Auto: Select this if the DNS IP address
is assigned by the ISP.
– Static: Select this to enter the DNS IP
address manually.

PC Programming Manual 607

27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

Preferred DNS Specifies the IP address of the primary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
IP Address DNS when DNS Setting is set to Static. 223.255.255.254 Programming
For details, refer to Installation Manual for Manual
KX-NS1000. References
Note 28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
• Since communication over a VPN Address/Ports—
will not be possible, do not set a Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN
for this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Preferred DNS IP
Address
Alternative Specifies the IP address of the secondary Blank, 1.0.0.1– PC
DNS IP DNS when DNS Setting is set to Static. 223.255.255.254 Programming
Address For details, refer to Installation Manual for Manual
KX-NS1000. References
Note 28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
• Since communication over a VPN Address/Ports—
will not be possible, do not set a Basic Settings
destination IP address in the VPN
for this setting.
• If this setting is configured at the
same time as the following setting,
the following setting takes
precedence.
28.1 Network Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—Basic Settings—
DNS Setting—Alternative DNS IP
Address
PPP Keep- Selects whether Keep-Alive is enabled or LCP ECHO: Select
Alive not. to detect PPPoE
When the server of the ISP is disconnected link failures.
for some reason, this function keeps the ICMP: Select to
PPPoE Connection alive automatically. detect network
failures.
Disable: Disables
this setting.
Advanced Click here to open the advanced setting
Setting menu for PPPoE - Advanced.

608 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings

PPPoE - Advanced
Value
Name Description Links
Range
MTU If the MTU value is assigned by the ISP, set it here (1280– 1280–
1492). 1492
If the MTU value is outside of the value range below, 1280 or
1492 is displayed.
Connection on When PPPoE for IPv6 is used to connect to the ISP, this setting Enable,
Demand is always set to Enable. Disable
Disconnect when If Enable is selected, configure the Disconnect when Idle Enable,
Idle timeout timeout—Max Idle Time (x60s) setting. Disable
If Disable is selected, Keep-Alive timer is not available.
Disconnect when Specifies a maximum idle time for which the internet connection 1–1440
Idle timeout— is maintained during inactivity. min
Max Idle Time If Disable is selected for Connection on Demand or
(x60s) Disconnect when Idle timeout, this setting is greyed out.
LCP ECHO If LCP ECHO is selected for PPP Keep-Alive, configure the
parameters below.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the LCP Echo Interval in seconds. 1–3600 s
LCP Echo This value sets the interval between LCP echo requests sent by
Interval (s) the PBX to the ISP.
If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE—
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the number of times that the PBX tries to get a 1–255
LCP Echo response to an LCP echo request before the PPPoE
Retries connection is considered inactive.
If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE—
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
LCP ECHO— Specifies the number of times that the PBX is judged to be 1–255
PPPoE Recovery recovered after the PPPoE connection has been re-
Time established.
If LCP ECHO is not selected for 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—Connection Settings—PPPoE—
PPP Keep-Alive, this item is greyed out.
TCP MSS Selects the setting method of the TCP MSS (Maximum Auto,
Segment Size) value. Fixed,
This function is only available for IPv4 packets. Disable
– Auto: MTU-40 is specified.
– Fixed: Specifies the TCP MSS Value.
If Auto is selected, MTU-40 is specified. However if MTU is
smaller than MRU, MRU-40 is specified.

Note
MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit, MRU: Maximum
Receive Unit

PC Programming Manual 609

27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network Monitor

Value
Name Description Links
Range
TCP MSS—TCP Specifies the TCP MSS—TCP MSS Value. If the TCP MSS 536–1452
MSS Value value is outside of the value range below, 536 or 1452 is
(536–1452) displayed.
If Fixed is not selected for PPPoE - Advanced, this item is
greyed out.

27.2.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-2] WAN—Network

Monitor
This screen is used to configure the network monitoring functions for the WAN.

Network Monitor (Basic)

Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Keep-Alive Specifies whether to keep the PPPoE connection Enable, Disable
Enabled alive automatically by using ICMP echo
mechanism.
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP address for ICMP echo 1.0.0.1–
Address requests. 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive
Enabled, this setting cannot be specified.
Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Network Monitor (Advanced).

Network Monitor (Advanced)

Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP Keep- Specifies whether to keep the PPPoE connection Enable, Disable
Alive Enabled alive automatically by using the ICMP echo
mechanism.
Destination IP Specifies the destination IP address for ICMP echo 1.0.0.1–
Address requests. 223.255.255.254
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.
Interval (s) Specifies the interval of the polling timer used for 1–3600 s
sending ICMP echo requests.
Fail Count Specifies the maximum count of ICMP echo failures. 1–255
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.
Recovery Count Specifies the number of ICMP echo replies received 1–255
for ICMP recovery to be detected from the fault state.
If Disable is selected for ICMP Keep-Alive Enabled,
this setting cannot be specified.

610 PC Programming Manual

 27.2.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-3] WAN—Protocol Bridge

27.2.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-3] WAN—Protocol

Bridge

Name Description Value Range Links

IPv6 Bridge Selects whether or not to enable IPv6 Pass Through. Enable, Disable
If the IPv6 function is enabled, this setting is disabled.
PPPoE Bridge Select whether or not to enable PPPoE Bridge. Enable, Disable

27.2.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-2-4] WAN—Dynamic

DNS
Name Description Value Range Links
Dynamic Selects whether to utilise a dynamic DNS service. Disable, Enable
DNS
DDNS Selects the method of specifying a DDNS server. IP address, URL
Server If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings
on this screen cannot be configured.
IP Address Specifies the DDNS Server IP Address. Blank (0.0.0.0),
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS or URL as 1.0.0.1–
DDNS Server, the settings on this screen cannot be 223.255.255.254
configured.
URL Specifies the DDNS URL. Maximum 253
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS or IP Address characters
as DDNS Server, the settings on this screen cannot be
configured.
User Name Specifies the use name for DDNS service. Maximum 64
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Password Specifies the password for DDNS service. Maximum 64
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Domain Specifies the domain name for DDNS service. Maximum 128
Name If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings characters
on this screen cannot be configured.
Update Time Specifies the update time for DDNS service. 0, 10–1440 min
If Disable is selected for Dynamic DNS, the settings
on this screen cannot be configured.
Setting "0" specifies an unlimited update time.

PC Programming Manual 611

27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN

27.3 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3] LAN

27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4

Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Setting—Host Indicates the host name 1–63 characters
Name (reference only).
LAN Setting—IP Indicates the IP address 1.0.0.1–
Address (reference only). 223.255.255.254
LAN Setting— Indicates the subnet mask 0–255.0–255.0–
Subnet Mask (reference only). 255.0–255 (except
0.0.0.0 and
255.255.255.255)
LAN Setting— Indicates the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–
Default Gateway default gateway (reference only). 223.255.255.254
LAN Setting—Local Indicates the local domain name Max. 128 characters
Domain for your network (reference only).
LAN Setting— You can click the Network PC
Network Service Service LAN Setting link to open Programming
LAN Setting the system network service Manual
settings screen for LAN. References
28.1 Network
Service—[1] IP
Address/Ports—
Basic Settings—
LAN Setting
Dynamic NAPT— Selects whether to utilise a Enable, Disable
Dynamic NAPT dynamic NAPT (Network Address
Enabled Port Translation).
Port Forward— Click here to open the advanced
Advanced Setting setting menu for port forward.
Multicast—IGMP Selects whether to use IGMP Disable, Enable
Proxy (Internet Group Management
Protocol) which your multicasting
server specifies over IPv4.
Protocol— Click here to open the advanced
Advanced Setting setting menu for protocol.

Port Forward Setting

Name Description Value Range Links
Port Specifies whether to set port forwarding for each entry. (Up to Enable, Disable
Forward 64 entries)
Protocol Selects a protocol type to be used when sending/receiving TCP, UDP,
data over the Internet. TCP&UDP, ICMP

612 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.1 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-1] LAN—IPv4

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN Port Specifies the start port for the WAN port range. 1–65535
Start If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
WAN Port Specifies the end port for the WAN port range. If this setting 1–65535
End is blank, only the port set for WAN Port Start is available for
port forwarding.
If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
• Ensure that the end range value is greater than the
start range value.
Local IP Specifies the IP address of equipment on the LAN. 1.0.0.1–
Address 223.255.255.254
LAN Port Specifies the start port for the LAN port range. 1–65535
Start If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.

PC Programming Manual 613

27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links

LAN Port Specifies the end port for the LAN port range. 1–65535
End If this setting is blank, only the port set for LAN Port Start is
available for port forwarding.
If ICMP is selected for Protocol, this item is greyed out.

Note
• If neither the start port nor the end port is set, any port
can be used.
• The user cannot reserve system ports for the WAN
side.
• If a range is set, ensure that the number of internal
ports and external ports match each other.
• Ensure that the end range value is greater than the
start range value.

Protocol Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
ICMP (WAN/LAN)—Send Selects whether to send ICMP redirect Enable,
ICMP Redirect messages. Disable
ICMP (WAN/LAN)—Allow Selects whether to enter a new IP address in Enable,
ICMP Redirect the routing table in accordance with ICMP Disable
redirect message.

27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links
DNS Server Enabled Selects whether to enable the DNS server. Enable,
Disable
DNS Port No. Indicates the DNS port number (reference only). 53
DNS Cache Timeout Specifies the DNS cache timeout which is the time-to- 0–86400 s
(s) live (TTL) value.
If Disable is selected for DNS Server Enabled, this
item is greyed out.
DNS Server— Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
Advanced Setting DNS Server.

DNS Server—Advanced—A Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to enable the DNS server. Enable,
Disable
Host Name Specifies a DNS host name. 1–254
characters

614 PC Programming Manual

 27.3.2 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-3-2] LAN—DNS Server

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Address Specifies the IPv4 IP address for the DNS host name. 1.0.0.1–
223.255.255.
254

DNS Server—Advanced—PTR(A) Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to specify the PTR(A) record. Enable,
Disable
IP Address Specifies the IPv4 IP address. 1.0.0.1–
223.255.255.
254
Host Name Specifies the DNS host name for the DNS Server. 1–254
characters

DNS Server—Advanced—CNAME Record

Name Description Value Range Links
Enabled Selects whether to specify the CNAME record. Enable,
Disable
CNAME Specifies the CNAME for the DNS host name. 1–254
characters
Host Name Specifies the DNS host name. 1–254
characters

PC Programming Manual 615

27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing

27.4 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-4] Routing

Name Description Value Range Links
Routing Selects whether to enable static routing. Enable, Disable
Destination IP Specifies the IP address of the destination Blank, 1.0.0.0–
Address host or network. 223.255.255.255
Netmask Specifies the netmask for the Destination Blank, 0–255.0–255.0–
IP Address. 255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0)
Interface or Selects the method of specifying the Gateway, PPPoE
Gateway Destination IP Address.
Gateway Address Specifies the IP address of the gateway. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
(Next Hop) If Interface or Gateway is set to PPPoE, 223.255.255.254
this item is greyed out.

616 PC Programming Manual

 27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ

27.5 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-5] DMZ

Name Description Value Range Links
DMZ Selects whether to enable the DMZ host function. Enable, Disable
DMZ Host IP Specifies the DMZ host IP address connected to 1.0.0.1–
Address (Only the same segment as the LAN port. (Except IP 223.255.255.254
Local Host address of the LAN port)
available) If Disable is selected for DMZ, this item is greyed
out.

PC Programming Manual 617

27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC Address

27.6 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-6] MAC

Address
Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Address Clone Selects whether to clone the MAC Enable, Disable
address of your PC’s network
adaptor onto this router.
MAC Address Specifies the MAC address of your 00:00:00:00:00:00– PC
(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) PC’s network adaptor. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Programming
After specifying the MAC address, Manual
you must restart the PBX. It is References
recommended to use the System
5.4 System Control
Reset command of the PBX.
—System Reset
If Disable is selected for MAC
Address Clone, this item is
greyed out.

618 PC Programming Manual

 27.7 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-7] Pass Through

27.7 Router Configuration—Setup—[1-7] Pass

Through
Name Description Value Range Links
IPSec Pass Selects whether to enable IPSec Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
IPSec Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the IPSec 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for IPSec Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.
PPTP Pass Selects whether to enable PPTP Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
PPTP Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the PPTP 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for PPTP Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.
L2TP Pass Selects whether to enable L2TP Pass Through. Enable, Disable
Through
L2TP Pass Specifies the IP address assigned from the L2TP 1.0.0.1–
Through—IP server when connected. 223.255.255.254
Address If Disable is selected for L2TP Pass Through,
this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 619

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security

27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One

Touch Security
Value
Name Description Links
Range
SPI—WAN/LAN Selects whether to enable SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection). Disable,
Port If a packet being received from the WAN/LAN sides is Enable
inspected, and judged to be a corrupt packet, it is
intercepted. By comparing the packet to static filtering
(packet filtering through header information), Internet data
can be sent more safely. A detection record is noted in the
log.
SPI—Log Output Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Enable
DoS Protection— Selects whether to enable DoS (Denial of Service) protection. Disable,
WAN Port If Enable is selected, harmful data from the WAN side is Enable
detected, and the packet is intercepted. A detection record is
noted in the log.
The following types of scans are performed:
– TCP SYN Scan
– TCP FIN Scan
– TCP RST Scan
– TCP NULL Scan
– TCP XMAS Scan
– UDP Port Scan
– IP Spoofing Scan
– Land Attack Scan
– SYN Attack Scan
– Ping of Death Scan
"Smurf Attack" denial-of-service attacks can be always
detected.
If an ICMP broadcast or multicast packet is received on the
LAN or WAN side, it will not be answered.
DoS Protection— Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Log Output Enable

620 PC Programming Manual

 27.8 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-1] One Touch Security

Value
Name Description Links
Range
Private IP Address Specifies whether to deny access to private IP addresses. Disable,
Filtering— If Enable is selected, the following types of packets can be Enable
WAN/LAN Port intercepted:
– when the source IP address from LAN to WAN is a private
address.
– when the destination IP address from WAN to LAN is a
private address.
A detection record is noted in the log.
If the IP address on the WAN side is private, this setting
cannot be configured.
Private IP Address Selects whether to output logs. Disable,
Filtering—Log Enable
Output
ICMP Echo Reply Selects whether to reply to ICMP echo requests from the Disable,
—WAN Port WAN. Enable
You can specify TCMP echo reply from the LAN settings at
28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security. A
detection record is noted in the log.
ICMP Echo Reply Selects whether to output the logs. Disable,
—Log Output Enable
NET BIOS Packet Selects whether to enable NET BIOS packet filtering. Disable,
Filtering—LAN If Enable is selected, the following types of services (and Enable
Port -> WAN Port port numbers) can be intercepted:
– microsoft-rpc (135)
– netbios-ns (137)
– netbios-dgm (138)
– netbios-ssn (139)
– microsoft-ds (445)
A detection record is noted in the log.
NET BIOS Packet Selects whether to output the logs. Disable,
Filtering—Log Enable
Output

PC Programming Manual 621

27.9 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet Filtering

27.9 Router Configuration—Firewall—[2-2] Packet

Filtering
By specifying the IP address, port and protocol parameters, it is possible to either pass or intercept IP
packets that are being received. If the parameters are set effectively they can be used as a security
measure. About other parameters, see 28.4.1.3 Network Service—[4-1-3] Other—Security—Packet
Filtering.
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN->WAN Indicates whether to accept or discard packets as the basic Accept,
Basic Policy policy from LAN to WAN (reference only). Discard
If Discard is displayed, all packets from LAN to WAN are
intercepted.
WAN->LAN Indicates whether to accept or discard packets as the basic Accept,
Basic Policy policy from WAN to LAN (reference only). Discard
If Discard is displayed, all packets from WAN to LAN are
intercepted.
Direction Indicates the direction of IPv4 packets (reference only). LAN->WAN,
WAN->LAN

622 PC Programming Manual

 27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS Settings

27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS

Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
QoS Service Selects whether to enable QoS. Enable, Disable
Auto QoS VoIP— Specifies whether to enable the automatic QoS OFF, ON
Enable setting where VoIP packets are prioritised.
Auto QoS VoIP— Selects the method of specifying the automatic Priority Queue, TOS
Priority QoS setting. (DSCP)
Queue/TOS If ON is not checked for Auto QoS VoIP—Enable,
(DSCP) this item is greyed out.
Auto QoS VoIP— Selects the kind of VoIP packets to be prioritised. VoIP (RTP Packet),
Mode If ON is not checked for Auto QoS VoIP—Enable, VoIP (Signalling),
this item is greyed out. VoIP (All)
Upstream Selects the method of specifying upstream Automatic, Fixed
Bandwidth bandwidth. Bandwidth Size
If Fixed Bandwidth Size (Kbps) is selected, (Kbps) (64–100000)
specify the bandwidth.
If Automatic is selected, this item is greyed out.
Advanced Setting Click here to open the advanced setting menu for
QoS Settings - Advanced.

QoS Settings - Advanced

Name Description Value Range Links
WAN QoS—QoS Indicates the QoS mode (Reference Only). Priority Queue
Mode
WAN QoS—Entry No. Selects the entry number. 1–32
(1-32)
WAN QoS—Priority Specifies whether to enable priority queue On, Off
Settings numbers.
WAN QoS—Priority Selects which queue number is prioritised. 0–3
Settings—Priority If Enable is not checked as WAN QoS—
Queue No. Priority Settings, this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—Protocol Selects the method of specifying protocols for ANY, Select
No. which QoS is applied. Protocol, Other ( 0 -
If ANY is selected for Protocol No., QoS is 255 )
available for all protocols.
If Select Protocol is selected for Protocol
No., specify the protocol type for Select
Protocol below.
If Other ( 0 - 255 ) is selected for Protocol
No., specify the protocol number for Other ( 0 -
255 ) below.

PC Programming Manual 623

27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN QoS—Protocol Selects the protocol name for which QoS is ICMP, TCP, UDP,
No.—Select Protocol applied. This setting is available only if Select TCP&UDP
Protocol is selected for WAN QoS—Protocol
No..
WAN QoS—Protocol Specifies the protocol number for which QoS is Blank, 0–255
No.—Other ( 0 - 255 ) applied. This setting is available only if Other
( 0 - 255 ) is selected for WAN QoS—Protocol
No..
WAN QoS—Source Selects the method of specifying a source. ANY, Address,
If ANY is selected for Source, QoS is available Subnet
for all IP addresses.
If Address is selected for Source, enter the IP
address for IP Address below.
If Subnet is selected for Source, enter the
subnet mask for Subnet Mask below.
WAN QoS—Source— Specifies the IP Address to specify a source. If Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address you did not select Address as Source, this 223.255.255.254
item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—Source— Specifies the subnet mask to specify a source. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Subnet Mask If you did not select Subnet as Source, this 255.255.255.255
item is greyed out.
WAN QoS— Selects the method of specifying a destination ANY, Address,
Destination IP address. Subnet
If ANY is selected for Destination, QoS is
available for all IP addresses.
If Address is selected for Destination, enter
the IP address for IP Address below.
If Subnet is selected for Destination, enter the
subnet mask for Subnet Mask below.
WAN QoS— Specifies the IP Address to specify a Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Destination—IP destination. If you did not select Address as 223.255.255.254
Address Destination, this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS— Specifies the subnet mask to specify a Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Destination—Subnet destination. This setting is available only if 255.255.255.255
Mask Subnet is selected for Destination.
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies whether to enable QoS by using the OFF, ON
(DSCP)—Enable DSCP value.
WAN QoS—TOS Selects the method of specifying DSCP value. ANY, TOS(DSCP)
(DSCP) Value (0-63)
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies the TOS (DSCP) value. 0–63
(DSCP)—TOS(DSCP) If TOS(DSCP) Value (0-63) is not selected for
Value (0-63) TOS (DSCP), this item is greyed out.
WAN QoS—TOS Specifies whether to enable TOS mapping. OFF, ON
Mapping—Enable

624 PC Programming Manual

 27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS Settings

Name Description Value Range Links

WAN QoS—TOS Specifies the TOS (DSCP) value. 0–63
Mapping— If above Enable is not checked, this item is
TOS(DSCP) Value greyed out.
(0-63)
Bandwidth Control— Selects whether to enable bandwidth control. OFF, ON
Enable If Enable is not selected, Priority Queue
0(kbps), Priority Queue 1(kbps), Priority
Queue 2(kbps) and Priority Queue 3(kbps)
are greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 0(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 1(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 2(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.
Bandwidth Control— Specifies the maximum bandwidth for this Blank, 64–100000
Upstream—Priority queue. Kbps
Queue 3(kbps) If you did not check Enable as Bandwidth
Control, this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 625

27.10 Router Configuration—QoS—[3-1] QoS Settings

626 PC Programming Manual

 Section 28
Network Service

This section serves as reference operating instructions

for the Network Service menu of the Setup screen of
Web Maintenance Console.

PC Programming Manual 627

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Basic Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Setting— Specifies the port number of the 68, 1024–65535
DHCP Port DHCP client. This parameter is only
Number available for entering values when
Obtain an IP address automatically
is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies whether to enable the Obtain an IP address Feature
Obtain an IP DHCP server to assign IP address automatically, Use Manual
address information automatically to the the following IP References
automatically/Use mother board, or to enter the address
5.6.5 Dynamic
the following IP information manually.
Host
address
Configuration
Protocol (DHCP)
Assignment
LAN Setting—IP Specifies the IP address of the mother 1.0.0.0–
Address board. This parameter is only 223.255.255.255
available for entering values when
Use the following IP address is
selected.
LAN Setting—MAC Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address mother board (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
LAN Setting— Specifies the network mask address 0–255.0–255.0–
Subnet Mask of the mother board. This parameter 255.0–255 (except
is only available for entering values 0.0.0.0 and
when Use the following IP address 255.255.255.255)
is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies the IP address of the default 0.0.0.0–
Default Gateway gateway for the network. This 223.255.255.255
parameter is only available for
entering values when Use the
following IP address is selected.
LAN Setting— Specifies the Local Domain for the Max. 128 characters
Local Domain network.
DNS Setting—Port Specifies the port number of the DNS 53, 1024–65535
Number server. This parameter is only
available for entering values when
Obtain DNS server address
automatically is selected.

628 PC Programming Manual

 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DNS Setting— Specifies whether to enable the Obtain DNS server Feature
Obtain DNS server DHCP server to assign DNS server address Manual
address address information automatically to automatically, Use References
automatically/Use the mother board, or to enter the the following DNS
5.6.5 Dynamic
the following DNS information manually. server address
Host
server address
Configuration
Protocol (DHCP)
Assignment
DNS Setting— Specifies the preferred IP address for 1.0.0.0– PC
Preferred DNS IP the DNS server. This parameter is 223.255.255.255 Programming
Address only available for entering values Manual
when Use the following DNS server References
address is selected.
27.2.1 Router
Note Configuration—
Setup—[1-2-1]
• Since communication over a WAN—
VPN will not be possible, do not Connection
set a destination IP address in Settings
the VPN for this setting.
• If this setting is configured at
the same time as the following
settings, this setting takes
precedence.
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—Static
IP—Preferred DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—DHCP
—Preferred DNS IP Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—
PPPoE—Preferred DNS IP
Address

PC Programming Manual 629

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DNS Setting— Specifies the alternative IP address 1.0.0.0– PC
Alternative DNS IP for the DNS server. This parameter is 223.255.255.255 Programming
Address only available for entering values Manual
when Use the following DNS server References
address is selected.
27.2.1 Router
Note Configuration—
Setup—[1-2-1]
• Since communication over a WAN—
VPN will not be possible, do not Connection
set a destination IP address in Settings
the VPN for this setting.
• If this setting is configured at
the same time as the following
settings, this setting takes
precedence.
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—Static
IP—Alternative DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—DHCP
—Alternative DNS IP
Address
– 27.2.1 Router Configuration
—Setup—[1-2-1] WAN—
Connection Settings—
PPPoE—Alternative DNS IP
Address
DSP IP Setting— Specifies whether the DHCP server Obtain DSP IP
Obtain DSP IP assigns IP address information address
address automatically to the DSP card(s), or to automatically, Use
automatically/Use enter the information manually. the following DSP IP
the following DSP address
IP address
DSP IP Setting — Specifies the IP address of the DSP 1.0.0.0–
DSP Card #1 - card. This parameter is only available 223.255.255.255
1/DSP Card #1 - for entering values when Use the
2/DSP Card #2 - following DSP IP address is
1/DSP Card #2 - selected.
2/DSP Card #3 -
1/DSP Card #3 - 2
—IP Address

630 PC Programming Manual

 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

DSP IP Setting — Indicates the MAC address of the 00:00:00:00:00:00–
DSP Card #1 - DSP card (reference only). FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
1/DSP Card #1 -
2/DSP Card #2 -
1/DSP Card #2 -
2/DSP Card #3 -
1/DSP Card #3 - 2
—MAC Address

Advanced Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
LAN Port—Speed Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
& Duplex the main port. The connection is 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
made in 100 Mbps/half duplex 1000M-Half: 1000 Mbps/half duplex
when Auto negotiation fails. (KX-NSX1000/2000 or KX-NS1000
only)
100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
LAN Port—MDI/ Specifies the cable type connected Auto, MDI, MDIX
MDIX to the LAN port.
WAN Port— Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
Speed & Duplex the WAN port. The connection is 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
made in 100 Mbps/half duplex 1000M-Half: 1000 Mbps/half duplex
when Auto negotiation fails. 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
This item is active when a 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
KX-NS1000 is selected in the Site 10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
Selection menu. 10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex
WAN Port—MDI/ Specifies the cable type connected Auto, MDI, MDIX
MDIX to the WAN port.
This item is active when a
KX-NS1000 is selected in the Site
Selection menu.
WAN Port—Uplink Specifies whether the WAN port Enable, Disable
data uplink is enabled.
This item is active when a
KX-NS1000 is selected in the Site
Selection menu.
Maintenance Port Specifies the connection mode of Auto: Automatic mode selection
—Speed & the maintenance port. The 1000M-Full: 1000 Mbps/full duplex
Duplex connection is made in 100 Mbps/ 1000M-Half: 1000 Mbps/half duplex
half duplex when Auto negotiation 100M-Full: 100 Mbps/full duplex
fails. This setting is available at 100M-Half: 100 Mbps/half duplex
Installer level only. 10M-Full: 10 Mbps/full duplex
10M-Half: 10 Mbps/half duplex

PC Programming Manual 631

28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Mirroring— Specifies the types of packets used Disable
Packet kind for for port mirroring. This setting is LAN (All packets)
mirroring available at Installer level only. LAN (Data packets PBX)
LAN (Voice packets)
WAN (All packets)
WAN/LAN (All packets)

Reference
The items displayed in this tab are the settings obtained from a DHCP server by the DHCP client of the
PBX. They are for reference only.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
Assigned IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned IP address of the
mother board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the
mother board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of
the mother board (reference only).
Assigned IP Address—Default Gateway Indicates the assigned IP address of the
default gateway for the network
(reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—IP Address Indicates the assigned WAN IP address
of the mother board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the
mother board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—Subnet Mask Indicates the network mask address of
the mother board (reference only).
Assigned WAN IP Address—Default Indicates the assigned WAN IP address
Gateway of the default gateway for the network
(reference only).
Assigned DNS Server Address—Preferred Indicates the assigned IP address for
DNS IP Address the preferred DNS server (reference
only).
Assigned DNS Server Address—Alternative Indicates the assigned IP address for
DNS IP Address the alternative DNS server (reference
only).
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the IP address assigned for
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2/DSP Card #3 - an installed optional DSP card
1/DSP Card #3 - 2—IP Address (reference only).
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the MAC address of the DSP
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2/DSP Card #3 - card (reference only).
1/DSP Card #3 - 2—MAC Address
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the Subnet Mask address of
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2/DSP Card #3 - the DSP card (reference only).
1/DSP Card #3 - 2—Subnet Mask

632 PC Programming Manual

 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports

Value
Name Description Links
Range
DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP Card #1 - 2/DSP Indicates the Default Gateway address
Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2/DSP Card #3 - of the DSP card (reference only).
1/DSP Card #3 - 2—Default Gateway

PC Programming Manual 633

28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

28.2 Network Service—[2] Server Feature

28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP(LAN)
Settings for the DHCP Server can be programmed.

Basic Settings
The following DHCP settings can be selected:
• DHCP Server
• DHCP Relay Agent: it can be selected when the site is KX-NS1000.
• Disable
Name Description Value Range Links
Port number Specifies the port number used for the DHCP 67, 1024–65535
server.
Server IP Specifies the IP address for the DHCP server for 1.0.0.1–
address for DHCP Relay. This setting is only available when 255.255.255.255
Relay DHCP Relay Agent is checked.

IP address auto assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
Starting IP address Specifies the starting IP address for the 1.0.0.1–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.254
Ending IP address Specifies the ending IP address for the 1.0.0.1–
assignable range of IP addresses. 223.255.255.254
Lease interval (h) Specifies the duration in hours of the DHCP 1–168 (hours)
allocation lease. Setting "0" specifies an
unlimited lease duration.
Auto assignment Up to 96 IP Addresses can be specified that will 1.0.0.1–
exclusions not be automatically assigned. 223.255.255.254

IP Address Static Assignment

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Specifies the MAC addresses of the MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00–
Address address/IP address pairs to be subject to static FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
DHCP allocation.
IP Address Specifies the IP addresses of the MAC address/IP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
address pairs to be subject to static DHCP
allocation.

IP Address Assignment List

Name Description Value Range Links
MAC Address Specifies MAC addresses currently 00:00:00:00:00:00–
specified by the system. FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF

634 PC Programming Manual

 28.2.2 Network Service—[2-3] Server Feature—FTP

Name Description Value Range Links

IP Address Specifies IP addresses currently assigned 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
by the system.
Remaining lease Specifies the remaining lease time for the 1–85777 s
time MAC address/IP address pair.

28.2.2 Network Service—[2-3] Server Feature—FTP

Settings for FTP server connections can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Control Specifies the port number for connecting 21, 990, 1024–65535
—Control Port to the PBX’s FTP server.
number
Data Transfer Port— Specifies the minimum port number for 1024–65535
Port number FTP data transfer.
(Minimum)
Data Transfer Port— Specifies the maximum port number for 1024–65535
Port number FTP data transfer.
(Maximum)
User Information Specifies the user name for the PBX’s Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–
#1/#2—User Name FTP server authentication. 9, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note Note
Be sure to change the user name The first character must
from its initial, default value. Also, for be a letter (a–z).
security reasons, change the user
name regularly.
User Information Specifies the password for the PBX’s Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–
#1/#2—Password FTP server authentication. z, 0–9, [hyphen],
[underscore])
Note
Be sure to change the password from Note
its initial, default value. Also, for The first character must
security reasons, change the be a letter or number.
password regularly.

28.2.3 Network Service—[2-5] Server Feature—HTTP

HTTP server settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
HTTP (LAN / Specifies the port number for HTTP connections using 80, 1024–
MNT)—Port the LAN or MNT ports. This port is used for accessing the 65535
number PBX for Web Maintenance Console programming.
HTTPs (LAN / Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the LAN or Disable,
MNT)—HTTPs MNT ports using the PBX’s HTTP server function. Enable
server

PC Programming Manual 635

28.2.4 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—NTP

Name Description Value Range Links

HTTPs (LAN / Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections. This 443, 1024–
MNT)—Port port is used for accessing the PBX for Web Maintenance 65535
number Console programming when using a TLS connection.
HTTPs (WAN)— Enables or disables HTTPs for connections to the WAN Disable,
HTTPs server port using the PBX’s HTTP server function. Enable
This item is active when a KX-NS1000 is selected in the
Site Selection menu.
HTTPs (WAN)— Specifies the port number for HTTPs connections to the 443, 1024–
Port number WAN port using the PBX’s HTTP server function. 65535
This item is active when a KX-NS1000 is selected in the
Site Selection menu.
HTTPs (WAN)— Specifies how HTTPs (WAN) is disabled. Automatic
Port Close Control If you enabled the HTTPs (WAN) port and select (24H), Manual
Automatic (24H), it will be disabled automatically after
24 hours for security purposes.
This item is active when a KX-NS1000 is selected in the
Site Selection menu.
Automatic logout Specifies the amount of time required to elapse before 5, 10, 30, 60×n
Timer (min) logging off an inactive connection from the HTTP server. (n=1–24)
(minutes)

28.2.4 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—NTP

NTP server settings for use with KX-UT series SIP phones can be programmed.
Value
Name Description Links
Range
NTP Enables or disables NTP service with Disable, PC Programming Manual
server the PBX’s NTP server for connected Enable References
KX-UT series SIP phones. 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
When this feature is enabled, the PBX System—Date & Time—SNTP /
will report to connected KX-UT series Daylight Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server
SIP phones the information obtained —IP Address
from the SNTP server specified in 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP /
System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—SNTP—SNTP Server
Daylight Saving. —Port Number
If this feature is disabled, connected 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2]
KX-UT series SIP phones will use their System—Date & Time—SNTP /
individually programmed time settings. Daylight Saving—Time Zone—Time
Zone

28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP

Settings for SMTP for sending e-mail for PBX functions can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Mail sending—Mail sender Specifies the name to be used as the Max. 64 characters
information name sender of the e-mails from the PBX.

636 PC Programming Manual

 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP

Name Description Value Range Links

Mail sending—Mail address Specifies the sending e-mail address Max. 128 characters
for messages sent from the PBX. This
address, for example, could be set as
the e-mail address of an administrator.
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the IP address of the SMTP 1.0.0.0–
SMTP server address—IP server to be used to send e-mails. 223.255.255.255
Address
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the host name of the SMTP Max. 128 characters
SMTP server address— server to be used to send e-mails.
Name
SMTP server for relay— Specifies the port number of the SMTP 25, 465, 587, 1024–
SMTP server Port number server to be used to send e-mails. 65535
SMTP server for relay— Specifies whether the SMTP server Enable, Disable
SMTP over TLS uses Transport Layer Security.
Note
When Enable is
selected, the
encryption method
used is STARTTLS.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies whether authentication on Enable, Disable
SMTP Authentication the SMTP server is enabled.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the user name required to Max. 64 characters
User Name access the SMTP server.
SMTP Authentication— Specifies the password required to Max. 64 characters
Password access the SMTP server.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies whether POP before SMTP Enable, Disable
before SMTP is enabled on the SMTP server.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the IP address of the POP 1.0.0.0–
server address—IP server when POP before SMTP is 223.255.255.255
Address enabled.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the host name of the POP Max. 128 characters
server address—Name server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
POP Before SMTP—POP Specifies the port number of the POP 110, 1024–65535
server Port number server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
POP Before SMTP—User Specifies the user name for the POP Max. 64 characters
Name server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
POP Before SMTP— Specifies the password for the POP Max. 64 characters
Password server when POP before SMTP is
enabled.
Mail Receiving—SMTP Specifies if SMTP authentication is Enable, Disable
Authentication enabled for mail receiving.

PC Programming Manual 637

28.2.6 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—IMAP4

Name Description Value Range Links

Mail Receiving—SMTP Specifies whether mail receiving uses Enable, Disable
over TLS Transport Layer Security for SMTP.
Mail Receiving—Receive Specifies the receiving port number 25, 465, 587, 1024–
Port number (SMTPs) when using SMTPs. 65535
Mail Receiving—Receive Specifies the receiving port number 25, 465, 587, 1024–
Port number (SMTP) when using SMTP. 65535

28.2.6 Network Service—[2-8] Server Feature—IMAP4

Settings for IMAP4 server functions for the PBX can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
IMAP4—IMAP4 server Specifies whether to enable the IMAP4 server Enable, Disable
functions of the PBX.
IMAP4—Port number Specifies a port number for the IMAP server. 143, 1024–
The default value is 143. 65535
IMAP4 over TLS—IMAP4 Specifies whether to enable TLS encryption for Enable, Disable
over TLS the IMAP4 server functions of the PBX.
IMAP4 over TLS—Port Specifies a port number for the IMAP server 993, 1024–
number when using TLS encryption. The default value 65535
is 993.
CAPABILITY command— Specifies whether the IMAP4 server will Enable, Disable
Supporting IDLE response respond to IDLE commands sent by clients.
Authenticated Connection Specifies the amount of time of no activity that 1, 2, 3, 5, 10,
Timeout—Authenticated is required before an authenticated connection 15, 20, 25, 30,
Connection Timeout (min) to the IMAP4 server will be disconnected. 60 (min)

28.2.7 Network Service—[2-9] Server Feature—TELNET

Settings for TELNET server functions for the PBX can be programmed. This option is available for the
Installer level account.
Name Description Value Range Links
TELNET Specifies whether to enable the TELNET server Enable, Disable
Server functions of the PBX.
However, only when the selected site is
Expansion Gateway (Site 2 or later) and the
model is KX-NS1000/KX-NS1000xxG, the setting
can be changed to Enable.
Port number Specifies a port number for the TELNET server. 23, 1024–65535
User name Specifies a user name for the TELNET server to Max. 24 characters (a–z,
log in. 0–9, $, [hyphen],
[underscore])
Password Specifies a password for the TELNET server to Max. 24 characters (a–z,
log in. 0–9, $, [hyphen],
[underscore])

638 PC Programming Manual

 28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

28.3 Network Service—[3] Client Feature

28.3.1 Network Service—[3-1] Client Feature—FTP
FTP client connection settings can be programmed. Up to 5 FTP sites can be specified for connections.

Connection 1—Connection 5
Name Description Value Range Links
Connection Specifies the name of the connection to Max. 64 characters
Name use for programming in other items.
IP Address Specifies the IP address of the FTP 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255
site. Click the IP Address radio button
when this is used.
Name Specifies the name of the FTP site. FTP site name (max. 253
Click the Name radio button when this characters)
is used.
Server Port Specifies the port number used to 21, 990, 1024–65535
Number connect to the FTP site.
User name Specifies the user name required to log Max. 24 characters (a–z, 0–9, $,
in to the FTP site. [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
• The first character must be a
letter or number.
• $ may only be used as the
final character.
Password Specifies the password for the user Max. 24 characters (A–Z, a–z, 0–9,
name required to log in to the FTP site. =, [hyphen], [underscore])

Note
The first character must be a
letter, number, or =.
Protocol Specifies the communication protocol FTP, FTPS (Explicit), FTPS (Implicit)
for the FTP connection.

28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—SYSLOG

Settings can be programmed for a Syslog client connection.
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Syslog Specifies whether an external Syslog Enable, Disable
server will be used with the PBX.
Remote Syslog Specifies the IP address or host name of 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 (IP
server—IP the external Syslog server. address), Max. 253 characters
address / Host (host name)
name

PC Programming Manual 639

28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Name Description Value Range Links

Port Specifies the connection port for the 514, 1024–65535
remote Syslog server.

28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP
manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general
system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
SNMP agent Enables the PBX to use its Disable, Enable Feature Manual References
SNMP agent function. 5.6.4 Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor
SNMP version Specifies the version of the SNMP V1, Feature Manual References
SNMP protocol to use. SNMP V2c, 5.6.4 Simple Network
SNMP V3 Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor
SNMP manager Specifies the SNMP 161, 1024– Feature Manual References
port manager port. 65535 5.6.4 Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the name and Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysContact contact information of the characters 5.6.4 Simple Network
system administrator. Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the administrative Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysName name for the system. characters 5.6.4 Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor
MIB info— Specifies the physical Max. 255 Feature Manual References
SysLocation location for the system. characters 5.6.4 Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
System Monitor

SNMPv3 Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
User Name Specifies the user name for SNMPv3 Max. 32 characters
certification.
Security Level Select a security level. noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv,
authPriv
Authentication Method Select an authentication method for MD5, SHA
SNMPv3 certification.

640 PC Programming Manual

 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Name Description Value Range Links

Authentication Specifies the authentication password. Blank, 8–64 characters
Password
Authentication Re-Enter the authentication password Blank, 8–64 characters
Password (Confirm) to confirm.
Encryption Method Displays an encryption method for AES
communication between manager and
agent.
Encryption Password Specifies the encryption password. Blank, 8–64 characters
Encryption Password Re-Enter the encryption password to Blank, 8–64 characters
(Confirm) confirm.

SNMP Manager #1/SNMP Manager #2

It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity
can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Name Description Value Range Links
IP address Specifies the IP address of 1.0.0.0– Feature Manual
an SNMP manager. Click 223.255.255.255 References
the button next to IP 5.6.4 Simple Network
Address and enter the Management Protocol
address. (SNMP) System Monitor
Host name Specifies the host name of Max. 253 Feature Manual
an SNMP manager. Click characters (host References
the button next to Host name) 5.6.4 Simple Network
Name and enter a name. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Trap port Specifies a port number 162, 1024–65535 Feature Manual
used to send trap messages References
from the agent to an SNMP 5.6.4 Simple Network
manager. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
Community name Specifies a community name Max. 32 characters Feature Manual
of an SNMP manager. References
5.6.4 Simple Network
Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
Standard TRAP sends standard trap References
messages to an SNMP 5.6.4 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor

PC Programming Manual 641

28.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—Directory Service

Name Description Value Range Links

TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Major Alarm trap References
(Major) messages to an SNMP 5.6.4 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor
TRAP filtering— Selects whether the PBX Disable, Enable Feature Manual
enterpriseSpecific sends Minor Alarm trap References
(Minor) messages to an SNMP 5.6.4 Simple Network
manager or not. Management Protocol
(SNMP) System Monitor

28.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—Directory Service

28.3.4.1 Network Service—[3-4-1] Client Feature—Directory Service
—Server Setting
Settings for an Active Directory® (LDAP) connection can be programmed.
To perform a connection test for the Active Directory (LDAP) server, click Test Connection.
Name Description Value Range Links
LDAP Server—LDAP Select an LDAP server address type from the IP Address, Name
Server address radio buttons.
LDAP Server—LDAP Specifies the IP address of the LDAP Server. 1.0.0.0–
Server address—IP 223.255.255.255
address
LDAP Server—LDAP Specifies the host name of the LDAP server. Max. 128 characters
Server address—
Name
LDAP Server—LDAP Specifies the port number used to connect to 1–65535
server Port number the LDAP server.
LDAP Server—User ID Specifies the user ID of the LDAP server. Max. 256 characters
LDAP Server— Specifies the password for the specified user Max. 64 characters
Password ID.
LDAP server Port Specifies the port number used to connect to 1–65535
number (SSL/TLS) the LDAP server for an SSL/TLS connection.
SSL/TLS availability Specifies the availability of SSL/TLS for the Disable, LDAP over
for LDAP connection LDAP connection. SSL, StartTLS
Verify Certification Specifies whether to use Verify Certification. Disable, Enable
File for Root Import the file for Root Certification.
Certification
1. Click Browse… to open the file dialogue.
2. Select the file for Root Certification.
3. Click Import to Import the file.

642 PC Programming Manual

 28.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—Directory Service

Name Description Value Range Links

File for Client Import the file for Client Certification.
Certification
1. Click Browse… to open the file dialogue.
2. Select the file for Client Certification.
3. Click Import to import the file.
File for Client Private Import the file for Client Private Key.
Key
1. Click Browse… to open the file dialogue.
2. Select the file for Client Private Key.
3. Click Import to import the file.
Password for Client Specifies the password for Client Private Key. 0, 4–64 characters
Private Key

28.3.4.2 Network Service—[3-4-2] Client Feature—Directory Service

—External Directory
Name Description Value Range Links
Base DN Specifies which Base DN to use, System, Tenant
System or Tenant.
Base DN—System Specifies the Base DN for system. Max. 256
characters
Search Timer (s) Specifies the search timer (seconds). 1–256
External Directory Service— Specifies whether to enable Service Enabled, Disable
Service Availability Availability for External Directory
Service.
External Directory Service— Specifies the name attribute for search Max. 256
Name Attribute for search for an External Directory service. characters
External Directory Service— Specifies the name filter for an External Max. 256
Name Filter Directory service. characters
External Directory Service— Specifies the maximum number of 1-200
Maximum number of search search results.
result
External Directory Service— Specifies the Maximum Number Max. 256
Number Attributes1, 2, 3 Attributes for External Directory characters
Service.
External Directory Service— Specifies whether to enable Automatic Enabled, Disable
Automatic Adoption of Line Adoption of Line Access Code for
Access Code External Directory Service.
Name Search by CLI for Specifies whether to enable Service Enabled, Disable
Incoming Call—Service Availability for Name Search by CLI for
Availability Incoming Call.

PC Programming Manual 643

28.3.4 Network Service—[3-4] Client Feature—Directory Service

Name Description Value Range Links

Name Search by CLI for Specifies the Name for Search by CLI Max. 256
Incoming Call—Name Attribute for Incoming Call. characters
for search
Name Search by CLI for Specifies the Number Filter Name for Max. 256
Incoming Call—Number Filter Search by CLI for Incoming Call. characters
Name Search by CLI for Specifies the Name Attribute for Search Max. 256
Incoming Call—Name Attribute by CLI for Incoming Call. characters
(Same as "Name Attribute for
search")

Base DN Setting for Tenant

Name Description Value Range Links
Base DN Specifies the Base Max. 256 characters
DN for Tenant.

28.3.4.3 Network Service—[3-4-3] Client Feature—Directory Service

—User Container Sync
Search Setting
Name Description Value Range Links
User Container Specifies whether enable Enable (use "mail" for Feature
Synchronisation User Container Sync with Microsoft® Active Manual
LDAP Server. Directory®), Enable (use References
"uid" for OpenLDAP™),
2.29.1.6 Linking
Disable
with LDAP User
Information
Base DN Specifies the Base DN. Max. 256 characters
Name Attributes Specifies the name Max. 256 characters
attributes.
Name Filter Specifies the name filter. Max. 256 characters
Search Timer (s) Specifies the search timer 1–256
(seconds).

Datasource Mapping
Name Description Value Range Links
External Specifies the settings for the user container to Disable, CN, givenName,
Datasource link LDAP attribute. homePhone, mobile, mail,
If "Other" is selected, enter the settings directly company, Other
(MAX. 256 characters).

644 PC Programming Manual

 28.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—HTTP

Sync Control
Name Description Value Range Links
Sync Control Specifies whether Enabled, Disable
enable User Container
Sync schedule.
If it is enabled, you can
specify scheduled sync
settings of three
patterns (Daily/Weekly/
Monthly).

Daily
Name Description Value Range Links
HH Specifies the hour. 0–23
MM Specifies the minute. 0–59

Weekly
Name Description Value Range Links
days of the week Specifies the day of the week. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
Friday, Saturday, Sunday
HH Specifies the hour. 0–23
MM Specifies the minute. 0–59

Monthly
Name Description Value Range Links
Day Of month: XX Day Specifies the day of 1–31
month.
HH Specifies the hour. 0–23
MM Specifies the minute. 0–59

28.3.5 Network Service—[3-5] Client Feature—HTTP

Description
Proxy server settings for the HTTP client can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Proxy Connection Selects whether to enable a connection proxy Disable, Enable
server.
Proxy Address Selects the type of proxy address. IP Address, Name
Proxy Address—IP Specifies the IP address of the proxy server. Valid IP Address
Address
Proxy Address —Name Specifies the host name of the proxy server. Valid host name
Port number Specifies the port number for the proxy 1–65535
connection.

PC Programming Manual 645

28.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

Authentication Selects whether to enable authentication to Disable, Enable
the proxy server.
Authentication User Specifies the user name for authentication for Max. 64 characters
name the proxy connection.
Authentication Specifies the password for authentication for Max. 64 characters
Password the proxy connection.

28.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—Remote

Maintenance
Name Description Value Range Links
Remote Displays the connection status with the No Connect: In Standby mode
Maintenance Server remote maintenance server. Connecting (try N times)*1:
Connection Status Attempting connection (N
times).
Connected: Connection is
normal.
Failed (Authentication Error):
Connection authentication
failed in client certificate
authentication system.
Failed (Password Error):
Connection authentication
failed in password
authentication system.
Failed (Proxy Error): Proxy
server connection failed.
Disconnected: Connection is
stopped.
Unexpected Error: Other,
unexpected error.
Update Client Install a client certificate file for client
Certification—File certification.
for Client 1. Click Browse… to open the file
Certification dialogue.
2. Select a client certificate file.
3. Click Import to import the file.
Update Client Click Export to create a CSR file for
Certification—CSR client certification.
file for Client
Certification
Remote Access Displays whether permission for Selected: Accepted
Acceptance— remote access is granted for the Not selected: Not Accepted
INSTALLER INSTALLER account.
(Displays the Remote Access
Acceptance setting displayed on the
Home screen when logging in at the
Administrator level.)

646 PC Programming Manual

 28.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance

Name Description Value Range Links

Remote Access Displays whether permission for Selected: Accepted
Acceptance— remote access is granted to Panasonic Not selected: Not Accepted
Panasonic Support Support.
(Displays the Remote Access
Acceptance setting displayed on the
Home screen when logging in at the
Administrator level.)

*1 "(try N times)" is displayed only from the second attempted connection.

PC Programming Manual 647

28.4 Network Service—[4] Other

28.4 Network Service—[4] Other

28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security
Network security settings can be programmed.

28.4.1.1 Network Service—[4-1-1] Other—Security—Encryption

Name Description Value Range Links
TLS—Encryption Specifies the method of AES256-SHA, AES128-SHA, DES-
Suite encryption used for TLS. CBC3-SHA, DES-CBC-SHA, AES256-
SHA2, AES128-SHA2

28.4.1.2 Network Service—[4-1-2] Other—Security—Protection

Value
Name Description Links
Range
ICMP—Echo Request Specifies whether to log echo requests. Enable,
Log Disable
ICMP—Echo Reply Specifies whether enable Echo Reply. Enable,
Disable
ICMP—Send Port Specifies whether to enable sending ICMP port Enable,
Unreachable unreachable. Disable
If the selected site is an expansion gateway
(KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000), this
setting is not displayed.
ICMP—Allow ICMP Specifies whether to allow ICMP redirect. Enable,
Redirect If the selected site is an expansion gateway Disable
(KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000), this
setting is not displayed.
SPI—Inspection Specifies whether to enable inspection over SPI. Enable,
If the selected site is an expansion gateway Disable
(KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000), this
setting is not displayed.
SYN Flood Protection Specifies whether to use SYN cookies. Enable,
—SYN Cookie If the selected site is an expansion gateway Disable
(KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000), this
setting is not displayed.
Option—IP Source Specifies whether to enable IP source routing. Enable,
Routing If the selected site is an expansion gateway Disable
(KX-NS300/KX-NS500/KX-NS700/KX-NS1000), this
setting is not displayed.

648 PC Programming Manual

 28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security

28.4.1.3 Network Service—[4-1-3] Other—Security—Packet Filtering

Name Description Value Range Links
Filter Indicates whether to enable the Enable, Disable
packet filtering function
(reference only).
Protocol No. Indicates the protocol type or the ANY, ICMP, TCP, UDP, TCP&UDP, 0–
protocol number (0–255) 255
(reference only).
Source IP Indicates the protocol name or ANY, Protocol Name, Port Number Start-
Address Start – the range of source IP address End
End (reference only).
Note
Protocol Name is specified at
28.4.1.3 Network Service—[4-1-3]
Other—Security—Packet Filtering
—Packet Filtering - Advanced.
Source Port Indicates the port name or the ANY, Port Name, Port Number
port number (reference only).
Destination IP Indicates the protocol name or ANY, Protocol Name, Port Number Start-
Address Start - the range of destination IP End
End addresses (reference only).
Note
Protocol Name is specified at
28.4.1.3 Network Service—[4-1-3]
Other—Security—Packet Filtering
—Packet Filtering - Advanced.
Destination Port Indicates the port name or the ANY, Port Name, Port number
port number (reference only).
ICMP Type Indicates the ICMP type ANY, Echo Reply, Destination
(reference only). Unreachable, Source Quench, Redirect,
Echo Request, Router Advertisement,
Router Solicitation, Time Exceeded,
Parameter Problem, Timestamp,
Timestamp Reply, Information Request,
Information Reply, Address Mask
Request, Address Mask Reply
Policy Indicates the packet filtering Accept, Discard
policy (reference only).
Logging Selects whether to enable the Enable, Disable
packet filtering log. If Accept is
selected for Policy, this setting
is greyed out and disabled.
Packet Filtering Click here to open the advanced
—Advanced setting menu for Packet
Setting Filtering - Advanced.

PC Programming Manual 649

28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security

Packet Filtering - Advanced

Name Description Value Range Links
Filter—Entry No. Selects the packet filter number. Once the 1–64
Entry No. is selected, all following items
on this screen can be programmed for
that packet filter.
Filter—Filter Selects whether to specify the packet Enable, Disable
filtering function.
Filter—Protocol Selects the protocol type or the protocol ANY, Protocol Name, Other
Number number (0–255). ( 0 - 255 )
Filter—Protocol Selects the protocol type. ICMP, TCP, UDP, TCP&UDP
Number— If you did not select Protocol Name as
Protocol Name Protocol Number, this item is greyed out.
Filter—Protocol Specifies the protocol number. Blank, 0–255
Number—Other If Other ( 0 - 255 ) is not selected for
( 0 - 255 ) Protocol Number, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Protocol Name, Port
Source Port TCP/UDP Source Port. Number
If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the protocol type. If TCP is selected for Protocol
Source Port— If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number Number—Protocol Name,
Protocol Name —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out. the following protocol types
can be selected:
Note FTP(20/21), Telnet(23),
• If TCP or TCP&UDP is selected for HTTP(80), HTTPS(443),
Protocol Number—Protocol POP3(110), IMAP(143),
Name, default value is FTP. SMTP(25)

• If ICMP is selected for Protocol If UDP is selected for

Number—Protocol Name or Protocol Number—Protocol
Protocol Name is not selected for Name, the following protocol
TCP/UDP Source Port, this item is types can be selected:
greyed out. DNS(53), DHCP(67/68),
SNMP(161/162)

If TCP&UDP is selected for

Protocol Number—Protocol
Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
FTP(20/21), Telnet(23),
HTTP(80), HTTPS(443),
POP3(110), IMAP(143),
SMTP(25), DNS(53),
DHCP(67/68),
SNMP(161/162)
Filter—TCP/UDP Specifies the start and end port numbers. 0–65535
Source Port— If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
Port Number —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.

650 PC Programming Manual

 28.4.1 Network Service—[4-1] Other—Security

Name Description Value Range Links

Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Protocol Name, Port
Destination Port TCP/UDP Destination Port. Number
If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—TCP/UDP Selects the protocol type. If TCP is selected for Protocol
Destination Port If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number Number—Protocol Name,
—Protocol Name —Protocol Name, or Protocol Name is the following protocol types
selected for TCP/UDP Destination Port, can be selected:
this item is greyed out. FTP(30021), SSH(30022),
HTTP(80), HTTPS(443),
Note IMAP(143), SMTP(25)
If TCP or TCP&UDP is selected for
Protocol Number—Protocol Name, If UDP is selected for
the default value is FTP. If UDP is Protocol Number—Protocol
selected for Protocol Number— Name, the following protocol
Protocol Name, the default value is types can be selected:
DNS. DHCP(67/68),
SNMP(161/162)

If TCP&UDP is selected for

Protocol Number—Protocol
Name, the following protocol
types can be selected:
FTP(30021), SSH(30022),
HTTP(80), HTTPS(443),
IMAP(143), SMTP(25),
DHCP(67/68),
SNMP(161/162)
Filter—TCP/UDP Specifies the start and end port number. 0–65535
Destination Port If ICMP is selected for Protocol Number
—Port Number —Protocol Name, this item is greyed out.
Filter—Source Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Address, Subnet
source packet.
Filter—Source— Specifies the IP address. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
IP Address If ANY is selected for Source, this item is 223.255.255.254
greyed out.
Filter—Source— Specifies the subnet mask. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Subnet Mask If Subnet is not selected for Source, this 255.255.255.255
item is greyed out.
Filter— Selects the method of specifying the ANY, Address, Subnet
Destination destination packet.
Filter— Specifies the IP address. Blank, 1.0.0.1–
Destination—IP If ANY is selected for Destination, this 223.255.255.254
Address item is greyed out.
Filter— Specifies the subnet mask. Blank, 0.0.0.0–
Destination— If Subnet is not selected for Destination, 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask this item is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 651

28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

Name Description Value Range Links

Filter—ICMP Selects the ICMP type. ANY, Echo Reply, Destination
Type Unreachable, Source Quench,
Redirect, Echo Request,
Router Advertisement, Router
Solicitation, Time Exceeded,
Parameter Problem,
Timestamp, Timestamp Reply,
Information Request,
Information Reply, Address
Mask Request, Address Mask
Reply
Filter—Policy Selects whether to enable the packet Accept, Discard
filtering policy.
Filter—Logging Specifies whether to enable the packet Enable, Disable
filtering log.

28.4.2 Network Service—[4-2] Other—NAS

NAS settings can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
NAS Status Displays/changes the connection Connected, Disconnected
status of the NAS. To change the connection status of
the NAS, perform the following:
• Click Disconnect to set the
NAS to disconnect status.
• Click Connect to set the NAS to
connect status.
NAS Setting— Specifies the communication NFS, CIFS
Protocol protocol for the NAS connection.
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the IP address of the 1.0.0.1–223.255.255.254
Address—IP NAS.
Address
NAS Setting—NAS Specifies the Name of the NAS. Max. 253 characters
Address—Name
NAS Setting—Port Specifies the NAS using port 445, 1024–65535
No. number.
NAS Setting—Mount Specifies the NAS mount directory. Max. 128 characters (multi-byte
directory characters allowed)
CIFS Setting—User Specifies the NAS connection user Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Name name when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.
CIFS Setting— Specifies the NAS connection Max. 24 characters (multi-byte
Password password when NAS Setting— characters allowed)
Protocol is set to CIFS.

652 PC Programming Manual

 Section 29
My Portal

PC Programming Manual 653

29.1 Logging in to My Portal

29.1 Logging in to My Portal

Users can log in to the My Portal site of Web Maintenance Console after their user container has been
created and activated. For details about creating user containers, see 8.1 Users—User Container.

The My Portal site address is as follows (enter the address exactly as shown):
http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/WebMC/users_portal/login
Enter your NSX server’s IP address for "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx".

When a user accesses the My Portal site, the login screen will appear. The user can enter his or her name
and password to log in to the site.

Login Screen

29.1.1 My Portal—Home
This screen is displayed after a user has successfully logged in. By clicking each icon or tab, a
corresponding screen will be displayed. Some menu items may not be displayed depending on the settings.
Refer to 8.1 Users—User Container—Customize MyPortal.

29.1.2 My Portal—Profile
On this screen, the user can configure the profile.
Name Description Value Range Links
First Name Specifies the first name of the user. Max. 20 characters
Last Name Specifies the last name of the user. Max. 20 characters

654 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.3 My Portal—Login ID & Password

Name Description Value Range Links

Display Name Indicates the display name of the user (reference Max. 32 characters
only).

Note
• You can change the way First Name and
Last Name are used to create this item
Option in 8.1 Users—User Container.
User PIN / Specifies the password for the user and Max. 8 digits (consisting
Voicemail voicemail. of 0–9)
Password
["0-9"]
Confirm new Re-enter the password for confirmation. Max. 8 digits (consisting
PIN ["0-9"] of 0–9)
CAUTION
It is strongly recommended that passwords
of 8 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorised access.
Language for Specifies the language for My Portal display. English (UK), English
My Portal (US), espańol, Français,
Note italiano, Deutsch,
When the user selects a language and clicks Português (BR),
OK or Apply, the display language is Português, Nederlands,
changed immediately. русский, Other
Home Phone Specifies the telephone number of the user's Max. 32 digits (consisting
home phone. of 0–9, *, #, P [Pause])
Personal Specifies the telephone number of the user's Max. 32 digits (consisting
Mobile Phone personal mobile phone. of 0–9, *, #, P [Pause])
Memo-1–2 Specifies additional information about the user. Max. 64 characters

29.1.3 My Portal—Login ID & Password

On this screen, the user can configure Login ID and Password.
Name Description Value Range Links
Login ID Specifies the user's login ID. Max. 16 characters
(consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
Password ["A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", Specifies the user's 4–16 characters
"*", "#"] password.
Re-enter ["A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", Re-enter the password for 4–16 characters
"*", "#"] confirmation.

29.1.4 My Portal—Phone No (Office)

On this screen, a user can configure the settings of the phone number (Office).
Name Description Value Range Links
Extension Indicates the extension number of the Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number extension (reference only). of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 655

29.1.5 My Portal—Phone No (Mobile)

Name Description Value Range Links

Extension Type Indicates the type of the extension (reference None, IP-PT, P-SIP, SIP,
only). SLT, DPT, APT, PS,
OPX, ISDN Extension,
UNKNOWN
2nd Telephone— Indicates the type of the extension (reference None, IP-PT, P-SIP, SIP,
Extension Type only). SLT, DPT, APT, OPX,
ISDN Extension,
Note UNKNOWN
• When the device is out of service, None
is displayed.
2nd Telephone Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls None, 5s, 10s, 15s
—Delayed arriving at the user's extension.
Ringing (s)
Portable Station— Indicates the status of the portable station None, Registered
Status (reference only).

Note
• When the PS is out of service, the
status is shown as None, regardless of
whether the extension has been
registered.
Portable Station— Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls None, 5s, 10s, 15s
Delayed Ringing arriving at the user's extension.
(s)

29.1.5 My Portal—Phone No (Mobile)

On this screen, the user can configure the settings related to phone numbers (mobile).
Name Description Value Range Links
When the mobile phone When the mobile phone started ringing On, Off
started ringing by delayed by delayed ringing, ringing of the phone
ringing, ringing of the phone (Main/Sub/PS) will be terminated. To
(Main / Sub / PS) will be enable this function, select the Yes
terminated. check box.
Mobile Phone #1–#4— Specifies the telephone numbers of the Max. 32 digits
Number user's mobile phones (up to 4). (consisting of 0–9, *,
#, [ ] [Secret], P
[Pause])
Mobile Phone #1–#4— Specifies the delayed ringing setting for None, 5s, 10s, 15s,
Delayed Ringing (s) calls arriving at a user extension. 20s

29.1.6 My Portal—Mail Address

On this screen, the user can configure the settings related to E-mail addresses.
Name Description Value Range Links
Email #1–#3—Email Address Specifies the user's e-mail addresses (up Max. 128
to 3). characters

656 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.7 My Portal—Phonebook

Name Description Value Range Links

Email #1–#3—Use for missed Specifies whether to send missed call On, Off
call notification notifications to the e-mail address.
Email #1–#3—Use for voice Specifies whether to send new voice mail On, Off
mail notification notifications to the e-mail address.

29.1.7 My Portal—Phonebook
On this screen, a user can configure the Personal Speed Dialling settings. A maximum of 100 Personal
Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed.
Name Description Value Range Links
Name Specifies the name of the Max. 20 characters Feature Manual
Personal Speed Dialling entry, References
which is shown on the 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
extension's display. Personal/System
Phone Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Number dialled by the Personal Speed of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], References
Dialling number. [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and 2.6.4 Speed Dialling—
F [Flash]) Personal/System

29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control

On this screen, a user can configure the Incoming Call Control settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies whether to enable the user’s Off, FWD On, DND
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for FWD/DND settings for trunk calls. On
external calls—Status To enable FWD, specify a value other
than None for Select call forwarding
type, and then select FWD On.
To enable DND, specify Do Not Disturb
for Use Do Not Disturb, and then select
DND On.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls None, Always (All),
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for from trunks. Busy, No Answer,
external calls—Select call Busy / No Answer
forwarding type
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD destination type for Phone (Home), Phone
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for calls from trunks. (Mobile), Other
external calls—Select call
forwarding destination Note
When Select call forwarding type is
None, this setting is greyed out.

PC Programming Manual 657

29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD destination type for Max. 32 digits
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for calls from trunks. (consisting of 0–9, *,
external calls—Dial #, [ ] [Secret], P
Number for call forwarding Note [Pause])
destination When Select call forwarding
destination is Phone (Home) or
Phone (Mobile), this setting is
greyed out.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the user's DND settings for None, Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for trunk calls.
external calls—Use Do Not
Disturb
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies whether to enable the user’s Off, FWD On, DND
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for FWD/DND settings for extension calls. On
internal calls—Status To enable FWD, specify a value other
than None for Select call forwarding
type, and then select FWD On.
To enable DND, specify Do Not Disturb
for Use Do Not Disturb, and then select
DND On.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD/DND setting for calls None, Always (All),
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for from extensions. Busy, No Answer,
internal calls—Select call Busy / No Answer
forwarding type Note
When Use external calls setting for
internal calls is selected, this setting
is greyed out.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD destination type for Phone (Home), Phone
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for calls from extensions. (Mobile), Other
internal calls—Select call
forwarding destination Note
When Select call forwarding type is
None, this setting is greyed out.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the FWD destination type for Max. 32 digits
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for calls from extensions. (consisting of 0–9, *,
internal calls—Dial Number #, [ ] [Secret], P
for call forwarding Note [Pause])
destination When Select call forwarding
destination is Phone (Home) or
Phone (Mobile), this setting is
greyed out.
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the user's DND settings for None, Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for extension calls.
internal calls—Use Do Not
Disturb

658 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.9 My Portal—Desktop Phone Control

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies whether to use apply the same On, Off
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for settings for external (trunk) calls to
internal calls—Use internal (extension) calls.
external calls setting for
internal calls Note
When Extension Number is not set,
this setting is greyed out. (Refer to
29.1.4 My Portal—Phone No (Office))
Call Forwarding (FWD) / Specifies the length of time that an 0–120 s
Do Not Disturb (DND) - for incoming call rings at the user's extension
internal calls—FWD No before the call is forwarded.
Answer Time (s)
Call Waiting Mode—For Specifies whether to receive call waiting None, Tone
external calls notifications for trunk calls.
Call Waiting Mode—For Specifies whether to receive call waiting None, Tone,
internal calls notifications for trunk calls. Announcement, One-
way Announcement

29.1.9 My Portal—Desktop Phone Control

On this screen, a user can configure the settings on the phone.
Name Description Value Range Links
Phone Display Specifies the display language of the user's Language1–
Language telephone. Language5
Dial Lock Specifies whether to enable the use of the extension On, Off
dial lock feature.
Display Lock Specifies whether to enable locking and unlocking On, Off
the incoming call log display.

Note
This setting does not apply to PSs.
Device in use (for Specifies which device to use when making or Main Telephone,
CTI) receiving a call from a CTI client. 2nd Telephone,
Portable Station
Flexible Button Clicking the Edit button displays the dialogue for
(Wired Extension) editing the flexible buttons of the wired extension.
Flexible Button Clicking the Edit button displays the dialogue for
(Portable Station) editing the flexible buttons of the portable station.

Flexible Button / Flexible Button (Portable Station)

On this dialogue, a user can configure the flexible button settings.

PC Programming Manual 659

29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail

Name Description Value Range Links

Type Specifies the feature to be Not Stored, DSS, PC Programming Manual
assigned to the flexible One-touch References
button. 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—
Wired Extension
8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—
Portable Station
Extension Specifies the number of an Max. 5 digits PC Programming Manual
Number extension to be accessed. (consisting of 0–9) References
This setting can be set 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—
when DSS is selected in Wired Extension
Type. 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—
Portable Station
Dial (Max. 32 Specifies the number to be Max. 32 digits PC Programming Manual
digits) dialled. This setting can be (consisting of 0–9, *, References
set when One-touch is #, T [Transfer], [ ] 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—
selected in Type. [Secret], P [Pause], Wired Extension
and F [Flash]) 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—
Portable Station
Label (Max. Specifies the label of Max. 12 characters
12 characters) flexible button.

29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail
On this screen, a user can configure the voice mail settings.
Name Description Value Range Links
Voicemail Indicates the voicemail number of the extension Max. 5 digits (consisting
Number (reference only). of 0–9)

Note
• Voicemail
Number is same
as Extension
Number.
Personal Click Registration to record, play, and delete
Greetings prompt messages. If Voicemail Number is
blank, this setting is greyed out.
Advanced Click Edit to configure advanced voicemail
Settings settings. If Voicemail Number is blank, this
setting is greyed out.
IMAP Plug-in for Click Download, and then a page for
Microsoft® downloading the Unified Messaging Plug-in will
Outlook® be displayed in a new window.
Fax Service Click Download, and then a page for
Utility downloading the Fax Driver Tool will be
displayed in a new window.

660 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail

Advanced Settings
Name Description Value Range Links
Mailbox Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. 4–16
Password To change a password for a mailbox: characters (A–
(Message Z, a–z, 0–9)
1. On the Advanced Settings screen, click Edit under
Client)
Mailbox Password Setting.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password
and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Advanced Call By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete
Transfer Setting Call Handling, a user can create a call handling "scenario"
for the extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a
scenario can be assigned to each absent message. Click
the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open
the window for programming. Select a Scenario number (1–
20) from the drop-down list, and then programme the
settings for that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the
window when finished.
For details, see 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail—Advanced
Call Transfer Setting.
Scenario Indicates the current scenario number of the user (reference None,
Setting— only). Scenario 1–20
Current
Scenario
Scenario Specifies the temporary scenario number of the user. None,
Setting— Scenario 1–20
Temporary
Scenario
Scenario Selects the scenario for Absent Message No.1 to No. 9. None,
Setting— The default message of Absent Messages are as follows: Scenario 1–20
Absent
No. Absent Message
Message No.1–
9 1 Will Return Soon
2 Go Home
3 At Ext %%%
4 Back at %%:%%
5 Out Until %%/%%
6 In a Meeting
7 Urgent Only
8 Not At My Desk
9 Custom 1

Advanced Call Transfer Setting

By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling, you can create a call handling
"scenario" for your extension. Up to 20 scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each

PC Programming Manual 661

29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail

absent message. Click the Edit button in Advanced Call Transfer Setting to open the window for
programming. Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down menu, then programme the settings for
that scenario. Click OK at the bottom of the window when finished.
Name Description Value Range Links
Scenario Specify a name for the scenario for Max. 32 Characters Feature Manual
Name identification. References
3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Scenario
Call Determines how the Unified None: Rings the Feature Manual
Transfer Messaging system will handle a call subscriber’s extension. References
Status— in the selected scenario. Call blocking: Handles 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Selection the call according to the Scenario
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer setting for
the subscriber’s
extension. The
subscriber’s extension
will not ring.
Call screening: The
caller is prompted to
record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging
system then calls the
subscriber and plays
back the caller name.
The subscriber can
choose whether to
answer the call.
Leave a Message:
Transfers the caller to the
mailbox.
Intercom Paging: Pages
the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.
Call Specifies whether calls from certain Enable, Disable Feature Manual
Transfer telephone numbers will be References
Status—VIP transferred directly to a specified 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Filter extension or telephone number. Scenario
Note
This setting can only be set to
"Enable" when Advanced Call
Transfer Setting is set to
"Leave a Message".

662 PC Programming Manual

 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail

Name Description Value Range Links

Call Specifies the telephone numbers Max. 32 digits Feature Manual
Transfer that the VIP Filter setting will be References
Status— applied to. When a call is received 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Telephone from any of the numbers specified Scenario
Number 1, 2, 3 here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination
specified in Call Transfer Status-
Transfer to (Selection/Other).
Call Specifies the transfer destination Extension: The call is Feature Manual
Transfer for calls transferred according to transferred to the user’s References
Status— the VIP Filter setting. extension. 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Transfer to Other: The call is Scenario
(Selection/ transferred to the
Other) telephone number (Max.
32 digits) that is specified
in Transfer to (Other).
Call Select a Custom Service from the 1–200 PC Programming
Transfer drop-down menu if "Transfer to Manual
Status— specified Custom Service Menu" is References
Transfer to selected for Call Transfer Status-
23.3 UM
specified Selection.
Configuration—[4-3]
Custom
Service Settings—
Service Menu
Custom Service
Feature Manual
References
3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Scenario
Call If "None" or "Call screening" is Max. 32 digits (consisting Feature Manual
Transfer selected for Call Transfer Status- of 0–9, , and #) References
Status— Selection, specifying a telephone 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Transfer to number here will transfer the caller Scenario
specified to that telephone number.
telephone
number - 1 Note
If "Call screening" is selected,
the transfer destination will hear
the call screening prompt
before the call is transferred.

PC Programming Manual 663

29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail

Name Description Value Range Links

Call If "None" or "Call screening" is Other, Extension, Feature Manual
Transfer selected for Call Transfer Status- Covering Extension References
Status— Selection, and the call could not be If "Other" is specified, 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Transfer to transferred to the number specified enter a maximum of 32 Scenario
specified in Call Transfer Status-Transfer digits consisting of 0–9,
telephone to specified telephone number - , and #.
number 2, 3, 1, the call will be transferred
4, 5 (Selection/ according to these settings for this
Other) scenario, in numerical order of
priority.

Note
• This sequence has higher
priority than the alternate
extension transfer sequence
specified in 24.4 UM
Configuration—[5-4]
System Parameters—
Parameters—PBX
Parameters.
• If "Call screening" is
selected, the transfer
destination will hear the call
screening prompt before the
call is transferred.
Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when there is no answer. Allows the caller to record References
for No Answer a message. 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Note Transfer to a covering Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox owner
by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
the top menu and try
another extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

664 PC Programming Manual

 29.2 Log-out

Name Description Value Range Links

Incomplete Specifies how the scenario handles Leave a Message: Feature Manual
Call Handling a call when the destination is busy. Allows the caller to record References
for Busy a message. 3.2.2.7 Call Transfer
Note Transfer to a covering Scenario
More than one option can be extension: Transfers the
selected. caller to a covering
extension.
Page the mailbox owner
by intercom paging:
Pages the subscriber by
intercom.
Transfer to operator:
Transfers the caller to an
operator.
Return to top menu:
Lets the caller return to
top menu and try another
extension.
Transfer to specified
Custom Service Menu:
Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom
Service.

29.2 Log-out
To logout of My Portal, click the button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen.
When this option is chosen, system data is automatically saved from the temporary memory (DRAM) of the
PBX to the SSD.

To logout
1. Click the button.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.

Note
• If the PC running the Web browser that is connected to My Portal is shut down, or the Web browser is
closed, any changes that have not been saved to the SSD will be lost. To save settings while
programming, click the OK or Apply button on the Home screen. Always end your programming
session by clicking the button.
• If you are logged in but do not perform any operations in Web Maintenance Console for 60 minutes
(default value), you will be automatically logged out.

PC Programming Manual 665

29.2 Log-out

666 PC Programming Manual

 Section 30
Appendix

PC Programming Manual 667

30.1 Revision History

30.1 Revision History

30.1.1 PNMPR Software File Version 002.00xxx
Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 1.2.2 Bulk Administration Tool
• 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types
• 2.1.1 Web Maintenance Console Accounts
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 2.1.3 Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
• 2.1.5 Software Interface
• 2.1.7 Extension Number Setting
• 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• 3.1 Home Screen
• 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
• 5.1.1 System Control—Program Update—Download Program File
• 5.1.2 System Control—Program Update—Update Program File
• 5.1.3 System Control—Program Update—Plug and Update
• 5.2.1 System Control—MOH—Install
• 5.2.2 System Control—MOH—Delete
• 5.2.3 System Control—MOH—Status / Backup
• 5.4 System Control—System Reset
• 5.5 System Control—System Shutdown
• 5.6 System Control—Hot Standby
• 6.1.3 Tool—System Data Backup—Auto Backup
• 6.5 Tool—Import
• 6.6 Tool—Export
• 6.7 Tool—Screen Customise
• 6.8.1 Tool—UM Data Backup—Manual Backup
• 6.14 Tool—P-SIP Option
• 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.2 Utility—File—File Transfer PBX to PC
• 7.3.3 Utility—Log—WEB Operation Log
• 7.4.12 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage
• 7.4.12.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Setting
• 7.4.12.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Display
• 8.1 Users—User Container

668 PC Programming Manual

 30.1.1 PNMPR Software File Version 002.00xxx

• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User

• 8.1.2 Users—User Container—Add Multiple Users
• 8.2 Users—User's Device Settings
• 8.2.1 Users—User's Device Settings—Device Settings
• 8.3.1 Users—User's Flexible Button—Wired Extension
• 8.3.1.1 Users—User's Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Flexible button data copy
• 8.3.2 Users—User's Flexible Button—Portable Station
• 8.3.2.1 Users—User's Flexible Button—Portable Station—Flexible button data copy
• 8.4 Users—User's Speed Dial
• 8.5 Users—User's CLIP ID Table
• 8.7.2 Supervisors—ICDG Management—ACD Report
• 8.8 Maintenance Personnel—Installer Information
• 8.9 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting
• 8.9.1 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Accounts
• 8.9.2 Maintenance Personnel—Sub Administrator Setting—Site Assignment
• 9.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
• 9.12 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Card Property
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property
• 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
• 10.11.2 PBX Configuration—[2-11-2] System—Audio Gain—Card
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List
• 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—DSS Console
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 13.6 PBX Configuration—[5-6] Optional Device—Optional IP Device
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

PC Programming Manual 669

30.1.2 PNMPR Software File Version 002.03xxx

• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

• 18.3.1 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Automatic Registration
• 18.3.2 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Name Generate
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting
• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security
• 28.3.4.1 Network Service—[3-4-1] Client Feature—Directory Service—Server Setting
• 28.3.4.3 Network Service—[3-4-3] Client Feature—Directory Service—User Container Sync
• 28.3.6 Network Service—[3-6] Client Feature—Remote Maintenance
• 29.1.1 My Portal—Home
• 29.1.3 My Portal—Telephony

30.1.2 PNMPR Software File Version 002.03xxx

Changed Contents
• 7.4.12.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Setting
• 7.4.12.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—System Resource Usage—Display
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
• 8.2.1.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—CLIP Generate
• 8.3 Users—Flexible Button
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
• 8.3.1.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Flexible button data copy
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
• 8.3.2.1 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Flexible button data copy
• 8.4 Users—Speed Dial
• 8.5 Users—CLIP ID Table
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting
• 28.3.4.3 Network Service—[3-4-3] Client Feature—Directory Service—User Container Sync
• 29.1.1 My Portal—Home
• 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail
• Feature Programming References

670 PC Programming Manual

 30.1.3 PNMPR Software File Version 002.10xxx

30.1.3 PNMPR Software File Version 002.10xxx

Changed Contents
• 6.1.2 Tool—System Data Backup—Backup to NAS
• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 7.8.2 Utility—Command—Network command
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports- Advanced Settings —Maintenance Port—Speed & Duplex
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP

30.1.4 PNMPR Software File Version 003.00xxx

Changed Contents
• 1.2.1 Starting Web Maintenance Console
• 2.3 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.6 System Control—Hot Standby
• 6.4 Tool—Extension List View
• 7.2.1 Utility—File—File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 8.1 Users—User Container
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 8
– Option 9
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
• 9.3 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Activation Key Status
• 9.4 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—System Property—Multisite
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
– Port Number
– SIP Extension
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
• 9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call
Distribution Port Group
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

PC Programming Manual 671

30.1.4 PNMPR Software File Version 003.00xxx

• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

– Main
– Option
– Remote Place (Location / P2P)
– FAX/T.38
• 10.12 PBX Configuration—[2-13] System—Security
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5
• 11.3.2 PBX Configuration—[3-3-2] Group—Call Pickup Group—Priority Setting
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4-1] Group—Paging Group—Priority Setting
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting
• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service
• 28.2.7 Network Service—[2-9] Server Feature—TELNET
• 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent
• 28.3.4.1 Network Service—[3-4-1] Client Feature—Directory Service—Server Setting
• 29.1 Logging in to My Portal
• 29.1.1 My Portal—Home
• 29.1.2 My Portal—Profile
• 29.1.3 My Portal—Login ID & Password
• 29.1.4 My Portal—Phone No (Office)
• 29.1.5 My Portal—Phone No (Mobile)
• 29.1.6 My Portal—Mail Address
• 29.1.7 My Portal—Phonebook
• 29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control
• 29.1.9 My Portal—Desktop Phone Control
• Feature Programming References
– Call Park
– Call Pickup
– Call Waiting
– Call Waiting Tone
– Direct In Line (DIL)
– Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

672 PC Programming Manual

 30.1.5 PNMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx

– Display Information
– Incoming Call Log
– Intercom Call
– Queuing Feature
– Simple Remote Connection
– Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
– Timed Reminder
– Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
– Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario
– Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device
– Verification Code Entry

30.1.5 PNMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx

Changed Contents
• Introduction
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 5.4 System Control—System Reset
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property
• 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
• 28.4.1.1 Network Service—[4-1-1] Other—Security—Encryption
• 29.1.9 My Portal—Desktop Phone Control

PC Programming Manual 673

30.1.5 PNMPR Software File Version 004.00xxx

674 PC Programming Manual

Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 675

Feature Programming References

Absent Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Absent Message Set /
Cancel
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent Message
• 14.5 PBX Configuration—[6-5] Feature—Absent Message

Feature Manual References

2.20.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Account Code Entry
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Account
Code Mode

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Automatic Callback
Busy Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Automatic
Callback Busy

Feature Manual References

2.10.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit
– Dial—Extension Inter-digit
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Feature Manual References

2.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

676 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Automatic Fax Delivery

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Fax Options
– Automatic Delivery Status
– Automatic Delivery Status Default Fax Number [0-9 * # T , ; ]
– Automatic Delivery Status Printed Fax Message

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.2 Automatic Fax Delivery

Automatic Fax Transfer

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Fax Extension

Feature Manual References

2.16.2 Automatic Fax Transfer

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 6.5 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit
– ARS - Except Code
– ARS - Routing Plan
• 6.6 Tool—Export
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 1—ARS Itemised
Code
• 8.5 Users—CLIP ID Table
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.8.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 10.1.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-1] System—Date & Time—Date & Time Setting
• 10.1.2 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Automatic Time
Adjustment—Automatic Time Correction on Stand-alone mode
• 10.1.2.1 PBX Configuration—[2-1-2] System—Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
• 28.2.4 Network Service—[2-6] Server Feature—NTP—NTP server

Feature Manual References

PC Programming Manual 677

Feature Programming References

5.5.4 Automatic Setup

Background Music (BGM)

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– External MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music On Hold 1–8)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.28.1 Background Music (BGM)

Budget Management
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge—Charge Options—Action at Charge
Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Manual References

2.7.2 Budget Management

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—User PIN / Mailbox Password ["0-9"]
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Bill
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Feature Manual References

2.23.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Call Charge Services

• 11.1.5 PBX Configuration—[3-1-5] Group—Trunk Group—Charge Rate
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

678 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Feature Manual References

2.22.3 Call Charge Services

Call Distribution Port Group

• 9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call
Distribution Port Group—Hunt Pattern 1–16—Leading Number
• 9.14.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Call
Distribution Port Group—Hunt Pattern 1–16—Call Distribution Port Group—1st–16th
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—Call Distribution Port
Group

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.3 Call Distribution Port Group

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set /
Cancel / Confirm
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

PC Programming Manual 679

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—FWD No Answer Timer
Set
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Call Forward to CO
– Manager—Group Forward Set
– Optional Device & Other Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Status of FWD for Virtual PS
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group
Log / Group FWD
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
2nd line LCD display information for ICD Group redirected call
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—Telephony Feature
• 29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control

Feature Manual References

2.3.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Hold
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
– Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group Key
– Option 1—PT Operation—Hold key mode
– Option 5—SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Feature Manual References

2.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN Hold

680 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type

• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Call Monitor
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive—Call Monitor
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 2—Data Mode
– Option 3—Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Call Park Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park
Retrieve
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Manual References

2.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—DSS Key
• 11.3 PBX Configuration—[3-3] Group—Call Pickup Group
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny

PC Programming Manual 681

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.4.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
– CO & SMDR—Transfer to CO
– Assistant—Transfer to busy Extension w/o BSS Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for
Extension Call
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer Recall
Destination

Feature Manual References

2.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Call Waiting
• 9.23 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - LCO type—Caller ID—Caller ID
Signalling
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Automatic Call Waiting
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

682 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Call Waiting—Automatic Call
Waiting for Extension Call
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID
Display
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—Public Call
through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 10.10 PBX Configuration—[2-10] System—Extension CID Settings
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Caller ID Modification
Table
• 11.1.3 PBX Configuration—[3-1-3] Group—Trunk Group—Caller ID Modification
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 8
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.19.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

PC Programming Manual 683

Feature Programming References

– CLI Destination
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI Ring
for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection
Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Feature Manual References

2.11.9 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
– ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
– CO Setting—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
CLIP on ICD Group Button
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings
– Extension Number
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– CLIP—CLIP ID
– CLIP—CLIP on Extension/CO
– CLIP—CLIR

684 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– CLIP—COLR
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name

Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
– Extension Number
– Display Name

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name
Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Class of Service (COS)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—COS

Feature Manual References

5.1.1 Class of Service (COS)

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.4 Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

4.3.2.2 Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

PC Programming Manual 685

Feature Programming References

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—CCBS Option
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS Delete Digits

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.3.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 9.5 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Dial Information (CTI)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

Feature Manual References

2.26.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Transfer to
CO
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—CO - CO Call Limitation—After
Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

686 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

2.14.2 Conference

Conference Group Call

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Conference Group Call—
Ring Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Conference Group Call
Operation
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—
Conference Group Call Operation
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8—Conference Group—Maximum
Number of Speakers During a Conference Group Call
• 11.9 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group
• 11.9.1 PBX Configuration—[3-9] Group—Conference Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.15.1 Conference Group Call

Confirmation Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from DOORPHONE
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Feature Manual References

2.25.2 Confirmation Tone

Data Line Security

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Data Line Security Set /
Cancel
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 2—Data Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.5 Data Line Security

PC Programming Manual 687

Feature Programming References

Dial Tone
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Feature Manual References

2.25.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Manual References

2.7.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—DDI / DID
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit

688 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Accept the Call from DISA
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—
When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Manual References

2.16.1 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Display Information
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency (3 characters)

PC Programming Manual 689

Feature Programming References

– Charge Options—Currency Display Position

• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

2.21.4 Display Information

Distribution Order
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
ICD Group Distribution order

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.4 Distribution Order

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Busy Tone / DND Tone
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—DND Override
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—Telephony Feature
• 29.1.8 My Portal—Incoming Call Control

Feature Manual References

2.3.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Door Open
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—
Doorphone—Open Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Door Unlock

Feature Manual References

2.18.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
– Doorphone—Call Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—DOORPHONE Call
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE

690 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called

by Voice
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone

Feature Manual References

2.18.1 Doorphone Call

DSP Resource Reservation

• 9.33 PBX Configuration—[1-5] Configuration—DSP Resource

Feature Manual References

5.5.3.1 DSP Resource Reservation

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

• 28.2.1 Network Service—[2-1] Server Feature—DHCP(LAN)

Feature Manual References

5.6.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment

E-mail Notification for Extension Users

• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters—E-mail/Text
Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.1 E-mail Notification for Extension Users

E-mail Notification for Manager

• 7.5.5 Utility—Report—E-mail Report
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

5.4.4 E-mail Notification for Manager

PC Programming Manual 691

Feature Programming References

E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm

• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Manual References

5.4.3 E-mail Notification of Sensor Alarm

E-mail Notification of System-level Events

• 5.1 System Control—Program Update
• 7.7 Utility—Email Notification
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
• 28.2.5 Network Service—[2-7] Server Feature—SMTP

Feature Manual References

5.4.2 E-mail Notification of System-level Events

Emergency Call
• 15.4 PBX Configuration—[7-4] TRS—Emergency Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Executive Busy Override

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Executive Override
Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Executive Busy
Override
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive
– Executive Busy Override
– Executive Busy Override Deny
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—One-touch Busy
Override by SCO key
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive
Override Deny

Feature Manual References

2.10.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level on
Extension Lock

Feature Manual References

692 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

2.7.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension Feature
Clear
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pick-up Dial)

Feature Manual References

2.24.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension PIN Set /
Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—User PIN / Mailbox Password ["0-9"]

Feature Manual References

2.24.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Flash Time
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Feature
Access
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA

Feature Manual References

2.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Relay Access
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—External Relay Access
• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay

Feature Manual References

2.18.4 External Relay Control

PC Programming Manual 693

Feature Programming References

External Sensor
• 9.29 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—DOORPHONE Card—Card Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring
Duration
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—External Sensor—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor

Feature Manual References

2.18.3 External Sensor

Fax Cover Page

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Fax Options—Cover Page Language
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management
– Fax Properties—System Name (Up to 25 characters)
– Fax Properties—System Fax Number (Max. 20 digits)
– Fax Properties—Printed Information
– Fax Properties—Printed Information Position
– Fax Properties—Cover Page

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.14 Fax Cover Page

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Disconnect Time
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 7—Flash Mode
during CO Conversation
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last
Display Duration in Idle Mode
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
• 8.3.1.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Flexible button data copy
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

Feature Manual References

2.21.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main

694 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature Manual References

5.5.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Floating Extension Number
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager—Floating Extension Number
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

5.5.7 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—Telephony Feature
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

PC Programming Manual 695

Feature Programming References

• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station

– Type
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))
– Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Manual References

2.3.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• 11 PBX Configuration—[3] Group

Feature Manual References

5.1.2 Group

Group Call Distribution

• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main—Distribution Method
– Main—Call Waiting Distribution
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Hands-free Answerback
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—Automatic
Answer (Caller)
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4—Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 5—Automatic Answer for CO Call

696 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Option 6—Forced Automatic Answer

Feature Manual References

2.4.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—
Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Answer
Mode

Feature Manual References

2.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type

Feature Manual References

2.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR Options—Option—ARS Dial

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line
(Pickup Dial) Start
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Program Set / Cancel
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.

Feature Manual References

2.6.7 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 11.6 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group
• 11.6.1 PBX Configuration—[3-6] Group—Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Feature Manual References

2.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual 697

Feature Programming References

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Incoming Call Log—Busy/Intercept (when Called Party is Busy)
– Incoming Call Log—Fwd All/Fwd Busy
– Incoming Call Log—Call Pickup
– Incoming Call Log—Extension / TIE Call
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 5—Incoming Call Display
– Option 7—Incoming Call Log Memory
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type

Feature Manual References

2.19.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

• 6.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 9.25 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Extension Inter-digit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of
Dial for en Bloc mode
• 11.1.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-4] Group—Trunk Group—Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Extension Number
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 7—ISDN Bearer

698 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

4.1.2 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Service Features

Intercept Routing
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept
Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—
Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings— Overflow
No Answer —Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 18.5 PBX Configuration—[10-5] CO & Incoming Call—Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator -
No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercom Call
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Alternate
Calling - Ring / Voice
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User
– Extension Number
– Display Name
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 3—Intercom Call by
Voice

Feature Manual References

2.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the
Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–512
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
COS
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—COS
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—COS

PC Programming Manual 699

Feature Programming References

• 13.4 PBX Configuration—[5-4] Optional Device—External Relay—COS Number

Feature Manual References

2.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

2.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—IP Terminal
Registration Mode
• 9.15 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Card Property
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP-CS (KX-NS0154)
• 7.4.4.1 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—Air Sync Group
• 7.4.4.2 Utility—Monitor/Trace—CS Status Monitor—LAN Sync Group
• 7.5.6 Utility—Report—IP-CS Information
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
– LLDP Packet Sending Ability
– IP-CS Registration Mode
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Media Relay
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
• 9.19 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Card Property
• 9.20 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPCS16—Port Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Air Synchronisation—
Watching Degeneracy (x60s)
• 19.2 PBX Configuration—[11-2] Maintenance—CS Synchronisation

Feature Manual References

5.2.6 IP-CS (KX-NS0154)

ISDN Extension
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension

700 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Extension Setting

Feature Manual References

5.2.5.1 ISDN Extension

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 16.2 PBX Configuration—[8-2] ARS—Leading Number—Leading Number
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits
– Added Number

Feature Manual References

4.3.3 ISDN Virtual Private Network (ISDN-VPN)

Last Number Redial

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Redial
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 7
– Outgoing Call Log—Extension Call
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 7—Outgoing Call
Log Memory

PC Programming Manual 701

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.6.3 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Feature Manual References

2.21.3 LED Indication

Legacy Device Connection

• 9.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Summary—Legacy Gateway 1 Shelf/Legacy Gateway
2 Shelf
• 9.28 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Legacy-GW1/Legacy-GW2

Feature Manual References

5.3 Legacy Device Connection

Line Preference—Incoming
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming
Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.4.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing
Preferred Line

Feature Manual References

2.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 7.3.1 Utility—Log—Error Log
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR—Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour

702 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Manual References

5.6.3 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Wrap-up Timer
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Wrap-up Timer based on
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Making a TIE Line Call

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TIE Line Access
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table—Own PBX Code

Feature Manual References

4.3.1.1 Making a TIE Line Call

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—MCID

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

PC Programming Manual 703

Feature Programming References

Manager Features
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming
—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.1.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set /
Cancel / Call Back
• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Message
Waiting Set
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 3—Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 5—SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

2.20.1 Message Waiting

Multi-connection Networking
• 1.2.3 PBX Configuration Types
• 3.1.1 Home Screen—Add Site Wizard
• 2.1.4 Easy Setup Wizard

Feature Manual References

4.2 Multi-connection Networking

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

704 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– External MOH—MOH 1–8 (Music On Hold 1–8)

Feature Manual References

2.13.4 Music on Hold

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor

Feature Manual References

2.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-touch Dialling
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 6—Flexible Key
Programming Mode
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Manual References

2.6.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Manual References

5.1.5 Operator Features

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 7.2.5 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 7.2.6 Utility—File—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM

PC Programming Manual 705

Feature Programming References

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—

Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—OGM Record / Clear /
Playback
• 11.5.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member
List—Delayed Ring
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 13.3.2 PBX Configuration—[5-3-2] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating
Extension Number

Feature Manual References

2.28.2 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Overflow Feature
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
• 11.5.2 PBX Configuration—[3-5-2] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—
Overflow immediately when All Logout

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1–6 (External Pager 1–6)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 11.4 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group
• 11.4.1 PBX Configuration—[3-4-1] Group—Paging Group—Priority Setting
• 11.4.2 PBX Configuration—[3-4] Group—Paging Group—External Pager
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 6—Paging Deny

Feature Manual References

2.17.1 Paging

706 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Card Property
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.2 Panasonic SIP Phones (P-SIP)

Pause Insertion
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Pause Time
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—
Pause Signal Time
• 14.4 PBX Configuration—[6-4] Feature—Second Dial Tone

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options
– Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
– Option 6 (CTI)—CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group,
SDN)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN)
– Extension Number (for SDN)
• 12.1 PBX Configuration—[4-1] Extension—DSS Console

Feature Manual References

2.9.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property—Main—P2P Group
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 8
– P2P Group—Priority Voice 1/Priority Voice 2/Priority Voice 3
– P2P Group—Video Conference

PC Programming Manual 707

Feature Programming References

• 11.10 PBX Configuration—[3-10] Group—P2P Group

Feature Manual References
5.2.3 Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Connection

Ping
• 7.1.2 Utility—Diagnosis—Ping

Feature Manual References

5.6.6 PING Confirmation

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 9.30 PBX Configuration—[1-2] Configuration—Portable Station

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Printing Message
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Printing Message
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2
—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Manual References

2.22.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Privacy Release by
SCO key
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Type

Feature Manual References

2.14.3 Privacy Release

PS Directory
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—Display Name
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Distribution Method
• 11.8 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group
• 11.8.1 PBX Configuration—[3-8] Group—PS Ring Group—Member List

708 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

5.2.4.2 PS Ring Group

PT Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—PT
Programming Mode
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—Password
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Feature Manual References

5.5.2 PT Programming

Public (Mobile Phone) Device

• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4
– Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO
– Send CLIP of Extension Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

2.29.2.5 Public (Mobile Phone) Device

Queuing Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extension
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Call Waiting on UM Group
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.3 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

PC Programming Manual 709

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

2.6.6 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Reverse Detection

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 10.8.1 PBX Configuration—[2-8-1] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO—Ring Tone Pattern Plan
1–8
• 10.8.2 PBX Configuration—[2-8-2] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from DOORPHONE—Ring Tone
Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Extension—Ring
Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 1—Ring Pattern
Table

Feature Manual References

2.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Type
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill—Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest

Feature Manual References

2.23.2 Room Status Control

Send to Fax Machine

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Auto Forwarding Message Type
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Fax Options
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Fax Management

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.30 Send to Fax Machine

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

• 28.3.3 Network Service—[3-3] Client Feature—SNMP Agent

Feature Manual References

5.6.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor

710 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Simple Remote Connection

• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Port Number—Firmware
Update Port No. for IP-PT/IP-CS (Media Relay)
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Media Relay
– Common—NAT - External IP Address / FQDN
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No.
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - MGCP Server Port No. for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Type for IP-CS
– IP Extension / IP-CS—Keep Alive Packet Sending Interval Time (s)
– IP Extension / IP-CS—NAT - FTP Server Port No.
– SIP Extension / UT Extension—NAT - SIP Proxy Server Port No.
– Option—NAT - RTP IP Address
– Option—NAT - SIP Proxy Server IP Address
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property—Remote Place
(Location / P2P)
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property—Remote Place
(Location / P2P)

Feature Manual References

5.2.2.1 Simple Remote Connection

Simplified Isolated Mode

• 3.1 Home Screen
• 9.14.2 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property—DN to Gateway—
Multisite—Master Suspend if Backup Master Detected
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main
– Isolated Mode
– Switch Time Service to Break in Isolated Mode
• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property—Main—Backup
• 10.6.2 PBX Configuration—[2-6-2] System—Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Manual References
4.2.3.1 Simplified Isolated Mode

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

• 9.17 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Card Property
• 9.18 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPEXT128—Port Property

Feature Manual References

5.2.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

• 9.9 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Shelf Property

PC Programming Manual 711

Feature Programming References

• 9.10 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Card Property

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property

Feature Manual References

4.1.1 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Trunk

SIP Refer Transfer

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property—Supplementary
Service
– Blind Transfer(REFER)
– Attended Transfer(REFER)

Feature Manual References

2.12.2 SIP Refer Transfer

Software Upgrading
• 5.1 System Control—Program Update

Feature Manual References

5.5.8 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for
System Speed Dialling
• 8.4 Users—Speed Dial
• 14.1 PBX Configuration—[6-1] Feature—System Speed Dial
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
– Extension Directory
– System Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

2.6.4 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—
Analogue CO Call Duration Start

712 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing

CO Call Printout (SMDR)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge
– Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge—Charge Options—Currency (3 characters)
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—Supervisor Extension Number

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Supervisory Feature (ACD)

• 8.7 Supervisors—ICDG Management
• 11.5.3 PBX Configuration—[3-5-3] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 11.5.4 PBX Configuration–[3-5-4] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—ACD Supervisor

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.9 Supervisory Feature (ACD)

Syslog Record Management

• 28.3.2 Network Service—[3-2] Client Feature—SYSLOG

Feature Manual References

2.22.1.2 Syslog Record Management

Tenant Service
• 10.2 PBX Configuration—[2-2] System—Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.7.3 PBX Configuration—[2-7-3] System—Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 11.2 PBX Configuration—[3-2] Group—User Group
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
Tenant Number

PC Programming Manual 713

Feature Programming References

• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—User Group

• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Tenant Number
• 13.5 PBX Configuration—[5-5] Optional Device—External Sensor—Tenant No.
• 14.6 PBX Configuration—[6-6] Feature—Tenant
• 16 PBX Configuration—[8] ARS
• 16.5.3 PBX Configuration—[8-5-3] ARS—Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—Tenant Number
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—Tenant Number
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN—Tenant Number

Feature Manual References

5.1.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911,
3PTY

Feature Manual References

4.1.2.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan
—Trunk Property
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Incoming Call Inter-digit
Timer—TIE
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Private Network—TIE Call by
Extension Numbering
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
• 17.1 PBX Configuration—[9-1] Private Network—TIE Table
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL—Trunk Property

714 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table—DDI / DID Destination—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Manual References

4.3.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 10.4 PBX Configuration—[2-4] System—Week Table
• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Time Service (Day /
Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Time Service
Switch
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Feature Manual References

5.1.4 Time Service

Timed Reminder
• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Timed Reminder—
Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display
• 13.3.1 PBX Configuration—[5-3-1] Optional Device—Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2

PC Programming Manual 715

Feature Programming References

• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 1
—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 14.2 PBX Configuration—[6-2] Feature—Hotel & Charge—Main—Timed Reminder Message for Standard
SIP Phone—Message
• 19.1 PBX Configuration—[11-1] Maintenance—Main—SMDR—Print Information—Timed Reminder
(Wake-up Call)

Feature Manual References

2.24.3 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
• 8.2 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—COS
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 15.1 PBX Configuration—[7-1] TRS—Denied Code
• 15.2 PBX Configuration—[7-2] TRS—Exception Code
• 15.3 PBX Configuration—[7-3] TRS—Special Carrier
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous

Feature Manual References

2.7.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 9.22 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—SLC2 - Port Property—Connection
• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection
• 9.26 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Main
• 9.27 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 10.7.2 PBX Configuration—[2-7-2] System—Class of Service—External Call Block
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 11.1.2 PBX Configuration—[3-1-2] Group—Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension

716 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 16.1 PBX Configuration—[8-1] ARS—System Setting— ARS Mode
• 18.1 PBX Configuration—[10-1] CO & Incoming Call—CO Line Settings—CO Name

Feature Manual References

2.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Adaptor Connection

• 9.11 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-SIPGW128—Port Property
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute
– Channel Attribute
• 9.14 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPGW128—Port Property
– Trunk Adaptor
– Connection Attribute

Feature Manual References

5.3.2 Trunk Adaptor Connection

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TAFAS Answer
• 10.11.1 PBX Configuration—[2-11-1] System—Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1–6 (External Pager 1–6)
• 13.2 PBX Configuration—[5-2] Optional Device—External Pager

Feature Manual References

2.17.2 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 9.24 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Busy Out Status
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Busy Out Cancel
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager—Manager
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 4—Option 5

Feature Manual References

2.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

PC Programming Manual 717

Feature Programming References

Trunk Call Limitation

• 7.3.5 Utility—Log—Call Control Log
• 9.5.1 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—Site Property—Main—Main—Area ID for logical
partition
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Extension-
CO Line Call Duration Limit
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 2
– Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
– Applying logical partitioning
• 11.1.1 PBX Configuration—[3-1-1] Group—Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
– Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
• 15.5 PBX Configuration—[7-5] TRS—Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Feature Manual References

2.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Unified Messaging—Alternate Extension Group

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Automated Attendant

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.1 Alternate Extension Group

Unified Messaging—Auto Forwarding

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– Auto Forwarding Active
– Auto Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Auto Forwarding Delay Time (hours:minutes)
– Auto Forwarding Message Type
– Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
– Auto Forwarding Mode
– Auto Forwarding Expires

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.2 Auto Forwarding

Unified Messaging—Auto Receipt

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Auto Receipt

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.1 Auto Receipt

718 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Automated Attendant (AA)

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Wait Time for First Digit (0-20 s)
– Menu Repeat Cycle (1-5 times)
– Play Owner’s Name during Transfer
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)
– Alternate Extension
– List All Names
– Operator Transfer Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.3 Automated Attendant (AA)

Unified Messaging—Automatic Login

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.3 Automatic Login

Unified Messaging—Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

• 7.10.3 Utility—Automatic Two-way Recording—Extension Setting List
– Internal Call
– External Call
– Supervisor

PC Programming Manual 719

Feature Programming References

– Mailbox Number

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.4 Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager

Unified Messaging—Call Services

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Parameter
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.6 Call Services

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Scenario

• 29.1.10 My Portal—Voicemail
– Advanced Settings—Advanced Call Transfer Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.7 Call Transfer Scenario

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer Status

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Call Transfer
Status

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.8 Call Transfer Status

Unified Messaging—Call Transfer to Outside

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Call Transfer to Outside
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.7 Call Transfer to Outside

Unified Messaging—Call-through Service

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Call-through Service
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Outside Transfer
Sequence—Call Transfer to Outside Sequence (Up to 16 digits / [0-9 * # D F R T , ; N])

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.6 Call-through Service

Unified Messaging—Callback Number Entry

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters—Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]

720 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

—Message Waiting Notification—System Callback No. (Up to 32 digits)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.9 Callback Number Entry

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.8 Caller ID Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Callback

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Caller ID Callback
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Transfer to Outside—Trunk Group (1–
128)—Caller ID Callback

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.10 Caller ID Callback

Unified Messaging—Caller ID Screening

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer—Caller ID Screen

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.9 Caller ID Screening

Unified Messaging—Caller Name Announcement

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Number of CIDs for Caller Name Announcement
(Selection)
• 24.3 UM Configuration—[5-3] System Parameters—System Caller Name Announcement

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.10 Caller Name Announcement

Unified Messaging—Company Greeting

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Selection)
– Day, Night, Lunch, and Break Mode - Company Greeting No. (Other)
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Daily Hours Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.12 Company Greeting

Unified Messaging—Covering Extension

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Covering
Extension

Feature Manual References

PC Programming Manual 721

Feature Programming References

3.2.1.14 Covering Extension

Unified Messaging—Custom Service

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.15 Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Custom Service Builder

• 23.3 UM Configuration—[4-3] Service Settings—Custom Service—Custom Service Builder

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.1 Custom Service Builder

Unified Messaging—Dialling by Name

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– First Name
– Last Name
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.16 Dialling by Name

Unified Messaging—Direct Service Access

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Direct Service UM Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.12 Direct Service Access

Unified Messaging—Extension Group

• 24.2 UM Configuration—[5-2] System Parameters—Extension Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.18 Extension Group

Unified Messaging—External Message Delivery Service

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– External Message Delivery Active
– External Message Delivery Prompt Mode
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Extension
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—External Message Delivery

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.13 External Message Delivery Service

722 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Group Distribution Lists

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Personal Distribution List
• 24.1 UM Configuration—[5-1] System Parameters—Mailbox Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.17 Group Distribution Lists

Unified Messaging—Hold
• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Call Hold Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Queuing Announcement Mode
– Call Hold Mode—Call Retrieval Announcement Timing (1-30 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.20 Hold

Unified Messaging—Holiday Service

• 10.5 PBX Configuration—[2-5] System—Holiday Table
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 9

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview
3.2.1.21 Holiday Service

Unified Messaging—Hospitality Mode

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Hospitality Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.22 Hospitality Mode

Unified Messaging—IMAP Integration

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Mailbox
Password (Message Client)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– Fax Option
– Desktop Messaging

Feature Manual References

3.3.1 IMAP Integration

Unified Messaging—Incomplete Call Handling Service

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
– Incomplete Call Handling for Busy

PC Programming Manual 723

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.18 Incomplete Call Handling Service

Unified Messaging—Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Intercept to Mailbox for Call to
Extension

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.23 Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Intercom Paging

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Call Transfer
– Intercom Paging Group
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Intercom Paging Parameters

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.24 Intercom Paging

Unified Messaging—Interview Service

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—Interview
Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.25 Interview Service

Unified Messaging—List All Names

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Directory Listing

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.26 List All Names

Unified Messaging—Live Call Screening (LCS)

• 10.8.3 PBX Configuration—[2-8-3] System—Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Live Call Screening
—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Message Cancel for Live Call Screening

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.19 Live Call Screening (LCS)

Unified Messaging—Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls
Transfer to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.27 Logical Extension (All Calls Transfer to Mailbox)

724 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Unified Messaging—Mailbox
• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.20 Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Manager Service Switching

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– System Manager Authority
– Message Manager Authority

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.22 Manager Service Switching

Unified Messaging—Message Reception Mode

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters—All Calls
Transfer to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.28 Message Reception Mode

Unified Messaging—Message Transfer

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Announce Message Transferred Information

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.23 Message Transfer

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—User Name
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—E-mail Address
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title Order
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Title String
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Callback Number
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Attach Voice File
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General
– E-mail Option
– Fax Option

PC Programming Manual 725

Feature Programming References

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—E-mail Option

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.29 Message Waiting Notification—E-mail Device

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters—Message
Waiting Lamp

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.30 Message Waiting Notification—Lamp

Unified Messaging—Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Notification Type
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No. of Retries
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Busy Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—No Answer Delay Time (min)
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Use Mode
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Start Delay Time (0-120 min)
– Telephone Device—Device Notification Timer—Device Interval Time between Device 1, 2, 3 and Next
Device
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.31 Message Waiting Notification—Telephone Device

Unified Messaging—Multilingual Service

• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Dialling Parameters/MSW Notification

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.32 Multilingual Service

Unified Messaging—No DTMF Input Operation

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv
– No DTMF Input Operation
– No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.33 No DTMF Input Operation

Unified Messaging—On Hold Announcement Menu

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation

726 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.34 On Hold Announcement Menu

Unified Messaging—Operator Service

• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters
– Operator Service
– Operator Service—Operator’s Extension
– Operator Service—Operator’s Mailbox
– Operator Service—Busy Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—No Answer Coverage Mode
– Operator Service—Operator No Answer Time (10-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.35 Operator Service

Unified Messaging—Password Administration

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Mailbox Parameters
– Mailbox Password
– Mailbox Password (Message Client)

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.3 Password Administration

Unified Messaging—Personal Custom Service

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Personal Custom Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.24 Personal Custom Service

Unified Messaging—Personal Greetings

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox
– Personal Greeting Length (s)
– Personal Greeting for Caller ID

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.25 Personal Greetings

Unified Messaging—PIN Call Routing

• 23.1 UM Configuration—[4-1] Service Settings—Caller ID / PIN Call Routing
– PIN No.
– Description
– Call Transfer for Day, Night, Lunch, and Break service

PC Programming Manual 727

Feature Programming References

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.36 PIN Call Routing

Unified Messaging—Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Play System Prompt after Personal Greeting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.37 Play System Prompt After Personal Greeting

Unified Messaging—Port Service

• 22 UM Configuration—[3] UM Extension / Trunk Service

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.38 Port Service

Unified Messaging—Remote Call Forwarding Set

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service—Remote Call Telephone Number 1, 2

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.29 Remote Call Forwarding Set

Unified Messaging—Subscriber Tutorial

• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Tutorial

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.31 Subscriber Tutorial

Unified Messaging—System Backup/Restore

• 6.8 Tool—UM Data Backup
• 6.9 Tool—UM Data Restore
• 6.10 Tool—UM Backup History

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.4 System Backup/Restore

Unified Messaging—System Prompts

• 7.9 Utility—UM – System Prompts Customisation
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—General—Prompt Mode
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.42 System Prompts

Unified Messaging—System Reports

• 7.5.4 Utility—Report—UM View Reports

Feature Manual References

728 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

3.1.2.5 System Reports

Unified Messaging—System Security

• 26.1 UM Configuration—[7] System Security

Feature Manual References

3.1.2.6 System Security

Unified Messaging—Toll Saver

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Remote Call/Automatic Login/Direct
Service
– Auto Login Extension
– Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
– Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login DDI/DID
– Auto Login TRG No.
– Auto Login DDI/DID, TRG No. Password Entry Requirement
– Auto Login Toll Saver
• 23.2 UM Configuration—[4-2] Service Settings—Parameters—Toll Saver
– Delayed Answer Time for New Message (5-60 s)
– Delayed Answer Time for No New Message (5-60 s)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.33 Toll Saver

Unified Messaging—Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings—Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.43 Transfer Recall to a Mailbox

Unified Messaging—Trunk Service (Universal Port)

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.45 Trunk Service (Universal Port)

Unified Messaging—Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—UM
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

PC Programming Manual 729

Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—Two-way Recorded Message Save Mode

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.34 Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer

Unified Messaging—Urgent Message

• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Notification Parameters
– Telephone Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
– E-mail/Text Message Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3—Only Urgent Messages
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—External MSG Delivery/Auto FWD/
Personal Custom Serv—Auto Forwarding Message Type Urgent
• 20.1.1 UM Configuration—[1-2] Mailbox Settings—Basic Setting—Announce Number of Messages
– Subscriber Service - New Urgent Messages
– Receiving Message Service - New Urgent Messages
• 21.1 UM Configuration—[2] Class of Service—Mailbox—First Playback Urgent Message

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.35 Urgent Message

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension—Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station—Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.36 Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

Unified Messaging—Voice Mail Service

• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group

Feature Manual References

3.2.1.46 Voice Mail Service

Unified Messaging—Web Programming

• 20.1 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings
• 22.1 UM Configuration—[3-1] UM Extension / Trunk Service—Service Group—Day, Night, Lunch, and
Break Mode - Incoming Call Service Prompt
• 24.4 UM Configuration—[5-4] System Parameters—Parameters—Prompt Setting

Feature Manual References

3.2.2.37 Web Programming

730 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

User Container
• 8 Users/Supervisors/Maintenance Personnel
• 12 PBX Configuration—[4] Extension
• 20 UM Configuration—[1] Mailbox Settings

Feature Manual References

2.29 User Container

Verification Code Entry

• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings
– Option 1—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 14.3 PBX Configuration—[6-3] Feature—Verification Code

Feature Manual References

2.7.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 11.5.1 PBX Configuration—[3-5-1] Group—Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—
Miscellaneous—VIP Call Mode

Feature Manual References

2.2.2.5 VIP Call

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview—UM Ports and the UM Group

Voice Mail Integration

• 10.3 PBX Configuration—[2-3] System—Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—
Transfer Recall
• 11.7.1 PBX Configuration—[3-7-1] Group—UM Group—System Settings
• 11.7.2 PBX Configuration—[3-7-2] Group—UM Group—Unit Settings
• 8.2.1 Users—Advanced Extension Settings—Advanced Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 8.3.1 Users—Flexible Button—Wired Extension
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

PC Programming Manual 731

Feature Programming References

– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 8.3.2 Users—Flexible Button—Portable Station
– Type
– Extension Number (for Two-way Record)
– Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)
– Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 13.1 PBX Configuration—[5-1] Optional Device—Doorphone—Service Group Number
• 18.2 PBX Configuration—[10-2] CO & Incoming Call—DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.3 PBX Configuration—[10-3] CO & Incoming Call—DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.
• 18.4 PBX Configuration—[10-4] CO & Incoming Call—MSN Table—MSN
– Tenant Number
– UM Service Group No.

Feature Manual References

3.1.1 Unified Messaging System Overview

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 28.1 Network Service—[1] IP Address/Ports—Basic Settings— DSP IP Setting —DSP Card #1 - 1/DSP
Card #1 - 2/DSP Card #2 - 1/DSP Card #2 - 2/DSP Card #3/DSP Card #3 - 2—IP Address

Feature Manual References

4.3.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

Walking COS
• 10.6.1 PBX Configuration—[2-6-1] System—Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote
Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other
Extensions—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 8.1.1 Users—User Container—Add User/Edit User—User Information—User PIN / Mailbox Password
["0-9"]

Feature Manual References

2.7.5 Walking COS

Whisper OHCA
• 9.16 PBX Configuration—[1-1] Configuration—Slot—V-IPEXT128—Port Property—Option—IP Codec
Priority

732 PC Programming Manual

 Feature Programming References

• 10.6.3 PBX Configuration—[2-6-3] System—Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 10.7.1 PBX Configuration—[2-7-1] System—Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—OHCA /
Whisper OHCA
• 10.9 PBX Configuration—[2-9] System—System Options—Option 5—Whisper OHCA—for SLT/PS

Feature Manual References

2.10.4.4 Whisper OHCA

PC Programming Manual 733

Note

734 PC Programming Manual

 Note

PC Programming Manual 735

Panasonic Corporation
1006, Oaza Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka 571-8501, Japan

http://www.panasonic.com/

© Panasonic Corporation 2015

PNQX7659QA PM1115HH9019